JP5108371B2 - Premium exchange system and premium exchange method - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a prize exchange system and a prize exchange method for exchanging prizes in a special prize service counter specialized in snacks other than prize exchanges operated by wagon services or pachinko halls, such as game halls such as pachinko halls, etc. .

In game halls such as pachinko, for example, at lunch time, if the player has lunch without leaving the gaming machine, the game will continue during that time, so that the profit can be increased. Therefore, the pavilion hall uses a patrol snack sales system where food and drinks are served by wagons. Conventionally, in the traveling snack sales by such wagons, it has been assumed that the operating entity that provides food and drink is a pachinko hall (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
Japanese Patent No. 3037132

  In the above-described conventional wagon service device, the operating entity that provides food and drink is pachinko halls, but for example, food and drinks such as bread, lunch boxes, and drinks are not promoted if they are unfavorable. If the wagon service is provided by a contractor, the sales performance will be improved and the number of visitors will increase. In addition, in the pachinko hall, when these foods and drinks are sold only in cash, for example, a player who has used up cash for gaming cannot use this service. It is desirable that it can be provided to players in the form of prize exchange. On the other hand, when these foods and drinks can be exchanged only with game media, for example, a player who has just played a game cannot use this service because there is no acquired game media. Therefore, it is desirable to make this service available using both cash and game media.

  In order to realize the above-described wagon service, in the conventional gift exchange system, for example, when a plurality of specialists start a wagon service, it is not possible to aggregate sales etc. for each specialist, that is, for each operating entity. could not. In addition, in the conventional prize exchange system, it is not possible to tabulate sales and the like by dividing the case where goods are sold using cash and the case where goods are exchanged using game media. Furthermore, in gaming machines, the unit price of the gaming media is, for example, a gaming machine that is lent out at 4 yen per ball, a gaming machine that is lent out at 2 yen per ball, a gaming machine that is lent out at 1 yen per ball, etc. There are a variety of game halls in stock, and conventional prize exchange systems could not perform processing corresponding to these.

  Therefore, the present invention was made to solve such a problem, and in various forms of prize exchange, it is possible to divide information related to prize exchange by dividing it by each operating entity or each prize exchange medium. An object is to provide a free gift exchange system and free gift exchange method.

In order to achieve the above object, a prize exchange system according to the present invention provides a machine that lends game media, a management device that is communicably connected to the machine, and a prize exchange via a storage medium. A prize exchange system for exchanging prizes, and performing a process relating to prize exchange, wherein the inter-vehicle machine selects a prize to be exchanged. A game medium subtracting means for subtracting the number of game media corresponding to the selected prize from the number of game media acquired, and a management entity specifying means for specifying the management entity that provides the selected prize And for each specified operating entity, a counting unit for each operating entity that aggregates the prize exchange information related to the prize exchange, and the prize exchange device stores the prize exchange permission information that enables the prize exchange. Storage medium The prize exchange permission information reading means for reading the prize exchange permission information and the prize exchange information relating to the prize selected by the prize selection means of the inter-vehicle machine based on the read prize exchange permission information. A prize exchange information writing means for writing into a medium, wherein the prize exchange device is capable of separately counting sales information for selling merchandise in cash and game medium exchange information for exchanging prizes with game media. To do.

  According to this prize exchange system, the number of game media corresponding to the prize to be exchanged selected by the interbank machine is subtracted from the number of game media acquired in the management device, and the prize exchange is performed for each operating entity providing the prize. Free gift exchange information can be aggregated. In this way, the management device can tabulate free gift exchange information related to free gift exchange for each operating entity. For example, even when all free gift exchange information regarding multiple operating entities is obtained, It is possible to clarify gift exchange information such as sales.

In addition, according to this premium exchange system, sales information sold in cash and game media exchange information exchanged with game media can be separately counted, so that sales information and premium exchange information are separated. Can be managed.

Furthermore, according to this prize exchange system, a prize exchange apparatus is provided, and the prize exchange information from the prize exchange apparatus is written to the storage medium, so that the storage medium can be stored in, for example, the management apparatus without being affected by the surrounding environment. The exchange of the gift exchange information can be performed accurately. Here, as the prize exchange permission information, for example, the number of acquired game media related to the number of game media such as the number of winning pachinko balls and the number of stored balls acquired by the player in the game, the number of acquired game media is installed in the wagon etc. Flag information indicating that the given prize is more than the most expensive prize, flag information indicating that the number is more than a predetermined number of balls, frequency in the case of purchasing a product by the frequency as a valuable value consumed when renting a ball Information, the frequency information is flag information indicating that there are more than the most expensive prizes on the wagon etc., flag information indicating that it is above a predetermined frequency, the number of acquired game media and frequency information, etc. The added value of all the valuable values, flag information indicating that all the valuable values are higher than the most expensive prizes of prizes mounted on wagons, etc., and that all the valuable values are above a predetermined value. The including but information such as flag information indicating, not limited thereto, as long possible kana information judgment prize exchange authorization. As the prize exchange information, for example, when the prize exchange permission information is the number of acquired game media (number of balls and medals), the number of game media to be withdrawn for prize exchange (number of balls and medals) or the withdrawal for prize exchange Examples include the remaining number of acquired game media obtained by subtracting the number of game media (number of balls and medals) from the number of acquired game media. In addition, when the prize permission information is flag information indicating that the number of acquired game media is larger than the most expensive prize of the prize installed in the wagon or the like, the number of withdrawal game media information for the exchange of prizes or the withdrawal game medium For example, prize ID information for identifying number information (information that can identify at least the withdrawal value of prizes exchanged for prizes) can be exemplified. Further, when the prize permission information is frequency information, the remaining frequency information withdrawn from the frequency information holding the withdrawal frequency information for the prize exchange or the withdrawal frequency information for the prize exchange can be exemplified. Furthermore, when the free gift permission information is flag information indicating that the possession frequency is higher than the most expensive premium of the free gift mounted on the wagon or the like, the withdrawal frequency information or withdrawal frequency information for exchanging the free gift is specified. For example, flag information indicating that the prize ID information and the prize permission information are equal to or higher than a predetermined frequency can be exemplified. In other words, the prize exchange information is a prize exchange in which the valuable value (the number of game media, the frequency, etc.) of the prize exchanged can be reliably subtracted from the valuable value held and the remaining valuable value after the prize exchange can be specified. Information related to.

  In the premium exchange system according to the present invention, the premium exchange device further includes a second premium selection means for selecting a premium to be exchanged, and the premium exchange information writing means is the read premium exchange permission information. The prize exchange information relating to the prize selected by the second prize selection means is written to the storage medium based on the above.

  According to this prize exchange system, since the prize exchange apparatus includes the second prize selection means, it is possible to select a prize to be exchanged in the prize exchange apparatus. Also, by writing the prize exchange information from the prize exchange device into the storage medium, the prize exchange information can be accurately transmitted to the management apparatus or the like via the storage medium without being influenced by the surrounding environment. .

  Furthermore, in the free gift exchange system of the present invention, the free gift exchange system further includes a first terminal device, and the first terminal device reads out the free gift exchange information from the storage medium and is exchanged at least. Output processing means for performing processing for outputting information related to the number of game media corresponding to the prize to the management device.

  According to the prize exchange system, the prize exchange information is accurately transmitted to the first terminal device through the storage medium in which the prize exchange information from the prize exchange apparatus is written, without being influenced by the surrounding environment. be able to. In addition, the first terminal device can perform processing for outputting premium exchange information to, for example, a management device or the like via the output processing means. Here, as the first terminal device, for example, an issuing machine, a replay accepting machine, a table machine, a counter, a prize management machine (POS), a checkout machine, and the like function.

  Also, the prize exchange system of the present invention is characterized in that the prize exchange permission information is acquired game medium number information related to the acquired number of game media.

  The premium exchange system according to the present invention is characterized in that the premium exchange device is capable of separately counting the total premium exchange information for each operating entity that provides each premium.

  According to this free gift exchange system, since all free gift exchange information can be tabulated separately for each operating entity providing each free gift, for example, even when all free gift exchange information relating to multiple operating entities is obtained. It is possible to clarify free gift exchange information such as sales in each operating entity.

  In addition, the prize exchange system of the present invention is capable of setting the value of the game medium corresponding to any one of the inter-machine machines, the game machines, the game islands, and the game machine groups in the prize exchange device. The processing relating to the prize exchange is performed based on the set value.

  According to this prize exchange system, it is possible to set information relating to the value of a game medium in correspondence with the value of the game medium for each of the machine, the game machine, the game island, or the game machine group. it can. As a result, for example, even if conversion of the value of a game medium that differs depending on the type of gaming machine is performed, prizes can be exchanged with a unified value, and prize exchange and merchandise can be performed without causing unfairness by the player. Processing related to sales can be performed.

The prize exchange method of the present invention enables the transmission of information relating to prize exchange via a storage machine that lends gaming media, a management device that is communicably connected to the machine, and a storage medium. A prize exchange method in a prize exchange system that includes a prize exchange apparatus for exchanging prizes and performs processing relating to prize exchange, wherein the prize of the machine can select a prize to be exchanged in the machine. A prize information output unit for outputting information related to the prize selected by the selection means to the management apparatus, and based on the information related to the selected prize exchanged in the management apparatus; A game medium subtracting step of subtracting the number of game media corresponding to the prize from the number of game media acquired by the game medium subtracting means, and an operator providing the prize selected by the prize selecting means and exchanging the prize And operating entity specifying step of operating entity specifying means for specifying a per operating entity identified, operating entity for each aggregation means comprises a management entity every aggregation step of aggregating the prize exchange information relating to prize exchange, the prize In the exchange device, a prize exchange permission information reading step in which the prize exchange permission information reading means reads the prize exchange permission information from the storage medium storing the prize exchange permission information enabling the prize exchange, and the read prize A prize exchange information writing step in which the prize information writing means writes the prize exchange information related to the prize selected by the prize selection means capable of selecting a prize to be exchanged in the inter-vehicle machine to the storage medium based on the exchange permission information. provided with a door, the prize exchange device, product sales separately aggregated calls that can be in the sales information and game media and game media exchange information prize exchange was in cash The features.

  According to this prize exchange method, the number of game media corresponding to the prize to be exchanged selected by the interbank machine is subtracted from the number of game media acquired in the management device, and the prize exchange is performed for each operating entity providing the prize. Free gift exchange information can be aggregated. In this way, the management device can tabulate free gift exchange information related to free gift exchange for each operating entity. For example, even when all free gift exchange information regarding multiple operating entities is obtained, It is possible to clarify gift exchange information such as sales. Here, the operating entity refers to a supplier that provides a free gift.

In addition, according to this prize exchange method, sales information for selling goods in cash and game medium exchange information for exchanging prizes with game media can be separately counted, so that sales information and prize exchange information are separated. Can be managed.

Furthermore, according to this prize exchange method, a prize exchange apparatus is provided, and the prize exchange information from the prize exchange apparatus is written into the storage medium, so that the storage medium is stored in the management apparatus, for example, without being affected by the surrounding environment. The exchange of the gift exchange information can be performed accurately. Here, as the prize exchange permission information, for example, the number of acquired game media related to the number of game media such as the number of winning pachinko balls and the number of stored balls acquired by the player in the game, the number of acquired game media is installed in the wagon etc. Flag information indicating that the given prize is more than the most expensive prize, flag information indicating that the number is more than a predetermined number of balls, frequency in the case of purchasing a product by the frequency as a valuable value consumed when renting a ball Information, the frequency information is flag information indicating that there are more than the most expensive prizes on the wagon etc., flag information indicating that it is above a predetermined frequency, the number of acquired game media and frequency information, etc. The added value of all the valuable values, flag information indicating that all the valuable values are higher than the most expensive prizes of prizes mounted on wagons, etc., and that all the valuable values are above a predetermined value. The including but information such as flag information indicating, not limited thereto, as long possible kana information judgment prize exchange authorization. As the prize exchange information, for example, when the prize exchange permission information is the number of acquired game media (number of balls and medals), the number of game media to be withdrawn for prize exchange (number of balls and medals) or the withdrawal for prize exchange Examples include the remaining number of acquired game media obtained by subtracting the number of game media (number of balls and medals) from the number of acquired game media. In addition, when the prize permission information is flag information indicating that the number of acquired game media is larger than the most expensive prize of the prize installed in the wagon or the like, the number of withdrawal game media information for the exchange of prizes or the withdrawal game medium For example, prize ID information for identifying number information (information that can identify at least the withdrawal value of prizes exchanged for prizes) can be exemplified. Further, when the prize permission information is frequency information, the remaining frequency information withdrawn from the frequency information holding the withdrawal frequency information for the prize exchange or the withdrawal frequency information for the prize exchange can be exemplified. Furthermore, when the free gift permission information is flag information indicating that the possession frequency is higher than the most expensive premium of the free gift mounted on the wagon or the like, the withdrawal frequency information or withdrawal frequency information for exchanging the free gift is specified. For example, flag information indicating that the prize ID information and the prize permission information are equal to or higher than a predetermined frequency can be exemplified. In other words, the prize exchange information is a prize exchange in which the valuable value (the number of game media, the frequency, etc.) of the prize exchanged can be reliably subtracted from the valuable value held and the remaining valuable value after the prize exchange can be specified. Information related to.

  Also, in the prize exchange method of the present invention, in the prize exchange apparatus, the prize information writing means can select a prize to be exchanged in the prize exchange apparatus based on the read prize exchange permission information. The system further comprises a second prize exchange information writing step of writing the prize exchange information relating to the prize selected by the second prize selection means to the storage medium.

  According to this prize exchange method, since the prize exchange apparatus includes the second prize selection means, it is possible to select a prize to be exchanged in the prize exchange apparatus. Also, by writing the prize exchange information from the prize exchange device into the storage medium, the prize exchange information can be accurately transmitted to the management apparatus or the like via the storage medium without being influenced by the surrounding environment. .

  Also, in the prize exchange method of the present invention, in the prize exchange method, the prize exchange system further includes a first terminal device, and the first terminal device reads the prize exchange information from the storage medium. And an output processing step in which the output processing means outputs information related to the number of game media corresponding to the prize to be exchanged to the management device.

  According to this prize exchange method, the prize exchange information is accurately transmitted to the first terminal device through the storage medium in which the prize exchange information from the prize exchange device is written, without being influenced by the surrounding environment. be able to. Further, the first terminal device can perform processing for outputting premium exchange information to, for example, a management device or the like via the output processing means in the output processing step. Here, as the first terminal device, for example, an issuing machine, a replay accepting machine, a table machine, a counter, a prize management machine (POS), a checkout machine, and the like function.

  The prize exchange method of the present invention is characterized in that the prize exchange permission information is acquired game medium number information relating to the acquired number of game media.

  Also, the prize exchange method of the present invention is characterized in that the prize exchange apparatus can separately count the all prize exchange information for each operating entity that provides each prize.

  According to this prize exchange method, since all prize exchange information can be separately counted for each operating entity providing each prize, for example, even when all prize exchange information relating to a plurality of operating entities is obtained. It is possible to clarify free gift exchange information such as sales in each operating entity.

  In addition, the prize exchange method of the present invention can set the value of the game medium corresponding to any one of the inter-machine machines, the game machines, the game islands, and the game machine groups in the prize exchange device. The processing relating to the prize exchange is performed based on the set value.

  According to this prize exchange method, it is possible to set information relating to the value of the game medium in correspondence with the value of the game medium for each of the machine, the game machine, the game island, or the game machine group. it can. As a result, for example, even if conversion of the value of a game medium that differs depending on the type of gaming machine is performed, prizes can be exchanged with a unified value, and prize exchange and merchandise can be performed without causing unfairness by the player. Processing related to sales can be performed.

  According to the free gift exchange system and free gift exchange method of the present invention, in various forms of free gift exchange, it is possible to aggregate information related to free gift exchange by classifying each operating entity or free gift exchange medium.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 1A is a diagram showing a configuration of an entire game hall management system 1A including a prize exchange system and a financial processing system according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1B is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a gaming hall management system 1B including a prize exchange system and a financial processing system in each gaming hall.

  As shown in FIG. 1A, an out-of-store terminal device 1100 provided in each store outside the game hall, a distribution control device 90 and a management device 13 provided in each game hall are an information distribution network 1120 such as the Internet or a dedicated line. It is configured to exchange information with the center server 1130 and the transmission server 1140 via the network. In addition, information is exchanged with the center server 1130 and the transmission server 1140 described above via an external communication network such as the Internet accessible by a general user terminal device 1160 such as a personal computer used by general users. . The information distribution network 1120 includes a distribution control device 90 and a management device 13 provided in each game hall, an out-of-store terminal device 1100 provided in each store outside the game hall, a center server 1130, and a transmission server 1140. It is used only for information communication in the network, and cannot enter from the outside. For example, it can be configured by a virtual dedicated line such as a VPN (Virtual Private Network).

  Here, the store outside the game hall is provided with an out-of-store terminal device 1100 that performs processing relating to prize exchange, for example, the prize exchange processing is performed in the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 in the game hall and issued there. This is a store for exchanging prizes for a predetermined amount of gift certificate, a gift exchange voucher, a gift voucher, etc., which will be described later. Specifically, the store outside the game hall is, for example, a store in the city, and a store that has signed a contract for a prize exchange with the game hall. An out-of-store terminal device 1100 provided in a store outside the game hall can perform settlement processing related to prize exchange via the center server 1130. Note that stores outside the game hall include stores and merchants that deliver prizes when a player selects a home gift for the prize exchange process in the game hall. The out-of-store terminal device 1100 also includes a home delivery terminal device provided in a store or a merchant that delivers home delivery prizes.

  As will be described later, the center server 1130 is operated by, for example, a third trader other than a game hall or a store outside the game hall, and performs money transfer between the game hall and the store outside the game hall. May be. As will be described later, the center server 1130 can also perform financial processing relating to the game hall and stores outside the game hall.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 1B, the structure of the game hall management system 1B in a game hall is demonstrated.

  As shown in FIG. 1B, in the gaming hall management system 1B in the gaming hall 1110, a plurality of pachinko machines 2 and a plurality of pachinko machines 3, 4 connected to each of the plurality of pachinko machines 2, a plurality of slot machines 5, and a slot machine An inter-machine 6 connected between 5 is connected to a network 8 via an island computer 7, and each pachinko machine 2 is provided with an individual counter (personal counter) 2C. The individual counter 2C of each pachinko machine 2 is connected to a pedestal machine to which each pachinko machine 2 is connected, and has a human body detection sensor. When a human body such as a player is detected, the detection signal is Output to the connected machine. Thereby, in each inter-machine, it is possible to detect that a person such as a player has come to the base (connected pachinko machine).

  Here, the human body detection sensor of the individual counter 2C is an example of means for detecting that a person such as a player has come to the vicinity of the gaming machine in the interbank machine or the like. The human body detection sensor as such means is not limited to the form provided in the individual counter of each gaming machine, for example, a form provided in the vicinity of the gaming machine such as each inter-machine, the seat of each gaming machine, the board, the ramp, etc. It can also be adopted. In the case of installing a counter for each island of the gaming machine without providing the slot machine 5 or individual counter of FIG. 1 without an individual counter, a human body detection sensor may be provided for each inter-vehicle machine or each seat. Good. As described above, since the form of the human body detection sensor is not unambiguous, it is assumed that the human body detection sensor is provided in the individual counter 2C as described above in the configuration of FIG. 1B. The description will be given assuming that the sensor is provided in a pedestal machine, a seat or the like.

  An example of a human body detection sensor is one that senses heat with infrared rays. Examples of human body detection sensors provided at locations other than the individual counters include those provided in the interbank machine, those provided on the upper and lower plates of the game table, and call information (such as the number of big hits). Display lamps that light up when the call button for displaying and calling an employee is pressed), but it is provided in an individual counter for placing a ball box below the game table, and If it is provided at the end closest to the human body on which the individual counter is seated, the position of the human body detection sensor is closer to the human body to be seated than the case where it is provided on other devices such as the above-mentioned interpolator, etc. An inexpensive human body detection sensor with the shortest detection distance can be adopted, and the human body of the seated player can be reliably detected by distinguishing between the seated player and the human body passing through the passage between the islands.

  The network 8 includes an out-of-store gift exchange terminal 22 having functions of a counter 9, a checkout machine 10, a gift management machine (POS) 11, a replay accepting machine 12, an issuing machine 20, a data display machine 21, and a data publishing machine. A wireless communication system 23 and the like are also connected. The network 8 is a network such as a LAN (Local Area Network). Here, the wireless communication system 23 is composed of, for example, an income system equipped with headphones, a microphone, and the like, and employees of the game hall wear the wireless communication system 23 to perform work. For example, when the employee opens the front door of the pachinko machine 2 via the wireless communication system 23, the employee is notified, and the management section is informed that it has not been opened illegally. I do. As described above, various information notifications and information acquisition based on business are performed via the wireless communication system 23. The out-of-store gift exchange terminal 22 performs a free gift exchange process for obtaining a free gift at a store outside the game hall.

  Information from each of these devices is output to the management apparatus 13 via the network 8 and further transmitted to the information management center 16 via the protocol converter 14 and the modem 15. The management device 13 is also connected to, for example, a personal computer 17. Further, a financial management device 50 that performs financial processing based on information managed by the management device 13 is connected to the management device 13 so as to be communicable with the management device 13. Note that the management apparatus 13 may have the function of the financial management apparatus 50.

  Information from the management device 13 is output to each device via the network 8. The management device 13 can be configured by one or a plurality of management devices. In the case of a plurality of management devices, a card system management device that processes valuable value information such as frequency, in order to adjust the operating information of the gaming machine, the settings for changing the nail of the gaming machine or the medal rate of the slot machine Examples include a hall computer that counts the number of items, a management device for prize management for managing the number of stocks and deliveries of prizes, a management device for member management such as the number of stored balls, and the like. The management device 13 may be configured by being connected by a network and performing data communication with each other. Here, in the function as a hall computer, various game operation data (for example, the number of outs (the number of all shot balls in the gaming machine), the safe number (the number of balls supplied to the top of the gaming machine, that is, the player) (Number of winning or winning balls), ball rental signal, difference ball, deposit amount for each card ID such as IC card for members, which will be described later, winning / losing (out number-safe number), fraud history (door open, radio wave), etc. And the game operation data can be displayed or printed by inputting predetermined instructions on the personal computer 17.

  The management device 13 is connected to a distribution control device 90 that performs processing related to information distribution in the game hall. The distribution control device 90 performs predetermined information communication with a distribution server (see FIG. 1A) in the information management center 16 and uses each device connected to the network 8 as an information distribution destination terminal (a distribution terminal described later). Deliver. Note that the management device 13 may have the function of the distribution control device 90. Therefore, in the configuration of FIG. 1B, the distribution control device 90 communicates with the distribution server of the information management center 16 and the terminal on the network 8 via the management device 13, but the communication mode via this management device 13 is as follows. The communication function of the management device 13 that transmits / receives information to / from the information management center 16 and each device and the information from each device concentrated on the management device 13 is a convenient method. The management device 13 can also be an information distribution destination terminal. Specifically, for the distribution control device 90, the pachinko machine 2, the inter-machines 3, 4 and 6 connected to the network 8, the slot machine 5, the counter 9, the checkout machine 10, the premium management machine (POS). ) 11, the replay accepting machine 12, the management device 13, the issuing machine 20, the data display machine 21, and the out-of-store gift exchange terminal 22 are terminals (distribution terminals) of information distribution destinations and serve as distribution servers of the information management center 16. On the other hand, the distribution control device 90 or the like installed in one or a plurality of game halls hits the terminal.

  In other words, the distribution control device 90 substantially distributes information by being interposed between the distribution server of the information management center 16 and each device on the network 8. Therefore, the distribution control device 90 only needs to be able to communicate with the distribution server and with each device on the network 8 including the management device 13. However, the present invention is not limited to the illustrated form, and the distribution control apparatus 90 may communicate with the distribution server without using the management apparatus 13 and connect to the network 8 without using the management apparatus 13. it can.

  In this game hall management system 1B, information such as an advertisement from an external advertisement requester or news from a news distribution source is distributed from the distribution server to the game hall side, and the distribution control device 90 on the game hall side In addition to the information received from the distribution server, the service information that the game hall intends to provide is also distributed to each device, and the information distributed to the terminal is mixed with the service information specific to the store. Implement provided services. About the information distribution of such a game hall management system, the specific content will be clarified in the explanation (information distribution system) described later.

  The distribution control device 90 includes the card system management device, hall computer, gift management management device, member management management device, financial processing device to be described later, and the like when the management device 13 is composed of a plurality of management devices. It may be configured with at least one, or may be configured with another dedicated computer. When the distribution control device 90 is configured by a plurality of computers such as a card system management device or the like, processing is distributedly executed by the plurality of computers. Although details will be described later, the distribution server of the information management center 16, the distribution control device 90, and each terminal (each distribution terminal) of the information distribution destination are each equipped with a CPU, such as a RAM, a ROM, a hard disk, etc. It is equipped with storage means, and the CPU processes various input data based on the programs stored in the ROM or hard disk, and the results are stored in the RAM or CPU-equipped stack or RAM. The results are read out as necessary and further processed.

  In the game hall management system 1B, an example is shown in which a member IC card used for a member player in another game hall can be used as it is by inserting it into the machine 3, 4, 6 as it is. Has been. In the case of a non-member IC card used for a non-member player in another game hall, the non-member IC card for that game hall can be obtained by inserting the IC card for non-member into the issuing machine 20. An example is shown in which a game IC card is issued instead, and a non-member IC card issued instead can be played. Here, in the game hall management system 1, the function of issuing the non-member IC card instead is not limited to being provided in the issuing machine 20, for example, the counter 9, the checkout machine 10, the prize management machine (POS). 11, the replay accepting machine 12, the data display machine 21, the data disclosure machine 22, and the like.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1B, the gaming hall management system 1B including the prize exchange system according to the present invention includes a wagon 1550 equipped with a prize exchange apparatus 1500. The wagon 1550 stores various types of prizes for exchanging prizes with game media or cash. In this wagon service, for example, food and drink such as juice, lunch boxes and bread can be exchanged as prizes. The wagon 1550 is configured to be freely movable in the game hall. Moreover, the wagon 1550 can be provided for each trader who provides food and drink, and each wagon 1550 can store the food and drink peculiar to each trader for sale or giveaway exchange. That is, a wagon service by a plurality of wagons 1550 is performed in the game hall.

  In addition to the equipment provided in the wagon 1550, the prize exchange device 1500 is specially adapted to snacks other than prize exchange operated by the pachinko hall that can be temporarily or simply installed in various places in the game hall. It may be equipped with a special prize service counter. In this service counter, as with the wagon 1550, for example, food and drink such as juice, lunch boxes and bread can be exchanged as prizes. Moreover, similarly to the wagon 1550, a service counter can be provided for each trader that provides food and drink, and can be operated for each trader. Here, for example, a company that develops a coffee chain store, a company that develops a hamburger chain store, a company that develops a takoyaki chain store, a private sales store specializing in sandwiches, a rental CD for listening to music while playing pachinko An example is a store. The prize exchange device 1500 will be described later in detail.

  Further, in the gaming hall management system 1B described below, as described above, the membership IC card for other gaming halls can be used, and the membership card corresponding to the non-member IC card for other gaming halls can be used. Although an example in which an IC card can be issued instead is shown, the game hall management system can also be adopted in a system in which an IC card for a member of another game hall or a non-member IC card cannot be used together.

  Here, the member's player is registered in the management device based on the ID that identifies the member's players with each other, such as address, name, age, gender, favorite stand, contact information, and personal identification number. A player who has a member IC card 30. A non-member player means a general player who is not registered as a member.

  In FIG. 1B, as an example, as the first terminal device, the inter-machines 3, 4, 5, counter 9, the settlement machine 10, the prize management machine (POS) 11, the replay accepting machine 12, the issuing machine 20 The data display 21 and the out-of-store gift exchange terminal 22 can be assigned. Further, as the second terminal device, when the card reader / writer is mounted on the interstage machines 3, 4, 5, the counter 9, and the individual counter 2C, the individual counter 2C can be assigned. As the third terminal device, a prize management machine (POS) 11 and other external devices not shown can be assigned. A vending machine such as juice (not shown) can be assigned as the fourth terminal device. However, the functions as the first to fourth terminal devices are not limited to the example described above, and can be appropriately installed in each device.

  Hereinafter, each of the storage medium used in the gaming hall management system 1B and each device constituting the gaming hall management system 1 will be described.

(Member IC card 30, non-member IC card 31 and clerk card 32)
Next, the member IC card 30, the nonmember IC card 31, and the store clerk card 32 will be described with reference to FIG.

  2A is a perspective view of a member IC card 30 that is a card-shaped storage medium used by a member player, and FIG. 2B is a non-member that is a card-shaped storage medium used by a non-member player. The perspective view of IC card 31 for business is shown, and the perspective view of salesclerk IC card 32 which is a card shape storage medium which an employee uses is shown in (c).

  The member IC card 30, the non-member IC card 31, and the store clerk card 32 are storage media having an IC chip conventionally used in a game system, and have a card shape. The non-member IC card 31 is configured so that the length and width of the card are shorter than that of the member IC card 30, and the thickness is thinner.

  These member IC card 30, non-member IC card 31 and store clerk card 32 have IC chips 30a, 31a, 32a and antenna portions 30b, 31b, 32b surrounding the IC chips 30a, 31a, 32a. It is a contact-type storage medium, and information can be read from and written to the IC chips 30a, 31a, and 32a via the antenna units 30b, 31b, and 32b.

  Further, on the surface of the member IC card 30, for example, authentication information for authenticating a player provided in the out-of-store gift exchange terminal 22 when the out-of-store gift exchange terminal 22 performs a free gift exchange process. It has an authentication information display unit 30c that displays a face photograph of a player photographed by a small camera or the like as input means in a rewritable manner.

  Here, in the management system using the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31, any one of the following management systems can be adopted.

  The member IC card 30 has (1) recording information of only ID, and other information includes a system managed by the management device 13 or (2) information such as valuable information such as frequency in addition to the ID. In addition, a system in which the information is also managed by the management apparatus 13 can be adopted.

  Here, the information when using the member IC card 30 includes ID, frequency, ball rental, out (fire ball), safe (supply ball to the gaming machine, that is, supply ball to the upper plate of the game: game Customer's winning ball), winning / losing (safe less subtracted), deposit, additional deposit, number of balls, number of balls (number of balls for which replay fee is collected when used again), number of winning balls (again The number of balls for which replay fees are not collected when used), the number of balls for replay (the maximum number of balls that can be replayed is 10,000 yen, the number of balls up to 2500 balls), the number of medals, replay Number of stored medals (up to 10,000 medals, number of balls up to 500 medals registered for replay), information such as replay fee, points, game table type, etc. Daily information, weekly information, address, name, age, gender Favorite table, contacts, personal identification number, refers to and membership information such as authentication information for authenticating the gaming customer, for example, a member of the face photograph 30c. Moreover, it is not restricted to these, If it is information required in performing game management, it can manage. Further, these pieces of information are information processed as members when the member IC card 30 is used.

  In addition, the above points include store visit points (points awarded when a member IC card is inserted into a machine), ball rental points (points given according to the number of balls lent), win / loss points (safe from out number) There are points given to losing customers according to the difference in number), operating points (points given according to the number of outs), and the like. Further, the information managed by the management device 13 when the member IC card 30 is used is not limited to these, and can be managed as long as it is information necessary for game management.

  The non-member IC card 31 has (3) recording information of only ID, other information includes information such as a system managed by the management apparatus 13, and (4) valuable information such as frequency, etc. 13 can employ a system that does not manage the information, and (5) information that includes valuable information such as frequency in addition to the ID, and the information is also managed by the management apparatus 13. (4) is not adopted in the member IC card 30 that needs to manage information in the management device 13.

  Here, the information when the non-member IC card 31 is used includes information such as frequency, rented balls, deposit, additional deposit, number of rented balls, information for managing these information only for a predetermined period, and the like. Say. These pieces of information are information processed as non-members when the non-member IC card 31 is used. In addition, this information includes out (launching balls), safe (supply balls to gaming machines, that is, supply balls to the upper plate of the game: balls acquired by the players), wins and losses (those that are reduced from safe to out) This is different from information processed as a member when the member IC card 30 is used in that it does not include the number of stored balls, the number of winning balls, the number of stored balls for replay, the replay fee, points, and the type of game machine. In addition, even if a non-member can manage the acquired number of game media with the management device 13 or the like, for example, information on the number of stored balls or the number of winning balls is included in the information when the non-member IC card 31 is used. May be included. The information managed by the management device 13 when the non-member IC card 31 is used is not limited to these, and can be managed as long as it is information necessary for game management.

  In the following description of the gaming hall management system 1B, the member IC card 30 and the non-member IC card 31 both have recording information of only ID, and other information is mainly managed by the management device 13. Although the description will be made on the basis of the information, as described above, it is also possible to configure a system having information such as valuable information such as frequency in addition to the ID, and further managing the information by the management device 13.

  In this case, the ID is read from the member IC card 30 and the non-member IC card 31, and information such as valuable information such as the frequency is also read. Various information is also stored in the member IC card 30 and the non-member IC card 31. In this case, these pieces of information are also managed in the management device 13.

  The clerk card 32 stores information that can identify an employee, for example, an employee ID. By recognizing information that can identify the employee via a device such as a table machine or a counter installed in the game hall, the employee who performs the work can be identified. Note that the employee transmits information to the management device 13 via a device such as a table machine or a counter, for example, instead of or in addition to having the clerk card 32. Possessing a predetermined remote control for the employee, and using the remote control for the employee, information that can identify the employee and information such as start of work, break, cancellation of information, etc. are transmitted to the management device 13 You may do it.

(Issuing machine 20)
FIG. 3 is a plan view showing the external appearance of the issuing machine 20, and FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the components of the issuing machine 20. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an operation flow in the issuing machine 20.

  First, the configuration of the issuing machine 20 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 3 shows a view of the issuing machine 20 as viewed from the front. On the front of the issuing machine 20, a card insertion slot 20a, a bill insertion slot 20b, a purchase frequency button 20c, a signal transmission / reception unit 20g, and a display unit are shown. 20e is mainly provided.

  The issuing machine 20 updates the frequency corresponding to the amount selected by the purchase frequency button 20c with respect to the banknote amount inserted from the banknote insertion slot 20b to the member IC card 30, or the member IC card 30 uses it. If not, it is an issuing machine or ticket issuing machine that issues the non-member IC card 31 in which the frequency corresponding to the amount is recorded. Further, when a non-member IC card used for a non-member player in another game hall is received from the card insertion slot 20a, an ID or the like is newly added to the non-member IC card for this game hall. Information is issued and issued. In this case, the ID of the non-member IC card used in another game hall is stored based on the newly assigned ID. In addition, the issuing machine 20 collects the non-member IC card used in other game halls.

  The issuing machine 20 also functions as a first terminal device, and reads out the gift exchange information written in the gift exchange device 1500 such as the wagon 1550 from the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31, As an example of processing at least information related to the number of game media corresponding to the prize to be exchanged, processing for outputting information related to the number of game media corresponding to the selected prize to the management device 13 is performed. This process is executed by the game medium number information processing means of the issuing machine 20. Note that the issuing machine is separate from the prize exchange device 1500 such as the wagon 1550 and is usually installed at one corner of the game hall.

  Here, the frequency is a value obtained by frequencyizing the amount of money received. For example, when 10,000 yen is frequencyd, the frequency becomes 100 frequency. Further, the issuing machine 20 is given store visit points when the member IC card 30 is used. The given store visit points are added to the number of points managed in the management device 13 based on the ID of the member IC card 30.

  The signal transmission / reception unit 20g transmits / receives information to / from the store clerk card 32 possessed by the employee, for example.

  The display unit 20e is a display unit that displays predetermined information associated with the operation of the issuing machine 20 and displays distribution information by an information distribution system described later. Details of the information display on the display unit 20e will be clarified in the description of the operation and the description of the entire information distribution system described later.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the issuing machine 20 includes a control unit 100, a card processing unit 101, a non-member card issuing unit 102, a selection button detection unit 103, a currency identification unit 104, an employee information reading unit 105, change / payment. The state detection unit 106 is mainly configured.

  The control unit 100 is mainly composed of an arithmetic unit (CPU), a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), and other storage means such as a semiconductor memory that keeps information as necessary. Various arithmetic processes are executed using programs and data stored in the storage means such as the ROM and RAM. The control unit 100 includes a display unit 20e, a card processing unit 101, a non-member card issuing unit 102, a selection button detection unit 103, a currency identification unit 104, an employee information reading unit 105, and a change / payment state detection unit 106. Signal input / output between machine parts and signal input / output between the management device 13 and the distribution control device 90 via the network 8 are controlled.

  Here, in the program stored in the storage means such as ROM or RAM, in addition to the processing operation of the issuing machine 20 that handles the IC card 30 for members, the processing operation for carrying out information distribution by the information distribution system described later Is included, and the control unit 100 executes processing related to information distribution according to the program. The processing related to information distribution performs storage of information, communication with the distribution control device 90, display operation control of the display unit 20e, and the like as necessary, and the issuing machine 20 stores necessary storage means. (ROM, RAM, and other semiconductor memories that keep information as needed), communication means (signal input / output control via the network 8 provided in the control unit 100, etc.), and control means (by the control unit 100) And the like (drive control of the display unit 20e). In addition, when the issuing machine 20 communicates with the distribution control device 90 in the configuration of FIG. 1B, the management device 13 is used, but this is only a convenient method as described above. In particular, the point through the management device 13 is not mentioned (hereinafter, the same applies to the description of other devices connected to the network 8).

  The card processing unit 101 reads, for example, an ID and valuable information managed by the ID stored in the member IC card 30 inserted from the card insertion slot 20a, and sends the read information to the control unit 100. And writing the updated valuable information from the control unit 100 to the member IC card 30, for example, a reader / writer. The card processing unit 101 also functions as a game medium number information processing unit, and reads premium exchange information written in the premium exchange device 1500 such as the wagon 1550 from the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31. Thus, at least processing for outputting information related to the number of game media corresponding to the selected prize to the management device 13 and processing for outputting to the management device 13 via the control unit 100 are performed.

  The non-member card issuing unit 102 records, on the non-member IC card 31, the frequency corresponding to the amount selected by the purchase frequency button 20c with respect to the banknote amount inserted from the banknote insertion slot 20b, and further gives an ID. For example, a reader / writer. Further, the non-member card issuing unit 102 has a function of detecting the storage state of the non-member IC card 31 to be issued, and can detect whether the non-member IC card 31 is stored.

  The selection button detection unit 103 detects that the purchase frequency button 20c and the cancel / fishing button 20d have been pressed, and outputs a signal to the control unit 100 based on the pressed signal. The type of the purchase frequency button 20c is, for example, as shown in FIG. 3, “10000” to purchase 10,000 yen, “5000” to purchase 5000 yen, “3000” to purchase 3000 yen, 1000 yen purchase. “1000” to be purchased, “all” to be purchased for the deposit amount, and the like.

  The currency identification unit 104 identifies four types of banknotes inserted from the banknote insertion slot 20b, and outputs the identified banknote information to the control unit 100. Moreover, based on the information from the control part 100, a banknote is returned from the banknote return port 20f.

  The employee information reading unit 105 includes a signal transmission / reception unit 20g. In addition, the employee information reading unit 105 receives, from the store clerk card 32, information that can identify an employee who performs work such as change to the issuing machine 20, replenishment of the non-member IC card 31, and collection of sales proceeds, for example. read. The employee information reading unit 105 is composed of, for example, a reader / writer.

  The change / payment state detection unit 106 detects the presence or absence of change stored in the issuing machine 20, detection of the full state of sales, and the like. Further, for example, when it is detected that the change has been made or the sales amount is full, for example, information to that effect can be output to the management device 13 or the like.

  The control unit 100 controls the display unit 20e, the card processing unit 101, the non-member card issuing unit 102, the selection button detection unit 103, the currency identification unit 104, the employee information reading unit 105, and the change / payment status detection. Each device unit of the unit 106 operates as follows (FIG. 5).

  The operation will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 5 showing the flow of operations in the issuing machine 20 shows a flowchart of the main routine in the issuing machine 20 executed by the control unit 100. The program is stored in the storage means of the control unit 100, and from the start. The high-speed processing operation in which the control unit 100 executes the processing up to the return in a time such as 0.01 ms is repeated. In this main routine, first, in the issuing machine 20, terminal distribution information [i] [m], terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m], and terminal distribution condition [i] [ m] is received (step SD1).

  Here, the terminal distribution information [i] [m] means news, weather forecasts, advertisements, game hall service information, a game hall or a store outside the game hall distributed to the information distribution destination terminal in the information distribution system described later Information such as registration information, price reduction information, and information input via the external communication network 1150 (in the information distribution system, character information displayed as a telop is handled as an example of distribution information. Details will be described later). The number or number of the distribution information is represented by [i], and the terminal of the distribution destination is represented by [m] of the terminal number assigned in advance. That is, the issuing machine 20 receives i pieces of distribution information from terminal distribution information [1] [m] to terminal distribution information [i] [m] as the m-th terminal on the network 8. Terminal distribution amount designation information [1] [m] to terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] and terminal distribution condition [1] [m] to terminal distribution condition [i ] [m] is received. Terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] is the amount of terminal distribution information [i] [m] displayed on the terminal (frequency of display indicating display amount during a predetermined period, display amount itself, etc.) The terminal distribution condition [i] [m] is information indicating a condition for displaying the corresponding terminal distribution information [i] [m] on the terminal.

  In the issuing machine 20, after receiving these pieces of information, the distribution control device sends the distribution result of each terminal distribution information [i] [m] and the distribution fee of each terminal distribution information [i] [m] via the network 8. 90 (step SD2). Here, the distribution result is information indicating a result of displaying each terminal distribution information [i] [m] on the display unit 20e in the issuing machine 20, which is the m-th terminal, and relates to display of distribution information to be described later. It is counted in the processing, and the distribution fee is also counted according to the counted distribution result (the total is calculated in a constant display subroutine and a distribution condition display subroutine described later in detail).

  The terminal distribution information [i] [m], the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m], the terminal distribution condition [i] [m], the terminal distribution information [ Regarding the distribution results of i] [m] and the distribution fee of each terminal distribution information [i] [m], the specific contents will be further clarified in the description of the entire information distribution system described later. In the entire gaming hall management system 1A and gaming hall management system 1B, as will be described below, other devices connected to the network 8 also transmit and receive terminal distribution information [i] [m], etc. The same applies to the information. However, each device connected to the network 8 is assigned a terminal number in advance as a delivery destination terminal, and the value of [m] is different. In addition, “(* Issuing machine does not input attribute designation)” in step SD2 indicates that an attribute desired for distribution (such as an attribute of a player who wants to distribute information of a specific genre) in the information distribution system described later. This indicates that the designated information may be handled, and that the information is not handled by the issuing machine 20 (a form of handling may be adopted, which will be described later). The information for designating the attribute here is used as the attribute designation information [i] [m] in the following description. The specific contents of the attribute designation information [i] [m] are also described in the entire information distribution system described later. It will be clarified in the explanation.

  As described above, in the issuing machine 20 that has transmitted / received the terminal distribution information [i] [m] or the like, a constant display subroutine is started (step SD3). The constant display subroutine is processing for causing the display unit 20e to display the received terminal distribution information [i] [m] based on the received terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m], and the program is a control unit. If there is an activation request, the control unit 100 executes the timer routine every predetermined time without interrupting the execution of the main routine. Regarding the processing of this constant display subroutine, the specific contents will be clarified in the description of the entire information distribution system to be described later, and the entire game hall management system 1A and the game hall management system 1B will be activated by other devices below. The same applies to the processing of the always-display subroutine.

  Then, in the next process in the main routine, the control unit 100 determines whether or not a bill has been deposited from the bill insertion slot 20b based on the information from the money identifying unit 104 (step S110).

  If a player or the like inserts a banknote into the banknote insertion slot 20b, the control unit 100 determines that payment has been made based on information from the currency identification unit 104 by the insertion of the banknote (determination result in step S110). As a result, the issuer 20 starts a distribution condition display subroutine (step SD4). The distribution condition display subroutine is based on the terminal distribution condition [i] [m] and the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] that are generally received from the received terminal distribution information [i] [m]. This is a process to be displayed. The program is stored in the storage means of the control unit 100, and if there is an activation request, the control unit 100 executes the timer interrupt every predetermined time without interrupting the execution of the main routine. Regarding the processing of the distribution condition display subroutine, the specific contents will be clarified in the description of the entire information distribution system to be described later, and the game hall management system 1A and the game hall management system 1B are started by other devices as follows. The same applies to the processing of the distribution condition display subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S110 that the banknote has been deposited from the banknote insertion slot 20b (Yes in step S110), the distribution condition display subroutine is started as described above (step SD4), and the currency identification unit 104 The deposited banknote is identified, and the identification information is output to the control unit 100 (step S111). Moreover, the banknote identified by the money identification part 104 is collect | recovered by the banknote collection | recovery part (not shown) in the issuing machine 20 (step S111).

  Subsequently, based on the information from the selection button detection unit 103, the control unit 100 determines whether or not a desired button has been pressed with the purchase frequency button 20c (step S112).

  If it is determined in step S112 that the switch remains off (“off” in step S112), the control unit 100 executes the processes in and after step S120. For example, in this state, when the control unit 100 determines that the cancel / fishing button 20d is pressed based on information from the selection button detection unit 103 (Yes in step S120), the deposited banknote returns the banknote. It is returned from the mouth 20f (step S121), and returns to the start.

  When the selection button detection unit 103 determines that the purchase frequency button 20c of the desired amount has been pressed in the determination in step S112 (“ON history” in step S112), for example, the purchase frequency button 20c is continuously displayed. In order to prevent the same operation from being repeated even if the button is pressed, the ON history of the purchase frequency button 20c is cleared (step S113). Then, information on the selected purchase frequency button 20 c is output to the control unit 100.

  Next, the control unit 100 determines that the deposit amount is a purchase frequency button based on the information on the amount of the banknote identified by the money identification unit 104 and the amount of the selected purchase frequency button 20c output from the selection button detection unit 103. It is determined whether or not the amount is 20c or more (step S114).

  When the amount of the identified banknote is smaller than the amount of the purchase frequency button 20c in the determination in step S114 (No in step S114), the control unit 100 executes the processing from step S120 onward, for example, in this state, When it is determined that the cancel / fishing button 20d is pressed based on the information from the selection button detection unit 103 (Yes in step S120), the control unit 100 returns the deposited banknote from the banknote return port 20f ( Step S121), return to start.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S114 that the amount of the identified banknote is equal to or greater than the amount of the purchase frequency button 20c (Yes in step S114), the control unit 100 is based on information from the card processing unit 101. Then, it is determined whether or not the member IC card 30 is inserted (step S115).

  If it is determined in step S115 that the member IC card 30 is not inserted (No in step S115), the process proceeds to step S127.

  If it is determined in step S115 that the member IC card 30 is inserted (Yes in step S115), the card processing unit 101 reads and reads the ID stored in the member IC card 30. The ID is output to the control unit 100 (step S116). Further, the control unit 100 transmits the ID, the amount of the banknote identified by the money identifying unit 104, and the amount of the selected purchase frequency button 20c to the management device 13 via the network 8 (step S116). Further, store visit points given when using the member IC card 30 are given, and the given store visit points are the number of points managed based on the ID of the member IC card 30 in the management device 13. Addition is performed (step S116). The management device 13 adds the purchased frequency to the frequency balance of the read ID, and outputs the updated information to the control unit 100 via the network 8 (step S116).

  Further, the control unit 100 outputs the information to the card processing unit 101, the card processing unit 101 outputs the information to the display unit 20e, and the display unit 20e displays, for example, a frequency balance (step S117). ). In the case of displaying information related to a game such as a frequency balance in this way, how to display distribution information by the above-described constant display subroutine or distribution condition display subroutine will be described in the entire information distribution system described later. It will be clarified in the description (in the description of the entire game hall management system 1A and the game hall management system 1B, in the following, other information related to the game and information necessary for the operation of the device are displayed on a predetermined display unit. The same applies to the display form of distribution information in those cases.)

  The member IC card 30 is returned from the card insertion slot 20a by the card processing unit 101 (step S118).

  Here, the control unit 100 subtracts the amount of the purchase frequency button 20c selected from the amount of the banknote identified by the money identifying unit 104, and outputs information corresponding to the remaining amount to the display unit 20e. Based on the information corresponding to the remaining amount output from the control unit 100, the display unit 20e displays the remaining amount (step S119).

  Here, the control unit 100 determines whether or not the cancel / fishing button 20d has been pressed based on the information from the selection button detection unit 103 (step S120).

  If it is determined in step S120 that the cancel / fishing button 20d has been pressed (Yes in step S120), the deposited banknote is returned from the banknote return slot 20f (step S121), and returns to the start. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S120 that the cancel / fishing button 20d has not been pressed (No in step S120), the process directly returns to the start.

  Next, when it is determined in step S110 that the banknote has not been deposited from the banknote insertion slot 20b (No in step S110), the control unit 100 subsequently inserts a card into the card processing unit 101. It is determined whether or not (step S122). Here, the card includes not only the member IC card 30 and the non-member IC card 31, but also other types of cards.

  If it is determined in step S122 that it is not desired to insert a card into the card processing unit 101 (No in step S122), the process returns to the start and waits for deposit or acceptance of some card.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S122 that a card has been inserted into the card processing unit 101 (Yes in step S122), the premium exchange information in which the inserted card is written in the premium exchange device 1500 such as the wagon 1550 is written. The card processing unit 101 reads the gift exchange information, and the control unit 100 outputs the gift exchange information and the card ID read by the card processing unit 101 to the management device 13 (step SF1). In this case, the first terminal device functions as a game medium number information processing means.

  Here, the prize exchange information is information relating to prize exchange, and is information for the purpose of specifying the valuable value after the prize exchange updated in the prize exchange apparatus 1500. Specifically, when the prize exchange permission information read as a prize exchange information to determine whether or not the prize exchange is permitted by the wagon 1550 and the specific prize service counter is the number of acquired game media (the number of balls and medals). The number of game media to be withdrawn for the exchange of prizes (the number of balls and medals) or the number of game media to be withdrawn from the number of game media to be withdrawn (the number of balls and medals) for the exchange of prizes. In addition, when the prize exchange permission information is flag information indicating that the number of acquired game media is larger than the most expensive prize of a prize installed in a wagon or the like, the number of withdrawal game media information for the prize exchange or the withdrawal game For example, premium ID information for specifying the medium number information (information that can specify at least the withdrawal value of the premium after exchanging the premium) is included. In addition, when the prize exchange permission information is frequency information, there is the remaining frequency information withdrawn from the frequency information holding the withdrawal frequency information for the prize exchange or the frequency information holding the withdrawal frequency information for the prize exchange. Furthermore, when the prize exchange permission information is flag information indicating that the possession frequency is higher than the most expensive prize of the prize installed in the wagon or the like, the withdrawal frequency information or withdrawal frequency information for the prize exchange is specified. Prize ID information, and flag information indicating that the prize exchange permission information is a predetermined frequency or more. In the management device 13, when the prize exchange information is information on the withdrawal value (number of balls, number of medals, frequency) for the prize exchange, it is received from the possessed value read from the storage unit based on the card ID received at the same time. Then, the updated valuable value is registered in the storage unit. Moreover, in the management apparatus 13, when the prize exchange information is the valuable value after the prize exchange, the valuable value after the prize exchange is registered based on the card ID received at the same time. In addition, when the prize exchange information is a prize ID, the management device 13 reads the withdrawal value stored in the storage unit such as a hard disk by the prize exchange ID and stores it in the storage unit based on the received card ID at the same time. The held valuable value updated by subtracting the withdrawn valuable value from the held valuable value is stored in the storage unit. A program that causes the management device 13, the first terminal device, the second terminal device, and the third terminal device to function is executed in accordance with what the appropriately selected free gift exchange information and free gift exchange permission information is.

  Subsequently, the control unit 100 reads the predetermined condition stored in the management device 13 and determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied (step SF2). Here, in the present prize exchange system, the predetermined condition is, for example, (1) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the number of winning balls is counted or stored in the management device 13 as the number of winning balls, or when the store is closed When a predetermined time comes, (2) When a storage medium such as the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 that stores at least information that can identify the number of winning balls and the number of stored balls is taken out from the intermediary machine (3) A storage medium such as a member IC card 30 or a non-member IC card 31 that stores information that can specify at least the number of winning balls and the number of stored balls is inserted when managed as the number of winning balls. When the machine is inserted into a machine that is different from the machine, or (4) when a prize is exchanged. Further, any one of the above conditions (1) to (4) may be set as the predetermined condition, or a plurality of conditions may be selected and set from these conditions. The determination as to whether or not the above-described predetermined condition is satisfied may be executed by the management apparatus 13 based on the predetermined condition stored in the management apparatus 13.

  If it is determined in step SF2 that the predetermined condition is not satisfied (No in step SF2), the process proceeds to SD4.

  If it is determined in step SF2 that the predetermined condition is satisfied (Yes in step SF2), the control unit 100 rewrites the information related to the number of winning balls, which satisfies the predetermined condition, into the number of stored balls, Information for subtracting the number of winning balls from the number of managed winning balls is output to the management device 13 (step SF3). When the management device 13 determines whether or not the above-described predetermined condition is satisfied, the management device 13 rewrites information related to the number of winning balls that satisfies the predetermined condition into the number of stored balls. After this process, the process proceeds to SD4.

  Subsequently, the control unit 100 determines that a card has been inserted based on the information from the card processing unit 101 by the card insertion (the determination result in Step S122 is Yes). A distribution condition display subroutine is started (step SD4).

  If it is determined in step S122 that a card is inserted in the card processing unit 101 (Yes in step S122), the distribution condition display subroutine is started as described above (step SD4), and then the control is performed. The unit 100 determines whether or not the card inserted in the card processing unit 101 is a non-member IC card in another game hall (step S123).

  If it is determined in step S123 that the inserted card is not a non-member IC card in another game hall (No in step S123), the inserted card is returned from the card insertion slot 20a. (Step S124), return and return to the start.

  If it is determined in step S123 that the inserted card is a non-member IC card in another game hall (Yes in step S123), the control unit 100 uses the information from the card processing unit 101. Based on this, the ID is read and the ID is output to the management device 13. The management device 13 authenticates the ID, and outputs the remaining frequency information based on the ID to the control unit 100 (step S125).

  Further, the control unit 100 erases the ID of the non-member IC card in another game hall based on the information from the card processing unit 101. Then, the non-member IC card is transported to the card collection unit by the card processing unit 101 and collected in the issuing machine 20 (step S126).

  Further, the control unit 100 takes out the non-member IC card 31 stored in the card storage unit to the card processing unit 101 and gives an instruction for recording the ID in the extracted non-member IC card 31 to the card processing unit. 101. Based on this information, the card processing unit 101 takes out the non-member IC card 31 from the card storage unit and assigns a predetermined ID that can be used in the game hall (step S127). Then, the control unit 100 outputs and registers this ID to the management device 13.

  At this time, the IDs of the non-member IC cards in other game halls are output to the management device 13 for management based on the newly assigned IDs. In addition, information on IC cards for non-members in other game halls can be obtained from an information management center 16 connected to the management device 13 so as to be communicable. Thereby, valuable information such as the remaining number can be obtained even if only ID information is stored in the non-member IC cards of other game halls. In addition, when storing valuable value information such as the remaining frequency together with the ID in the non-member IC card, the value information such as the remaining frequency is directly read from or written to the non-member IC card in another game hall. It can be carried out.

  Further, the control unit 100 outputs information such as the purchase frequency to the management device 13 based on the ID of the newly issued non-member IC card 31, and the management device 13 outputs the information based on the ID. Information such as the purchase frequency is stored, and the expiration date of the frequency is stored (step S128).

  This new non-member IC card 31 is issued from the card insertion slot 20a (step S129).

  Note that the operation of the issuing machine 20 is not limited to the above-described operation. For example, there is a non-member IC card 31 to issue and replenish a change when a change is made when a change is made, or when a deposited banknote is full. It is also possible to execute, as necessary, processing related to a request for card replenishment or the like when no longer exists, and work performed by an employee in response to the request. Also, a call button or the like is provided on the issuing machine 20 so that the player can press the call button when a bill is jammed or when the non-member IC card 31 is not issued. It is good also as performing the process regarding etc. as needed. In the process of notifying or canceling the request or call to the employee, the request signal, the call signal or the release signal is transmitted to the management device 13, and the management device 13 passes through the wireless communication system 23. Then, a predetermined notification operation or the like may be executed (the same applies to a case where a request for work or the like is notified or canceled by another device connected to the network 8 below).

(Replay acceptance machine 12)
FIG. 6 is a plan view showing the appearance of the replay accepting machine 12, FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the components of the replay accepting machine 12, and FIG. .

  First, the configuration of the replay accepting machine 12 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 6 shows a view of the replay accepting machine 12 as seen from the front. On the front of the replay accepting machine 12, there are a card insertion slot 12a, a password input numeric keyboard 12b, an end ball / end medal. A return button 12c, a card return button 12d, a replay acceptance button 12e, an end ball / end medal receiving port 12f, a display unit 12g, and a signal transmission / reception unit 12h are mainly provided.

  The replay accepting machine 12 sends a request signal for rewriting information on the replay FLG, the number of stored balls, and the number of stored balls for replay, together with the ID stored in the IC card 30 for members, via the network 8. This is transmitted to the management device 13 so that replay can be performed.

  The replay accepting machine 12 also functions as a first terminal device, and reads the gift exchange information written in the gift exchange device 1500 such as the wagon 1550 from the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31. As an example of processing at least information relating to the number of game media corresponding to the prize to be exchanged, processing for outputting information relating to the number of game media corresponding to the selected prize to the management device 13 is performed. This process is executed by the game medium number information processing means. The replay accepting machine 12 is a separate unit installed at a place different from the prize exchange device 1500 such as the wagon 1550, and is typically installed at one corner of the game hall.

  The replay FLG is information written in the management device 13 and makes replay possible or impossible. For example, if 1 is written, replay is possible, and 0 is written. It will be impossible to play again. Here, the replay refers to the number of balls corresponding to a predetermined amount (for example, 10,000 yen) of the number of stored balls counted and stored by the counter 9 as the number of replayed balls. It means playing a game by lending a ball. Further, the replay accepting machine 12 can reduce the points awarded by using the member IC card 30 to, for example, the number of replay savings.

  The display unit 12g displays predetermined information associated with the operation of the replay accepting machine 12, and also delivers news, weather forecasts, advertisements, game hall service information distributed to information distribution destination terminals in an information distribution system described later, It is a display means for displaying distribution information such as prize registration information, price reduction information, and information input via the external communication network 1150 at a game hall or a store outside the game hall. The specific information display contents on the display unit 12g will be clarified in the operation description and the entire information distribution system described later.

  The signal transmission / reception unit 12h transmits / receives information to / from the store clerk card 32 possessed by the employee, for example.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the replay accepting machine 12 mainly includes a control unit 150, a card processing unit 151, an end ball return unit 152, a selection button detection unit 153, and an employee information reading unit 154.

  The control unit 150 is mainly composed of an arithmetic unit (CPU), a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), and other storage means such as a semiconductor memory that keeps information as necessary. In the CPU, Various arithmetic processes are executed using programs and data stored in the storage means such as the ROM and RAM. In the control unit 150, signals are input / output between the display unit 12 g, the card processing unit 151, the end ball return unit 152, the selection button detection unit 153, and the employee information reading unit 154, and via the network 8. Signal input / output between the management apparatus 13 and the distribution control apparatus 90 is controlled.

  Here, in addition to the processing operation of the replay accepting machine 12 relating to replay acceptance, the program stored in the storage means such as ROM or RAM defines the processing operation for carrying out information delivery by the information delivery system. The control unit 150 executes processing related to information distribution according to the program. The processing related to information distribution performs information storage, communication with the distribution control device 90, display operation control of the display unit 12g, and the like as necessary, and the replay accepting machine 12 is necessary for that purpose. Storage means (ROM, RAM, and other semiconductor memory that keeps information as required), communication means (signal input / output control via the network 8 provided in the control unit 150, etc.), and control means (control unit) 150), and the like.

  The card processing unit 151 reads, for example, an ID or valuable information managed by the ID stored in the member IC card 30 inserted from the card insertion slot 12a, and sends the read information to the control unit 150. And writing the updated valuable information from the control unit 150 to the member IC card 30, for example, a reader / writer. Further, the card processing unit 151 reads out the premium exchange information written in the premium exchange device 1500 such as the wagon 1550 from the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31, and at least corresponds to the premium to be exchanged. As an example of processing information related to the number of game media, a process for outputting information related to the number of game media corresponding to the selected prize to the management device 13 is performed. In this case, the first terminal device functions as a game medium number information processing means.

  For example, when the end ball / end medal return button 12c is pressed to return the stored ball without receiving replay, the end ball returning unit 152 has a small number of stored balls. From 12f, the end balls which are the small number of stored balls are returned. In addition, the end ball return unit 152 also has a function as an end ball presence / absence detection unit that detects the presence / absence of a storage ball to be returned.

  The selection button detection unit 153 detects that the PIN number input numeric keyboard 12b, the end ball / end medal return button 12c, the card return button 12d, and the replay acceptance button 12e are pressed, and based on the pressed signals. Thus, a signal is output to the control unit 150.

  The employee information reading unit 154 includes a signal transmission / reception unit 12h. In addition, the employee information reading unit 154 reads, from the store clerk card 32, for example, information that can identify an employee who performs operations such as replenishment of end balls to the replay acceptance machine 12. The employee information reading unit 154 is composed of, for example, a reader / writer.

  The display unit 12g, the card processing unit 151, the end ball return unit 152, the selection button detection unit 153, and the employee information reading unit 154 that are controlled by the control unit 150 operate as follows ( FIG. 8).

  The operation will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 8 showing the flow of operations in the replay accepting machine 12 shows a flowchart of the main routine in the replay accepting machine 12 executed by the control unit 150, and the program is stored in the storage means of the control unit 150. Thus, the high-speed processing operation in which the control unit 150 executes the processing from the start to the return in a time of 0.01 ms or the like is repeated. In this main routine, first, in the replay accepting machine 12, terminal distribution information [i] [m], terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m], and terminal distribution conditions [i ] [m] is received (step SD1). In other words, the replay accepting machine 12 serves as the m-th terminal on the network 8 from the distribution control device 90 to i pieces of distribution information from the terminal distribution information [1] [m] to the terminal distribution information [i] [m]. Terminal delivery amount designation information [1] [m] to terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] and terminal delivery condition [1] [m] to terminal delivery condition respectively corresponding to the delivery information [i] [m] is received.

  In the replay accepting machine 12, after receiving such information, the distribution result of each terminal distribution information [i] [m] and the distribution fee of each terminal distribution information [i] [m] are distributed via the network 8. It transmits to the control apparatus 90 (step SD2). The distribution result here is information indicating the result of displaying each terminal distribution information [i] [m] on the display unit 12g in the replay accepting machine 12, which is the m-th terminal, and the display of distribution information to be described later. The distribution fee is also counted according to the counted distribution performance (the data is counted in a constant display subroutine and a distribution condition display subroutine described later in detail). Note that the replay accepting machine 12 does not handle the information specifying the attribute in the same manner as the issuing machine 20 as “(* replay accepting machine does not input attribute designation)” in step SD2. Can be adopted, but this will be described later.)

  In the replay accepting machine 12 that transmits / receives the terminal distribution information [i] [m] and the like in this way, a constant display subroutine is started (step SD3). The constant display subroutine activated by the replay accepting machine 12 is a process for displaying the received terminal distribution information [i] [m] on the display unit 12g based on the received terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m]. The program is stored in the storage means of the control unit 150, and if there is an activation request, the control unit 150 executes the timer interrupt every predetermined time without interrupting the execution of the main routine.

  In the next process in the main routine, the control unit 150 determines whether or not the member IC card 30 is inserted based on the information from the card processing unit 151 (step S160).

  If it is determined in step S160 that the member IC card 30 has not been inserted (No in step S160), the process directly returns to the start.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S160 that the member IC card 30 is inserted (Yes in step S160), the inserted card is written in the prize exchange device 1500 such as the wagon 1550. When having the information, the card processing unit 151 reads out the prize exchange information, and the control unit 150 processes the information related to the number of game media corresponding to the prize to be exchanged, that is, as an example, corresponding to the selected prize. Processing for outputting information related to the number of game media to be performed to the management device 13 is performed (step SF1).

  Here, the free gift exchange information is information related to free gift exchange, and as the free gift exchange information, the example information described above can be cited. The free gift exchange information is information that is updated in the free gift exchange device 1500 and is intended to specify the valuable value after the free gift exchange.

  Subsequently, the control unit 150 reads out the predetermined condition stored in the management device 13 and determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied (step SF2). Here, in the present prize exchange system, the predetermined condition is, for example, (1) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the number of winning balls is counted or stored in the management device 13 as the number of winning balls, or when the store is closed When a predetermined time comes, (2) When a storage medium such as the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 that stores at least information that can identify the number of winning balls and the number of stored balls is taken out from the intermediary machine (3) A storage medium such as a member IC card 30 or a non-member IC card 31 that stores information that can specify at least the number of winning balls and the number of stored balls is inserted when managed as the number of winning balls. When the machine is inserted into a machine that is different from the machine, or (4) when a prize is exchanged. Further, any one of the above conditions (1) to (4) may be set as the predetermined condition, or a plurality of conditions may be selected and set from these conditions. The determination as to whether or not the above-described predetermined condition is satisfied may be executed by the management apparatus 13 based on the predetermined condition stored in the management apparatus 13.

  If it is determined in step SF2 that the predetermined condition is not satisfied (No in step SF2), the process of S161 described later is executed.

  When it is determined in step SF2 that the predetermined condition is satisfied (Yes in step SF2), the control unit 150 rewrites the information related to the number of winning balls, which satisfies the predetermined condition, into the stored ball number and the information Information for subtracting the number of winning balls from the number of managed winning balls is output to the management device 13 (step SF3). When the management device 13 determines whether or not the above-described predetermined condition is satisfied, the management device 13 rewrites information related to the number of winning balls that satisfies the predetermined condition into the number of stored balls.

  When a member player inserts the member IC card 30 into the card insertion slot 12a, the control unit 150 inserts the member IC card 30 based on information from the card processing unit 151 by the card insertion. (The determination result in step S160 is Yes), and the replay accepting machine 12 starts a distribution condition display subroutine (step SD4). The distribution condition display subroutine activated by the replay accepting machine 12 includes the terminal distribution condition [i] [m] and the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] that generally received the received terminal distribution information [i] [m]. The program is displayed on the display unit 12g based on the control unit 150, and the program is stored in the storage unit of the control unit 150. If there is an activation request, the control unit can perform a timer interrupt every predetermined time without interrupting the execution of the main routine. 150 executes.

  If it is determined in step S160 that the member IC card 30 has been inserted (Yes in step S160), the distribution condition display subroutine is started (step SD4) after the processing in step SF3 described above. The processing unit 151 reads the ID and password stored in the member IC card 30 and outputs them to the control unit 150 (step S161).

  Subsequently, the selection button detection unit 153 detects the security code input with the security code input numeric keyboard 12b, and outputs the detection signal to the control unit 150 (step S162). The control unit 150 compares the password read from the member IC card 30 with the password entered using the password entry numeric keyboard 12b (step S163).

  If it is determined in step S163 that the numbers do not match (“NG” in step S163), the card processing unit 151 returns the member IC card 30 from the card insertion slot 12a (step S164) and returns. Return to the start.

  On the other hand, if both numbers match in the determination in step S163 (“OK” in step S163), the card processing unit 151 outputs the read ID to the control unit 150, and the control unit 150 further The ID is transmitted to the management apparatus 13 via the network 8 (step S165). And the management apparatus 13 reads the number of stored balls etc. managed by the ID (step S165).

  Next, the selection button detection unit 153 detects that any one of the end ball / end medal return button 12c, the card return button 12d, and the replay acceptance button 12e is pressed, and sends the information to the control unit 150. Output (step S166).

  If it is determined in step S166 that the edge / end medal return button 12c has been pressed (“end / end medal return button” in step S166), the management device 13 via the network 8 from the control unit 150. Is output. Then, a return signal for the end ball is output from the management device 13 to the end ball return unit 152 via the control unit 150, and the end ball is returned from the end ball / end medal receiving port 12 f by the end ball return unit 152. (Step S167). Here, the end ball / end medal return button 12c is pressed when the number of stored balls is small and it is desired to return the stored balls without accepting replay. The end balls are returned. Then return to start.

  If it is determined in step S166 that the card return button 12d has been pressed (“card return button” in step S166), the card processing unit 151 returns the member IC card 30 from the card insertion slot 12a ( Step S168). Then return to start.

If it is determined in step S166 that the replay acceptance button 12e has been pressed ("replay acceptance button" in step S166), the detection signal is sent from the control unit 150 to the management device 13 via the network 8. Is output. Then, in the management device 13, it is determined whether or not the number of stored balls (X1) read based on the ID in step S165 satisfies the following formula (1) (in the case of pachinko) (step S169).
X1 ≧ 2500 + 2500 × fee rate (1)

If the determination in step S169 is No, the number of replay balls (Y1) is calculated from the following equation (2) (step S170).
Y1 = X1−X1 × (fee rate) (2)

  Here, the fee rate is 0.375, for example, and this value is arbitrarily changed.

  Then, the management device 13 registers the number of replayed balls (Y1) based on the ID (step S170), and the number of balls is rewritten as 0 (step S171).

When it is determined in step S169 that Expression (1) is satisfied (Yes in step S169), the number of stored balls (X2) is rewritten to the value of the following expression (3) in the management device 13 (step S172). ), The number of replayed balls is registered in 2500 (step S173).
X2 = X1-2500-2500 × (fee rate) (3)

  When the number of balls for replay is registered in step S170 or step S173, the replay FLG of the management device 13 is rewritten to 1 based on the ID so that it can be replayed (step S174), and returns to start. Return.

  The above formulas (1), (2), and (3) are for a pachinko machine, but when targeting a slot machine, 500 medals for 10,000 yen can be used instead of 2500 balls. . The replay accepting machine 12 may be provided with a switching button or the like, and the switching button can be used to select which of the pachinko machine and the slot machine is replayed. Further, each may be provided as a separate replay accepting machine 12.

  Here, the process in the replay accepting machine 12 is not limited to the above process. For example, the replay storage ball may be discharged to the end ball / end medal receiving port 12f of the replay accepting machine 12. Further, the replay accepting machine 12 is not limited to being configured alone, and may be provided in the inter-machines 3, 4, 6, for example. In this case, the intermediary machines 3, 4, 6 are further provided with a code number input numeric keyboard or the like.

  Furthermore, the replay accepting machine 12 may execute, for example, processing related to a request for replenishing an end ball due to the end of the end of the end ball, an operation performed by an employee in response to the request, as necessary. Also, a call button or the like is provided on the replay accepting machine 12 so that the player can press the call button when the end ball is not discharged due to a cause other than the end of the end ball. It is good also as performing a process etc. as needed. Note that the end ball breakage is monitored by, for example, an optical sensor comprising a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit installed below the end ball storage unit formed in a funnel shape. If the light is not blocked, it may be detected that there is no end ball.

(Between machines 3, 4, 6)
Next, the inter-machines 3, 4, and 6 will be described with reference to the plan view of the inter-machines 3, 4, and 6 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 9 shows a view of three types of intermediary machines 3, 4, and 6 as viewed from the front. The intermediary machine 3 (unit) of (a) and the intermediary machine 4 (sand) of (b) are shown. ) Is for a pachinko machine, and the inter-machine 6 (inter-medal lending machine) of (c) is for a slot machine.

  Since the inter-machine 3 (unit) can communicate with the pachinko machine 2, the pachinko machine 2 supplies the pachinko ball directly from the pachinko machine 2 to the upper plate of the pachinko machine 2 when the ball rental button of the pachinko machine 2 is pressed. Can do. On the other hand, since the inter-machine 4 (sand) cannot communicate with the pachinko machine 2, the pachinko balls are supplied to the upper plate of the pachinko machine 2 from the nozzle of the sand.

  In addition, since the machine 6 (the machine for lending the machine) cannot communicate with the gaming machine similarly to the machine 4 (the sand), the medal is the medal of the machine 6 (the machine for lending the machine). It is supplied to the payout port and moved to the slot machine 5 by the player. In addition, a nozzle may be attached to the medal payout opening of the machine 6 (intermediate medal lending machine) so that the medal is automatically supplied to the medal payout opening of the slot machine 5.

  In addition, the inter-machines 3, 4, and 6 also function as the first terminal device, and the prize exchange written in the prize exchange apparatus 1500 such as the wagon 1550 from the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 is performed. The information is read out, and at least processing for outputting information related to the number of game media corresponding to the selected prize to the management device 13 is performed. This process is executed by the game medium number information processing means of the inter-machines 3, 4, 6.

  Furthermore, the inter-machines 3, 4, and 6 also function as a second terminal device. The premium exchange is performed on the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 in the premium exchange device 1500 such as a wagon 1550 or a service counter. The process of writing the gift exchange permission information that enables the This process is executed by the prize exchange permission writing means of the inter-vehicle machines 3, 4 and 6. In addition, the prize exchange permission information includes, for example, information on the number of game media acquired by the player in the game, such as the number of game media such as the number of pachinko balls won and the number of balls stored, but is not limited thereto. It is not a thing. For example, the prize exchange permission information includes information similar to information relating to a prize selected by the player in the display units 3e, 4e, and 6e of the inter-vehicle machines 3, 4, and 6, which will be described later. That is, specific example information of the premium exchange information described above can be given.

  Here, in the case where the information on the number of game media related to the number of game media such as the number of winning pachinko balls and the number of stored balls is used as the prize exchange permission information, the prize selected by the player at the prize exchange device 1500 is used. The acquired game medium number information may be updated based on the information, and the updated machine exchange information may be output to the management device 13 by the inter-vehicle machines 3, 4, 6. Further, when flag information is used as the gift exchange permission information, the gift exchange device 1500 stores the gift exchange information based on the prize selected by the player in the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31. Then, the stored prize exchange information may be output to the management apparatus 13 by the interstage machines 3, 4, 6.

  In addition, each intermediary machine 3, 4, 6 has a card insertion slot 3a, 4a, 6a, a ball rental button 3b, 4b (the game machine has a ball rental button, so There are also cases where there are no replay ball rental buttons 3c, 4c, a medal loan button 6b, a replay medal button 6c, a return button 3d, 4d, 6d, a display unit 3e, 4e, 6e, a lamp 3f, 4f, 6f, card collection units 3g, 4g, 6g, bill insertion slots 3h, 4h, 6h, signal transmission / reception units 3i, 4i, 6i are provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 10, a control unit 200, a card processing machine 201, a power supply circuit 202, a banknote recognition device with a storage mechanism (bill burr) 203, etc. are installed in the interstage machines 3, 4, 6. .

  The card processor 201 moves the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 inserted from the card insertion slot 3a, 4a, 6a to a predetermined position by the transport means, and the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card. Information such as an ID is read from the IC card 31, and is configured by, for example, a reader / writer. Further, the card processing machine 201 takes out the non-member IC card 31 from a card storage unit (not shown) that stores the non-member IC card 31 provided in the card processing machine 201 and whose frequency is “0”. For example, ID etc. can be memorize | stored and it can also reissue from card insertion slot 3a, 4a, 6a.

  Here, when one member IC card 30 or non-member IC card 31 is inserted from the card insertion slot 3a, 4a, 6a, for example, by means of mechanical card insertion prevention means (not shown) such as a solenoid. Since the card insertion openings 3a, 4a, 6a are blocked, it becomes impossible to insert another member IC card 30 or non-member IC card 31. As a result, it is possible to prevent card clogging or the like caused by inserting a plurality of member IC cards 30 or non-member IC cards 31 into the card insertion openings 3a, 4a, 6a. Further, card jamming or the like may be prevented by other methods without using mechanical card insertion preventing means such as a solenoid.

  The ball rental buttons 3b and 4b are buttons that are pressed when the player requests the pachinko ball rental. For example, when the ball lending buttons 3b and 4b are pressed once, a pachinko ball for 500 yen is lent out. The pachinko balls are rented in units of 500 yen.

  The medal lending button 6b is a button that is pressed when the player requests medal lending. For example, when the rental medal button 6b is pressed once, a medal for 1,000 yen is lent out. The medal is lent out in units of 1000 yen.

  The replay ball rental buttons 3c and 4c and the replay loan medal button 6c are used only when the IC card for a member for which a replay procedure is performed in the replay acceptance machine 12 is used, and can be used for replay. Pressed when lending a pachinko ball or medal that can be done.

  The display units 3e, 4e, and 6e are display units that display predetermined information associated with operations of the inter-vehicle machines 3, 4, and 6, respectively, and display distribution information by the information distribution system. As information display accompanying the operation of the inter-vehicle machines 3, 4, and 6, for example, the frequency is displayed. As a result, the frequency can be confirmed and the timing of payment can be achieved. Moreover, you may display information other than frequency on the display parts 3e, 4e, and 6e.

  Each of these display units 3e, 4e, 6e is a display means having a touch panel constituted by a touch panel EL (Electro Luminescence) display or the like, and various operations arranged on the touch panel corresponding to display contents. A key operation input by a player or the like is received at the key, and a key operation input by the touch operation is supplied to the control unit 200, and an arbitrary touch operation other than the operation key is specified (the display of the operation target is not specified and the display screen is simply displayed). A touch operation by simply touching an arbitrary area of the screen), and an operation input by the optional touch operation is also supplied to the control unit 200. The display units 3e, 4e, and 6e also display information according to the touch operation of the player or the like, but the specific information display contents are clearly shown in the explanation of the operation described later and the explanation of the entire information distribution system. To do.

In addition, as distribution information displayed on the display units 3e, 4e, and 6e, premium information provided by a wagon 1550 or a service counter is displayed, and a prize such as a wagon 1550 or a service counter is displayed when the player performs a touch operation. May be selected.

  The lamps 3f, 4f, and 6f are for visually identifying whether a player who is playing is a member or a non-member. For example, red light is emitted for a member and blue light is emitted for a non-member. .

  The card collection units 3g, 4g, and 6g are non-member IC cards when the storage limit of the non-member IC card 31 is reached in the card storage unit that stores the non-member IC card 31 of the card processor 201. 31 is collected. For example, when the non-member IC card 31 stored in the card storage unit becomes full, a part of the stored non-member IC card 31 is guided to the card discharge unit provided in the card storage unit and dropped. And collect it in the card collection units 3g, 4g, and 6g. The non-member IC card 31 collected by the card collection units 3g, 4g, and 6g is collected by a store clerk or the like, for example, after the end of business.

  The signal transmission / reception units 3i, 4i, and 6i transmit / receive information to / from the store clerk card 32 possessed by the employee, for example. Here, the slot machine 6 for the slot machine has a configuration in which two platform machines are provided side by side. If the signal transmission / reception unit 6i is arranged adjacently, incorrect information, that is, the slot machine 5 on the left side is arranged. Information that is recognized as information for the right slot machine 5 may be transmitted and received. Therefore, here, in order to prevent erroneous transmission / reception of information, in the inter-station machine 6 having a configuration in which two inter-vehicle apparatuses are provided, the signal transmission / reception unit 6i is arranged at a remote position.

  The control unit 200 controls each component device in the inter-vehicle machines 3, 4, 6 and performs information communication with, for example, the island computer 7 other than the inter-machines 3, 4, 6, and an interface circuit. 200a, CPU 200b, ROM 200c, and RAM 200d.

  The power supply circuit 202 supplies power for driving each component device in the inter-vehicle machine 3, 4, 6 to each component device.

  The bill recognition device with a storage mechanism (bill burr) 203 is a compact size bill discriminator that can handle four types of bills inserted from the bill insertion slots 3h, 4h, and 6h. The computer 7 is connected so that information communication is possible. In addition, the banknote identification device with a storage mechanism (Bill Bali) 203 can accept only a predetermined banknote, for example, only a thousand yen bill.

  By the way, in the game hall management system 1B, there is provided means for detecting that a person such as a player has come with a table machine or the like, but this means is limited to the human body detection sensor of the individual counter 2C. What is not done is as described above. Therefore, as the human body detection sensor as such means, in the description of the inter-machines 3, 4, and 6 performed here, it is assumed that a seating sensor is provided in the seat of each gaming machine. Specifically, a seating sensor is provided in each gaming machine seat, and a seating sensor that is turned on when a player or the like sits in the seat of each gaming machine with respect to the pedestal machine of each gaming machine. The detection signal is supplied to the control unit 200.

  Next, the operation of the interstage machines 3, 4, 6 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Since the basic operations of the inter-vehicle machines 3, 4, and 6 are the same, the operation of the inter-vehicle machine 3 (unit) will be described here as an example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the components of the intermediary machine 3, and FIGS. 12A and 12B are flowcharts showing the flow of operations in the intermediary machine 3.

  Further, here, the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 has only an ID, and other information will be described in the operation in the system managed by the management device 13. As described above, the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 can store and use valuable information such as frequency in addition to the ID.

  Furthermore, in this explanation, when the IC card 30 for members is used, after the replay acceptance machine 12 accepts the replay, the replay FLG is 1, and the number of balls available for replay is replayed. It is assumed that the system has the management device 13 as the number of storage balls for use.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the intermediary machine 3 mainly includes a control unit 300, a card processing unit 301, a selection button detection unit 302, a currency identification unit 303, and an employee information reading unit 304.

  The control unit 300 includes the above-described control unit 200 and the like, and stores an arithmetic unit (CPU), a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), and other memories such as a semiconductor memory that keeps information as necessary. The CPU is mainly configured, and the CPU executes various arithmetic processes using programs, data, and the like stored in the storage means such as the ROM and RAM. In this control unit 300, input / output of signals between the respective units of the display unit 3e, the card processing unit 301, the selection button detection unit 302, the money identification unit 303, and the employee information reading unit 304, and the island computer 7, the network 8 controls the input / output of signals to / from the management device 13 and the distribution control device 90. Here, the island computer 7 performs information communication between the pachinko machine 2, the slot machine 5, the inter-machines 3, 4, 6 and the network 8, and is configured by a data logger or the like.

  An operation input signal corresponding to a touch operation of a player or the like is supplied from the touch panel of the display unit 3e to the control unit 300, and a seating detection signal that is turned on when the player or the like is seated is also supplied from the seating sensor. . The operation input signal supplied from the touch panel includes a signal indicating the key operation input by the touch operation of the operation key described above and a signal indicating the operation input by the arbitrary touch operation, and the player or the like performs an arbitrary touch operation. The operation input signal at this time is a signal that informs the control unit 300 that the user has touched the display screen without specifying the operation target (just that there is a touch operation).

  The program stored in the storage means such as ROM or RAM of the control unit 300 includes processing for carrying out information distribution by an information distribution system to be described later in addition to the processing operation of the intermediary machine 3 that lends pachinko balls and the like. A program whose operation is defined is included, and the control unit 300 executes processing related to information distribution according to the program. The processing related to information distribution is to perform storage of information, communication with the distribution control device 90, display operation control of the display unit 3e, and the like as necessary. Means (ROM, RAM, other semiconductor memory that keeps information as necessary), communication means (signal input / output control via the island computer 7 and network 8 provided in the control unit 300), and control means (The drive control of the display part 3e by the control part 300) etc. are provided.

  The card processing unit 301 reads, for example, an ID and valuable information managed by the ID stored in the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 inserted from the card insertion slot 3a. Information is output to the control unit 300, and updated valuable information from the control unit 300 is written to the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31. For example, the card processor 201 or the like Consists of. Here, the card processing unit 301 is used as the card processing unit 301.

  Further, when issuing the non-member IC card 31, the card processing unit 301 stores an ID or the like in the non-member IC card 31. Further, the card processing unit 301 has card transport means such as a card transport belt, and the card transport means reads, for example, the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 inserted from the card insertion slot 3a as a reader / writer. Move to a position where it can communicate with the department. The card processing unit 301 has a function of detecting the storage state of the non-member IC card 31 to be issued, and can detect whether the non-member IC card 31 is stored.

  The card processing unit 301 also functions as a game medium number information processing unit, and reads premium exchange information written in the premium exchange device 1500 such as the wagon 1550 from the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31. As an example of processing at least information relating to the number of game media corresponding to the prize to be exchanged, processing for outputting information relating to the number of game media corresponding to the selected prize to the management device 13 is performed. Further, the card processing unit 301 may function as a free gift exchange permission information writing unit for writing the above free gift exchange permission information into the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31. Furthermore, the card processing unit 301 functions as a free gift exchange information reading unit that reads information on a storage medium in which full free gift exchange information related to free gifts exchanged by a plurality of players in the free gift exchange device 1500 is written. May be. Here, as the total prize exchange information, for example, total information in a predetermined period such as one business day in which a plurality of players have exchanged prizes, individual information in a predetermined period such as one business day in which a plurality of players have exchanged prizes, etc. All the information of the prize amount information is listed, and all the prize exchange amounts related to the prize exchange performed by the prize exchange apparatus that may be operated by a trader other than the game hall such as the wagon 1550 and the specific prize service counter 1560 May be information that can be calculated and specified. As all information of individual prize amount information in a predetermined period such as one business day when prizes are exchanged among a plurality of players, for example, select various kinds of prizes (such as prize IDs), information on the number of prizes, and prizes. The information (for example, card ID etc.) concerning the player who performed can be illustrated. At the same time as the all prize exchange information, the merchant ID information for the business relating to the prize exchange is output to the management device 13.

  The selection button detection unit 302 detects that the ball rental button 3b, the replay ball rental button 3c, and the return button 3d are pressed, and outputs a signal to the control unit 300 based on the pressed signal. It is. The configuration of the part of the touch panel that supplies the operation input signal corresponding to the touch operation to the control unit 300 in the display unit 3e may be included in the selection button detection unit 302.

  The currency identification unit 303 identifies four types of banknotes based on a signal from the banknote identification device 203 with a storage mechanism, and outputs information on the identified banknotes to the control unit 300.

  The employee information reading unit 304 includes a signal transmission / reception unit 3i and the like. Further, the employee information reading unit 304 is information that can identify an employee who performs operations such as replenishment of the non-member IC card 31 that is a card stored in the inter-machine 3 and transporting the ball box to the counter 9. Is read from the clerk card 32, for example. The employee information reading unit 304 is composed of, for example, a reader / writer.

  And each apparatus part of the display part 3e, the card | curd process part 301, the selection button detection part 302, the money identification part 303, and the employee information reading part 304 controlled by the control part 300 operate | moves as follows (FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B).

  The operation will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B showing the flow of operations in the intermediary machine 3 show a flowchart of the main routine in the intermediary machine 3 executed by the control unit 300, and the program is stored in the storage means of the control unit 300. The high-speed processing operation in which the control unit 300 stores and executes the processing from start to return in 0.01 ms or the like is repeated. In this main routine, first, terminal distribution information [i] [m], terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] and terminal distribution information [i] [m] are transmitted from the distribution control device 90 via the network 8 (and island computer 7) in the intermediary machine 3. The terminal distribution condition [i] [m] is received (step SD1). That is, the intermediary machine 3 receives i pieces of distribution information from terminal distribution information [1] [m] to terminal distribution information [i] [m] from the distribution control device 90 as the m-th terminal on the network 8. The terminal delivery amount designation information [1] [m] to the terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] and the terminal delivery condition [1] [m] to the terminal delivery condition [ i] [m] is received.

  In the inter-vehicle machine 3, after receiving these pieces of information, the distribution record of each terminal distribution information [i] [m] via the network 8 (from the island computer 7 via the network 8), each terminal distribution information [ The distribution fee of i] [m] and the attribute designation information [i] [m] are transmitted to the distribution control device 90 (step SD5). The distribution result here is information indicating the result of displaying each terminal distribution information [i] [m] on the display unit 3e in the inter-machine 3 which is the m-th terminal, and relates to the display of distribution information to be described later. It is counted in the processing, and the distribution fee is also counted according to the counted distribution result (the total is calculated in a constant display subroutine and a distribution condition display subroutine described later in detail). The attribute designation information [i] [m] is information for designating an attribute desired to be distributed in the intermediary machine 3 which is the mth terminal. When there is an input for designating the attribute to the intermediary machine 3 Sent to.

  In the inter-station machine 3 that has transmitted / received the terminal distribution information [i] [m] and the like in this way, a constant display subroutine is started (step SD3). The constant display subroutine activated by the inter-vehicle machine 3 is a process of displaying the received terminal distribution information [i] [m] on the display unit 3e based on the received terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m]. Yes, the program is stored in the storage means of the control unit 300, and if there is an activation request, the control unit 300 executes the timer interrupt every predetermined time without interrupting the execution of the main routine.

  In the processing in the main routine, the card processing unit 301 waits for the insertion of the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 from the card insertion slot 3a, and the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card. When insertion of 31 is detected, processing corresponding to that is executed.

  The currency identification unit 303 determines whether or not a banknote has been accepted (step S308).

  Now, assuming that a player or the like has inserted a banknote into the banknote insertion slot 3h, the control unit 300 determines that the banknote has been accepted based on information from the currency identification unit 303 by the banknote insertion (step S308). As a result, the delivery condition display subroutine is started in the inter-station machine 3 (step SD4). The distribution condition display subroutine activated by the inter-vehicle machine 3 includes the terminal distribution condition [i] [m] and the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] that generally received the received terminal distribution information [i] [m]. The program is stored in the storage means of the control unit 300 based on the control unit 300, and if there is an activation request, the control unit 300 can perform a timer interrupt every predetermined time without interrupting the execution of the main routine. Will run.

  If it is determined in step S308 that the banknote has been accepted (Yes in step S308), the delivery condition display subroutine is started as described above (step SD4), and the currency identification unit 303 determines the deposit amount of the banknote. The frequency corresponding to is output to the control unit 300.

  Further, the card processing unit 301 always determines whether or not the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 is inserted. When the card processing unit 301 determines that the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 is inserted in the card processing unit 301, the card processing unit 301 uses the member IC card 30 or the non-member. The ID of the IC card 31 is read and output to the control unit 300.

  The control unit 300 transmits the frequency corresponding to the deposit amount of the banknote from the money identification unit 303 and the ID information from the card processing unit 301 to the management device 13 via the island computer 7 and the network 8. The information transmitted to the management device 13 is recorded in the management device 13 (step S309). If the inserted member IC card 30 or non-member IC card 31 cannot be read or written, the card processing unit 301 returns the member IC card 30 or non-member IC card 31.

  On the other hand, when the card processing unit 301 determines that the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 is not inserted into the card processing unit 301, the control unit 300 uses the card storage unit ( The non-member IC card 31 stored in (not shown) is taken out, and information for moving the non-member IC card 31 to the reader / writer unit (not shown) is output to the card processing unit 101. And ID is memorize | stored in the IC card 31 for nonmembers moved to the position which can communicate with a reader-writer part (step S310). The control unit 300 outputs the frequency corresponding to the ID and the deposit amount of banknotes to the management device 13. The management device 13 records the information based on the ID (step S310). Then, the process proceeds to step S318.

  If it is determined in step S308 that the banknote has not been accepted (No in step S308), the control unit 300 subsequently proceeds to the member IC card 30 based on information from the card processing unit 301. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the non-member IC card 31 is inserted (step S311).

  When it is determined in step S311 that the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 is not inserted (No in step S311), the processing after step S340 (processing from Q) is executed. .

  Here, if a player who is a member inserts a member IC card 30 into the card insertion slot 3a or a non-member player inserts a non-member IC card 31, the controller 300 It is determined that the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 is inserted based on the information from the card processing unit 301 by card insertion (the determination result in Step S311 is Yes), thereby In the machine 3, a distribution condition display subroutine is started (step SD4).

  If it is determined in step S311 that the member IC card 30 or non-member IC card 31 is inserted (Yes in step S311), the distribution condition display subroutine is started as described above (step SD4). Subsequently, based on the information from the card processing unit 301, the control unit 300 determines whether or not the information of the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 can be read and written (step S312). ).

  When it is determined in step S312 that the information of the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 cannot be read and written (Yes in step S312), the control unit 300 displays the card processing unit. Information for returning the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 is output to 301. The card processing unit 301 that has received the information returns the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 from the card insertion slot 3a. (Step S313). Then, the processing after S340 (processing from Q) is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S312 that the information of the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 can be read and written (No in step S312), the control unit 300 continues. Based on the information from the card processing unit 301, it is determined whether or not the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 is not properly transported (step S314).

  If it is determined in step S314 that the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 is not properly transported (Yes in step S314), the control unit 300 generates a transport failure in the display unit 3e. It is displayed (step S315). Further, the control unit 300 outputs information on the conveyance failure to the management device 13 via the island computer 7 and the network 8. Based on the conveyance failure information, the management device 13 outputs information based on the occurrence of the conveyance failure to the prize management machine (POS) 11 or the like. Further, it is possible to notify that a conveyance failure has occurred due to a buzzer, in-site broadcasting, or the like (step S315).

  Here, after waiting until the card causing the card conveyance failure is removed, the process proceeds to step S316.

  If it is determined in step S314 that the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 is not defective (No in step S314), the control unit 300 then starts from the card processing unit 301. Whether the inserted IC card is a non-member IC card in another game hall or an expired card even if it is a non-member IC card in its own hall Determination is made (step S316).

  If it is determined in step S316 that the inserted IC card is a non-member IC card in another game hall, or even if it is a non-member IC card in the own game hall (step S316) In S316 (Yes), the control unit 300 outputs to the card processing unit 301 information for returning the IC card for the non-member in the other inserted game hall. Receiving the information, the card processing unit 301 returns the non-member IC card of another game hall from the card insertion slot 3a (step S317).

  Subsequently, the control unit 300 outputs a signal for closing the shutter to the individual counter 2C provided corresponding to each gaming machine so that the pachinko ball cannot flow into the individual counter 2C (step SE1). ). Then, the processing after S340 (processing from Q) is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S316 that the inserted IC card is not a non-member IC card in another game hall, and it is determined that the expiration date has not expired (No in step S316). Subsequently, the control unit 300 determines whether or not it is the first time to detect the insertion of the inserted IC card (step SE2).

  When it is determined in step SE2 that the insertion of the inserted IC card is not detected for the first time (No in step SE2), that is, the inserted IC card is the inter-unit machine 3, 4, 5, when it is determined that the insertion of the IC card is detected in the previous loop of the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, the control unit 300 inputs the count result from the individual counter 2C (step SE3). ). Here, inputting the counting result is executed by, for example, counting a count clock in the individual counter 2C, that is, a signal output every time one pachinko ball is detected.

  Subsequently, the control unit 300 converts the counted number of gaming media such as pachinko balls into a unified unit based on the gaming machine ID obtained from the gaming media (step SE4). Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the value of the pachinko balls to be discharged may differ depending on the model. For example, if there is a gaming machine that discharges one pachinko ball by converting it to 4 yen, it will be converted to 2 yen There is also a gaming machine that discharges in terms of 1 yen. In such a situation, in order to manage the acquired number of game media in terms of a predetermined constant value, the above-described process of converting the counted number of game media into a unified unit is executed. Note that the value of the above-described gaming medium can be set for each of the inter-machine machines, the gaming machines, the gaming islands, and the gaming machine groups. Here, each gaming machine group means each group when gaming machines are grouped by type when a plurality of gaming machines are installed on one gaming island.

  Subsequently, in step SE3, when there is no change in the counting result from the individual counter 2C for a predetermined time (only once again if there is a change in the counting result), the control unit 300 causes the card processing unit 301 to Information on the number of acquired game media, such as the number of winning balls and the number of stored balls, converted to a unified unit in step SE4, is written on the inserted IC card as premium exchange permission information (step SE5). In addition, for example, when the prize is exchanged, when it is set to subtract the number of game media corresponding to the selected prize in preference to either the number of winning balls or the number of stored balls, the control unit 300 Inputs the information from the management device 13, and causes the card processing unit 301 to write this information on the IC card (step SE5). This information is written as plug information, for example.

  Subsequently, the control unit 300 outputs information on the number of acquired game media such as the number of winning balls and the number of stored balls to the management device 13 (step SE6). The management device 13 stores and manages these pieces of information based on, for example, the player ID.

  When it is determined in step SE2 that the IC card is not inserted in the previous loop of the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B for the first time (YES in step SE2), that is, In the case of the first insertion, the control unit 300 reads the ID based on the information from the card processing unit 301 and outputs the ID to the management device 13. The management device 13 authenticates the ID and outputs information on the remaining number based on the ID to the control unit 300. Moreover, the control part 300 displays information, such as remaining frequency, on the display part 3e based on the information from the management apparatus 13, for example. Further, the control unit 300 outputs information for extending the expiration date of the remaining frequency to a predetermined period (for example, 20 days) to the management device 13 based on the ID, and the management device 13 based on the information, Rewrite the remaining expiration date. Further, the control unit 300 outputs information on the amount of money received to the management device 13 based on the ID, and the management device 13 integrates and writes the frequency of the money received in the frequency balance for each ID (step S318). .

  Here, the IC card for members issued in other game halls can be used directly in the inter-table machine 3. In this case, the information on the IC card for a member of another game hall can be obtained from the information management center 16 connected to the management device 13 so as to be communicable. As a result, valuable information such as the remaining number can be obtained even if only the ID information is stored in the member IC cards of other game halls. In addition, when valuable information such as the remaining frequency is stored together with the ID on the member IC card, the valuable information such as the remaining frequency is directly read from or written to the IC card for the member in another game hall. It can be carried out.

  Subsequently, when the inserted IC card has the prize exchange information written in the prize exchange apparatus 1500 such as the wagon 1550 as the first terminal apparatus, the inter-vehicle machines 3, 4, and 5 have the card processing unit 301. Reads out the prize exchange information, and the control unit 300 reads out the prize exchange information in the card processing unit 301 and processes at least information relating to the number of game media corresponding to the prize to be exchanged as the game medium number information processing means 1 As an example, processing for outputting information related to the number of game media corresponding to the selected prize to the management device 13 is performed. In this case, the first terminal device functions as a game medium number information processing means. The prize exchange information is as described above.

  Subsequently, the control unit 300 outputs a signal for opening the shutter of the individual counter 2C provided corresponding to each gaming machine so that the pachinko balls can flow into the individual counter 2C (step). SE7).

  Subsequently, the control unit 300 reads the predetermined condition stored in the management device 13 and determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied (step SF2). Here, in the present prize exchange system, the predetermined condition is, for example, (1) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the number of winning balls is counted or stored in the management device 13 as the number of winning balls, or when the store is closed When a predetermined time comes, (2) When a storage medium such as the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 that stores at least information that can identify the number of winning balls and the number of stored balls is taken out from the intermediary machine (3) A storage medium such as a member IC card 30 or a non-member IC card 31 that stores information that can specify at least the number of winning balls and the number of stored balls is inserted when managed as the number of winning balls. When the machine is inserted into a machine that is different from the machine, or (4) when a prize is exchanged. Further, any one of the above conditions (1) to (4) may be set as the predetermined condition, or a plurality of conditions may be selected and set from these conditions. The determination as to whether or not the above-described predetermined condition is satisfied may be executed by the management apparatus 13 based on the predetermined condition stored in the management apparatus 13.

  If it is determined in step SF2 that the predetermined condition is not satisfied (No in step SF2), the process executes step S319.

  If it is determined in step SF2 that the predetermined condition is satisfied (Yes in step SF2), the control unit 300 rewrites the information related to the number of winning balls to the number of stored balls and satisfies the predetermined condition. Information for subtracting the number of winning balls from the number of managed winning balls is output to the management device 13 (step SF3). When the management device 13 determines whether or not the above-described predetermined condition is satisfied, the management device 13 rewrites information related to the number of winning balls that satisfies the predetermined condition into the number of stored balls. After this process, the process of step S319 (process from P in FIG. 12B) is executed.

  Subsequently, based on the information from the selection button detection unit 302, the control unit 300 determines whether or not a ball rental request signal based on the player selecting the ball rental button 3b has been input (step S319). .

  Here, when the player selects and operates the ball rental button 3b, the control unit 300 receives a ball rental request signal based on information from the selection button detection unit 302 by the button operation (the ball rental button 3b). Is selected) (the determination result in step S319 is Yes), and the delivery condition display subroutine is started in the intermediary machine 3 (step SD4).

  If it is determined in step S319 that a ball rental request signal has been input (Yes in step S319), the distribution condition display subroutine is started as described above (step SD4), and the control unit 300 uses the member IC. The power balance corresponding to the ID of the card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 is read from the management device 13, the power balance is compared with the power corresponding to the ball lending request signal, and the power balance corresponds to the ball lending request signal. If it is larger than the frequency, a ball lending discharge signal based on the ball lending request signal is transmitted to the control unit of the pachinko machine 2 via the control unit 300, and a predetermined number of pachinko balls are lent to the upper plate of the pachinko machine 2. This is performed (step S320). The control unit 300 subtracts the frequency corresponding to the ball lending request signal from the frequency balance, and transmits the subtracted frequency balance to the management device 13. The management device 13 writes information based on the subtracted frequency balance for each ID (step S320).

  Furthermore, when the member IC card 30 is used, the management device 13 adds points given according to the frequency corresponding to the ball rental request signal based on the ID (step S321).

  If it is determined in step S319 that a ball rental request signal has not been input (No in step S319), the control unit 300 subsequently determines the player based on the information from the selection button detection unit 302. Determines whether or not a replay ball rental request signal based on selecting the replay ball rental button 3c has been input (step S322).

  Here, when the player selects and operates the replay ball rental button 3c, the control unit 300 receives a replay ball rental request signal based on information from the selection button detection unit 302 by the button operation. It is determined that the replay ball rental button 3c has been selected (the determination result in step S322 is Yes), and thereby the distribution condition display subroutine is started in the intermediary machine 3 (step SD4). .

  If it is determined in step S322 that a replay ball rental request signal has been input (Yes in step S322), the distribution condition display subroutine is started as described above (step SD4), and the control unit 300 manages the management device 300. From 13, the value of the replay FLG managed based on the ID is input. Then, the control unit 300 determines the value of the replay FLG from the management device 13 (step S323). When the replay acceptance machine 12 accepts the replay FLG, which is a recorded value in the management apparatus 13, the replay FLG is 1. When not accepted, the replay FLG is 0.

  If it is determined in step S322 that a replay ball rental request signal has not been input (No in step S322), the process proceeds to step S325.

  If it is determined in step S323 that the replay FLG is “1” (“1” in step S323), the control unit 300 sends a replay ball rental request signal to the control unit of the pachinko machine 2. Output. The control unit of the pachinko machine 2 lends a predetermined number of pachinko balls from the pachinko machine 2 (step S324). Further, the control unit 300 outputs information on the number of balls corresponding to the replay ball rental request signal to the management device 13. Then, the management device 13 subtracts the number of balls corresponding to the replay ball rental request signal from the number of replayed balls, and writes the number of replayed balls after subtraction for each ID (step S324). In this case, a winning ball or a saving ball is used for replay. Further, when it is set to preferentially use the stored balls for replay, the management device 13 subtracts the number of balls corresponding to the replay ball rental request signal from the number of stored balls. Further, when it is set to preferentially use the winning ball for replay, the management device 13 subtracts the number of balls corresponding to the replaying ball rental request signal from the number of winning balls.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S323 that the replay FLG is “0” (“0” in step S323), the pachinko ball is not lent and the process proceeds to step S327. At this time, for example, the control unit 300 can cause the display unit 3e to display “Cannot replay”.

  Subsequently, the control unit 300 receives information on the number of balls for replay from the management device 13, and determines whether or not the number of balls for replay is “0” (step S325).

  If it is determined in step S325 that the number of replayed balls is “0” (Yes in step S325), the control unit 300 manages information for rewriting the value of the replay FLG to “0”. 13 is output. Then, the management device 13 rewrites the value of the replay FLG to “0” based on the ID (step S326).

  If it is determined in step S325 that the number of replayed balls is not “0” (No in step S325), the control unit 300 continues based on the information from the selection button detection unit 302. It is determined whether or not a return request signal based on selecting the return button 3d has been input (step S327).

  If it is determined in step S327 that the return request signal has not been input (No in step S327), the control unit 300 subsequently proceeds to the member IC card based on information from the card processing unit 301. It is determined whether or not 30 is inserted (step S328).

  When it is determined in step S328 that the member IC card 30 has been inserted (Yes in step S328), the control unit 300 lights the lamp 3f in red (step S329), and the card is inserted by the solenoid. The mouth 3a is blocked (step S330). And the process after step S340 is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S328 that the member IC card 30 has not been inserted (No in step S328), the control unit 300 subsequently proceeds based on the information from the card processing unit 301. It is determined whether or not the non-member IC card 31 is inserted (step S331).

  If it is determined in step S331 that the non-member IC card 31 is inserted (Yes in step S331), the control unit 300 lights the lamp 3f in blue (step S332), and the card is operated by a solenoid. The insertion port 3a is blocked (step S330). Then, the process after step S340 is executed, and if the determination result in step S331 is No, the process after step S340 is executed as it is.

  On the other hand, when the player selects and operates the return button 3d, the control unit 300 receives a return request signal based on information from the selection button detection unit 302 by the button operation (the return button 3d is pressed). (The determination result in step S327 is Yes), and the delivery condition display subroutine is started in the inter-station machine 3 (step SD4).

  If it is determined in step S327 that a return request signal has been input (Yes in step S327), the distribution condition display subroutine is started as described above (step SD4). Based on the information from the processing unit 301, it is determined whether or not there is a non-member IC card 31 (step S333).

  If it is determined in step S333 that there is no non-member IC card 31 (No in step S333), the control unit 300 returns the member IC card 30 to the card processing unit 301 from the card insertion slot 3a. Output information. The card processing unit 301 returns the member IC card 30 based on the information (step S334). And the process below step SF4 is performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S333 that there is a non-member IC card 31 (Yes in step S333), the control unit 300 subsequently determines that the non-member is based on information from the card processing unit 301. It is determined whether or not the IC card 31 has a frequency balance (step S335).

  If it is determined in step S335 that the non-member IC card 31 has a power balance (Yes in step S335), the control unit 300 causes the card processing unit 301 to enter the non-member IC from the card insertion slot 3a. Information for returning the card 31 is output. Then, the card processing unit 301 returns the non-member IC card 31 based on the information (step S336). And the process below step SF4 is performed.

  If it is determined in step S335 that the non-member IC card 31 does not have a power balance (No in step S335), then, based on information from the card processing unit 301, a card storage unit (not shown) ) Is determined whether or not the storage amount is the limit (step S337).

  When it is determined in step S337 that the storage amount is the limit (Yes in step S337), the control unit 300 causes the card processing unit 301 to transport the non-member IC card 31 to the card collection unit 3g. Is output. Then, the card processing unit 301 conveys the non-member IC card 31 to the card collection unit 3g (step S338). And the process below step SF4 is performed.

  If it is determined in step S337 that the storage amount is not the limit (No in step S337), the control unit 300 stores information for storing the non-member IC card 31 in a card storage unit (not shown). The data is output to the card processing unit 301. Then, the card processing unit 301 stores the non-member IC card 31 in a card storage unit (not shown) (step S339). And the process below step SF4 is performed.

  In step SF4 processing, the control unit 300 reads a predetermined condition stored in the management apparatus 13 and determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied (step SF4). Here, in the present prize exchange system, the predetermined condition is, for example, (1) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the number of winning balls is counted or stored in the management device 13 as the number of winning balls, or when the store is closed When a predetermined time comes, (2) When a storage medium such as the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 that stores at least information that can identify the number of winning balls and the number of stored balls is taken out from the intermediary machine (3) A storage medium such as a member IC card 30 or a non-member IC card 31 that stores information that can specify at least the number of winning balls and the number of stored balls is inserted when managed as the number of winning balls. When the machine is inserted into a machine that is different from the machine, or (4) when a prize is exchanged. Further, any one of the above conditions (1) to (4) may be set as the predetermined condition, or a plurality of conditions may be selected and set from these conditions. The determination as to whether or not the above-described predetermined condition is satisfied may be executed by the management apparatus 13 based on the predetermined condition stored in the management apparatus 13.

  If it is determined in step SF4 that the predetermined condition is not satisfied (No in step SF4), the process in step S340 is executed.

  When it is determined in step SF4 that the predetermined condition is satisfied (Yes in step SF4), the control unit 300 rewrites the information related to the number of winning balls, which satisfies the predetermined condition, into the stored ball number and the information Information for subtracting the number of winning balls from the number of managed winning balls is output to the management device 13 (step SF5). When the management device 13 determines whether or not the above-described predetermined condition is satisfied, the management device 13 rewrites information related to the number of winning balls that satisfies the predetermined condition into the number of stored balls. After this process, the process of step S340 is executed.

  In the processing after step S340, the control unit 300 determines whether or not a touch operation on the touch panel has been performed based on an operation input signal supplied from the touch panel of the display unit 3e (step S340). Here, the touch operation to be determined is arbitrary, and when any of the above-described touch operation of the operation key or any touch operation is performed, the control unit 300 that has received the operation input signal has performed the touch operation. Judge that it is. That is, as long as the player or the like touches the touch panel, the control unit 300 that has received the operation input signal determines that the touch operation has been performed on the touch panel (the determination result in step S340 is Yes), thereby In the intermediary machine 3, a distribution condition display subroutine is started (step SD4).

  As described above, an arbitrary touch operation is determined as a determination target in step S340, indicating that the player's mind is directed toward the display unit 3e (the player or the like is viewing the display unit 3e). This is because the distribution condition display subroutine is started for all touch operations. However, some touch operations by a player or the like include a predetermined key operation for requesting specific information display on the display unit 3e. Therefore, when such a key operation is performed, the information display on the display unit 3e is displayed. It may be constrained. Therefore, the touch operation to be determined in step S340 may be appropriately selected or partially excluded in advance, and the distribution condition display subroutine is always provided as long as the player touches the touch panel as described above. It is possible to adopt a form in which priority is given to the display of predetermined information as needed. When the distribution condition display subroutine is activated by a touch operation on the touch panel, the processing of the main routine returns and returns to the start.

  On the other hand, when there is no touch operation on the touch panel and no operation input signal is supplied from the touch panel to the control unit 300, the control unit 300 subsequently determines whether or not the seating sensor is turned on (step S340). The determination result is No and the process proceeds to step S341.) The determination here is only for the first time when the seating sensor is turned on, and in the main routine that is repeatedly executed, when the seating sensor was turned on at the previous execution, the seating sensor was turned on again by the judgment again Not. For example, when the seating detection signal remains off for a predetermined time and turns on at a certain time, the control unit 300 is seated only by the determination immediately after receiving the seating detection signal that is turned on. It is determined that the sensor is turned on.

  Now, assuming that a player is seated in a gaming machine seat and the seating detection signal turned on is supplied to the control unit 300, the control unit 300 determines that the seating sensor is turned on by the seating detection signal. (The determination result in step S341 is Yes), and thereby the distribution condition display subroutine is started in the inter-station machine 3 (step SD4). As described above, when the distribution condition display subroutine is activated by the seating of the player or the like, the processing of the main routine returns and returns to the start.

  On the other hand, when the seat of the gaming machine is vacant, or when the player or the like continues to be seated after the distribution condition display subroutine is started by the seating of the player or the like, the control unit 300 The supplied seating detection signal is turned off or continuously turned on. The control unit 300 receiving these seating detection signals does not determine that the seating sensor is ON (the determination result in Step S341 is No), and the processing of the main routine returns to start. Return.

  Note that the operation of the intermediary machine 3 is not limited to the above-described operation. For example, the lamp 3f is turned on or off according to a predetermined lighting pattern, or the card is replenished when there is no non-member IC card 31 to be issued. It is also possible to execute processing related to the request, the work performed by the employee in response to the request, the work of transporting the ball box to the counter 9 by the employee, and the like as necessary. Moreover, the operation | movement of the above pedestal machine 3 can be performed similarly to the above also in the pedestal machine 4 and the pedestal machine 6. FIG.

(Counter 9)
Next, a counter 9 that counts game media such as pachinko balls and medals will be described with reference to FIGS.

  13 is a perspective view showing the external appearance of the counter 9, FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the components of the counter 9, and FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the flow of operations in the counter 9.

  First, the configuration of the counter 9 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the counter 9 includes a card insertion slot 9a, a game medium insertion section 9b, an all button 9c, a count result display section 9d, a return button 9e, a receipt ticket issuing slot 9f, a signal transmission / reception section 9h, a call button. 9i etc. are provided.

  The counter 9 counts the number of pachinko balls or medals. When the member IC card 30 is inserted into the card insertion slot 9a that accepts only the member IC card 30, the ID stored in the member IC card 30 is read and the counted value is used as the number of stored balls. Is stored in the management device 13 based on the above. Further, the counting machine 9 may reduce the points given by using the member IC card 30 as, for example, the number of balls, and add the reduced number of balls to the number of balls counted by the counting machine 9. it can.

  On the other hand, when the member IC card 30 is not inserted into the card insertion slot 9a, the counted information is recorded on the receipt as, for example, a barcode, and the receipt is issued from the receipt ticket issuing slot 9f. In addition, the simple management ID is recorded on the receipt, and the simple management ID is managed together with the number of balls counted by the counter 9 until the prize is exchanged using the receipt. . The medium for recording the counted information is not limited to a receipt. For example, the counted information may be stored in a storage medium such as an IC card and issued as a savings card.

  The counting result display unit 9d is a display unit that displays predetermined information associated with the operation of the counter 9 and displays distribution information by an information distribution system described later. The specific information display contents in the counting result display unit 9d will be clarified in the operation description and the information distribution system as a whole.

  The counter 9 includes a signal transmission / reception unit 9h, and transmits / receives information to / from the store clerk card 32 possessed by the employee via the signal transmission / reception unit 9h.

  Furthermore, the counting machine 9 includes a calling button 9i. For example, when counting acquired pachinko balls or medals, the counting machine 9 can call an employee and witness or ask the employee for a counting operation.

  The counter 9 also functions as a first terminal device, and reads the gift exchange information written in the gift exchange device 1500 such as the wagon 1550 from the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31, At least processing for outputting information related to the number of game media corresponding to the selected prize to the management device 13 is performed. This process is executed by the game medium number information processing means of the counter 9.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the counter 9 is mainly composed of a control unit 400, a card processing unit 401, a recording medium processing unit 402, a selection button detection unit 403, a counting processing unit 404, and an employee information reading unit 405. Yes.

  The control unit 400 is mainly composed of an arithmetic unit (CPU), a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), and other storage means such as a semiconductor memory that keeps information as required. In the CPU, Various arithmetic processes are executed using programs and data stored in the storage means such as the ROM and RAM. In the control unit 400, signals are input / output between the counting result display unit 9d, the card processing unit 401, the recording medium processing unit 402, the selection button detection unit 403, the counting processing unit 404, and the employee information reading unit 405. And the input / output of signals between the management device 13 and the distribution control device 90 via the network 8 are controlled.

  Here, in addition to the processing operation of the counter 9 that counts game media, the processing operation for carrying out information distribution by the information distribution system described later is defined in the program stored in the storage means such as ROM and RAM. The control unit 400 executes processing related to information distribution according to the program. The processing related to information distribution performs information storage, communication with the distribution control device 90, display operation control of the counting result display unit 9d, and the like as necessary. The counter 9 is necessary for that purpose. Storage means (ROM, RAM, other semiconductor memory that keeps information as required), communication means (signal input / output control via the network 8 provided in the control unit 400, etc.), and control means (control unit) 400) (the drive control of the counting result display unit 9d by 400).

  The card processing unit 401 reads, for example, an ID and valuable information managed by the ID stored in the member IC card 30 inserted from the card insertion slot 9a, and sends the read information to the control unit 400. And writing the updated valuable information from the control unit 400 to the member IC card 30. For example, the reader / writer is configured.

  The card processing unit 401 also functions as a game medium number information processing unit, and reads premium exchange information written in the premium exchange device 1500 such as the wagon 1550 from the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31. Thus, at least a process for outputting information related to the number of game media corresponding to the selected prize to the management apparatus 13 and a process for outputting to the management apparatus 13 via the control unit 400 are performed.

  The recording medium processing unit 402 records the number of balls and the simple management ID counted by the counting processing unit 404 on a receipt, for example, as a barcode, and issues the recorded receipt from the receipt ticketing opening 9f. . The recording medium processing unit 402 may store the number of balls counted by the counting processing unit 404 and the simple management ID in a storage medium such as an IC card and issue it as a savings card.

  The selection button detection unit 403 detects that the all button 9c, the return button 9e, and the call button 9i have been pressed, and outputs a signal to the control unit 400 based on the pressed signal.

  The counting processing unit 404 counts the number of balls thrown into the game medium throwing unit 9b and outputs the counted information to the control unit 400. The result counted by the counting processing unit 404 can be displayed on the counting result display unit 9d, for example.

  The employee information reading unit 405 includes a signal transmission / reception unit 9h. In addition, the employee information reading unit 405 carries the ball box to the counter 9 and reads, for example, information from the store clerk card 32 that can identify an employee who performs operations such as counting. The employee information reading unit 405 is composed of, for example, a reader / writer.

  The device units controlled by the control unit 400, such as the card processing unit 401, the recording medium processing unit 402, the selection button detection unit 403, the counting processing unit 404, and the employee information reading unit 405, operate as follows. (FIG. 15).

  The operation will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 15 showing the flow of the operation in the counter 9 shows a flowchart of the main routine in the counter 9 executed by the control unit 400. The program is stored in the storage means of the control unit 400, and from the start. The high-speed processing operation in which the control unit 400 executes the processing up to the return in a time such as 0.01 ms is repeated. In this main routine, first, when the IC card inserted from the card insertion slot 9a has the prize exchange information written in the prize exchange device 1500 such as the wagon 1550, the card processing unit 401 reads the prize exchange information and performs control. The unit 400 outputs the prize exchange information and the IC card ID information read out by the card processing unit 401 to the management device 13 (step SF1). In this case, the first terminal device functions as a game medium number information processing means.

  Here, as the prize exchange information, information relating to prize exchange, for example, information relating to the number of winning balls and the number of accumulated balls updated in the prize exchange apparatus 1500, a prize selected by the prize exchange apparatus 1500 such as a prize ID, etc. The information relating to the gift exchange information is as described above.

  Then, the control part 400 reads the predetermined condition memorize | stored in the management apparatus 13, and determines whether the predetermined condition is satisfy | filled (step SF2). Here, in the present prize exchange system, the predetermined condition is, for example, (1) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the number of winning balls is counted or stored in the management device 13 as the number of winning balls, or when the store is closed When a predetermined time comes, (2) When a storage medium such as the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 that stores at least information that can identify the number of winning balls and the number of stored balls is taken out from the intermediary machine (3) A storage medium such as a member IC card 30 or a non-member IC card 31 that stores information that can specify at least the number of winning balls and the number of stored balls is inserted when managed as the number of winning balls. When the machine is inserted into a machine that is different from the machine, or (4) when a prize is exchanged. Further, any one of the above conditions (1) to (4) may be set as the predetermined condition, or a plurality of conditions may be selected and set from these conditions. The determination as to whether or not the above-described predetermined condition is satisfied may be executed by the management apparatus 13 based on the predetermined condition stored in the management apparatus 13.

  If it is determined in step SF2 that the predetermined condition is not satisfied (No in step SF2), the process of SD1 is executed.

  If it is determined in step SF2 that the predetermined condition is satisfied (Yes in step SF2), the control unit 400 rewrites the information related to the number of winning balls, which satisfies the predetermined condition, into the stored ball number and the information Information for subtracting the number of winning balls from the number of managed winning balls is output to the management device 13 (step SF3). In addition, when the management apparatus 13 performs determination whether the above-mentioned predetermined condition is satisfy | filled, the management apparatus 13 rewrites the information regarding the number of winning balls which satisfy | fills predetermined conditions to the number of stored balls.

  Subsequently, the counter 9 receives terminal distribution information [i] [m], terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m], and terminal distribution conditions [i] [m] from the distribution control device 90 via the network 8. (Step SD1). That is, the counter 9 receives i pieces of distribution information of terminal distribution information [1] [m] to terminal distribution information [i] [m] from the distribution control device 90 as the mth terminal on the network 8. Terminal distribution amount designation information [1] [m] to terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] and terminal distribution condition [1] [m] to terminal distribution condition [i ] [m] is received.

  In the counter 9, after receiving these pieces of information, the distribution result of each terminal distribution information [i] [m], the distribution fee of each terminal distribution information [i] [m], and attribute designation via the network 8 Information [i] [m] is transmitted to the distribution control device 90 (step SD5). The distribution result here is information indicating the result of displaying each terminal distribution information [i] [m] on the counting result display unit 9d in the counter 9 which is the m-th terminal, and the display of distribution information described later. The distribution fee is also counted according to the counted distribution performance (the data is counted in a constant display subroutine and a distribution condition display subroutine described later in detail). The attribute designation information [i] [m] is information for designating an attribute desired to be distributed in the counter 9 which is the m-th terminal, and is transmitted when the counter 9 receives an input for designating an attribute. Is done.

  In the counter 9 that transmits / receives the terminal distribution information [i] [m] and the like in this way, a constant display subroutine is started (step SD3). The constant display subroutine activated by the counter 9 is a process for displaying the received terminal distribution information [i] [m] on the counting result display unit 9d based on the received terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m]. The program is stored in the storage unit of the control unit 400, and if there is an activation request, the control unit 400 executes the timer routine at predetermined intervals without interrupting the execution of the main routine.

  In the process in the main routine, the control unit 400 determines whether or not the member IC card 30 has been inserted based on the information from the card processing unit 401 (step S410). Here, if a player who is a member inserts the member IC card 30 into the card insertion slot 9a, the control unit 400 determines that the member IC card 30 is based on information from the card processing unit 401 by the card insertion. It is determined that it has been inserted (the determination result in step S410 is Yes), whereby the distribution condition display subroutine is started in the counter 9 (step SD4). The distribution condition display subroutine activated by the counter 9 generally includes the received terminal distribution information [i] [m] and the received terminal distribution information [i] [m] and the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m]. Based on the counting result display unit 9d, the program is stored in the storage means of the control unit 400, and if there is an activation request, the control unit performs a timer interrupt every predetermined time without interrupting the execution of the main routine. 400 executes.

  When the member IC card 30 is inserted in this way, the distribution condition display subroutine is started, and the game medium is counted in the subsequent main routine processing (step S417). Further, the control unit 400 converts the counted number of gaming media such as pachinko balls into a unified unit based on the gaming machine ID from which the gaming media is obtained (step S417). Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the value of the pachinko balls to be discharged may differ depending on the model. For example, if there is a gaming machine that discharges one pachinko ball by converting it to 4 yen, it will be converted to 2 yen There is also a gaming machine that discharges in terms of 1 yen. In such a situation, in order to manage the acquired number of game media in terms of a predetermined constant value, the above-described process of converting the counted number of game media into a unified unit is executed. Note that the value of the above-described gaming medium can be set for each of the inter-machine machines, the gaming machines, the gaming islands, and the gaming machine groups. Here, each gaming machine group means each group when gaming machines are grouped by type when a plurality of gaming machines are installed on one gaming island. When the member IC card 30 is not inserted, the control unit 400 does not determine that the member IC card is inserted based on the information from the card processing unit 401, and starts the distribution condition display subroutine. The game media is counted (the determination result in step S410 is No and the process proceeds to step S417 as it is).

  In counting the game media, the count processing unit 404 counts the game media input to the game media input unit 9b (step S417). The result counted by the counting processing unit 404 is output to the control unit 400. The control unit 400 can also output information for displaying the coefficient result on the counting result display unit 9d to the counting result display unit 9d, for example.

  Subsequently, the control unit 400 determines whether or not the all button 9c has been pressed based on the information from the selection button detection unit 403 (step S418).

  If it is determined in step S418 that all the buttons 9c have not been pressed (No in step S418), the process returns to start.

  On the other hand, when the player who has loaded the counted game media presses all the buttons 9c, the control unit 400 determines that all the buttons 9c are pressed based on the information from the selection button detection unit 403 by pressing the buttons. (The determination result in step S418 is Yes), and thereby the distribution condition display subroutine is started in the counter 9 (step SD4).

  If it is determined in step S418 that the all button 9c has been pressed (Yes in step S418), the distribution condition display subroutine is started as described above (step SD4). Based on the information from the processing unit 401, it is determined whether or not the member IC card 30 is inserted (step S423).

  If it is determined in step S423 that the member IC card 30 has not been inserted (No in step S423), the control unit 400 determines the number of balls counted by the counting processing unit 404 and the simple management ID. The information is output to the management device 13 via the network 8, and the number of balls counted by the count processing unit 404 and the simple management ID information are output from the control unit 400 to the recording medium processing unit 402. Based on the information output from the control unit 400, the recording medium processing unit 402 records the number of balls and the simple management ID on the receipt as, for example, a barcode, and issues a receipt from the receipt ticketing opening 9f (step S424). ).

  Here, the counting result display portion 9d is provided in front of the counting machine 9 together with the receipt ticketing opening 9f and the like, and is in the eyes of a player who receives the receipt. Therefore, the counter 9 also activates the distribution condition display subroutine when a receipt is issued from the receipt ticketing slot 9f (step SD4).

  Subsequently, the control unit 400 deletes history information indicating that the all button 9c has been pressed (step S425).

  If it is determined in step S423 that the member IC card 30 is inserted (Yes in step S423), the control unit 400 is stored in the member IC card 30 read by the card processing unit 401. The ID is entered (step S426).

  Subsequently, the control unit 400 determines whether or not the return button 9e has been pressed based on the information from the selection button detection unit 403 (step S427).

  If it is determined in step S427 that the return button 9e has not been pressed (No in step S427), the process returns to start.

  On the other hand, when the player who has inserted the member IC card 30 presses the return button 9e, the control unit 400 determines that the return button 9e is pressed based on the information from the selection button detection unit 403 by pressing the button. (The determination result in Step S427 is Yes), and thereby the distribution condition display subroutine is started in the counter 9 (Step SD4).

  If it is determined in step S427 that the return button 9e has been pressed (Yes in step S427), the distribution condition display subroutine is started as described above (step SD4), and the card processing unit 401 receives the card insertion slot. The member IC card 30 is returned from 9a (step S428).

  In addition, the control unit 400 transmits the ID read by the card processing unit 401 and the number of balls counted by the counting processing unit 404 to the management device 13 via the network 8 (step S429). Then, in the management device 13, the number of balls counted by the counting processing unit 404 is added to the number of balls already stored based on the ID (step S429).

  Subsequently, the control unit 400 deletes history information indicating that the all button 9c has been pressed (step S425).

  Here, it is preferable to display the number of stored balls after the addition in step S429, because it is possible for the player to know how much the total number of stored balls has become. The counter 9 includes a pachinko ball and a medal used in a slot machine.

  The operation of the counter 9 is not limited to the above-described operation. For example, when the member IC card 30 is not returned, or when the receipt is expired or the receipt is jammed, the player presses the call button 9i. You may do it. In addition, processing related to pressing of a call button at that time, calling of an employee, information communication with the wireless communication system 23 and the management device 13 at the time of calling, work of an employee who responds to the call, release of the call, etc. It is good also as performing as needed.

(Premium Management Machine (POS) 11)
Next, refer to the number of stored balls from the received member IC card 30 or a receipt or IC card (stored card) on which information on the number of stored balls is recorded. A premium management machine (POS) 11 that indicates the type and quantity of a prize to be paid out to the prize dispenser 18 when the prize dispenser 18 is displayed will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 16 is a plan view showing the appearance of the giveaway management machine (POS) 11, FIG. 17 is a view showing the components of the giveaway management machine (POS) 11, and FIG. 18 shows the operation of the giveaway management machine (POS) 11. It is a flowchart which shows a flow.

  First, with reference to FIG. 16, the structure of the prize management machine (POS) 11 is demonstrated.

  FIG. 16 shows a view of the premium management machine (POS) 11 as viewed from the front. The premium management machine (POS) 11 includes a card insertion slot 11a, a numeric keypad 11b for inputting a personal identification number, a bar code reader. 11c, a display unit 11d, a special prize button 11e, a general prize selection unit 11f, a signal transmission / reception unit 11g, and the like.

  The prize management machine (POS) 11 refers to the number of stored balls based on the ID from the member IC card 30 inserted from the card insertion slot 11a, and displays the number of stored balls, the type of the prize exchanged according to the number of stored balls, and the quantity. If the prize dispenser 18 is installed, the type and quantity of the prize to be paid out to the prize dispenser 18 are instructed. Further, when using a receipt issued by the counter 9, the information recorded on the receipt is read by the barcode reader 11c, and the number of stored balls is exchanged for the number of stored balls based on the information. is there. When an IC card is issued by the counter 9, for example, information stored in the IC card is read by a reader / writer or the like. Further, when a merchant card (to be described later) is inserted, the prize management machine (POS) 11 reads, for example, all prize exchange information stored in the merchant card and outputs the information to the management device 13. It also has. Here, as the all prize exchange information, for example, various types of selected prizes (such as prize IDs) and the number of information, information relating to the player who selected the prize (such as a card ID), business related to prize exchange, etc. All the information on the total amount in a predetermined period such as one business day in which a prize is exchanged for a plurality of players, and the amount information of individual prizes in a predetermined period such as one business day in which a plurality of players are exchanged a prize. All prize exchange amounts related to prize exchanges performed by prize exchange devices that may be operated by companies other than the game hall such as the wagon 1550 and specific prize service counters can be calculated and specified. Any information may be used. In this case, the third terminal device functions.

  The prize management machine (POS) 11 also functions as a first terminal device, and prize exchange information written in the prize exchange apparatus 1500 such as the wagon 1550 from the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31. , And at least a process for outputting information related to the number of game media corresponding to the selected prize to the management device 13 is performed. This process is executed by the game medium number information processing means of the prize management machine (POS) 11.

  The prize management machine (POS) 11 also functions as a second terminal device, and exchanges prizes on the IC card 30 for members and the IC card 31 for non-members in a prize exchange apparatus 1500 such as a wagon 1550 or a service counter. A process of writing the permitted gift exchange permission information is performed. This process is executed by a prize exchange permission writing means of the prize manager (POS) 11 or the like. In addition, the prize exchange permission information includes, for example, information on the number of game media acquired by the player in the game, such as the number of game media such as the number of pachinko balls won and the number of balls stored, but is not limited thereto. It is not a thing. The prize exchange permission information is as described above.

  Here, in the case where the information on the number of game media related to the number of game media such as the number of winning pachinko balls and the number of stored balls is used as the prize exchange permission information, the prize selected by the player at the prize exchange device 1500 is used. The acquired game medium number information may be updated based on the information, and the prize management machine (POS) 11 may output the updated prize exchange information to the management device 13. Further, when flag information is used as the gift exchange permission information, the gift exchange device 1500 stores the gift exchange information based on the prize selected by the player in the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31. Then, the stored prize exchange information may be output to the management apparatus 13 by the prize management machine (POS) 11.

  Furthermore, the prize management machine (POS) 11 also functions as a third terminal device. For example, in the prize exchange apparatus 1500, all prize exchange information related to all prizes exchanged for prizes by a plurality of players is written. You may make it function as all the prize exchange information reading means which reads the information of a storage medium. Then, the prize manager (POS) 11 outputs the read all prize exchange information to the management apparatus 13. The storage medium in which all prize exchange information is written is possessed by a trader who performs prize exchange or merchandise sales using, for example, a wagon 1550 or a service counter. Hereinafter, a storage medium such as an IC card possessed by a trader is referred to as a trader card. The merchant card also stores information such as an ID that can identify the merchant. Further, the above-described inter-machines 3, 4, and 6 may function as a third terminal device in the same manner as the prize management machine (POS) 11.

  The display unit 11d is a display unit that displays predetermined information associated with the operation of the gift management machine (POS) 11 and displays distribution information by an information distribution system described later. The specific information display content on the display unit 11d will be clarified in the operation description and the information distribution system as a whole.

  The prize when the special prize button 11e is pressed includes, for example, a large prize (2500 yen), a small prize (1000 yen), and the like. For example, when a prize dispenser 18 is provided, the prize is automatically paid out. When the prize dispenser 18 is not provided, the prize is paid out by a store clerk or the like based on the displayed type and quantity of the prize to be exchanged. For example, when exchanging with a general prize such as cigarette or juice, the general prize selection unit 11f selects a prize or the number to be exchanged and exchanges the prize. When exchanging with a general prize, a clerk or the like often pays out a prize, but the prize can also be automatically paid out by a prize dispenser or the like.

  In addition, the prize management machine (POS) 11 may exchange points for use of the member IC card 30 for prizes such as tobacco and juice.

  Moreover, the prize management machine (POS) 11 includes a signal transmission / reception unit 11g, and transmits / receives information to / from a store clerk card 32 possessed by the employee via the signal transmission / reception unit 11g.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the prize management machine (POS) 11 includes a control unit 500, a card processing unit 501, a recording medium processing unit 502, a selection button detection unit 503, a gift payout processing unit 504, and an employee information reading unit 505. It is mainly composed.

  The control unit 500 is mainly composed of an arithmetic unit (CPU), a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), and other storage means such as a semiconductor memory that keeps information as necessary. In the CPU, Various arithmetic processes are executed using programs and data stored in the storage means such as the ROM and RAM. The control unit 500 includes a display unit 11d, a card processing unit 501, a recording medium processing unit 502, a selection button detection unit 503, a premium payout processing unit 504, an employee information reading unit 505, and a premium supplement detection unit 506. And the signal input / output between the management device 13 and the distribution control device 90 via the network 8 are controlled.

  Here, in the program stored in the storage means such as ROM or RAM, in addition to the processing operation of the prize management machine (POS) 11 for managing the prize, processing operation for carrying out information distribution by the information distribution system described later. Is included, and the control unit 500 executes processing related to information distribution in accordance with the program. The processing related to information distribution performs information storage, communication with the distribution control device 90, display operation control of the display unit 11d, and the like as necessary, and the prize management machine (POS) 11 Necessary storage means (ROM, RAM, other semiconductor memory that keeps information as required), communication means (signal input / output control via the network 8 provided in the controller 500, etc.), and control means ( The display unit 11d is controlled by the control unit 500).

  The card processing unit 501 reads, for example, an ID or valuable information managed by the ID stored in the member IC card 30 inserted from the card insertion slot 11a, and sends the read information to the control unit 500. And writing the updated valuable information from the control unit 500 to the member IC card 30, for example, a reader / writer.

  The card processing unit 501 also functions as a game medium number information processing unit, and reads premium exchange information written in the premium exchange device 1500 such as the wagon 1550 from the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31. Thus, at least a process for outputting information related to the number of game media corresponding to the selected prize to the management apparatus 13 and a process for outputting to the management apparatus 13 via the control unit 500 are performed. In addition, the card processing unit 501 also serves as an all prize exchange information reading means for reading out information on a merchant card in which all prize exchange information relating to all prizes exchanged by a plurality of players in the prize exchange device 1500 is written. Function. Further, the card processing unit 501 may function as a free gift exchange permission information writing unit for writing the free gift exchange permission information into the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31.

  The recording medium processing unit 502 includes a barcode reader 11c and the like. The barcode reader 11c reads the number of balls and the simple management ID recorded on the receipt, and outputs the read information to the control unit 500. . When an IC card is issued from the counter 9 instead of a receipt, the recording medium processing unit 502 includes, for example, a reader / writer and the number of balls stored in the IC card and a simple management ID. And the read information is output to the control unit 500.

  Information such as the counted number of balls read by the card processing unit 501 or the recording medium processing unit 502 is displayed on the display unit 11d. The display unit 11d also displays the type and number of prizes to be exchanged.

  The selection button detection unit 503 detects that the selection button of the password input numeric keyboard 11b, the special prize button 11e, and the general prize selection unit 11f has been pressed, and the control unit 500 determines based on the pressed signal. A signal is output.

  Based on the signal detected by the selection button detection unit 503, the premium payout processing unit 504 outputs premium payout information such as the type and number of special prizes to be paid out to the display unit 11d and the premium dispenser 18, for example. is there.

  The employee information reading unit 505 includes a signal transmission / reception unit 11g and the like. When the gift dispenser 18 is also provided, the employee information reading unit 505 reads information that can identify an employee who performs work such as replenishing the gift dispenser 18 from the clerk card 32, for example. . The employee information reading unit 505 is composed of, for example, a reader / writer.

  The prize replenishment detection unit 506 is provided in the prize dispenser 18, for example, and detects the presence or absence of a prize. The premium replenishment detection unit 506 is configured by, for example, a non-contact sensor or a contact sensor.

  The control unit 500 controls the display unit 11d, the card processing unit 501, the recording medium processing unit 502, the selection button detection unit 503, the premium payout processing unit 504, the employee information reading unit 505, and the premium supplement detection unit 506. Each device unit operates as follows (FIG. 18).

  The operation will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 18, which shows the flow of operations in the prize management machine (POS) 11, shows a flowchart of the main routine in the prize management machine (POS) 11 executed by the control unit 500. It is stored in the storage means and repeats a high-speed processing operation in which the control unit 500 executes processing from start to return in a time of 0.01 ms or the like. In this main routine, first, in the prize manager (POS) 11, terminal distribution information [i] [m], terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m], and terminal distribution conditions are transmitted from the distribution control device 90 via the network 8. [i] [m] is received (step SD1). That is, the prize management machine (POS) 11 serves as the m-th terminal on the network 8 from the distribution control device 90 to i pieces of terminal distribution information [1] [m] to terminal distribution information [i] [m]. The terminal distribution amount designation information [1] [m] to the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] and the terminal distribution condition [1] [m] to the terminal that receive the distribution information and respectively correspond to the distribution information Receive delivery conditions [i] [m].

  In the prize management machine (POS) 11, after receiving these pieces of information, the distribution record of each terminal distribution information [i] [m] and the distribution fee of each terminal distribution information [i] [m] via the network 8 , And attribute designation information [i] [m] are transmitted to the distribution control device 90 (step SD5). The distribution record here is information indicating the record of displaying each terminal distribution information [i] [m] on the display unit 11d in the prize management machine (POS) 11, which is the m-th terminal, and distribution information described later. The distribution fee is also counted according to the counted distribution performance (totalized in a constant display subroutine and a distribution condition display subroutine, which will be described in detail later). The attribute designation information [i] [m] is information for designating an attribute desired to be distributed in the prize management machine (POS) 11 which is the m-th terminal, and designates the attribute in the prize management machine (POS) 11. Sent when input is received.

  In the prize management machine (POS) 11 that transmits / receives the terminal distribution information [i] [m] and the like in this way, a constant display subroutine is started (step SD3). The always-on display subroutine activated by the prize management machine (POS) 11 displays the received terminal distribution information [i] [m] on the display unit 11d based on the received terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m]. The program is stored in the storage unit of the control unit 500, and if there is an activation request, the control unit 500 executes the timer interrupt at predetermined intervals without interrupting the execution of the main routine.

  In the processing in the main routine, the card processing unit 501 waits for the insertion of the member IC card 30 from the card insertion slot 11a. When the insertion of the member IC card 30 is detected, the corresponding processing is executed. . The recording medium processing unit 502 waits for reading of the number of balls and the simple management ID recorded on the receipt from the barcode reader 11c, and when detecting these readings, executes processing corresponding thereto.

  The control unit 500 determines whether or not the merchant card or the member IC card 30 is inserted based on the information of the card processing unit 501 (step S510).

  If it is determined in step S510 that the supplier card or the member IC card 30 is not inserted (No in step S510), the barcode reader 11c uses the information from the recording medium processing unit 502 based on the information from the recording medium processing unit 502. The number of balls and simple management ID recorded on the read receipt are read (step S511). The simple management ID read by the card processing unit 501 is output to the control unit 500 and further output from the control unit 500 to the management device 13 via the network 8 (step S511). Then, the management device 13 outputs information related to the number of balls based on the stored simple management ID to the control unit 500 via the network 8 (step S511).

  If an IC card is used as a savings card instead of a receipt, if the inserted IC card is not a merchant card or member IC card 30 in the determination in step S510, the process in step S511 is performed. Execute. At this time, in the determination in step S510, the saving card may be specified and the process in step S511 may be executed based on the information. When a savings card is used, the number of balls and the simple management ID stored in the savings card are read in the process of step S511, and their information is output to the management device 13. Then, the management device 13 outputs information related to the number of balls based on the stored simple management ID to the control unit 500 via the network 8.

  Subsequently, the control unit 500 compares the number of balls based on the simple management ID recorded on the receipt with the number of balls based on the simple management ID output from the management device 13, and determines whether or not they match. Determination is made (step S512).

  If it is determined in step S512 that they do not match (No in step S512), the processing of the main routine returns and returns to the start.

  If it is determined in step S512 that they match each other (Yes in step S512), the process proceeds to step S518.

  On the other hand, when a member player inserts the member IC card 30 into the card insertion slot 11a, the control unit 500 inserts the member IC card 30 based on information from the card processing unit 501 by the card insertion. (The determination result in step S510 is Yes), and thereby the prize management machine (POS) 11 starts a distribution condition display subroutine (step SD4). The distribution condition display subroutine activated by the prize management machine (POS) 11 generally receives the received terminal distribution information [i] [m], the terminal distribution condition [i] [m] and the terminal distribution amount designation information [i]. [m] is a process to be displayed on the display unit 11d, the program is stored in the storage means of the control unit 500, and if there is a start request, the execution of the main routine can be interrupted without interrupting the timer. The control unit 500 executes.

  If it is determined in step S510 that the merchant card or the member IC card 30 is inserted (Yes in step S510), the inserted card is the member IC card, and a prize exchange such as a wagon 1550 is exchanged. When the device 1500 has the free gift exchange information written in the device 1500, the card processing unit 501 reads the free gift exchange information, and the control unit 500 outputs the free gift exchange information and the card ID read by the card processing unit 501 to the management device 13. (Step SF1). In this case, the first terminal device functions as a game medium number information processing means. Here, the free gift exchange information is information related to free gift exchange and is as described above.

  Subsequently, the control unit 500 reads the predetermined condition stored in the management device 13 and determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied (step SF2). Here, in the present prize exchange system, the predetermined condition is, for example, (1) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the number of winning balls is counted or stored in the management device 13 as the number of winning balls, or when the store is closed When a predetermined time comes, (2) When a storage medium such as the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 that stores at least information that can identify the number of winning balls and the number of stored balls is taken out from the intermediary machine (3) A storage medium such as a member IC card 30 or a non-member IC card 31 that stores information that can specify at least the number of winning balls and the number of stored balls is inserted when managed as the number of winning balls. When the machine is inserted into a machine that is different from the machine, or (4) when a prize is exchanged. Further, any one of the above conditions (1) to (4) may be set as the predetermined condition, or a plurality of conditions may be selected and set from these conditions. The determination as to whether or not the above-described predetermined condition is satisfied may be executed by the management apparatus 13 based on the predetermined condition stored in the management apparatus 13.

  If it is determined in step SF2 that the predetermined condition is not satisfied (No in step SF2), the process of SD4 is executed.

  When it is determined in step SF2 that the predetermined condition is satisfied (Yes in step SF2), the control unit 500 rewrites the information related to the number of winning balls, which satisfies the predetermined condition, into the stored ball number and the information Information for subtracting the number of winning balls from the number of managed winning balls is output to the management device 13 (step SF3). In addition, when the management apparatus 13 performs determination whether the above-mentioned predetermined condition is satisfy | filled, the management apparatus 13 rewrites the information regarding the number of winning balls which satisfy | fills predetermined conditions to the number of stored balls.

  If it is determined in step S510 above that the merchant card or member IC card 30 is inserted (Yes in step S510), the distribution condition display subroutine is started as described above (step S510). SD4) Based on the information from the card processing unit 501, the control unit 500 inputs the ID and password stored in the member IC card 30 read by the card processing unit 501 (step S513).

  In addition, the selection button detection unit 503 detects the security code input with the security code input numeric keyboard 11b, and outputs the detection signal to the control unit 500 (step S514).

  Subsequently, the control unit 500 compares the password read from the merchant card or the member IC card 30 with the password entered using the password input numeric keyboard 11b (step S515).

  When it is determined in step S515 that both numbers do not match (“NG” in step S515), the control unit 500 returns information for returning the merchant card or member IC card 30 to the card processing unit 501. The card processing unit 501 returns the merchant card or the member IC card 30 from the card insertion slot 11a based on the information (step S516). However, here, if the merchant card or the member IC card 30 is not returned, the store clerk is informed that the passwords do not match, and the member IC card 30 is used, the store clerk notifies the player. For example, if you ask questions about the date of birth or phone number, and use a business card, the store clerk asks the business operator about the business name or phone number, and the answer is actually registered. If they match, the procedure for changing the forgotten password may be taken.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S515 that both numbers match (“OK” in step S515), the control unit 500 transmits the ID read in step S513 to the management apparatus 13 via the network 8. Transmit (step S517). Then, the management device 13 reads, stores, and manages the number of stored balls managed by the ID (step S517). If a merchant card is used, a merchant ID that can identify the merchant and all prize exchange information stored in the merchant card is transmitted to the management device 13 (step S517). Then, the management device 13 reads, stores, and manages all premium exchange information managed by the ID. In this case, the third terminal device functions as a whole prize exchange information reading unit.

  Next, the control unit 500 determines whether or not the special prize button 11e has been pressed based on information from the selection button detection unit 503 (step S518). Here, for example, a merchant using a merchant card can specify the merchant's sales, etc. based on the total prize exchange information, equipment rental cost (location fee), utility cost, pachinko customer introduction fee, etc. The amount obtained by subtracting the predetermined expenses such as can be used as the income of the trader. Then, in the management device 13, when the sales for each trader, the equipment lending cost, the utility cost, the pachinko customer introduction cost, and, for example, a merchant card is inserted, a special prize equivalent to this revenue amount is given as a prize. It can also be paid out from the dispenser 18. Further, the management device 13 totals the amount of special prize paid out in this case. In this case, the third terminal device functions as a premium payout unit.

  If it is determined in step S518 that the special prize button 11e has not been pressed (No in step S518), it is a general prize such as a cigarette or juice that is requested to be exchanged. Based on the information from the selection button detection unit 403, the control unit 500 detects information on the prize and quantity selected by the general prize selection unit 11f (step S519).

  Information on the selected prize and quantity is output to the prize payout processing unit 504 via the control unit 500. The type and quantity of the selected general giveaway are displayed on the display unit 11d (step S520).

  Then, the control unit 500 subtracts the number of prizes paid out from the number of paid-out prize stocks, and outputs the information to the prize-paying processing part 504. The prize-paying process part 504 updates the information on the number of paid-out prize stocks ( Step S521).

  On the other hand, for example, when the player presses the special prize button 11e, the control unit 500 determines that the special prize button 11e has been pressed based on information from the selection button detection unit 503 by pressing the button (step S518). As a result, the distribution condition display subroutine is started in the premium management machine (POS) 11 (step SD4).

  If it is determined in step S518 that the special prize button 11e has been pressed (Yes in step S518), the distribution condition display subroutine is started as described above (step SD4). Based on the information from the prize payout processing unit 504, it is determined whether or not the prize dispenser 18 is provided (step S522).

  When it is determined in step S522 that the prize dispenser 18 is provided (Yes in step S522), the control unit 500 stores the number of stored balls read from the management device 13 based on the ID or the simple management ID. The information on the amount of the prize to be paid out and the number thereof are output to the prize payout processing unit 504 and displayed on the display unit 11d (step S523). The prize payout processing unit 504 outputs the information to the prize dispenser 18, and pays out the prize from the prize dispenser 18 (step S523).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S522 that the prize dispenser 18 is not provided (No in step S522), the control unit 500 is read from the management device 13 based on the ID or the simple management ID. From the information on the number of stored balls, information such as the type and number of prizes to be paid out is output to the prize payout processing unit 504. Then, the prize payout processing unit 504 displays the information on the display unit 11d (step S524). In this case, a prize is paid out by a store clerk or the like based on the display on the display unit 11d.

  Then, the control unit 500 subtracts the number of special prizes paid out from the special prize stock quantity, and outputs the information to the prize payout processing part 504, and the prize payout processing part 504 updates the information on the special prize stock quantity. (Step S525).

  Subsequently, the control unit 500 determines whether or not the merchant card or the member IC card 30 is inserted based on the information from the card processing unit 501 (step S526).

  If it is determined in step S526 that the merchant card or member IC card 30 is not inserted (No in step S526), the number of balls exchanged for prizes and payout based on the simple management ID The type and number of prizes that have been given are stored in the prize payout processing unit 504 (step S527). Note that these pieces of information stored in the prize payout processing unit 504 are stored for a predetermined period. Further, the information on the simple management ID and the number of balls stored in the management device 13 is deleted (step S527). Then, the processing of the main routine returns and returns to the start.

  If it is determined in step S526 that the merchant card or member IC card 30 is inserted (Yes in step S526), the merchant's income based on the number of balls exchanged for prizes or all prize exchange information Based on the ID, the amount and the type and number of the paid-out prizes are transmitted from the control unit 500 to the management device 13 via the network 8, and stored for each ID by the management device 13 (step S528). Then, the processing of the main routine returns and returns to the start.

  The operation of the prize management machine (POS) 11 is not limited to the above-described operation. For example, the lack of special prizes or the lack of general prizes in the prize dispenser 18 can be detected or determined, or the special prizes that are lacking. It is good also as performing the process regarding the replenishment request | requirement and the replenishment work of the employee with respect to the replenishment request | requirement as needed.

(Checkout machine 10)
Next, the settlement machine 10 that returns the received balance (value value) of the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 in cash will be described with reference to FIGS.

  19 is a plan view showing the appearance of the settlement machine 10, FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the components of the settlement machine 10, and FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the flow of operations in the settlement machine 10.

  First, the configuration of the settlement machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 19 shows a view of the settlement machine 10 as viewed from the front. On the front side of the settlement machine 10, there are a card insertion slot 10a, a password input keypad 10b, a bill return slot 10c, a change receipt 10d, A settlement button 10e, a cancel button 10f, a display unit 10g, a signal transmission / reception unit 10h, and the like are provided.

  The checkout machine 10 returns the power balance of the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 inserted from the card insertion slot 10a in cash. Here, the frequency is a value obtained by frequencyizing the amount of money received. For example, when 10,000 yen is frequencyd, the frequency becomes 100 frequency. The frequency balance is the remaining frequency obtained by subtracting the used frequency from the frequency.

  Moreover, in the checkout machine 10, you may reduce the points provided by using the member IC card 30 by, for example, cashing.

  When the member IC card 30 is inserted, when the password is input by the password input numeric keyboard 10b provided in the checkout machine 10, the password stored in the member IC card 30 is input. Checking with a password is performed, and if they match, a settlement operation is performed. Thus, in the case of a member player, for example, even if the member IC card 30 is dropped and the member IC card 30 is handed over to a third party, the frequency balance is cashed unless the PIN is known. Never happen. In this way, when the player leaves the seat, for example, to go to the toilet, the frequency balance is not cashed even if the member IC card is stolen.

  In addition, when the member IC card 30 is passed to a third party, it is conceivable that the third party will use the amount balance for the game. Based on the membership number and password entered by the inter-station machine, the membership IC card 30 can be controlled so that it cannot be used for each device.

  When the non-member IC card 31 is used, the period that can be held as a frequency balance is limited to, for example, one day, so if it is not within that period, the frequency balance is settled by the settlement machine 10. Can not be cashed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the non-member IC card 31 from being taken out of the pachinko hall or the slot machine hall and lost or damaged.

  Further, the checkout machine 10 also functions as a first terminal device, and reads the gift exchange information written in the gift exchange device 1500 such as the wagon 1550 from the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31, At least processing for outputting information related to the number of game media corresponding to the selected prize to the management device 13 is performed. This process is executed by the game medium number information processing means of the settlement machine 10 or the like.

  Further, the checkout machine 10 also functions as a second terminal device, and a prize can be exchanged for a member IC card 30 or a non-member IC card 31 in a prize exchange apparatus 1500 such as a wagon 1550 or a service counter. Processing to write exchange permission information is performed. This process is executed by the prize exchange permission writing means of the checkout machine 10 or the like. In addition, the prize exchange permission information includes, for example, information on the number of game media acquired by the player in the game, such as the number of game media such as the number of pachinko balls won and the number of balls stored, but is not limited thereto. It is not a thing. For example, as the prize exchange permission information, for example, the number of acquired game media related to the number of game media such as the number of winning pachinko balls and the number of stored balls acquired by the player in the game, the number of acquired game media is mounted on the wagon, etc. Flag information indicating that there are more than the most expensive prizes, flag information indicating that the number of balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and frequency information in the case of purchasing a product according to the frequency as a valuable value consumed when renting balls The player holds flag information indicating that the frequency information is higher than the most expensive prize of the prize mounted on the wagon, flag information indicating that the prize is over the predetermined frequency, the number of acquired game media and frequency information, etc. The added value of all the valuable values, flag information indicating that all the valuable values are higher than the most expensive prizes of prizes installed in wagons, etc., and that all the valuable values are above a predetermined value. The including but information such as flag information indicating, not limited thereto, as long possible kana information judgment prize exchange authorization.

  Here, in the case where the information on the number of game media related to the number of game media such as the number of winning pachinko balls and the number of stored balls is used as the prize exchange permission information, the prize selected by the player at the prize exchange device 1500 is used. The acquired game medium number information may be updated based on the information, and the settlement machine 10 may output the updated prize exchange information to the management device 13. Further, when flag information is used as the gift exchange permission information, the gift exchange device 1500 stores the gift exchange information based on the prize selected by the player in the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31. Then, the stored prize exchange information may be output to the management apparatus 13 by the checkout machine 10.

  The display unit 10g is a display unit that displays predetermined information associated with the operation of the payment machine 10 and displays distribution information by an information distribution system described later. The specific information display contents on the display unit 10g will be clarified in the description of the operation and the description of the entire information distribution system described later.

  Further, the checkout machine 10 includes a signal transmission / reception unit 10h, and transmits / receives information to / from the store clerk card 32 possessed by the employee via the signal transmission / reception unit 10h.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the checkout machine 10 mainly includes a control unit 600, a card processing unit 601, a money processing unit 602, a selection button detection unit 603, and an employee information reading unit 604.

  The control unit 600 is mainly composed of an arithmetic unit (CPU), a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), and other storage means such as a semiconductor memory that keeps information as required. In the CPU, Various arithmetic processes are executed using programs and data stored in the storage means such as the ROM and RAM. In the control unit 600, input / output of signals between the respective units of the display unit 10 g, card processing unit 601, money processing unit 602, selection button detection unit 603, employee information reading unit 604, and management via the network 8 Signal input / output between the apparatus 13 and the distribution control apparatus 90 is controlled.

  Here, in the program stored in the storage means such as ROM or RAM, in addition to the processing operation of the settlement machine 10 that handles the member IC card 30 or the like, the processing operation for carrying out information distribution by the information distribution system described later. Is included, and the control unit 600 executes processing related to information distribution according to the program. The processing related to information distribution is information storage, communication with the distribution control device 90, display operation control of the display unit 10g, and the like as necessary. (ROM, RAM, and other semiconductor memory that keeps information as required), communication means (signal input / output control via the network 8 provided in the control unit 600, etc.), and control means (by the control unit 600) And the like (drive control of the display unit 10g).

  The card processing unit 601 reads, for example, IDs and valuable information managed by the IDs stored in the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 inserted from the card insertion slot 10a. Information is output to the control unit 600, and updated valuable information from the control unit 600 is written to the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31. For example, the reader / writer is configured. Is done.

  The card processing unit 601 also functions as an information processing unit for the number of game media, and reads premium exchange information written in the premium exchange device 1500 such as a wagon 1550 from the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31. Thus, at least a process for outputting information related to the number of game media corresponding to the selected prize to the management apparatus 13 and a process for outputting to the management apparatus 13 via the control unit 600 are performed. Further, the card processing unit 601 may function as a free gift exchange permission information writing unit for writing the above free gift exchange permission information into the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31.

  Based on the ID read by the card processing unit 601, the money processing unit 602 repays the amount corresponding to the frequency of the valuable information read from the management device 13 from the bill return port 10c and the change receiver 10d. Also, the money processing unit 602 can output information such as the frequency balance and the refund amount to the display unit 10g, and can display the frequency balance and the refund amount on the display unit 10g. Furthermore, the money processing unit 602 also has a function of detecting whether or not the settlement money in the settlement machine 10 is insufficient.

  The selection button detection unit 603 detects that the password input numeric keyboard 10b, the checkout button 10e, and the cancel button 10f are pressed, and outputs a signal to the control unit 600 based on the pressed signals. is there.

  The employee information reading unit 604 includes a signal transmission / reception unit 10h. In addition, the employee information reading unit 604 reads information that can identify an employee who performs an operation such as replenishing the payment machine 10 from the clerk card 32, for example. The employee information reading unit 604 is composed of, for example, a reader / writer.

  And each apparatus part of the display part 10g, the card | curd process part 601, the money process part 602, the selection button detection part 603, and the employee information reading part 604 controlled by the control part 600 operate | moves as follows (FIG. 21).

  The operation will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 21 showing the flow of the operation in the checkout machine 10 shows a flowchart of the main routine in the checkout machine 10 executed by the control unit 600. The program is stored in the storage means of the control unit 600 and starts from the start. The high-speed processing operation in which the control unit 600 executes the processing up to the return in a time such as 0.01 ms is repeated. In this main routine, first of all, terminal distribution information [i] [m], terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m], and terminal distribution condition [i] [ m] is received (step SD1). That is, the checkout machine 10 receives i pieces of distribution information of terminal distribution information [1] [m] to terminal distribution information [i] [m] from the distribution control device 90 as the m-th terminal on the network 8. Terminal distribution amount designation information [1] [m] to terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] and terminal distribution condition [1] [m] to terminal distribution condition [i ] [m] is received.

  In the checkout machine 10, after receiving these pieces of information, the distribution results of each terminal distribution information [i] [m], the distribution fee of each terminal distribution information [i] [m], and attribute designation are received via the network 8. Information [i] [m] is transmitted to the distribution control device 90 (step SD5). The distribution result here is information indicating the result of displaying each terminal distribution information [i] [m] on the display unit 10g in the settlement machine 10, which is the mth terminal, and processing related to display of distribution information, which will be described later. The distribution fee is also counted according to the counted distribution result (the total is counted in a constant display subroutine and a distribution condition display subroutine which will be described in detail later). The attribute designation information [i] [m] is information for designating an attribute desired to be distributed in the settlement machine 10, which is the mth terminal, and is transmitted when the settlement machine 10 receives an input for designating an attribute. Is done.

  In the settlement machine 10 that transmits / receives the terminal distribution information [i] [m] and the like in this way, a constant display subroutine is started (step SD3). The constant display subroutine activated by the checkout machine 10 is a process of displaying the received terminal distribution information [i] [m] on the display unit 10g based on the received terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m]. The program is stored in the storage means of the control unit 600, and if there is an activation request, the control unit 600 executes the timer interrupt every predetermined time without disturbing the execution of the main routine.

  In the processing in the main routine, the card processing unit 601 waits for the insertion of the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 from the card insertion slot 10a, and the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card. When insertion of 31 is detected, processing corresponding to that is executed.

  The control unit 600 determines whether or not the non-member IC card 31 is inserted based on the information from the card processing unit 601 (step S610).

  Here, if a non-member player inserts the non-member IC card 31 into the card insertion slot 10a, the control unit 600 determines the non-member IC based on information from the card processing unit 601 by the card insertion. It is determined that the card 31 has been inserted (the determination result in step S610 is Yes), whereby the distribution machine 10 starts a distribution condition display subroutine (step SD4). The distribution condition display subroutine activated by the checkout machine 10 generally includes the received terminal distribution information [i] [m] and the received terminal distribution condition [i] [m] and the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m]. The program is displayed on the display unit 10g based on the program stored in the storage means of the control unit 600. If there is an activation request, the control unit 600 can interrupt the execution of the main routine without interrupting the execution of the main routine. Execute.

  When it is determined in step S610 that the non-member IC card 31 has been inserted (Yes in step S610), the inserted card is a gift exchange information written in the gift exchange device 1500 such as the wagon 1550. The card processing unit 601 reads the gift exchange information, and the control unit 600 outputs the gift exchange information and the card ID read by the card processing unit 601 to the management device 13 (step SF1). Here, the gift exchange information is as described above.

  Subsequently, the control unit 600 reads the predetermined condition stored in the management device 13 and determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied (step SF2). Here, in the present prize exchange system, the predetermined condition is, for example, (1) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the number of winning balls is counted or stored in the management device 13 as the number of winning balls, or when the store is closed When a predetermined time comes, (2) When a storage medium such as the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 that stores at least information that can identify the number of winning balls and the number of stored balls is taken out from the intermediary machine (3) A storage medium such as a member IC card 30 or a non-member IC card 31 that stores information that can specify at least the number of winning balls and the number of stored balls is inserted when managed as the number of winning balls. When the machine is inserted into a machine that is different from the machine, or (4) when a prize is exchanged. Further, any one of the above conditions (1) to (4) may be set as the predetermined condition, or a plurality of conditions may be selected and set from these conditions. The determination as to whether or not the above-described predetermined condition is satisfied may be executed by the management apparatus 13 based on the predetermined condition stored in the management apparatus 13.

  If it is determined in step SF2 that the predetermined condition is not satisfied (No in step SF2), the process of SD4 is executed.

  If it is determined in step SF2 that the predetermined condition is satisfied (Yes in step SF2), the control unit 600 rewrites the information related to the number of winning balls, which satisfies the predetermined condition, into the stored ball number and the information Information for subtracting the number of winning balls from the number of managed winning balls is output to the management device 13 (step SF3). When the management device 13 determines whether or not the above-described predetermined condition is satisfied, the management device 13 rewrites information related to the number of winning balls that satisfies the predetermined condition into the number of stored balls.

  If it is determined in step S610 that the non-member IC card 31 is inserted (Yes in step S610), the distribution condition display subroutine is started as described above (step SD4). Subsequently, the control unit 600 determines whether the date information stored in the non-member IC card 31 is valid based on information from the card processing unit 601 (step S611).

  If it is determined in step S611 that the date information is not valid (No in step S611), the control unit 600 outputs information for returning the non-member IC card 31 to the card processing unit 601. Upon receiving the information, the card processing unit 601 returns the non-member IC card 31 from the card insertion slot 10a (step S612). Then, the processing of the main routine returns and returns to the start.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S611 that the date information is valid (Yes in step S611), the card processing unit 601 reads the ID stored in the non-member IC card 31, and reads the ID Is output to the control unit 600. The ID output to the control unit 600 is output to the management device 13 via the network 8 (step S613). Then, frequency balance information based on the ID of the non-member IC card 31 stored in the management device 13 is output from the management device 13 to the control unit 600 via the network 8 (step S613).

  Further, the frequency balance information output to the control unit 600 is output from the control unit 600 to the money processing unit 602. Further, the frequency balance information is output from the money processing unit 602 to the display unit 10g, and the frequency balance is displayed on the display unit 10g (step S619).

  If it is determined in step S610 that the non-member IC card 31 has not been inserted (No in step S610), the control unit 600 subsequently proceeds to the member based on information from the card processing unit 601. It is determined whether or not the IC card 30 is inserted (step S614).

  If it is determined in step S614 that the member IC card 30 is not inserted (No in step S614), the processing of the main routine returns and returns to the start.

  On the other hand, when a member player inserts the member IC card 30 into the card insertion slot 10a, the control unit 600 inserts the member IC card 30 based on information from the card processing unit 601 by the card insertion. (The determination result in step S614 is Yes), whereby the settlement machine 10 starts a distribution condition display subroutine (step SD4).

  When it is determined in step S614 that the member IC card 30 has been inserted (Yes in step S614), the inserted card displays the gift exchange information written in the gift exchange device 1500 such as the wagon 1550. If so, the card processing unit 601 reads the gift exchange information, and the control unit 600 outputs the gift exchange information and card ID read by the card processing unit 601 to the management device 13 (step SF4). Here, the gift exchange information is as described above.

  Subsequently, the control unit 600 reads the predetermined condition stored in the management device 13 and determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied (step SF5). Here, in the present prize exchange system, the predetermined condition is, for example, (1) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the number of winning balls is counted or stored in the management device 13 as the number of winning balls, or when the store is closed When a predetermined time comes, (2) When a storage medium such as the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 that stores at least information that can identify the number of winning balls and the number of stored balls is taken out from the intermediary machine (3) A storage medium such as a member IC card 30 or a non-member IC card 31 that stores information that can specify at least the number of winning balls and the number of stored balls is inserted when managed as the number of winning balls. When the machine is inserted into a machine that is different from the machine, or (4) when a prize is exchanged. Further, any one of the above conditions (1) to (4) may be set as the predetermined condition, or a plurality of conditions may be selected and set from these conditions. The determination as to whether or not the above-described predetermined condition is satisfied may be executed by the management apparatus 13 based on the predetermined condition stored in the management apparatus 13.

  If it is determined in step SF5 that the predetermined condition is not satisfied (No in step SF5), the process of SD4 is executed.

  If it is determined in step SF5 that the predetermined condition is satisfied (Yes in step SF5), the control unit 600 rewrites the information related to the number of winning balls, which satisfies the predetermined condition, into the stored ball number and the information Information for subtracting the number of winning balls from the number of managed winning balls is output to the management device 13 (step SF6). In addition, when the management apparatus 13 performs determination whether the above-mentioned predetermined condition is satisfy | filled, the management apparatus 13 rewrites the information regarding the number of winning balls which satisfy | fills predetermined conditions to the number of stored balls.

  If it is determined in step S614 that the member IC card 30 is inserted (Yes in step S614), the distribution condition display subroutine is started as described above (step SD4). The processing unit 601 reads the ID and password stored in the member IC card 30, and outputs the read ID and password to the control unit 600 (step S615). In addition, the ID output to the control unit 600 is output to the management device 13 via the network 8 (step S615). Then, the power balance based on the ID of the member IC card 30 stored in the management device 13 is output from the management device 13 to the control unit 600 via the network 8 (step S615).

  Next, the selection button detection unit 603 detects the password entered with the password input numeric keyboard 10b, and outputs the detection signal to the control unit 600 (step S616).

  The control unit 600 compares and determines the password read from the member IC card 30 and the password entered using the password entry numeric keyboard 10b (step S617).

  If it is determined in step S617 that both numbers do not match (“NG” in step S617), the control unit 600 outputs information for returning the member IC card 30 to the card processing unit 601. Upon receiving the information, the card processing unit 601 returns the member IC card 30 from the card insertion slot 10a (step S618).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S617 that both numbers match (“OK” in step S617), the control unit 600 outputs the management device 13 to the control unit 600 via the network 8 in step S615. The frequency balance information thus output is output to the money processing unit 602. Further, the frequency balance information is output from the money processing unit 602 to the display unit 10g, and the frequency balance is displayed on the display unit 10g (step S619).

  Subsequently, the control unit 600 determines whether or not the settlement button 10e has been pressed based on the information from the selection button detection unit 603 (step S620).

  If it is determined in step S620 that the checkout button 10e has not been pressed (No in step S620), the control unit 600 subsequently selects the cancel button 10f based on information from the selection button detection unit 603. It is determined whether or not is pressed (step S621).

  If it is determined in step S621 that the cancel button 10f has not been pressed (No in step S621), the processing of the main routine returns and returns to the start.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S621 that the cancel button 10f has been pressed (Yes in step S621), the control unit 600 causes the card processing unit 601 to store the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31. Output information that returns. Upon receiving the information, the card processing unit 601 returns the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 from the card insertion slot 10a (step S622).

  When the player presses the cancel button 10f, it is determined that the cancel button 10f is pressed by the control unit 600 as described above based on the information from the selection button detection unit 603 by pressing the button (step S621). The member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 is returned from the card insertion slot 10a (step S622). In this case, the settlement machine 10 starts the distribution condition display subroutine. (Step SD4). Then, the processing of the main routine returns and returns to the start.

  When the player presses the settlement button 10e, the control unit 600 determines that the settlement button 10e has been pressed based on the information from the selection button detection unit 603 by pressing the button (in step S620 above). As a result of the determination, the delivery condition display subroutine is started in the checkout machine 10 (step SD4).

  If it is determined in step S620 that the settlement button 10e has been pressed (Yes in step S620), the distribution condition display subroutine is started as described above (step SD4), and the control unit 600 performs the money processing unit 602. In addition, information for refunding the amount corresponding to the balance frequency read from the management device 13 based on the ID is output. Based on the information, the money handling unit 602 returns money from the banknote return port 10c and the change receiver 10d (step S623).

  The amount settled based on the ID of the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 is output from the control unit 600 to the management device 13 via the network 8, and from the frequency balance based on each ID. The settled frequency is reduced. Basically, since all the frequency balances are settled, the frequency balance becomes 0 (step S624).

  When the process of step S624 is completed, the member IC card 30 is returned from the card insertion slot 10a by the card processing unit 601 (step S618).

  On the other hand, the IC card 31 for non-members is all settled and the count balance becomes 0. Therefore, the non-member IC card 31 is moved from the card processing unit 601 to a storage unit (not shown) provided in the settlement machine 10 and collected. (Step S625). Then, the processing of the main routine returns and returns to the start.

  Note that the operation of the settlement machine 10 is not limited to the above-described operation. For example, processing related to a request for replenishment of a settlement when a shortage of settlement proceeds, an operation performed by an employee in response to the request, etc. It is good also as performing as needed. Also, a call button or the like is provided on the checkout machine 10 so that the player can press the call button when the banknotes are jammed or the member IC card 30 is not returned. It is good also as performing a process etc. as needed.

(Data display machine 21)
Next, attached to the upper part of each gaming machine, for example, a big hit start number history graph in each gaming machine, the number of start times (if it is a pachinko machine, winning a predetermined winning opening, aligning multiple pictures and winning a big hit lottery The data display device 21 for displaying information such as the number of hits, the number of big hits drawn by aligning a plurality of pictures such as a big bonus by hitting the start lever in the case of a slot machine, This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 22 is a front view showing the appearance of the data display device 21, FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the components of the data display device 21, and FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the flow of operations in the data display device 21.

  First, the configuration of the data display device 21 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 22 shows a front view of the data display device 21. On the front surface of the data display device 21, a big hit start number history graph 21a showing the number of start times until each big hit is obtained. The start number display unit 21b indicating the integrated value of the number of times, the big hit number display unit 21c indicating the integrated value of the number of big hits, the probability changing big number of times display unit 21d indicating the integrated value of the number of probable big hits, and how many days ago the display data is Various display units such as a date specifying display unit 21e indicating a distribution information, a distribution information display unit for displaying distribution information by an information distribution system to be described later (the display unit may be used as each display unit, or may be provided separately). Is provided. Furthermore, on the front of the data display device 21, a data change button 21f for displaying the data of the day to be displayed, a call button 21g to be pressed when calling an employee, and transmission / reception of information to / from the store clerk card 32 possessed by the employee A signal transmission / reception unit 21h, for example, a lamp 21i that is turned on and visually recognized when calling an employee is provided (the distribution information display unit may be provided in a part of the lamp 21i).

  Further, the data display device 21 is connected to the pachinko machine 2 or the slot machine 5, the intermediary machine 3, 4 or 6, and the island computer 7 or the like, and the intermediary machine 3, the pachinko machine 2, the slot machine 5, etc. Information communication with the gaming machine, the management device 13, the distribution control device 90, and the like is possible.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the data display 21 is mainly configured by a control unit 640, a game information input unit 641, a game information totaling unit 642, a display unit 643, an employee information reading unit 644, and a selection button detection unit 645. ing.

  The control unit 640 is mainly composed of an arithmetic unit (CPU), a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), and other storage means such as a semiconductor memory that keeps information as necessary. In the CPU, Various arithmetic processes are executed using programs and data stored in the storage means such as the ROM and RAM. In the control unit 640, the game information input unit 641, the game information totaling unit 642, the display unit 643, the employee information reading unit 644, the input / output of signals between the respective units of the selection button detection unit 645, and the island computer 7 The control circuit controls the signal input / output between the management device 13 and the distribution control device 90 via the network 8.

  Here, in the program stored in the storage means such as ROM or RAM, in addition to the processing operation of the data display device 21 that displays information about each gaming machine, information distribution by the information distribution system described later is performed. A program in which processing operations are defined is included, and the control unit 640 executes processing related to information distribution according to the program. The processing related to information distribution performs storage of information, communication with the distribution control device 90, display operation control of the distribution information display unit, and the like as necessary. The data display 21 is necessary for that purpose. Storage means (ROM, RAM, other semiconductor memory that keeps information as needed), communication means (signal input / output control via the island computer 7 and network 8 provided in the control unit 640), and control Means (drive control of the distribution information display unit by the control unit 640) and the like.

  The game information input unit 641 is for inputting information provided to the game from, for example, the table machine 3, the pachinko machine 2, the slot machine 5, the management device 13, and the like.

  The game information totaling unit 642 counts and manages, for example, results calculated by the control unit 640 for the information input by the game information input unit 641. For example, management of information displayed on various display units such as the big hit start number history graph 21a, the start number display unit 21b, the big hit number display unit 21c, the probability variation big hit number display unit 21d, and the like is executed. These pieces of information may be information that is aggregated by the game information aggregating unit 642 based on the information output from the management device 13 and displayed on various display units.

  The display unit 643 displays various information based on information input from the game information input unit 641, various information aggregated by the game information aggregation unit 642, and distribution information by an information distribution system described later. For example, the jackpot start number history graph 21a, the start number display unit 21b, the big hit number display unit 21c, the probability variation big hit number display unit 21d, the due date display unit 21e, and the distribution information display unit are included. In addition, a lamp 21i that is turned on and visually recognizes information also functions as the display unit 643. The specific information display contents on the distribution information display unit, which is a distribution information display means, will be clarified in the description of the operation and the description of the entire information distribution system.

  The employee information reading unit 644 includes a signal transmission / reception unit 21h. The employee information reading unit 644 reads information that can identify an employee who performs work for various work requests, for example, from the clerk card 32 or a predetermined employee remote control (described later). The employee information reading unit 644 is composed of, for example, a reader / writer.

  The selection button detection unit 645 detects that the data change button 21f or the call button 21g has been pressed, and outputs a signal to the control unit 640 based on the pressed signal.

  And each apparatus part of the game information input part 641, the game information totaling part 642, the display part 643, the employee information reading part 644, and the selection button detection part 645 controlled by the control part 640 operates as follows. (FIG. 24).

  FIG. 24 showing the flow of operations in the data display device 21 shows a flowchart of the main routine in the data display device 21 executed by the control unit 640, and the program is stored in the storage means of the control unit 640. The high-speed processing operation in which the control unit 640 executes the processing from the start to the return in a time such as 0.01 ms is repeated. In this main routine, first, terminal distribution information [i] [m], terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] and terminal distribution information [i] [m] are transmitted from the distribution control device 90 via the network 8 (and island computer 7) in the data display 21. The terminal distribution condition [i] [m] is received (step SD1). That is, the data display device 21 receives i pieces of distribution information from terminal distribution information [1] [m] to terminal distribution information [i] [m] from the distribution control device 90 as the m-th terminal on the network 8. The terminal delivery amount designation information [1] [m] to the terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] and the terminal delivery condition [1] [m] to the terminal delivery condition [ i] [m] is received.

  In the data display device 21, after receiving these pieces of information, the distribution record of each terminal distribution information [i] [m] via the network 8 (from the island computer 7 via the network 8), each terminal distribution information [ The distribution fee of i] [m] and the attribute designation information [i] [m] are transmitted to the distribution control device 90 (step SD5). The distribution result here is information indicating the result of displaying each terminal distribution information [i] [m] on the distribution information display unit of the display unit 643 in the data display 21 which is the m-th terminal, which will be described later. It is counted in the processing relating to the display of the distribution information, and the distribution fee is also counted according to the counted distribution result (the total is calculated in the constant display subroutine and the distribution condition display subroutine described later in detail). The attribute designation information [i] [m] is information for designating an attribute desired to be distributed in the data display 21 which is the mth terminal, and when the data display 21 receives an input for designating the attribute. Sent to.

  In the data display 21 that has transmitted / received the terminal distribution information [i] [m] and the like in this way, a constant display subroutine is started (step SD3). The constant display subroutine activated by the data display device 21 is a process for displaying the received terminal distribution information [i] [m] on the distribution information display section based on the received terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m]. The program is stored in the storage means of the control unit 640, and if there is an activation request, the control unit 640 executes the timer interrupt at predetermined intervals without interrupting the execution of the main routine.

  In the processing in the main routine, the selection button detection unit 645 waits for input of an employee call signal when the call button 21g is pressed, and when the call button 21g is pressed and the input of the call signal is detected. Then, the processing corresponding to that is executed.

  Here, the processing executed in response to the input of the call signal is mainly the processing related to the work of the employee who responds to the call, but in the gaming hall management system 1, as described above, the employee Information such as start of work or break may be transmitted to the management device 13 by a predetermined remote control for employees. Therefore, in the following processing relating to the work of the employee, the discussion proceeds on the assumption that the employee uses the predetermined employee remote control. Specifically, the employee has a remote control for employees that includes a start button to notify the start of work, a break button to notify a break, a cancel button to cancel transmission information, etc., and these button operation signals are It is input to the data display 21 from the signal transmission / reception unit 21h together with the employee ID, and is transmitted to the management device 13 via the island computer 7 and the network 8 (however, the employee ID is the clerk card 32 owned by the employee). You can also detect information from. When only the store clerk card 32 is used without using the employee remote control, the break application device and the cancel application device, which replace the break button and cancel button of the employee remote control, are connected to the network 8. By connecting and holding the clerk card 32, it may be possible to apply for a break and apply for cancellation, respectively. In this case, one device for applying for a break may be installed in the vicinity of the resting place, but the device for applying for cancellation when the work content specified on the management device 13 side is different is provided in the game hall. Since it is desirable to be provided everywhere, it is attached to a part of the data display 21. As a device for the application for cancellation, another signal transmission / reception unit may be provided in a part away from the signal transmission / reception unit 21h.

  When the call button 21g is pressed and the input of the call signal is detected (step S650), the control unit 640 determines whether there is a history that the call button has been turned on (step S651).

  If it is determined in step S651 that there is no history that the call button has been turned on ("ON history not found" in step S651), then the control unit 640 is provided on both sides of the data display device 21. It is determined whether the lamp 21i is lit (step S652).

  If it is determined in step S652 that the lamp 21i is not lit (No in step S652), then the control unit 640 is input based on information from the employee information reading unit 644. It is determined whether the type of information is a break signal when the break button of the employee remote control is pressed or a cancel signal when the cancel button is pressed (step S653).

  If it is determined in step S653 that a break signal associated with the pressing of the break button has been input ("break" in step S653), the control unit 640 deletes the previous break history (step S653). S654).

  Subsequently, the control unit 640 outputs the employee ID and break information indicating that the break is to be entered to the management device 13 (step S655). Then, return and return to the start.

  On the other hand, in the determination in step S653, it is determined that the cancel signal associated with the pressing of the cancel button has been input (“cancel” in step S653), for example, the employee is in a resting state. When the break occurs, the rest state is released (step S656). Further, when the employee is not in a resting state and the calling lamp is not lit, when the work content specified by the management apparatus 13 and notified by the wireless communication system 23 is incorrect, wireless communication is sequentially performed. Until the next work content candidate sent through the system 23 is hit, the store clerk repeatedly presses the cancel button.

  If it is determined in step S652 that the lamp 21i is turned on (Yes in step S652), the control unit 640 outputs a call signal for calling the employee to the management device 13. For example, the management device 13 notifies the employee of a call request and information such as the machine number of the gaming machine for which the call request has been made via the on-site broadcast or the wireless communication system 23 owned by the employee. . Further, at this time, information on the work content performed by the employee is notified to the employee via the on-site broadcast or the wireless communication system 23 possessed by the employee (step S657).

  Here, the information on the work content performed by the employee is based on information from the game information input unit 641, the game information totaling unit 642, etc., and the information specified in the data display device 21 is output to the management device 13, May be notified to the employee via the on-site broadcast or the wireless communication system 23 owned by the employee. In addition, based on various information input to the management device 13, the management device 13 specifies the work content that the employee performs, and the specified information is broadcast in the field or the wireless communication system 23 possessed by the employee. You may notify the employee via.

  Subsequently, the employee information reading unit 644 of the data display device 21 provided on the gaming machine requested to be called reads the employee ID and outputs it to the control unit 640 (step S658). In addition, the control unit 640 outputs information on the employee ID to the management device 13. In addition, the employee information reading unit 644 reads the employee ID and notifies the employee that the clerk card 32 is brought close to the signal transmission / reception unit 21h of the data display 21 via the wireless communication system 23, for example.

  The employee presses the start button of the employee remote control when the information on the work contents performed by the employee notified in step S657 is correct, and presses the cancel button of the employee remote control when not correct. Push.

  Therefore, based on the information from the employee information reading unit 644, the control unit 640 determines whether the type of the input information is a cancel signal associated with pressing the cancel button of the employee remote control, It is determined whether the signal is a start signal associated with the pressing (step S659).

  If it is determined in step S659 that a cancel signal associated with the pressing of the cancel button has been input (“cancel” in step S659), the control unit 640 deletes the previous cancel history and cancels the cancel signal. Information based on the input of the signal is output to the management device 13 (step S660).

  Subsequently, the management device 13 notifies the employee of information on the work content different from the work performed by the employee notified in the process of step S657 via the on-site broadcast or the wireless communication system 23 possessed by the employee. (Step S661). And the process from step S658 is performed.

  If it is determined in step S659 that a start signal associated with the pressing of the start button has been input (“start” in step S659), the control unit 640 notifies the employee ID and the process in step S657. The start information indicating that the employee has started work content is output to the management device 13 (step S662). Then, return and return to the start.

  If it is determined in step S659 that no input has been made (“not input” in step S659), the processing from step S658 is executed.

  On the other hand, when a player or the like presses the call button 21g, the input of a call signal by pressing the button is detected (step S650), but the control unit 640 inputs the call signal when the call button 21g is pressed. To record the on-history of the call button in a RAM or the like. Therefore, in the main routine immediately after the ON history is recorded, the control unit 640 determines that there is a history that the call button has been turned ON ("ON history" is determined in step S651). As a result, the data display device 21 starts a distribution condition display subroutine (step SD4). The distribution condition display subroutine activated by the data display device 21 generally receives terminal distribution information [i] [m] received terminal distribution information [i] [m] and terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m]. The program is stored in the storage means of the control unit 640 based on the control information, and if there is an activation request, the control unit performs a timer interrupt every predetermined time without interrupting the execution of the main routine. 640 executes.

  If it is determined in step S651 that there is a history that the call button 21g has been turned on ("ON history" in step S651), the distribution condition display subroutine is started as described above (step SD4), and control is performed. Unit 640 deletes the ON history (step S663). As a result, when the player or the like presses the call button 21g once, it is determined that there is a call button on-history immediately after the main routine process, and the distribution condition display subroutine is started at that time. That is, in the data display device 21, every time a player or the like presses the call button 21g, the distribution condition display subroutine is started immediately after the button is pressed.

  Subsequently, the control unit 640 determines whether or not the lamps 21i provided on both sides of the data display device 21 are lit (step S664).

  When it is determined in step S664 that the lamp 21i is not lit (No in step S664), the control unit 640 turns on the lamp 21i (step S665).

  Subsequently, the control unit 640 specifies the work content that the employee performs based on information from the game information input unit 641, the game information totaling unit 642, and the like (step S666). Further, as described above, the work content performed by the employee may be specified by the management apparatus 13 based on various information input to the management apparatus 13.

Examples of work performed by the employee include the following contents, and the control unit 640 and the management apparatus 13 have the game information input unit 641 and the game information totaling unit 642 related to these work, etc. Work content is specified based on information from
(A) Ball box carrying and counting work: When a player's ball (pachinko ball paid out) is exchanged for prizes, the ball box is carried to the counter 9 and counted.
(B) Work in response to replenishment request: When the slot machine has run out of medals in the hopper, or when the remaining capacity is low, the work is to replenish new medals by opening the frame, or to replenish balls with a pachinko machine Work to supply pachinko balls when there are no pachinko balls on the road.
(C) Work associated with replenishment inspection: Work to eliminate problems such as pachinko ball replenishment equipment and pachinko ball stoppage that occurred in the back mechanism of the pachinko machine itself, or there is a medal in the hopper with a slot machine And work to improve clogging of medals when medals are not paid out even if the patterns are complete.
(D) Work associated with card replenishment: Work for replenishing the non-member IC card 31 when the non-member IC cards 31 stored for issuance by the interstage machines 3, 4, 6, etc. are insufficient or disappear.
(E) Work associated with jackpot bill placement: Work for placing a jackpot bill at a predetermined installation position when a hit state (bonus state) is obtained from a normal state with a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
(F) Work associated with ball box lowering: When a big hit occurs again while winning or losing (value obtained by subtracting out number from safe number) is within -1000 balls (losing number is within 1000) In addition, the task of lowering the currently used ball box to the player's feet and handing out an empty ball box to the player.
(G) Work in line with bonuses: If there is a player who cannot win a bonus symbol even though a bonus (BB, RB, etc.) has been won internally at the slot machine, a bonus symbol will be substituted for that player. Work to align.
(H) Work associated with ball stop: Work to release pachinko balls stopped between obstacle nails on the game board. There are also cases where a pachinko ball is put into the winning opening as a service after the cancellation.
(I) Work for collecting jackpot bills: Work for collecting the jackpot bills from a predetermined installation position when the jackpot state (bonus state) is finished in the pachinko machine or the slot machine.
(J) Work associated with lowering the ball box: If the win / loss is -1750 balls from the previous big hit, if there is a ball box loaded under the player's feet, raise it to the counter and the ball currently on the counter Work to collect boxes.

  After the work content is specified in step S666, the process returns to the start.

  When it is determined in step S664 that the lamp 21i is turned on (Yes in step S664), the control unit 640 turns off the lamp 21i (step S667).

  Subsequently, the control unit 640 outputs the employee ID, the specified work content, the completion information of the specified work, the machine number of the gaming machine, and the like to the management device 13 (step S668).

  Subsequently, the control unit 640 deletes the stored information related to the employee ID (step S669). Then, return and return to the start.

  The data display device 21 described above includes a control unit 640, which includes a game information input unit 641, a game information totaling unit 642, a display unit 643, an employee information reading unit 644, and a selection button detection unit 645. Although an example of controlling signal input / output between each unit has been shown, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, the control device 640, the game information input unit 641, the game information totaling unit 642, the display unit 643, the employee information reading unit 644, the selection button detection unit 645, and the like are provided in the management device 13 and the island computer 7, etc. Based on the output from the management device 13, the island computer 7, etc., the data display device 21 includes, for example, a big hit start number history graph 21a, a start number display unit 21b, a big hit number display unit 21c, a probability variation big hit number display unit 21d, etc. Information may be displayed on various display units. It should be noted that the above-described processing related to the work of the employee can also be performed with an intermediary machine or the like.

(Management device 13)
Next, the management device 13 for collecting and managing various information will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the components of the management device 13, and FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the operation flow in the management device 13. 27 and 28 are diagrams showing examples of the information management list tables 750 and 751, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the management device 13 includes a plurality of pachinko machines 2, platform machines 3 and 4 connected to each of the plurality of pachinko machines 2, a plurality of slot machines 5, and a slot machine 5. The connected machine 6 is connected to the island computer 7 and the network 8. In addition, the management device 13 includes a counter 9, a payment machine 10, a prize management machine (POS) 11, a replay accepting machine 12, an issuing machine 20, a data display machine 21, and an outside store gift exchange functioning as a data publishing machine. The terminal device 22 and the wireless communication system 23 are connected via the network 8 and are also connected to the distribution control device 90.

  Further, information input to the management device 13 via the network 8 is transmitted to the information management center 16 via the protocol converter 14 and the modem 15. In addition, the management device 13 is connected to, for example, a personal computer 17 and the personal computer 17 can view information on the management device 13. In addition, since the personal computer 17 can access each information managed by the management device 13, it can display and print each information. Furthermore, the personal computer 17 can also perform various settings of the management device 13 such as setting of a replay fee and member registration.

  The personal computer 17 can handle various types of information managed by the management device 13 as described above. A display unit of the personal computer 17 that displays information at that time displays such various types of information and will be described later. Display means for displaying the distribution information by the information distribution system (in other words, the display unit of the personal computer 17 displays predetermined information associated with the operation of the management device 13 and the information distribution system). It is a display means of the management apparatus 13 that displays distribution information.) The specific information display contents on the display unit of the personal computer 17 will be clarified in the explanation of the operation and the explanation of the entire information distribution system described later.

  The management device 13 includes inter-machines 3, 4, 6, a counter 9, a checkout machine 10, a gift management machine (POS) 11, a replay accepting machine 12, an issuing machine 20, a data display 21, and a gift for exchange outside the store. Information from devices such as the terminal device 22 and the wireless communication system 23 is managed. Based on the communication of information with the management device 13 for each device described above, the management device 13 stores various types of information as will be described later.

  In addition, the management device 13 stores various information stored in these IC cards when the member IC cards 30 and non-member IC cards 31 issued in other game halls are used for these devices. It memorize | stores based on ID of this game hall newly provided to them. When a merchant card is used, various information such as all prize exchange information stored in the merchant card is stored based on a merchant ID that can identify the merchant. Here, as the total prize exchange information, for example, total information in a predetermined period such as one business day in which a plurality of players have exchanged prizes, individual information in a predetermined period such as one business day in which a plurality of players have exchanged prizes, etc. All prize amount information is listed, and all prize exchange amounts related to prize exchange performed by prize exchange devices that may be operated by companies other than gaming halls such as wagon 1550 and specified prize service counter 1560 are calculated or specified Any information is possible. For example, as information on individual prize amount information in a predetermined period such as one business day when prizes are exchanged among a plurality of players, for example, various types of prizes (such as prize IDs), information on the number of prizes, and games in which prizes are selected. The information (for example, card ID etc.) concerning a customer can be illustrated. At the same time as the all prize exchange information, the vendor ID information for the business relating to the prize exchange is output to the management device 13. In addition, the management device 13 can also aggregate the total prize exchange information, for example, for each trader who is an operating entity. It should be noted that the processing for totalization for each trader may be executed by the prize exchange device 1500 and the result may be stored and managed by the management device 13. In addition, the management device 13 can also separately count sales information for selling merchandise in cash and information for exchanging gifts with game media in a prize exchange device 1500 installed in a wagon 1550 or the like.

  Further, in the management apparatus 13, the prize exchange information written in the prize exchange apparatus 1500 installed in the wagon 1550 or the like is stored in, for example, a storage medium such as a member IC card 30, a non-member IC card 31, a merchant card, or the like. The information can be read via a communication line capable of outputting information to the gift exchange device 1500. Further, the management device 13 stores information that sets whether to deduct the number of game media related to the prize exchange in preference to either the winning ball or the stored ball when the prize exchange in the prize exchange device 1500 is performed. Further, for example, the management device 13 manages the number of winning balls and the number of stored balls based on, for example, a player's card ID, and converts the winning ball to the stored ball based on the predetermined condition described above. Conversion to Kachidama can be performed. Further, when using the winning ball for replay, the management device 13 subtracts the number of game media corresponding to the replay fee, updates the information related to the winning ball number, and uses the saved ball for replaying. In this case, the number of game media corresponding to the replay fee is subtracted to update the information relating to the number of accumulated balls. In addition, the replay fee that is collected when using the winning ball for replay and the replay fee that is collected when using the saved ball for replay may be the same or different. Can do. For example, the replay fee collected when the winning ball is used for replay may be collected more or less than the replay fee collected when the stored ball is used for replay.

  In addition, the management device 13 obtains the information on the value of the gaming media set corresponding to the value of each gaming machine, the gaming machine, the gaming island, or the gaming machine group. I remember it. For example, the value of a pachinko ball discharged from one type of gaming machine is converted to 4 yen per ball, the value of a pachinko ball discharged from another type of gaming machine is converted to 2 yen per ball, and from a further type of gaming machine The value of the pachinko ball to be discharged stores information related to the value of the game medium, such as converting 1 ball into 1 yen. Note that the value of the above-described gaming medium can be set for each of the inter-machine machines, the gaming machines, the gaming islands, and the gaming machine groups. Here, each gaming machine group means each group when gaming machines are grouped by type when a plurality of gaming machines are installed on one gaming island.

  Furthermore, the management device 13 can also output information such as, for example, jackpot start number history graph, start number, jackpot number, etc. for each gaming machine to the data display 21 attached to the top of each gaming machine. The data display 21 displays this information on the display unit and provides the game table information to the player.

  Further, the management device 13 stores, for example, information such as the jackpot start number history graph, the number of start times, the number of jackpots, etc., the ranking of the gaming machine, the winning and losing of each gaming machine, etc. in the terminal device 22 for exchanging gifts outside the store. It can also be output. The out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22 displays these pieces of information on the display unit, and provides the game table information to the player.

  Here, in addition to displaying information from the management device 13, the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 can also display distribution information by an information distribution system described later. When the distribution information is displayed on the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22, the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 is the m-th terminal on the network 8 from the distribution control device 90 as in the other devices described above. The terminal distribution information [i] [m], the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] and the terminal distribution condition [i] [m] are received, and the distribution results of each terminal distribution information [i] [m] The distribution fee of each terminal distribution information [i] [m] and the attribute designation information [i] [m] are transmitted to the distribution control device 90 (here, each terminal distribution transmitted from the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22) The distribution results of the information [i] [m] and the distribution charges of the terminal distribution information [i] [m] are also counted in the constant display subroutine and the distribution condition display subroutine which will be described in detail later. Then, the terminal display information [i] [m] based on the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] is generally displayed on the display unit by executing the process of the constant display subroutine, and when there is a predetermined input or the like (For example, when a predetermined button operation or a touch operation on the display unit screen is detected, or when a human body is detected in the vicinity, etc.), processing of a distribution condition display subroutine is executed to generally distribute the terminal distribution amount to the display unit. The terminal distribution information [i] [m] based on the specified information [i] [m] and the distribution condition [i] [m] is displayed. The same applies to the case where the distribution information is displayed on the island computer 7, the wireless communication system 23, other devices not shown in the game hall, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the management apparatus 13 includes a control unit 700, a member card information management unit 701, a non-member card information management unit 702, an input / output processing unit 703, a work time counting unit 704, and a work content information management unit 705. It is mainly composed. Here, the information when the merchant card is used is described as being managed by the member card information management unit 701. However, for example, a merchant card information management unit is provided separately and the merchant card is used. Various types of information may be managed.

  The control unit 700 is mainly composed of an arithmetic unit (CPU), a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), and other storage means such as a semiconductor memory that keeps information as necessary. In the CPU, Various arithmetic processes are executed using programs and data stored in the storage means such as the ROM and RAM. In this control unit 700, a member card information management unit 701, a non-member card information management unit 702, an input / output processing unit 703, a work time counting unit 704, a signal input / output between each unit of the work content information management unit 705, Controlling signal input / output with personal computer 17 and other peripheral devices, signal input / output with distribution control device 90, and signal input / output with each device via network 8 Yes. Further, the control unit 700 is connected to the management device 13 via the network 8 so as to be able to communicate with the control unit of each device.

  Here, in the program stored in the storage means such as ROM or RAM, in addition to the processing operation of the management apparatus 13 that handles various information, the processing operation for performing information distribution by the information distribution system described later is defined. A program is included, and the control unit 700 executes processing related to information distribution according to the program. The processing related to information distribution involves storing information, communicating with the distribution control device 90, and controlling the display operation of the display unit of the personal computer 17 as necessary. The management device 13 is necessary for this purpose. Storage means (ROM, RAM, other semiconductor memory that keeps information as necessary), communication means (signal input / output control with the distribution control device 90 provided in the control unit 700, etc.), and It has a configuration such as control means (drive control of the display unit of the personal computer 17 by the control unit 700).

  Here, the management apparatus 13 can also be constituted by a plurality of computer systems on the same network to which roles are shared. For example, if a plurality of computer systems such as card management, customer management, game machine management, data display machine management, and work content management are used, each role can be executed at a higher speed.

  The member card information management unit 701 manages information when the member IC card 30 is used for each device. FIG. 27 shows an example of the information management list 750. The information management list 750 shown in FIG. 27 can be viewed on, for example, the personal computer 17 connected to the management apparatus 13. The member card information management unit 701 also manages information when a merchant card is used, and can view the management information on the personal computer 17 or the like.

  When the member IC card 30 is used, based on the ID of the member IC card 30, for example, as described in the information management list 750, for example, the number of stored balls, the balance of frequency, the number of stored balls for replay, It manages the amount of money inserted into points, stand machines or issuing machines, and the amount of payment. These data are managed for each ID of the member IC card 30 and further managed as history information, daily information, weekly information, and the like. The information management list 750 shown in FIG. 27 is an example of daily information.

  It should be noted that the management items for member gamers using the member IC card 30 are not limited to the management items described in the information management list 750 in FIG. 27. For example, the management items for each type of game machine played (Launching balls), safe (balls supplied to the upper plate of the game, that is, the player's winning balls), winning / losing information (those that are out of the safe), jackpot count, CR machine sales, etc., and member games The customer's address, name, age, favorite platform, contact information, etc. can also be set as management items.

  The non-member card information management unit 702 manages information when the non-member IC card 31 is used for each device. FIG. 28 shows an example of the information management list 751. The information management list 751 shown in FIG. 28 can be viewed on, for example, the personal computer 17 connected to the management apparatus 13.

  When the non-member IC card 31 is used, based on the ID of the non-member IC card 31, for example, a frequency balance, a disk machine or an issuing machine as described in the information management list 751 The amount of money inserted and the amount of payment are managed. These data are managed for each ID of the non-member IC card 31. When the non-member IC card 31 is used, the period during which the frequency balance can be held is limited to, for example, one day. Therefore, if it is not within the period, the balance of the frequency cannot be settled and cashed by the settlement machine 10.

  When the non-member IC card 31 is used, information corresponding to a period in which the frequency balance can be held is managed. The information management list 751 shown in FIG. 28 is an example of information in the management period. Note that the information on the simple management ID and the number of balls (counted by the counter 9) at the time of receipt issuance is temporarily managed in order to prevent the use of forged receipts. Therefore, the information on the simple management ID and the number of balls is deleted from the management device 13 after confirming the appropriateness of the receipt at the time of prize exchange in the prize manager (POS) 11.

  Here, when the non-member IC card 31 is used, out (fire ball), safe (a supply ball to the upper plate of the game, that is, a player's acquisition ball), win / loss (out is reduced from the safe) ), The number of stored balls, the number of stored balls for replay, replay fee, points, type of game machine, number of jackpots, CR machine sales, etc. Is different.

  The input / output processing unit 703 includes: inter-machines 3, 4, 6, a counter 9, a payment machine 10, a prize management machine (POS) 11, a replay accepting machine 12, an issuing machine 20, a data display 21, and a store gift. Input / output processing of information from devices such as the exchange terminal device 22 and the wireless communication system 23 and input / output processing of information with the information management center 16 are performed. From the above devices, game data, various information accompanying the game, and the like are always input. In addition, for example, information such as business results of a day, work contents of an employee, and work volume managed by the member card information management unit 701, the non-member card information management unit 702, and the work content information management unit 705 is information. Output to the management center 16. The output to the information management center 16 is performed, for example, when an end-of-day processing signal is input from the personal computer 17 or the like to the management device 13, and information transmitted to the information management center 16 is transmitted via the control unit 700. The data is transmitted to the information management center 16 via the protocol converter 14 and the modem 15. In the input / output processing unit 703, for example, the number of times when a player of a member of the gaming hall plays a game in another gaming hall using the member IC card 30 of the gaming hall from the information management center 16 Information, various information such as money billing information from other game halls associated therewith, information associated with the work contents of the employees of each game hall, and the like can be input.

  The work time measuring unit 704 measures the time spent for the work when the employee performs each specified work. The time counted by the work time counting unit 704 is managed by the work content information management unit 705 together with, for example, an employee ID for specifying the work content and the employee.

  The work content information management unit 705 includes the inter-machines 3, 4, 6, the counter 9, the checkout machine 10, the prize management machine (POS) 11, the replay acceptance machine 12, the issuing machine 20, the data display machine 21, and the outside of the store. Information relating to the work of employees input from devices such as the gift exchange terminal device 22 and the wireless communication system 23 is managed, for example, for each employee and for each work content. Further, based on these pieces of information, for example, the work amount for each employee, the work amount of each employee for each work content, and the like are calculated and tabulated.

  Then, the member card information management unit 701, the non-member card information management unit 702, the input / output processing unit 703, the work time counting unit 704, the work content information management unit 705, and the individual devices controlled by the control unit 700, and personal The display unit of the computer 17 operates as follows (FIG. 26). Note that the operation of information communication with each device has been described in the description of each device, and here, the processing operation related to information distribution in the management device 13 and the management operation of information input to the management device 13 are mainly described here. Explained.

  The operation will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 26 showing the flow of operations in the management device 13 shows a flowchart of the main routine in the management device 13 executed by the control unit 700. The program is stored in the storage means of the control unit 700, and from the start. The high-speed processing operation in which the control unit 700 executes the process up to the return in a time such as 0.01 ms is repeated. In this main routine, first, the management apparatus 13 receives terminal distribution information [i] [m], terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m], and terminal distribution conditions [i] [m] from the distribution control apparatus 90. (Step SD1). That is, the management apparatus 13 receives i pieces of distribution information from terminal distribution information [1] [m] to terminal distribution information [i] [m] from the distribution control apparatus 90 as the mth terminal on the network 8. Terminal distribution amount designation information [1] [m] to terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] and terminal distribution condition [1] [m] to terminal distribution condition [i ] [m] is received.

  In the management apparatus 13, after receiving these pieces of information, the distribution record of each terminal distribution information [i] [m], the distribution fee of each terminal distribution information [i] [m], and the attribute designation information [i] [ m] is transmitted to the distribution control apparatus 90 (step SD5). The distribution record here is information indicating a record of displaying each terminal distribution information [i] [m] on the display unit of the personal computer 17 in the management device 13 which is the m-th terminal. It is counted in the processing relating to the display, and the distribution fee is also counted according to the counted distribution result (the total is calculated in a constant display subroutine and a distribution condition display subroutine which will be described in detail later). The attribute designation information [i] [m] is information for designating an attribute desired to be distributed in the management apparatus 13 that is the mth terminal, and is transmitted when there is an input for designating the attribute to the management apparatus 13. Is done. Note that transmission / reception of terminal distribution information [i] [m] and the like so far is performed via a cable or the like connecting the management apparatus 13 and the distribution control apparatus 90 in the configuration of FIG. 1, but not via the management apparatus 13. In the configuration in which the distribution control device 90 is connected to the network 8, it is performed via the network 8 as in the above-described devices.

  In the management device 13 that has transmitted / received the terminal distribution information [i] [m] and the like in the above steps SD1 and SD2, a constant display subroutine is started (step SD3). The constant display subroutine activated by the management apparatus 13 displays the received terminal distribution information [i] [m] on the display unit of the personal computer 17 based on the received terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m]. This process is stored in the storage means of the control unit 700, and if there is an activation request, the control unit 700 executes the timer interrupt at predetermined intervals without interrupting the execution of the main routine.

  Then, in the processing in the main routine, the control unit 700 determines whether or not the device is operated (step S709). The operation of the device here is an operation as one device of the management device 13 itself, and an operation of a predetermined operation button or the like provided in the management device 13 corresponds to this, but the management information of the management device 13 is accessed. This includes operations of the personal computer 17 and other peripheral devices. In practice, peripheral devices such as the personal computer 17 are operated more frequently than the management device 13 itself is operated. Therefore, when the controller 700 determines whether or not the device is operated, the keyboard operation of the personal computer 17 is performed. Operation of a pointing device such as a mouse or a mouse is a main determination target. For this reason, the control unit 700 receives an operation detection signal for operations other than the input operation to the management apparatus 13 from the personal computer 17 or other peripheral devices, and monitors whether or not the device is operated.

  Here, if the employee operates the personal computer 17 (or another peripheral device or the management device 13 itself), the control unit 700 determines that the device has been operated in response to the operation detection signal. (The determination result in step S709 becomes “Yes”), and the distribution condition display subroutine is started in the management apparatus 13 (step SD4). The distribution condition display subroutine activated by the management device 13 generally includes the received terminal distribution information [i] [m] in the terminal distribution condition [i] [m] and the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m]. The program is displayed on the display unit of the personal computer 17 based on the program, stored in the storage unit of the control unit 700, and controlled by a timer interrupt every predetermined time without interrupting the execution of the main routine if there is an activation request. The unit 700 executes.

  In the management apparatus 13 in which the distribution condition display subroutine is started in this way, information input from each device and information separation processing are subsequently performed (step S710). On the other hand, when the device is not operated, no operation detection signal is supplied, whereby the control unit 700 determines that there is no device operation, and each of the operations is performed without starting the distribution condition display subroutine. The process proceeds to the process of inputting information from the device and sorting the information (the determination result in step S709 is “No”, and the process proceeds to step S710).

  In the process of inputting information and sorting information from each device, the control unit 700 of the management device 13 includes the issuing machine 20, the replay accepting machine 12, the inter-machines 3, 4, 6, the counter 9, and the prize management machine. Information from the (POS) 11, the settlement machine 10, the wireless communication system 23, and the like is input. In addition, when a member IC card issued at another game hall or a non-member IC card is used for each device, various information stored in those IC cards is newly given to them. Based on the ID of the game hall, the IDs of the IC cards for members and non-member IC cards issued in other game halls are also stored (step S710).

  Here, information on the IC cards for members and non-member IC cards in other game halls can be obtained from the information management center 16 connected to the management device 13 so as to be communicable. Thereby, valuable information such as the remaining number can be obtained even if only ID information is stored in the IC card for members and the IC card for non-members of other game halls. In addition, when valuable information such as the remaining number is stored together with the ID in the member IC card and the member IC card, the valuable information such as the remaining number is directly stored from the member IC card in another game hall. Can read or write.

  The control unit 700 determines whether or not the information input in step S710 is information when the merchant card or the member IC card 30 is used (step S711). This information includes cases where IC cards for members of other game halls are used, and is managed based on the ID assigned in this game hall.

  If it is determined in step S711 that the supplier card or member IC card 30 is used (Yes in step S711), the input information is output to the member card information management unit 701 ( Step S712). The membership card information management unit 701 manages input information for each ID and item, for example, as shown in FIG. 27, based on the input information (step S712). When an IC card for a member of another game hall is used, the ID stored in the IC card for a member of another game hall is not shown in FIG. The ID of the IC card for the member of the hall "is added and managed. Further, when a vendor card is used, input information is managed for each vendor ID and item.

  If it is determined in step S711 that the supplier card or member IC card 30 is not used (No in step S711), the input information is output to the non-member card information management unit 702. (Step S713). In this information, when the issuing machine 20 uses the non-member IC card for another game hall to issue the non-member IC card 31 for this game hall, the non-member of this game hall Information when the IC card 31 is used is also included, and is managed based on the ID assigned at the game hall.

  Based on the input information, the non-member card information management unit 702 manages input information for each ID and item, for example, as shown in FIG. 28 (step S713). In the issuing machine 20, when the non-member IC card 31 of this game hall is issued using the non-member IC card of another game hall, the non-member IC card 31 of this game hall is issued. When used, the ID stored in the non-member IC card of the other game hall is not shown in FIG. 28, but “ID of the non-member IC card of other game hall” is added to the item column. Managed.

  Next, based on the information from the input / output processing unit 703, the control unit 700 determines whether or not an end-of-day processing signal is input from the personal computer 17 or the like to the management device 13 (step S714).

  If it is determined in step S714 that the end-of-day processing signal is not input (No in step S714), the process in step S719 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S714 that the end-of-day processing signal has been input (Yes in step S714), for example, the member card information management unit 701 and the non-member card information management unit 702 are input from the input / output processing unit 703. The results of the day's business, calculated based on the data managed by the company, and information such as the remaining number of times when a member IC card or non-member IC card for another game hall is used. Information such as the result of counting based on each ID for each hall is transmitted to the information management center 16 via the control unit 700, the protocol converter 14, and the modem 15 (step S715).

  Subsequently, the control unit 700 determines whether or not a data transmission request signal is input from the personal computer 17 or the like to the management device 13 based on information from the input / output processing unit 703 (step S716).

  If it is determined in step S716 that the data transmission request signal has not been input (No in step S716), the process of step S719 is executed.

  If it is determined in step S716 that a data transmission request signal has been input (Yes in step S716), based on the data managed by the member card information management unit 701 and the non-member card information management unit 702, For example, data as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28 is output to the personal computer 17 or the like (step S717). Based on the data managed by the member card information management unit 701 and the non-member card information management unit 702, the output data is displayed on the screen of the personal computer 17.

  Subsequently, a start-up process is performed (step S718). The start-up process confirms whether or not communication with each device described above is possible via the network, and the presence or absence of a failure in each device by the self-diagnosis function of each device. In this confirmation, when communication with each device is not possible or when it is determined that there is a failure in each device, the store clerk is notified. In addition, when executing the start processing, when the prize exchange processing is performed by the prize exchange device 1500, information that sets whether or not the number of game media related to prize exchange is withdrawn preferentially from either the winning ball or the storage ball, For example, the flag information is transmitted to various devices in the game hall, for example (step S718). For example, when the information is written in the member IC card 30 or the like by the intermediary machines 3, 4, 6 and the information on the number of winning balls or the number of stored balls is stored in the member IC card 30, the flag information Based on the corresponding number of balls, the number of game media corresponding to the selected prize is subtracted. Further, for example, the prize information can be written in the merchant card by the prize management machine (POS) 11 and stored in the prize exchange device 1500 via the merchant card. As a result, the prize exchange device 1500 can execute a process relating to prize exchange based on the flag information.

  And the control part 700 performs the process of step S719. In the process of step S719, based on the information received from the pachinko machine 2, the inter-machines 3, 4 and 6 and the slot machine 5 and the information received from other devices on the network 8 as necessary, various processes are performed. Game operation data (for example, out, safe, difference ball, winning / losing for each card ID (difference ball), sales (lending ball), deposit amount, deposit money type, fraud (door open, radio wave), jackpot, probability change, etc. , All premium exchange information) is collected and aggregated (step S719). In addition, the game operation data collected and aggregated is displayed on the display unit or printed by a peripheral device printer or the like in response to a request by an instruction input from the personal computer 17 or the like.

  Further, the control unit 700 outputs the collected information based on a request signal from each device in the game hall (step S720). For example, the management device 13 summarizes information in step S719, such as information related to the number of winning balls and the number of stored balls for each card ID, information such as the number of valuables related to exchange or sale of prizes for each valuable value for each dealer, Output to the game hall equipment that output the request signal. In addition, in the management apparatus 13, the information on the number of valuable values related to the exchange of prizes for each valuable value or the number of valuable values related to sales can be separately stored and tabulated separately.

  The processing of step S719 is processing as a hall computer of the game hall, and when this is completed, the processing of the main routine returns and returns to the start. Note that the processing in steps S710 to S717 corresponds to processing as a card management device or a member management device for the game hall, so the management device 13 that executes the above main routine functions as a card management device or a member management device. In addition, it also has a function as a hall computer.

  The processing of the main routine executed by the management device 13 is as described above, but the operation of the management device 13 is not limited to the above-described processing operation, and processing related to requests from each device, employee work, etc. as necessary. It is good also as performing. For example, a change replenishment request from the issuing machine 20, a deposit collection request and a card replenishment request, a replenishment replenishment request from the replay acceptance machine 12, a premium replenishment request from the prize management machine (POS) 11, and a settlement from the checkout machine 10. It is also possible to execute a process of receiving a request such as a replenishment request and notifying the employee of the request by the local broadcast or the wireless communication system 23. In addition, by measuring the time from the start of work by the employee to the completion of work, or by calculating the distance traveled by the employee for work, the work time, work volume, work content, employee ID of the employee It is good also as what performs the process which totals various data, such as.

  In the premium exchange system described above, for example, the first machine such as the issuing machine 20, the replay accepting machine 12, the inter-machines 3, 4, 6, the counter 9, the premium management machine (POS) 11, the checkout machine 10, etc. When receiving the game medium, the terminal apparatus writes the reception information to the game medium by the reception information writing means of the first terminal apparatus. For example, even when an IC card having only information of a card ID is inserted into a vending machine functioning as a fourth terminal device installed in a game hall and not accepted by the first terminal device described above. In some cases, a vending machine product is exchanged. In such a case, when the IC card has no valuable value, the valuable value is negative. Therefore, when the fourth terminal device receives a card in which the reception information is not written as described above, the processable range may be limited. Limiting the processable range includes, for example, prohibiting merchandise exchange, returning the storage medium without exchanging merchandise when the storage medium is inserted into the fourth terminal device, and non-contact type storage medium In this case, if the reception information is not written, a message such as “Once the card is inserted into the inter-vehicle machine can be paid out” is displayed. For example, even if a so-called white card in which reception information is not written is inserted into the fourth terminal device, the processable range can be limited. Thereby, the player comes to perform the process of writing the reception information in the first terminal device described above.

  This completes the description of the gaming hall management system 1. However, the information management center 16 executes processing related to management of game halls by information communication with the management device 13, but is provided with a distribution server in an information distribution system to be described later. Execution of processing related to management of the game hall will be described together with the description of the distribution server in the distribution system.

(Information distribution system)
1. Overall Configuration Next, the entire information distribution system will be described. The information distribution system includes a distribution server that distributes information to each store of the game hall, a distribution control device that corresponds to the above-described distribution control device 90 that performs information distribution in each store, and an information distribution destination from the distribution control device in each store The distribution control device of each store intervenes between the distribution server and each terminal of each store and performs information distribution.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of the overall configuration of such an information distribution system. In FIG. 29, “(Store A)”, “(Store B)”, etc. represent stores in the game hall, and stores A, B, C, D, and E are respectively stores. Each device is connected to distribution control apparatuses 90A, 90B, 90C, 90D, and 90E corresponding to the distribution control apparatus 90 described above via networks 8A, 8B, 8C, 8D, and 8E. As shown in this figure, the information distribution system is configured such that distribution control devices 90A, 90B, 90C, 90D, and 90E connected to each device of each store are distributed to the distribution server of the information management center 16 via the information distribution network 850, respectively. The distribution server 800 is connected to the external communication network 92 and exchanges information with the external communication network 92 via the external communication server 91. The information distribution network 850 corresponds to the information distribution network 1120 described with reference to FIG. 1A, and the external communication network 92 corresponds to the external communication network 1150 described with reference to FIG. 1A. A detailed description of the distribution control device such as the distribution control device 90A and the distribution server 800 will be described later, and the other configuration in FIG. 29 will be described here.

  Each of the networks 8A, 8B, 8C, 8D, and 8E is a network such as a LAN (Local Area Network) corresponding to the network 8, and each device shown in FIG. 29 in each store is the pachinko machine 2, Interstage machines 3, 4 and 6, slot machine 5, island computer 7, counter 9, settlement machine 10, prize management machine (POS) 11, replay acceptance machine 12, issuing machine 20, data display machine 21, data disclosure This is a device in a game hall corresponding to an out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22, a wireless communication system 23, etc. that also has a function as a machine. In the information distribution system, these game hall devices serve as information distribution destination terminals, and as described above, terminal distribution information [i] [m] and the like are transmitted and received, and a constant display subroutine and distribution condition display subroutine are executed. Implement information provision services at each store.

  Hereinafter, the devices in the game hall that serve as information distribution destination terminals are collectively referred to as “distribution terminals”. In FIG. 29, the distribution terminal of each store is not shown corresponding to the management device 13, but this also means that the distribution control device manages each device as a distribution terminal in the implementation of information distribution. Therefore, the management device that performs other management is simply omitted for convenience, and the management device of each store corresponding to the management device 13 is also included in the distribution terminal (or the distribution control device 90A or the like corresponds to the management device 13). (It is good also as what has the function as a management apparatus.).

  The information distribution network 850 is a communication network configured by a dedicated line or the like that carries information communication between the distribution control devices 90A, 90B, 90C, 90D, and 90E and the distribution server 800 (information management center 16). This information distribution network 850 is used only for information communication between the store of each game hall and the information management center 16, and cannot enter from the outside. For example, a VPN (Virtual Private Network (VPN) It can also be configured by a virtual dedicated line such as a virtual private network)).

  The external communication server 91 is a communication server provided for the distribution server 800 to exchange information with the external communication network 92. In the external communication network 92, an external advertisement client sends information such as advertisements to an information distribution system, or an external news distribution source or a weather forecast distribution source (information service provider for news reports or weather forecasts, etc.) This is a communication network that sends content information such as news and weather forecasts, as well as registration information, price reduction information, advertisement information by general users, etc. at game halls and stores outside the game hall. The Internet includes, but may include other fixed communication networks, mobile communication networks, IP telephone networks, satellite communication networks, submarine cables, leased lines, and any other communication network that accesses the information distribution system from the outside. . The distribution server 800 is provided with an external communication server 91 in order to exchange information with the outside through such an external communication network 92 such as the Internet, and to secure security in performing the information exchange.

  That is, in the information distribution system, information from an external advertisement requester or news distribution source transmitted through the external communication network 92 is handled as distribution information distributed by the distribution server 800, and the information is handled by the distribution server 800. In the acquisition, it is assumed that the external communication server 92 is interposed and the distribution server 800 cannot be separated from the external communication network 92 to directly access the distribution server 800 from the outside. As a result, it is possible to acquire information from the outside by the distribution server 800 while preventing a virus from entering or illegal access from the external communication network 92 including a general communication network such as the Internet. Yes. Further, the information distribution system has a function of calculating an estimate of the advertisement fee, and the calculated estimate of the advertisement fee is transmitted to the advertisement client through the external communication network 92 by the external communication server 91. .

  Hereinafter, the distribution server, the distribution control device, and the distribution terminal of the information distribution system that executes such processing for handling the distribution information and processing for calculating the estimate of the advertisement fee will be described in detail. The distribution control devices 90A, 90B, 90C, 90D, and 90E are different from each other in the distribution information and distribution terminals that are actually handled, but all correspond to the distribution control device 90 and are technical. Since the general configuration and operation are the same, in the following description, it will be simply referred to as “distribution control device 90” (the distribution control device 90 described below is one of the distribution control devices 90A, 90B, 90C, 90D, and 90E). And the configuration and operation thereof apply to all of the distribution control devices 90A, 90B, 90C, 90D, and 90E).

2. Distribution Server (1) Configuration The distribution server of the information distribution system is configured by a computer or the like in which a program that defines processing to be described later is installed, and a predetermined input device, information processing device, storage device, display device, and communication It has an interface.

  Here, the input device includes input means such as a keyboard and a pointing device, and accepts character input, selection input, and the like by an administrator or the like and supplies them to the information processing device. The information processing apparatus is composed of arithmetic means such as a CPU for executing various internal arithmetic processes, a non-volatile memory such as a ROM storing system information and the like, and a semiconductor memory such as a RAM storing updatable information. Storage means and various control operations that control various internal operations and information exchange with the outside, and execute various types of information processing according to the input from the input device and the contents of installed programs, etc. It serves as the core for processing various types of information in the operations described below. The storage device includes storage means such as a hard disk in which information such as installed program files and various data files (for example, database files that manage various types of data in a database structure) are stored. Keep information on as needed. The display device includes display means such as a liquid crystal display and a CRT display, and displays predetermined information under the control of the information processing device. The communication interface includes a port for connecting to a communication line and other devices, a modem, and the like, and is responsible for information communication with the information distribution network 850 and the external communication server 91.

  FIG. 30 is a functional block diagram showing the main configuration of the distribution server 800 realized by such various apparatuses. As shown in this figure, the distribution server 800 includes a control unit 801, an input / output information processing unit 802, an information management unit 803, an estimation processing unit 804, and a distribution amount designation unit 805. The distribution server 800 shown in the figure has a function as a general management apparatus that comprehensively manages information received from the management apparatus of each game hall corresponding to the management apparatus 13 in addition to the function as the distribution server of the information distribution system. Also have.

  The control unit 801 is a functional block realized by the information processing device, the storage device, and the communication interface. The calculation unit of the information processing device mainly uses programs, data, and the like stored in the ROM, RAM, and the storage device. The present invention relates to a part that executes various arithmetic processes. In this control unit 801, information input / output between each unit of the input / output information processing unit 802 and the information management unit 803, and information between the distribution control device and management device of each game hall via the information distribution network 850 I / O is controlled.

  The input / output information processing unit 802 is a functional block realized by the information processing apparatus and the communication interface, and performs input / output processing of information managed by the information management center 16. As the input information, for example, the remaining number based on the ID of the IC card issued at each game hall, the remaining number when the IC card 30 for a member or the non-member IC card 31 of another game hall is used, The number of game media acquired based on the ID of the membership card 30 counted by the counter of each gaming hall such as the counter 9, information based on the work of the employees of each gaming hall, and managed by the management device 13 of each gaming hall Information from each game hall, such as the daily sales results compiled based on existing data. Further, the information collected in the distribution server 800 is output to the management device of each game hall via the input / output information processing unit 802.

  The information management unit 803 is a functional block realized by the storage device, and stores various information about each game hall input to the input / output information processing unit 802 and various information aggregated in the distribution server 800. .

  The estimate processing unit 804 is a functional block realized by the information processing device, the storage device, and the communication interface, and for the advertisement distributed in the information distribution system, the estimate calculation of the advertisement fee according to the request from the advertisement requester candidate, etc. Execute.

  The distribution amount designation unit 805 is a functional block realized by the information processing device and the storage device, and executes calculation of a distribution amount designated for each store for each piece of distribution information distributed from the distribution server 800.

(2) Operation
(a) Processing Operation of Main Routine Next, the operation of the distribution server 800 having the above configuration will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating a main routine executed in the distribution server 800. In the distribution server 800, the main routine program is stored in the storage device, and the high-speed processing operation in which the information processing apparatus or the like executes the processing from the start to the return in a short time is repeated.

  In the main routine of the distribution server 800, first, store distribution information itself on the distribution control device side, store distribution amount designation information, distribution conditions for each store distribution information, distribution results of store distribution information, store distribution information distribution fee, server distribution Information distribution results, average distribution amount designation information for each attribute, and distribution result average for each attribute are all received (step S810). These pieces of information are transmitted from the distribution control device 90 of each store through the information distribution network 850, and are supplied to the information processing apparatus via the communication interface in the distribution server 800. Thereby, in the distribution server 800, for all stores, all store distribution information itself on each distribution control device side, store distribution amount designation information for all store distribution information, distribution conditions for all store distribution information, Receives distribution results for all store distribution information, distribution fees for all store distribution information, distribution results for all server distribution information, average distribution amount designation information for each attribute, and average distribution result for each attribute . The store here means a game hall, and the communication of information via the distribution server 800 is not limited to the information in the above-described game hall, but, for example, a general user terminal 1160 that can communicate with the external communication network 92. Information transmitted from (see FIG. 1A) is also included. Further, information transmitted from a store (such as a store) outside the game hall that can communicate with the information distribution network is also included.

  Here, the store distribution information itself on the distribution control device side indicates a character string of the terminal distribution information itself that the distribution control device 90 is trying to distribute to the distribution terminal in addition to the distribution information from the distribution server 800 in each store. Information. In the information distribution system, as described above, information from an external advertisement requester or a news distribution source is handled as distribution information (server distribution information) distributed by the distribution server 800. In addition to the distribution information, the terminal distribution information [i] [m] that distributes the service information of the company that the game hall of each store intends to distribute to the distribution terminal as distribution information (store distribution information) by the process described later Mixed. Accordingly, the distribution server 800 receives the store distribution information itself on the distribution control device side in order to grasp the store distribution information that each store intends to distribute to the distribution terminal, such as service information. The distribution server 800 also receives store distribution amount designation information, distribution conditions for each store distribution information, distribution results of store distribution information, and distribution charges for store distribution information as information corresponding to the received store distribution information itself. To do. However, as the store distribution amount designation information, not only the distribution amount designation information of the store distribution information but also the distribution amount designation information at each store of the server distribution information distributed by the distribution server 800 is received. On the other hand, the distribution record of server distribution information is information indicating the distribution record at each store of the server distribution information distributed by the distribution server 800. In addition, the average of the distribution amount designation information for each attribute and the distribution result average for each attribute correspond to the attribute by the processing described later when the distribution control device 90 receives the attribute designation information [i] [m] at each store. Since the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] is calculated and used, the distribution control device 90 of each store determines the distribution amount designation information for each attribute in order to grasp the information distribution status for each attribute in the distribution server 800. The average and the distribution result average for each attribute are to be transmitted to the distribution server 800 (the distribution amount designation information in each store of the server distribution information distributed by the distribution server 800 is received as the store distribution amount designation information). Similarly, the distribution amount designation information is changed in each store by the processing of the distribution control device 90. That is, the distribution control device 90 of each store converts the store distribution information into the terminal distribution information [i] by the processing described later. [ m], the distribution amount designation information of the server distribution information is reduced, so the distribution server 800 receives and grasps the actual distribution amount designation information in each store of the server distribution information.

  Note that each piece of information received by the distribution server 800 is specified during the processing operation of the distribution control device 90 that transmits the information. When the distribution server 800 newly accepts store distribution information here, an identification number is given to the new store distribution information, and related information is added to the database of the storage device. Remember. The related information here includes character string information as distribution information of received store distribution information, its type (genre of information or corresponding attribute described later), number of characters, name information of distribution source (advertiser, news distribution) (Name information such as original or store name), address of the distributor, telephone number and e-mail address, contract form (contract minimum value, etc. described later), and various information for specifying the distribution form (for example, desired delivery amount designation described later) Information such as information, delivery conditions, desired delivery area and desired delivery store designation information, and delivery terminal designation information to be delivered) are stored.

  When the distribution server 800 receives the distribution information on the distribution control device side from the distribution control device 90 of each store, the distribution server 800 extracts the distribution NG wording of the store distribution information and instructs the deletion of the distribution NG wording (step S811). ). In the information distribution system, when implementing the information provision service at the distribution terminal, search for bad words etc. that are prohibited from use according to predetermined rules etc. from the distribution information, and inadequate information to be provided in advance delete. For this reason, in the distribution server 800, for example, use prohibition words inappropriate for distribution such as obscene language, insulting language, obscene or defamatory language, and obscene language are registered in the storage device in advance as distribution NG language. The wording in the store distribution information received from the distribution control device 90 of each store is compared or collated with the distribution NG wording, and the distribution NG wording is extracted from each of the store distribution information itself. Then, when there is store distribution information including the distribution NG wording, the distribution control device 90 that has transmitted the store distribution information is instructed to delete the distribution NG wording from the terminal distribution information through the information distribution network 850. As a result, the deletion information indicating the instruction content is transmitted from the distribution server 800, and the distribution control device 90 that has received the deletion information from the distribution server 800 distributes NG from the terminal distribution information to be distributed to the distribution terminal of the store. The wording is deleted (the contents of this deletion operation will be described later in the explanation of the distribution control device 90).

  Next, the distribution server 800 determines whether or not the distribution information has reached the distribution limit (step S812). As described above, the server distribution information distributed by the distribution server 800 is information received from an external advertisement requester, a news distribution source, or the like. The information is displayed on a distribution terminal such as a stand machine in the game hall. In this case, if there is too much information, not all the information can be displayed, and the information providing service cannot be properly implemented. Therefore, in the distribution server 800, the upper limit of the number of server distribution information to be distributed is set as a distribution limit in advance, and the total number of information already received as server distribution information from the advertisement requester or news distribution source is the distribution limit. By determining whether or not the server distribution information has been reached, it is determined whether or not new submission of server distribution information is permitted. As for the distribution limit, an arbitrary number of information (for example, 100) may be set, and a specific device (for example, an input device of the distribution server 800 or other peripherals predetermined by a specific administrator) may be set. It may be set by a device, a terminal of the information management center 16 that can access the distribution server 800, a terminal of a specific game hall, or the like.

  Here, if the total number of server distribution information is less than the distribution limit, the distribution server 800 determines that the distribution information has not reached the distribution limit (the determination result in step S812 is “No”). Next, the server distribution information is accepted (step S813). In the submission of server distribution information, the external communication server 91 supplies the distribution server 800 with information on advertisements, news, etc. (contents) transmitted by an external advertisement requester or news distribution source through an external communication network 92 such as the Internet. Then, the information supplied by the distribution server 800 is newly stored in the storage device as server distribution information.

  Also, for the distribution server 800, the external communication server 91 inputs desired distribution amount designation information and distribution conditions corresponding to the new server distribution information, and the distribution server 800 stores the new server distribution information. The desired delivery amount designation information and delivery conditions are stored in the storage device. The desired delivery amount specification information and delivery conditions here specify the desired delivery amount and delivery conditions for the information when the advertisement client or news delivery source sends information such as advertisements and news, etc. This information is also transmitted as information indicating. For this reason, the external communication server 91 receives information desired to be submitted as server distribution information from outside as needed, and also receives desired distribution amount designation information and distribution conditions corresponding to each of the received information. Accordingly, the desired delivery amount designation information and delivery conditions corresponding to each server delivery information to be submitted are input to the delivery server 800 and stored.

  In order to submit server distribution information, an order for information to be distributed is received from an advertisement requester or a news distribution source by telephone, FAX, or e-mail, and information input necessary for submission is manually input by the input device. In addition to the distribution information received through the external communication network 92, the distribution information input from the other input means in the distribution server 800 can be used as the server distribution information. When the distribution server 800 newly receives server distribution information, an identification number is assigned to the new server distribution information in the same manner as when the store distribution information is newly received in step S810 (this identification number is This corresponds to the information number i of the server distribution information in an estimation calculation subroutine or the like to be described later, and an identification number i is newly assigned to one server distribution information.), And related information is added to the database of the storage device. Remember. The related information here includes character string information as distribution information of received server distribution information, its type (genre of information or corresponding attribute described later), number of characters, name information of distribution source (advertiser, news distribution) (Name information such as original or store name), address of the distributor, telephone number and e-mail address, contract form (contract minimum value, etc. described later), and various information for specifying the distribution form (for example, desired delivery amount designation described later) Information such as information, distribution conditions, desired distribution area and desired distribution store designation information, and distribution terminal designation information to be distributed) are stored.

  When the total number of server distribution information is less than the distribution limit, submission of server distribution information is accepted in this way, and the distribution server 800 subsequently executes an advertisement fee estimation calculation by the estimation processing unit 804. (Step S814). On the other hand, when the total number of server distribution information is the number of distribution limit information, the distribution server 800 determines that the distribution information has reached the distribution limit, and does not accept the submission of the server distribution information. Charge estimation calculation is executed (the determination result in step S812 is “Yes” and the process proceeds directly to step S814). The advertisement fee estimate calculation is executed by the processing of a subroutine activated in the main routine of the distribution server 800, and the details thereof will be specifically described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Next, the distribution server 800 receives distribution distribution inputs for advertisements and news (step S815). In the information distribution system, the distribution server 800 designates distribution of advertisement information to be distributed and information such as news (contents such as news and weather forecasts), and the distribution server uses the distribution as distribution distribution of advertisements and news. 800 can be entered. As the distribution distribution to be specified, any distribution (for example, a distribution with an advertisement-to-news ratio of 20:80, etc.) may be input. A specific administrator or the like is predetermined for the input operation. It may be performed by a specific device (for example, an input device of the distribution server 800, other peripheral devices, a terminal of the information management center 16 that can access the distribution server 800, a terminal of a specific game hall, or the like).

  Subsequently, in the distribution server 800, the distribution amount designation unit 805 performs distribution amount designation information calculation for each server distribution information of each store (step S816). This distribution amount designation information calculation is processing for specifying the distribution amount designation information of all server distribution information including server distribution information newly accepted for submission for each store. The contents are specifically described later with reference to another flowchart.

  The distribution server 800 that has finished calculating the distribution amount designation information calculates the distribution of advertisements and news, all server distribution information, and distribution amount designation information for all server distribution information for each store for all stores. And the delivery condition for every server delivery information is regularly output to the delivery control apparatus 90 (step S817). That is, the distribution server 800 distributes all advertisements and news distributed in step S815 to the distribution control device 90 of each store, and all server distribution information newly accepted for submission in step S813. The server distribution information, the distribution amount designation information for each server distribution information specified in step S816 and the distribution conditions for each server distribution information are transmitted through the information distribution network 850. Transmission such as distribution distribution is output on a regular basis, and is performed by the distribution server 800 every predetermined time, such as every hour or every day in the morning (thus, not necessarily every time the main routine is executed). This is performed in the main routine every predetermined time if necessary). The distribution server 800 also transmits server distribution information, distribution amount designation information, and other information accompanying the distribution conditions (for example, related information such as the above-mentioned type for each server distribution information) in the scheduled output, Information necessary for the provision of each server distribution information is supplied to the distribution control devices of all stores.

  In the main routine of the distribution server 800, the processes in steps S810 to S817 are processes for realizing the function of the distribution server 800 as the distribution server of the information distribution system, and the subsequent steps (steps S818 to S822). This process is a process for realizing a function (function as a card management server or the like) as a general management apparatus for managing information received from the management apparatus of each game hall by the distribution server 800. Therefore, the processing of the subsequent steps is not essential for the distribution server of the information distribution system (the central management device is provided in the information management center 16 or another management center separately from the distribution server 800, and the subsequent steps) Here, the distribution server 800 also has a function as the overall management apparatus as described above, and the distribution server 800 also serves as the overall management apparatus. The processing operation will be described.

  In the processing operation as the overall management apparatus, the control unit 801 waits for the input of information to the input / output information processing unit 802. Execute.

  First, information input to the input / output information processing unit 802, for example, the number of remaining games and the number of acquired game media based on the ID of the IC card issued at each game hall, the IC card 30 for members of other game halls and non-members When the IC card 31 is used, the number of remaining times and the number of acquired game media, the information based on the work of the employees of each game hall, and the data managed by the management device 13 of each game hall The control unit 801 stores and manages information from each game hall, such as the business results of the day, for each game hole in the information management unit 803 (step S818).

  Based on the information stored in the information management unit 803 such as the remaining frequency when the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 is used, the control unit 801 stores the other game halls. Using the member IC card 30 and the non-member IC card 31 issued in the above, the number of games played is accumulated and totaled for each game hall. For example, the member IC card 30 The game hall that issued the member IC card 31 is charged for the amount of settlement corresponding to the accumulated frequency (step S819).

  For example, at the game hall store A, the member IC card 30 and the non-member IC card 31 issued at the game hall store B and the game hall store C are used. If the number is 45000 degrees or 17800 degrees, the store A charges the store B with the amount corresponding to 45000 degrees as the amount charged for the month, and the store C charges the amount corresponding to 17800 degrees that month. As a charge for. Further, for example, when the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 issued by the store A is used in the store B, and the usage frequency thereof is, for example, 15000 times in the month, An amount corresponding to 30000 degrees (45000 degrees-15000 degrees) may be charged to the store B as the billed amount for the month.

  The accumulated amount for each game hall can be output from the distribution server 800 as the overall management device to the management device for each game hall, so the personal computer 17 connected to the management device for each game hall. Etc. can be seen.

  Further, the control unit 801 collates the ID of each member IC card 30 or each non-member IC card 31 with the remaining frequency based on the information stored in the information management unit 803 (step S820), and determines the result. Determination is made (step S821). In this collation, the frequency obtained by counting the frequency information managed by the ID is compared with the frequency directly input based on the ID. For example, when the directly input frequency is larger, it is possible to detect an intervention such as fraud.

  If it is determined in step S821 that all the collation results match (if the determination result in step S821 is “all OK”), the processing of the main routine returns and returns to the start.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the determination in step S821 that there is something that does not match the collation result (when the determination result in step S821 is “NG”), the control unit 801 is for members that do not match. Information such as the ID of the IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 is output to the game hall that issued the IC card via the input / output information processing unit 802 to notify that there is no match as a result of the collation (step S822), the processing of the main routine returns and returns to the start.

  In addition, in the processing as the overall management device, in addition to the above processing, based on the information stored in the information management unit 803, the entire group game hall is totaled, the work amount of the employee in each game hall, The work efficiency, the relationship between the salary and the work amount, and the like can be calculated and totaled, or the totaled result can be distributed to the management device and displayed on the screen of the personal computer 17. As the total result, for example, the work content, work time, work amount, etc. of the employee after opening the store may be shown in time series. In the function as the overall management device, the number of remaining times and the number of acquired game media based on the ID of the IC card issued in each gaming hall, the totaling for each gaming hole, the totaling in the group gaming hall as a whole Aggregation, aggregation of information corresponding to each game hall when using IC card 30 for non-members and IC card 31 for non-members, aggregation of information based on the work of employees of each game hall, etc. Do. The totaled information can be output to each gaming hall management device, and the various totaled results can be viewed on the personal computer 17 or the like connected to each gaming hall management device.

  The processing operation of the main routine in the distribution server 800 is as described above, but the form of the processing operation as the distribution server of the information distribution system (steps S810 to S817) is not limited to the above-described form. For example, in step S813, the server distribution information is accepted, but in addition to this, after the advertisement requester, the news distribution source, etc. submit their information as server distribution information, The designation of the delivery condition (either or both) may be changed so that the desired delivery amount designation information indicating the designation after the change and the delivery condition can be transmitted. In this case, the external communication server 91 receives the changed desired delivery amount designation information and delivery conditions, and the desired delivery amount designation information and delivery conditions of the server delivery information corresponding to the delivery server 800 to which the information is input. Update. Such changes and updates of only the desired delivery amount designation information and delivery conditions are accepted not only when the delivery information has not reached the delivery limit, but also when the delivery information has reached the delivery limit. Also good.

  Further, as described above, transmission such as distribution distribution (step S817) is performed every hour or every predetermined time such as the first day in the morning, but other processes must be performed every time the main routine is executed. However, it may be performed as necessary. For example, even if the distribution information has not reached the distribution limit, if the external communication server 91 has not received information such as a newly transmitted advertisement or news, the server distribution information is submitted (step S813). The distribution distribution input of advertisements and news (step S815) may be accepted when the administrator or the like intends to specify the distribution distribution as necessary.

  Note that some server distribution information is stored in advance in the storage device of the distribution server 800 at the start of operation of the information distribution system, and after the operation is started, submission of server distribution information is accepted at any time as described above. It is good also as what deletes suitably what became. Alternatively, server distribution information is not stored in advance at the start of operation, but the server distribution information is accepted from time to time as described above from the start of operation, and the unnecessary distribution is deleted as appropriate. It may be a thing.

(b) Estimation Calculation Processing Operation Next, the advertising fee estimation calculation processing operation executed in the distribution server 800 will be described. FIG. 32 is a view showing a flowchart of an estimate calculation subroutine of the distribution server 800 that executes the estimate calculation of the advertisement fee. In the distribution server 800, the program of the estimation calculation subroutine is stored in the storage device, and when there is an activation request in step S814 in the main routine, the processing from the start to the return is processed by the estimation processing unit 804 (information processing Device, storage device and communication interface). The advertisement server distribution information (hereinafter referred to as “estimation target server distribution information”) that is the target of the advertisement fee estimate calculation is an estimate request to the distribution server 800 performed by the advertisement requester through the external communication network 92 and the external communication server 91. Server distribution information that can be arbitrarily set by input from the input device of the distribution server 800 or other peripheral devices, etc., as well as server distribution information that has already been distributed, Information on advertisements that have not yet been submitted can also be used as the server distribution information to be estimated.

  In the estimate calculation subroutine, first, initialization is performed such that the value of k is the number of distribution stores, the value of i is the number of distribution information, and the estimated advertising fee is 0 (steps S830, S831, and S832). Here, k is an integer representing a store number assigned in order to each game hall store to which the distribution server 800 distributes server distribution information, and is the total number of stores (the maximum value of the store number). It is initialized. i is an integer representing an information number sequentially assigned to each server distribution information, and is initialized to the number of distribution information (maximum value of information number) that is the total number of server distribution information.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of k is 0 or less (step S833), it is determined that the value of k immediately after initialization is not 0 or less (the determination result in step S833 is “No”), and cnt The value of SUM is set to 0 and the value of SUM is set to 0 (step S834). SUM is the subsequent processing of the delivery amount designation information or delivery results at store [k] of each server delivery information to be delivered to the store represented by k (store with store number k; hereinafter referred to as “store [k]”). Represents the accumulated value when accumulating, and finally represents the distribution amount designation information of all server distribution information or the total value of distribution results in the store [k]. cnt is a counter that counts the number of distribution amount designation information or distribution results accumulated in SUM, and finally represents the total number of distribution amount designation information or distribution results accumulated in SUM.

  After setting both the cnt and SUM values to 0, it is determined whether or not the value of i is 0 or less (step S835), and it is determined that the value of i immediately after initialization is not 0 or less (in step S835). The determination result of “No” is “No”), and it is determined whether i is the subject of the store (step S836). That is, it is determined whether or not the server distribution information represented by i (the server distribution information with the information number i, hereinafter referred to as “server distribution information [i]”) is distribution information distributed at the store [k]. This determination is performed according to the distribution condition of the server distribution information [i]. For example, when a distribution area is designated as the distribution condition, the determination is made based on whether or not the store [k] is in the distribution area. The contents of such distribution conditions will be described in detail later with specific examples.

  Here, when the server distribution information [i] is distribution information distributed at the store [k] (when the determination result in step S836 is “Yes”), the store distribution amount is designated as the immediately preceding SUM value. By adding the information [k] [i] to the new SUM value, the store delivery amount designation information [k] [i] is accumulated in the SUM, and the count value of cnt is incremented by 1 (step) S837 top). Alternatively, by adding the store delivery record [k] [i] to the previous SUM value as the new SUM value, the store delivery record [k] [i] is accumulated in the SUM, and the cnt The count value is incremented by 1 (lower step in step S837). The store delivery volume designation information [k] [i] and store delivery record [k] [i] here are the delivery volume designation information and the delivery record of the server delivery information [i] at the store [k], respectively. It is included in the delivery record of the store delivery amount designation information and server delivery information received by the delivery server 800 from the delivery control device 90 in step S810 in the main routine. In this step S837, when the estimate of the advertising fee is calculated based on the delivery amount designation information, the upper process is performed, and when the calculation based on the distribution result is performed, the lower process is performed. .

  If the server distribution information [i] is distribution information distributed at the store [k], the sum of SUM is incremented in this way to increment cnt, and then the value of i is decremented by 1 (step S836). The determination result is “Yes”, the process proceeds to step S837, and then the process proceeds to step S838. On the other hand, if the server distribution information [i] is not distribution information distributed at the store [k], the value of i is decremented by 1 without accumulating SUM and incrementing cnt (determination in step S836). The result is “No”, and the process proceeds to step S838.)

  Then, it is determined again whether or not the decremented value of i is equal to or less than 0 (return from step S838 to step S835), and the same processing as described above is executed again. Since i is the number of distribution information that is the total number of server distribution information at the time of initialization, it is an integer of 1 or more unless the number of distribution information is decremented, and the value is determined not to be 0 or less. (The determination result in step S835 is “No”.) Thus, as described above, SUM is accumulated and cnt is incremented depending on whether the server distribution information [i] is distribution information at the store [k], and whether the value of i is 0 or less after decrementing. The determined processing operation (processing operation in steps S835 to S838) is repeated.

  By repeating this processing operation, the value of SUM is determined from the store delivery amount designation information [k] [i] or store delivery record [k] [i] of each server delivery information [i] delivered at the store [k] Are sequentially accumulated, and the value of cnt is the number (number) of store delivery amount designation information [k] [i] or store delivery results [k] [i] accumulated. The value of i is determined to be 0 or less when the number of pieces of distribution information is decremented (i becomes 0 and the determination result in step S835 becomes “Yes”), and the SUM at that time is determined. SUM / cnt obtained by dividing the above by cnt is defined as AV (step 839).

  When i is decremented by the number of distribution information, the above processing operations such as accumulation of SUM have been completed for all server distribution information distributed at store [k]. The distribution amount designation information of distribution information or the total value of distribution results is represented, and cnt represents the total number of distribution amount designation information or distribution results accumulated in SUM. Therefore, AV is the average value of the distribution amount designation information or distribution results in the store [k] of the server distribution information, and how much distribution amount or distribution record per server information is in the store [k]. Will be shown. Therefore, the AV is compared with the contract minimum value for the distribution amount or the distribution result (step S840), and the estimate of the advertisement fee at the store [k] is calculated as follows according to the comparison result. However, the contract minimum value here is a value designated by the advertisement requester of the server distribution information to be estimated, and the advertisement requester can specify any contract minimum value in the desired delivery amount designation information transmitted through the external communication network 92. A value can be specified. For example, when the desired delivery amount is specified by the frequency of advertisement display during a predetermined period, the contract minimum value is specified by a numerical value such as 1/30 (the ratio of the display period when the predetermined period is 1). It is good.

  As a result of comparing AV with the contract minimum value, if AV is below the contract minimum value (AV <contract minimum value and the determination result in step S840 is “Yes”), only the proportion of the ratio is below The estimate is reduced (step S841). In other words, the estimate of the advertising fee at the store [k] is “1 terminal basic charge × number of terminals [k] × AV / contract minimum value × delivery average for each attribute”, and this estimate is set to 0 in the above initialization. The estimated advertising fee at store [k] is accumulated in the estimated advertising fee by newly setting the value added to the estimated advertising fee as the estimated advertising fee.

  Here, the one terminal basic fee is an advertisement implementation fee per one distribution terminal, and may be arbitrarily set (for example, 100 yen). The number of terminals [k] is the total number of distribution terminals in the store [k]. The distribution result average for each attribute is a distribution result average for each attribute (such as an attribute of a player who desires information distribution of the genre) corresponding to the genre of the server distribution information to be estimated, and in step S810 in the main routine. The distribution server 800 includes the distribution result average for each attribute received from the distribution control device 90.

On the other hand, if the AV is equal to or higher than the contract minimum value as a result of comparing the AV with the contract minimum value (AV ≧ contract minimum value and the determination result in step S840 is “No”), the advertisement requester desires Therefore, the estimated amount according to the basic fee is calculated (step S842). That is, the estimate of the advertising fee at the store [k] is “one terminal basic fee × number of terminals [k] × average distribution performance per attribute”, and this estimate is added to the estimated advertising fee set to 0 in the above initialization. By using the value as the estimated advertising fee, the estimated advertising fee at the store [k] is accumulated in the estimated advertising fee.

  Thus, according to the result of comparing AV with the contract minimum value, the estimate of the advertisement fee at the store [k] is accumulated to the estimated advertisement fee, and then the value of k is decremented by 1 and the value of i is initialized. The number of distribution information is again set as in the case of (Step S843).

  Then, it is determined again whether or not the decremented value of k is 0 or less (from step S843 to step S833), and the above-described processing after the determination is executed again. Since k is the number of distribution stores that is the total number of stores that distribute server distribution information at the time of initialization, it is an integer of 1 or more unless the number of distribution stores is decremented, and the value is not 0 or less (The determination result in step S833 is “No”). As above, SUM is accumulated, AV is calculated, advertising price is estimated at store [k] according to the comparison result of AV and contract minimum, accumulated to the estimated advertising fee immediately before the estimate, etc. And the processing operation for determining whether or not i is equal to or less than 0 after the value of k is decremented again (i.e., the processing operation in steps S833 to S843) is repeated.

  By repeating this processing operation, the estimated advertising fee becomes a value obtained by sequentially accumulating the estimated advertising fee at each store [k] that distributes the server distribution information. The value of k is determined to be 0 or less when the number of distribution stores is decremented (k becomes 0 and the determination result in Step S833 becomes “Yes”), and the estimate at that time The advertisement fee is presented as the estimated advertisement fee of the estimated server distribution information (step 844). When the k decrements are made for the number of distribution stores, the processing operation for accumulating the estimated advertising fee is completed for all the stores distributing the server distribution information. This is the sum of the estimated advertising fees. The estimated advertisement fee may be presented by, for example, transmitting the estimated server distribution information from the distribution server 800 to the advertisement requester through the external communication server 91 and the external communication network 92.

  The process of the estimate calculation subroutine presents the estimated advertisement fee by the above processing operation, and then returns to the main routine. Alternatively, when there are more advertisements to be estimated, the advertisement may be newly set as estimated object server distribution information, and the calculation of the advertisement fee may be calculated in the same manner as described above after returning to the start. In addition, if there is an advertisement that should be subject to the estimation calculation as described above, the estimation calculation subroutine is executed at any time without interrupting the execution of the main routine after the activation request in the main routine. You may make it do.

  Further, in the above-described estimation calculation subroutine, AV is the average value of the delivery amount designation information or delivery results at the store [k] of the server delivery information, and how much delivery per server information is at the store [k]. It shows the amount or the delivery performance. Therefore, based on the AV value, the frequency and performance of the advertisement can be estimated and presented as a status report.

  That is, AV is obtained for each k in the above-described estimation calculation subroutine (step S839), and this is set as AV [k] as distribution amount designation information for each store [k] or an average value of distribution results, The value (ΣAV [k] / number of distribution stores) obtained by adding AV [k] for k of the above and dividing by the number of distribution stores is obtained. Then, the value becomes the average value of the delivery amount designation information or delivery results of the server delivery information in all stores, and the results such as the delivery amount or the number of times such as the frequency of advertisement actually performed in the store of the game hall. To represent. Therefore, server distribution information that has already been distributed (advertisements that have already been implemented) by presenting the distribution amount designation information of server distribution information in all stores or the average value of distribution results together with the estimated advertisement fee ), It is possible to estimate the frequency and performance of actual advertisements and present them as status reports, and server distribution information (new advertisements that are about to be implemented) ) And advertisements that have not yet been submitted, it is possible to estimate the frequency and performance of advertisements that will be actually performed and to present them as status reports of other ongoing advertisements.

(c) Processing Operation for Distribution Quantity Designation Information Calculation Next, the processing operation for computing the distribution quantity designation information for each server distribution information of each store executed in the distribution server 800 will be described. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a distribution amount designation information calculation subroutine of the distribution server 800 that executes the distribution amount designation information calculation. In the distribution server 800, the program of the distribution amount designation information calculation subroutine is stored in the storage device, and the processing from the start to the return is performed when there is an activation request in step S816 in the main routine. 805 (information processing device and storage device) executes.

  In the distribution amount designation information calculation subroutine, first, initialization is performed with the value of k as the number of distribution stores and the value of i as the number of distribution information (steps S850 and S851). Here, k, i, the number of distribution stores, and the number of distribution information are synonymous with those in the estimation calculation subroutine, and k is initialized to the number of distribution stores that is the total number of stores that distribute server distribution information. Is initialized to the number of distribution information which is the total number of server distribution information.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of k is 0 or less (step S852), it is determined that the value of k immediately after initialization is not 0 or less (the determination result in step S852 is “No”), and then It is determined whether or not the value of i is 0 or less (step S853). It is determined that the value of i immediately after initialization is not 0 or less (the determination result in step S853 is “No”). It is determined whether or not (step S854). That is, it is determined whether or not the server distribution information [i] is distribution information distributed at the store [k]. This determination is performed according to the distribution conditions of the server distribution information [i] in the same manner as the determination in the estimate calculation subroutine (step S836) (for example, if the distribution area is specified in the distribution conditions, the store [k] Judgment is based on whether or not it is in the distribution area.

  Here, when the server distribution information [i] is distribution information distributed at the store [k] (when the determination result in step S854 is “Yes”), the server is set according to the set desired distribution amount designation information. The delivery amount designation information [k] [i] is updated (step S855). The desired delivery amount designation information here is the desired delivery amount designation information transmitted together with the server delivery information [i] by the advertisement requester or news delivery source of the server delivery information [i] at the time of submission. As described above, it is stored in the storage device of the distribution server 800 (step S813 in the main routine) and set as desired distribution amount designation information of the server distribution information [i]. The server delivery amount designation information [k] [i] is information for the delivery server 800 to designate the delivery amount of the server delivery information [i] for the store [k]. This server delivery amount designation information [k] ] [i] is updated by making the desired delivery amount designation information set in the server delivery information [i].

  In addition, following the update of the server distribution amount designation information [k] [i], the server distribution information distribution condition [k] [i] is also updated according to the set distribution condition (step S856). The distribution conditions mentioned here are the distribution conditions sent by the advertiser or news distribution source of the server distribution information [i] together with the server distribution information [i] at the time of submission, etc. It is stored in the storage device of the server 800 (step S813 in the main routine) and set as a distribution condition for the server distribution information [i]. The distribution condition [k] [i] is information that the distribution server 800 notifies the distribution condition of the server distribution information [i] to the store [k]. The distribution condition [k] [i] is the server It is updated by making the distribution conditions set in the distribution information [i].

  When the server distribution information [i] is distribution information distributed at the store [k], the server distribution amount designation information [k] [i] and the distribution condition [k] [i] are updated in this way, , I is decremented by 1 (the determination result in step S854 is “Yes”, the flow proceeds to steps S855 and S856, and then the flow proceeds to step S857).

  On the other hand, if the server distribution information [i] is not distribution information distributed at the store [k], the server distribution amount designation information [k] [i] is set to 0, and then the value of i is decremented by 1 ( The determination result in step S854 is “No”, and the process proceeds to step S858, and then the process proceeds to step S857. Setting the server delivery amount designation information [k] [i] to 0 means that the delivery amount of the server delivery information [i] designated by the delivery server 800 for the store [k] is 0, that is, the store [k]. Then, server distribution information [i] is not distributed.

  Then, it is determined again whether or not the decremented value of i is 0 or less (from step S857 to step S853), and the same processing as described above is executed again. Since i is the number of distribution information that is the total number of server distribution information at the time of initialization, it is an integer of 1 or more unless the number of distribution information is decremented, and the value is determined not to be 0 or less. (The determination result in step S853 is “No”.) As a result, the server delivery amount designation information [k] [i] is updated depending on whether or not the server delivery information [i] is delivery information at the store [k], and the value of i is decremented. The processing operation for determining whether it is 0 or less (the processing operation in steps S853 to S858) is repeated.

  By repeating this processing operation, server delivery amount designation information [k] [i] and delivery conditions [k] [i] are set for each server delivery information [i] delivered at the store [k]. The server delivery amount designation information [k] [i] is set to 0 for each server delivery information [i] that is updated to the desired delivery amount designation information and delivery conditions that are not delivered at the store [k]. The value of i is determined to be 0 or less when the number of distribution information is decremented (i becomes 0 and the determination result in step S853 becomes “Yes”), and then the value of k Is decremented by 1 and the value of i is set again to the number of distribution information as in the initialization (step S859). When i is decremented by the number of pieces of distribution information, the above processing operations such as the update of the server distribution amount designation information [k] [i] are completed for all the server distribution information, and the server distribution information of the store [k] Each delivery amount designation information (and a delivery condition when the delivery amount designation information is not 0) is specified.

  Then, it is determined again whether or not the decremented value of k is 0 or less (from step S859 to step S852), and the above-described processing after the determination is executed again. Since k is the number of distribution stores that is the total number of stores that distribute server distribution information at the time of initialization, it is an integer of 1 or more unless the number of distribution stores is decremented, and the value is not 0 or less. (The determination result in step S852 is “No”). As a result, the server delivery amount designation information [k] [i] is updated as described above, and it is determined whether or not i is set to the number of pieces of delivery information and the value of k is decremented to 0 or less. The processing operation (processing operation from step S852 to step S859) is repeated.

  By repeating this processing operation, the delivery amount designation information for each server delivery information of each store [k] (and the delivery condition when the delivery amount designation information is not 0) is sequentially specified. Then, the value of k is determined to be 0 or less when the number of distribution stores is decremented (k becomes 0 and the determination result in step S852 becomes “Yes”). When k is decremented by the number of distribution stores, distribution amount designation information for each server distribution information of all stores (and distribution conditions when the distribution amount designation information is not 0) is specified, and the distribution amount designation is thereby performed. The processing of the information calculation subroutine ends, returns and returns to the main routine.

  The above is the processing operation of the distribution amount designation information calculation subroutine. In the main routine after returning, the distribution amount designation information and distribution conditions for each server distribution information of each store specified by the above-mentioned distribution amount designation information calculation are displayed. The information is transmitted through the information distribution network 850 (step S817). That is, the distribution server 800 provides the distribution control device 90 of each store [k] with the server distribution amount designation information [distribution amount designation information for each server distribution information and the distribution conditions for each server distribution information in the main routine. k] [i] and distribution condition [k] [i] are transmitted. And the delivery control apparatus 90 which receives those delivery amount designation | designated information etc. performs the information delivery in each store with the following structures and operation | movement.

3. Distribution Control Device (1) Configuration A distribution control device of an information distribution system is configured by a computer or the like in which a program that defines processing to be described later is installed, and a predetermined input device, information processing device, storage device, and display device And a communication interface.

  Here, the input device includes input means such as a keyboard and a pointing device, and accepts character input, selection input, and the like by an administrator or the like and supplies them to the information processing device. The information processing apparatus is composed of arithmetic means such as a CPU for executing various internal arithmetic processes, a non-volatile memory such as a ROM storing system information and the like, and a semiconductor memory such as a RAM storing updatable information. Storage means and various control operations that control various internal operations and information exchange with the outside, and execute various types of information processing according to the input from the input device and the contents of installed programs, etc. It serves as the core for processing various types of information in the operations described below. The storage device is configured by storage means such as a hard disk in which information such as installed program files and various data files are stored, and keeps the information as necessary. The display device includes display means such as a liquid crystal display and a CRT display, and displays predetermined information under the control of the information processing device. The communication interface is configured by a port, a modem, or the like for connecting to a communication line or another device, and is responsible for information communication through the information distribution network 850 and the network of each store corresponding to the network 8.

  FIG. 34 is a functional block diagram showing the main configuration of the distribution control apparatus 90 realized by such various apparatuses. As shown in this figure, the distribution control apparatus 90 includes a control unit 901, an input / output information processing unit 902, a store distribution information management unit 903, an estimation processing unit 904, and a distribution amount designation unit 905.

  The control unit 901 is a functional block realized by the information processing device, the storage device, and the communication interface. The calculation unit of the information processing device mainly uses programs, data, and the like stored in the ROM, RAM, and the storage device. The present invention relates to a part that executes various arithmetic processes. The control unit 901 exchanges information between the functional blocks of the input / output information processing unit 902, the store distribution information management unit 903, the estimation processing unit 904, and the distribution amount designation unit 905 as necessary, via the information distribution network 850. Information input / output with the distribution server 800 and information input / output with each distribution terminal via the store network are controlled. The network of stores referred to here is the networks 8A, 8B, 8C, 8D to 8E, etc., and in these networks, the devices that are actually connected and the information to be transmitted are different for each store. However, they all correspond to the network 8 and have the same technical configuration and operation, and therefore will be simply referred to as “network 8” in the following description.

  The input / output information processing unit 902 is a functional block realized by the information processing device and the communication interface, and performs input / output processing of information transmitted and received by the distribution control device 90. Main information to be transmitted / received is information exchanged with the distribution server 800 via the information distribution network 850, information exchanged with each distribution terminal via the network 8, and the like.

  The store distribution information management unit 903 is a functional block realized by the input device, the information processing device, the storage device, and the communication interface. is there.

  The estimate processing unit 904 is a functional block realized by the information processing device, the storage device, and the communication interface. Execute. That is, the estimation processing unit 904 is a functional block similar to the estimation processing unit 804 of the distribution server 800, and the distribution control device 90 can perform the above-described estimation calculation processing operation in the same manner as the distribution server 800. It is like that.

  In current network computing, software processing can be performed only by a specific computer, and can be performed by any computer connected to the network. Therefore, the processing of the above-described estimation calculation subroutine is not limited to the distribution server 800, but can be executed by any computer connected to the distribution network 850. For example, it may be performed on the distribution control device 90 side. . Accordingly, the distribution control device 90 includes an estimation processing unit 904 that executes an estimation calculation of an advertisement fee, similarly to the distribution server 800, and executes the above-described estimation calculation subroutine processing as necessary to estimate advertisements. The fee can be presented.

  The delivery amount designation unit 905 is a functional block realized by the information processing device, the storage device, and the communication interface, and designates each delivery information delivered from the delivery control device 90 to each delivery terminal to each delivery terminal. Executes calculation of delivery volume.

(2) Operation
(a) Processing Operation of Main Routine Next, the operation of the distribution control device 90 having the above configuration will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of a main routine executed in the distribution control apparatus 90. In the distribution control device 90, the main routine program is stored in the storage device, and the high-speed processing operation in which the information processing device or the like executes the processing from the start to the return in 0.01 ms or the like is repeated.

  In the main routine of the distribution control device 90, first, on-time reception of advertisement and news distribution, server distribution information, distribution amount designation information for each server distribution information, and distribution conditions for each server distribution information is received (step S910). Information such as distribution distribution is transmitted to the distribution control device 90 of each store during the main routine of the distribution server 800 described above (step S817), and the distribution control device 90 distributes the store. Information such as distribution distribution transmitted from the distribution server 800 to the control device (addressed to the distribution control device 90) through the information distribution network 850 is received. However, transmission such as distribution distribution from the distribution server 800 is a scheduled output as described above. For example, the distribution server 800 performs transmission control every predetermined time such as every hour or every day in the morning. The device 90 performs scheduled reception according to the scheduled transmission from the distribution server 800 by the scheduled output (thus, it is not always received every time the main routine is executed, but when there is a scheduled transmission from the distribution server 800) In addition to the distribution amount designation information and the distribution conditions, the information such as the accompanying type is received as well as the server distribution information, but after receiving such information once, each information As long as there is no change, it is not necessary to receive it again. Therefore, in the second and subsequent scheduled output from the distribution server 800, the changed information and the step S8 in FIG. Newly transmitted trafficked server distribution information and distribution amount specified information or the like only at 3, may be to deliver the control device receiving 90 their information in step S910 of FIG. 35.).

  In the processing of the main routine that follows, the distribution control device 90 accepts an input of “distribution distribution for stores: distribution distribution of advertisements and news” (step S911). The distribution control device 90 distributes the received advertisement and news of the server distribution information as terminal distribution information [i] [m] to the distribution terminal. The company's service information that the game hall intends to provide is mixed into the terminal distribution information [i] [m] and distributed by subsequent processing. For this reason, in the information distribution system, distribution distribution of store distribution information and information such as advertisements and news is designated by the distribution control device 90, and the distribution ratio is “distribution distribution for stores: distribution of advertisements and news, etc.” Distribution "can be input to the distribution control device 90.

  Here, distribution distribution for stores is distribution distribution of store distribution information, but distribution of advertisements and news is distribution distribution of all other information. That is, distribution of advertisements and news is distribution of information other than store distribution information. In this embodiment, distribution distribution of only server distribution information corresponds to this, but information other than store distribution information is actively used. (In other words, distribution of advertisements and news is simply distribution other than distribution for stores).

  In addition, as the distribution distribution to be specified, any distribution may be input. However, in the information distribution system, the range of distribution distribution that can be specified is determined in advance, and only the store distribution information is excessively distributed. In advance. For example, in the distribution control device 90, “distribution distribution for stores: distribution distribution of advertisements and news” is accepted within the range of “20 or less: 80 or more” (the distribution distribution distribution for stores can be up to 20 at the maximum). The distribution of advertisements and news is assumed to be at least 80), so that the range of distribution that can be specified is determined in advance. The distribution distribution input operation may be performed by the input device of the distribution control device 90, other peripheral devices, other terminals of the game hall that can access the distribution control device 90, or the like.

  The range of the distribution distribution that can be specified as the distribution distribution for the store may be determined as a fixed distribution in advance, but may be appropriately specified in the distribution server 800. For example, the distribution server 800 accepts the distribution distribution input of advertisements and news during the processing of the main routine described above (step S815 in FIG. 31), but at this time also accepts the limit value of distribution distribution for stores, The limit value of distribution distribution for stores is transmitted to the distribution control device 90 at each store by a scheduled output to the distribution control device 90 (step S817 in the figure), and the distribution control device 90 at each store receives the above-mentioned scheduled reception (FIG. 35). In step S910), in addition to the distribution of advertisements and news, etc., the distribution distribution limit value for stores is also received. As a result, distribution distribution of store service information and the like can be set in step S911 in FIG. 35 on the distribution control device 90 side, but the distribution server 800 side specifies a limit value for distribution distribution for stores that limits the range that can be set. It becomes possible to do.

  In this case, the input range of the store distribution distribution is 0 to the limit value of the store distribution distribution received (the limit value of the store distribution distribution input in step S815 in the main routine of the distribution server 800. For example, 0.2. )). That is, the distribution control device 90 does not accept an input of a numerical value exceeding the limit value (for example, a numerical value greater than 0.2) as the distribution distribution for the store. For example, when the distribution distribution for stores is limited to the range of 0 to 0.2, the distribution server 800 sets the limit value for distribution distribution for stores to 0.2 (in step S815 in FIG. 31) and sets each store. In the distribution control device 90 of each store that received the limit value in step S910 in FIG. 35, the above “distribution distribution for stores: advertisement and news, etc.” The distribution distribution for stores that can be accepted in the input reception of “distribution distribution” (step S911) is set to 20 at the maximum, and the distribution distribution of advertisements and news is set to 80 or more at a minimum. In addition, the distribution of advertisements and news is prohibited from being input here, and may be a value received from the distribution server (the distribution server 800 prohibits the distribution control apparatus 90 from inputting the distribution of advertisements and news, etc.). You may make it specify with.)

  Next, the distribution control device 90 determines whether or not the store distribution information has reached the store distribution limit (step S912). The store distribution limit here is the upper limit of the number of store distribution information distributed to the distribution terminal, and is determined according to the distribution distribution for the store. For example, when the store distribution limit is determined in proportion to the store distribution distribution and the total number of distribution information is 100, if the store distribution distribution input in step S911 is 20, the store distribution limit is 20, If the distribution distribution is 15, the store distribution limit is 15, and if the distribution distribution is 10, the store distribution limit is 10.

  Now, assuming that the total number of store distribution information is less than the store distribution limit, the distribution control device 90 determines that the store distribution information has not reached the store distribution limit (the determination result in step S912 is “No” is set), and the submission of the store distribution information is accepted within the range of the store distribution limit (step S913). In the distribution of store distribution information, service information (advertising such as various events, discounts, recommended game machines, recommended prizes, etc.) Information that the store intends to distribute independently, such as an advertisement requested by a store or restaurant nearby the store, is input from the input device of the distribution control device 90, and the distribution control device 90 is within the range of the store distribution limit. Is newly stored in the storage device as store distribution information. In addition, when submitting store delivery information, the desired delivery amount designation information and delivery conditions are also input for each store delivery information to be submitted, and those information is requested for each store delivery information submitted by the delivery control device 90. The distribution amount designation information and distribution conditions are stored in the storage device. At this time, information related to the store distribution information such as the type is also input and stored in the storage device.

  On the other hand, when the total number of store distribution information is the number of stores distribution limit information, the distribution control device 90 determines that the store distribution information has reached the distribution limit (the determination result in step S912 is “Yes”). ”And accepts the deletion of the already-stored store distribution information (step S914). That is, the delivery control device 90 deletes the store delivery information submitted in the past that has become unnecessary for delivery by inputting a delete instruction from the input device or the like (erase from the storage device or store delivery information to be delivered). Can not be treated as). When this deletion is performed, the total number of store distribution information becomes smaller than the number of store distribution limit information, so that the distribution control device 90 performs the deletion by determining whether or not the deletion of the store distribution information is accepted (step S915). If accepted, the submission of the store distribution information is accepted within the range of the store distribution limit in the same manner as described above (the determination result in step S915 is “Yes” and the process proceeds to step S913).

  The distribution control device 90 has a case where the store distribution information has not reached the store distribution limit as described above, and a case where the store distribution information has been deleted but has not been reached (if the result of deletion is that it has not reached). The store delivery information submission is accepted, and then the delivery NG message deletion information reception process is performed (step S916). If the store distribution information has reached the store distribution limit and is not deleted, reception processing of the deletion information of the distribution NG wording is performed without accepting submission of the store distribution information (the determination result in step S915 is “ No "is determined and the process proceeds to step S916).

  The deletion information of the distribution NG wording is transmitted to the distribution control device 90 that has transmitted the store distribution information including the distribution NG wording during the main routine of the distribution server 800 described above (step S811). The store delivery information including the wording is specified and the deletion is instructed. Therefore, when the distribution control device 90 receives the deletion information of the distribution NG wording, the distribution NG wording is deleted from the terminal distribution information. However, the distribution control device 90 calculates the distribution amount designation information for each terminal distribution information. In this process, terminal distribution information is distributed to each distribution terminal. Therefore, the distribution control device 90 does not use the store distribution information with the distribution NG word indicated by the received deletion information in the calculation of the distribution amount designation information for each terminal distribution information, so that the distribution NG wording from the terminal distribution information. Is deleted.

Next, in the distribution control device 90, the distribution amount designation unit 905 executes distribution amount designation information calculation and distribution result aggregation for each terminal distribution information (step S917). In this distribution amount designation information calculation and distribution result totalization, all the distribution information of both store distribution information and server distribution information is set as terminal distribution information, and the distribution amount designation information of each terminal distribution information is calculated, and those distribution information is calculated. This is a process of counting the distribution results of terminal distribution information, but is executed by a subroutine process activated in the main routine of the distribution control apparatus 90, and the contents will be specifically described later with reference to another flowchart. To do.

  Then, the distribution control device 90 stores the store distribution information itself, the store distribution amount designation information, the distribution condition for each store distribution information, the distribution record of the store distribution information, the distribution fee of the store distribution information, the distribution record of the server distribution information, and each attribute. The distribution amount designation information average and the distribution result average for each attribute are transmitted to the distribution server 800 (step S918). That is, the distribution control device 90 instructs the distribution server 800 to store distribution information itself that has been submitted in step S913 (mainly, store distribution information itself that has been newly submitted), and to specify a distribution amount in step S917. Store distribution amount designation information indicating distribution amount designation information of terminal distribution information at the store by information calculation, distribution conditions input for each store distribution information, and distribution results of store distribution information by aggregation of distribution results in step S917, The distribution fee of the store distribution information, the distribution result of the server distribution information, the average distribution amount designation information for each attribute, and the average distribution result for each attribute are transmitted through the information distribution network 850. Thereby, in the distribution control device 90, the processing of the main routine returns and the process returns to the start, but information such as the store distribution information itself is transmitted from the distribution control device 90 of each store through the information distribution network 850, and is described above. This information is received during the main routine of the distribution server 800 (step S810).

  The processing operation of the main routine in the distribution control device 90 is as described above, but the form of the processing operation as the distribution control device of the information distribution system is not limited to the above-described form. For example, in step S913, the submission of the store distribution information is accepted, but in addition to this, a predetermined operation from the input device is performed after the specification of the desired distribution amount and the distribution condition (either or both) of the store distribution information is submitted. It may be changed by input or the like. Such a designation change of the desired delivery amount is accepted not only when the store delivery information has not reached the store delivery limit, but also when the store delivery information has reached the store delivery limit, and is designated by the delivery control device 90. You may make it update desired delivery amount designation | designated information etc. according to a change. Further, the deletion of the input store distribution information is not limited to the case where the store distribution information has reached the store distribution limit as described above, and may be appropriately accepted as necessary.

  As described above, the distribution of advertisements and news distribution (step S910) is performed every hour or every predetermined time such as the first day of the morning, but other processes are always executed every time the main routine is executed. It does not have to be performed, but may be performed as necessary. For example, even if the store distribution information does not reach the store distribution limit, if there is no new service information to be notified in the store, the new store distribution information is not submitted (step S913 above), The store distribution distribution: distribution of advertisements and news distribution "(step S911 described above) may be accepted when the administrator or the like intends to specify distribution distribution as necessary.

  Note that some store distribution information is stored in advance in the storage device of the distribution control device 90 at the start of operation of the information distribution system in the store, and after the operation starts, submission of store distribution information is accepted as described above. It is also possible to appropriately delete those that are no longer required for distribution. Alternatively, store distribution information is not stored in advance at the start of operation, but as described above, submission of store distribution information is accepted at any time after the start of operation, and items that become unnecessary for distribution are deleted as appropriate. It may be a thing.

  However, the newly submitted store distribution information is transmitted to the distribution server 800 in step S918, and is used for calculation of the distribution amount designation information after it is determined that no instruction to delete the distribution NG wording is given. For this reason, the store distribution information newly submitted in step S913 is not used for the calculation of the distribution amount designation information executed in step S917 immediately after that, but is transmitted to the distribution server 800 and deleted in the subsequent step S918. Even if it is to be used for calculation of delivery amount designation information when there is no return of information, or it is used to calculate delivery amount designation information immediately after submission, as soon as deletion information is received, delivery amount designation information Or exclude it from the calculation target.

(b) Processing Operation for Distribution Amount Designation Information Calculation and Distribution Result Aggregation Next, processing operation for distribution amount designation information calculation and distribution result aggregation for each terminal distribution information executed in the distribution control device 90 will be described. In the delivery amount designation information calculation, all delivery information of both store delivery information and server delivery information is used as terminal delivery information, and the delivery control device 90 delivers each terminal delivery information as a server that delivers information on the store side. Recalculate the quantity specification information. Further, in the distribution result totalization, the distribution results of the terminal distribution information are totaled, and the average distribution result for each attribute is calculated. FIG. 36 shows a distribution amount designation information calculation subroutine of the distribution control apparatus 90 that executes the distribution amount designation information calculation and distribution result aggregation (including distribution amount aggregation processing. Since most of the processing operations are distribution amount designation information calculation, the distribution amount It is a figure showing a flowchart of a designation information calculation subroutine. In the distribution control device 90, the program of the distribution amount designation information calculation subroutine is stored in the storage device, and the processing from the start to the return is designated when there is an activation request in step S917 in the main routine. The unit 905 (information processing device, storage device, and communication interface) executes.

  In the distribution amount designation information calculation subroutine, first, initialization is performed with the value of m as the number of in-store distribution terminals and the value of i as the number of distribution information (steps S920 and S921). Here, m is an integer representing a terminal number assigned in order by the distribution control device 90 to a distribution terminal in a store that distributes terminal distribution information. As described above, the terminal numbers are the pachinko machine 2, the inter-machines 3, 4 and 6, the slot machine 5, the island computer 7, the counter 9, the checkout machine 10, the prize management machine (POS) 11, and the replay accepting machine 12. , Management device 13, issuing machine 20, data display machine 21, out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 also having a function as a data publishing machine, wireless communication system 23, etc. It is initialized to the number of in-store distribution terminals (maximum value of terminal numbers), which is the total number of those distribution terminals. i is an integer representing an information number sequentially assigned to the terminal distribution information. The information number is assigned to all the distribution information of both the store distribution information and the server distribution information, and i is the total number of terminal distribution information in the store including the store distribution information in addition to the server distribution information. Initialized to a certain number of distribution information (maximum value of information number).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of m is 0 or less (step S922), it is determined that the value of m immediately after initialization is not 0 or less (the determination result in step S922 is “No”), and then It is determined whether the value of i is 0 or less (step S923), it is determined that the value of i immediately after initialization is not 0 or less (the determination result in step S923 is “No”), and the terminal [m] (Distribution terminal of terminal number m. The same applies hereinafter.) From attribute designation information [i] [m], distribution results of each terminal distribution information [i] [m] and distribution of each terminal distribution information [i] [m] A fee is received (step S924). These pieces of information are transmitted to the distribution control device 90 via the network 8 during the operation of each of the distribution terminals described above (step SD2 or step SD5).

  Next, the delivery control device 90 calculates delivery amount designation information [i] based on the designated delivery distribution and desired delivery amount designation information for the terminal delivery information of the information number i to be delivered to the terminal [m] (step S925). Since the terminal distribution information is distributed differently depending on whether it is store distribution information or server distribution information, the distribution amount designation information [i] is calculated according to which distribution information the terminal distribution information of information number i is. .

That is, when the terminal distribution information of the information number i is store distribution information such as advertisements as service information input at the store or news related to the store,
Distribution amount specification information [i] = Distribution distribution for stores x Distribution distribution of advertisements and news
X It is set as the desired delivery amount designation information that has been input. Here, the store distribution distribution is distribution distribution of the store distribution information designated and input in step S911 in the main routine. The distribution of advertisement and news is the distribution of distribution received from the distribution server 800 in step S910 in the main routine. If the terminal distribution information is an advertisement, the distribution distribution specified for the advertisement by the distribution server 800 is multiplied. If the terminal distribution information is content such as news, the distribution server 800 multiplies the distribution distribution specified for the news. The desired delivery amount designation information set as input is the desired delivery amount designation information of the store delivery information inputted at the time of submission in step S913 in the main routine.

For example, when the delivery amount designation information [i] is represented by a display frequency by a numerical value such as 1/30, the distribution proportion of the store is multiplied by 0.2 of the proportion of distribution, and the designation of distribution of advertisement and news is 2 : 8, the advertisement and news distribution are further multiplied by 0.2 for advertisements and by 0.8 for content such as news. Then, as the desired delivery amount designation information that has been input and set, the distribution amount designation information [i], which is the delivery distribution for the store delivery information, is further multiplied by the distribution ratio of the store delivery information to the delivery amount of the entire store delivery information. . Therefore, the distribution distribution for the store is 0.2, the distribution distribution specification for advertisement and news is 2: 8, the desired distribution amount designation information set for the store distribution information is 0.5, and the store distribution information is the advertisement. If so, the delivery amount designation information [i] is 0.2 × 0.2 × 0.5 = 0.02 (2%). If the store delivery information is content such as news, the delivery amount designation information [i] ] Is 0.2 × 0.8 × 0.5 = 0.08 (8%). However, for store distribution information, it is also possible to adopt the form of distribution amount designation information [i] = store distribution distribution × number of input store distribution information / store distribution limit (the store distribution limit is The upper limit of the number of distribution information, that is, the total number of store distribution information that can be input.)

On the other hand, when the terminal distribution information of the information number i is server distribution information,
Distribution amount specification information [i] = Distribution distribution other than for stores x Distribution distribution of advertisements and news
X Received delivery amount designation information from the delivery server. Here, the distribution distribution other than the store distribution is the distribution of advertisements and news inputted and designated in step S911 in the main routine, and the distribution of advertisements and news is synonymous with the case of the store distribution information. is there. The received delivery amount designation information from the delivery server is the delivery amount designation information of the server delivery information received from the delivery server 800 in step S910 in the main routine.

  For example, when the delivery amount designation information [i] is represented by a display frequency by a numerical value such as 1/30, the distribution proportion other than the store is multiplied by 0.8 as a distribution proportion, and the distribution of advertisement and news is designated. Is 2: 8, the distribution of advertisement and news is further multiplied by 0.2 and the content such as news is multiplied by 0.8. Then, as the received distribution amount designation information from the distribution server, the distribution amount designation information [i], which is the distribution distribution for the server distribution information, is further multiplied by the distribution ratio of the server distribution information to the distribution amount of the entire server distribution information. To do. Therefore, the distribution distribution other than the store distribution is 0.8, the advertisement and news distribution distribution specification is 2: 8, the received distribution amount designation information of the server distribution information is 0.03, and the server distribution information is an advertisement. If so, the delivery amount designation information [i] is 0.8 × 0.2 × 0.03 = 0.2048≈0.005 (0.5%), and if the store delivery information is content such as news, delivery is performed. The quantity designation information [i] is 0.8 × 0.8 × 0.03 = 0.0192≈0.019 (1.9%).

  The distribution control device 90 that calculated the distribution amount designation information [i] in this way next determines the distribution attribute of the terminal [m] (step S926). This distribution attribute determination is performed based on the attribute designation information [i] [m] received from the terminal [m] in step S924. The attribute designation information [i] [m] is transmitted when there is an input for designating an attribute desired to be distributed (such as an attribute of a player who wants to distribute information of a specific genre) at the terminal [m] as described above. (Step SD5).

  The attributes of the player are managed for each card ID of the player such as the IC card 30 for the member. In the game hall management system 1, the address, name, age, gender, favorite game stand of the member player , Contact information, personal identification number, and the like are managed as attribute information. The employee attributes can be managed by the ID of the store clerk card 32 or the like. In the information distribution system, the genre (type) of information desired to be distributed is specified in advance as a genre corresponding to each attribute, and each terminal distribution information corresponds to the genre to which each terminal distribution information belongs. The attribute to be specified is specified in advance. Examples of genres to which each attribute corresponds include genres (information types) such as entertainment, sports, politics, and travel. Of these genres, information indicating the genre of information desired to be distributed may be managed as attribute information corresponding to the card ID of the player or employee (the genre desired to be distributed in the attribute information). Information may be included.) The above-mentioned type stored as information related to each piece of distribution information in the distribution server 800 or the distribution control device 90 corresponds to information indicating the genre of information desired to be distributed here, and therefore the type corresponding to the card ID. It is also possible to adopt a form in which the above information is managed and used as attribute designation information, which will be described later.

  The terminal [m] transmits the attribute designation information [i] [m] when there is information input designating the corresponding attribute such as the card ID. For example, when the member IC card 30 is inserted in the inter-station machine 3, the ID is transmitted to the management device 13, and information corresponding to the ID of the inserted member IC card 30 is received from the management device 13. It is transmitted to the intercom unit 3 (step S318 in FIG. 12). Thereby, the inter-machine 3 acquires attribute information corresponding to the transmitted ID, and transmits attribute designation information [i] [m] according to the attribute of the player who has inserted the member IC card 30 (FIG. Step SD5 in 12). The data display device 21 displays game machine data. When a card such as a member IC card 30 is inserted, the attribute information indicating that the type of the game machine displaying the data is the preferred game machine is used. Attribute designation information [i] [m] is transmitted. On the other hand, when the management device 13 issues the member IC card 30, the player's gender, age, address, name, favorite game machine, pachinko history or slot history, and hall information (such as the above service information) are stored. Since whether mail delivery is possible is input as attribute information, attribute designation information [i] [m] is transmitted in accordance with these attributes.

  In this way, the attribute designation information [i] [m] transmitted from the terminal [m] is whether or not the terminal distribution information of the information number i is information corresponding to the attribute designated in the terminal [m]. Whether or not the information of the genre being used is). However, when the information indicating the corresponding attribute of each terminal distribution information is not obtained on the terminal [m] side, information on the specified attribute itself is transmitted from the terminal [m]. The attribute designation information [i] [m] may be obtained from the received attribute information itself. Then, the distribution control device 90 sets the distribution attribute of the terminal [m] based on whether or not the attribute of the terminal distribution information of the information number i is specified by the terminal [m] based on the attribute specifying information [i] [m]. The terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] of the terminal delivery information [i] [m] with the information number i to be delivered to the terminal [m] is calculated (steps S926, S927, and S928 in FIG. 36). .

Now, assuming that the terminal distribution information [i] [m] is the attribute information specified by the terminal [m] based on the attribute specification information [i] [m], the distribution control device 90 corresponds to the attribute. The terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] giving the increased amount due to the determination is calculated (the determination result in step S926 is “Yes” and the process proceeds to step S927). That is,
Terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] = delivery amount designation information [i] × attribute increase amount. Here, the delivery amount designation information [i] is the delivery amount designation information calculated in step S925. The attribute increase is a coefficient that gives an increase corresponding to the attribute, and can be arbitrarily set (for example, 1.5).

On the other hand, if the terminal distribution information [i] [m] is not information of the attribute specified by the terminal [m] by the attribute specifying information [i] [m], the distribution control device 90 corresponds to the attribute. The terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] that has been reduced by the amount that has not been reduced is calculated (the determination result in step S926 is “No” and processing proceeds to step S928). That is,
Terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] = delivery amount designation information [i] × non-attribute reduction. Here, the delivery amount designation information [i] is the delivery amount designation information calculated in step S925 as described above. Non-attribute weight loss is a coefficient for weight loss due to attribute non-applicability. The attribute weight gain divided by the number of non-attribute genres (number of categories) may be reduced, or the attribute weight gain may be reduced to the number of genres of all attributes. The amount divided by (number of types) may be reduced. The terminal [m] is a game hall device such as a pedestal machine, and the amount of information that can be displayed is determined (details will be described later, but the distribution information displayed on the terminal [m] is text information by telop) Therefore, the non-attribute weight loss that prevents the sum of the specified delivery amounts from changing is used as a coefficient. Therefore, the attribute increase here is the total increase in the terminal delivery amount designation information to the terminal [m] that increases due to the attribute increase, and the non-attribute decrease is the non-attribute terminal distribution. The amount divided by the number of information (the total number of terminal distribution information not corresponding to the attribute specified by the terminal [m]) may be reduced.

  In this manner, the distribution control device 90 calculates the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] of the terminal distribution information [i] [m], and then decrements the value of i by 1 (step S929). Then, it is determined again whether or not the decremented value of i is 0 or less (from step S929 to step S923), and the same processing as described above is executed again. Since i is the number of distribution information that is the total number of terminal distribution information (server distribution information and store distribution information) at the store at the time of initialization, it is an integer of 1 or more unless the number of distribution information is decremented. It is determined that the value is not 0 or less (the determination result in step S923 is “No”). As a result, the terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] is calculated in the same manner as described above, and the processing operation for determining whether or not the value of i is 0 or less after the value of i is decremented (processing operation from step S923 to step S929). repeat.

  By repeating this processing operation, terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] is sequentially calculated for each piece of terminal delivery information [i] [m] delivered to the terminal [m]. When several minutes are decremented, it is determined that the value is 0 or less (i becomes 0 and the determination result in step S923 becomes “Yes”). When i is decremented by the number of pieces of distribution information, calculation of terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] is completed for all terminal distribution information [i] [m] distributed to terminal [m]. The distribution control device 90 transmits the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] and the like to the terminal [m] (step S930). That is, the distribution control device 90 sends the terminal distribution information [i] [m] of each information number i, each terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] calculated, and each terminal distribution condition [i] [m] (each Terminal distribution information [i] [m] distribution conditions) is transmitted to the terminal [m] through the network 8.

  Thereafter, the value of m is decremented by 1 and the value of i is again set as the number of distribution information as in the initialization (step S931). Then, it is determined again whether or not the decremented value of m is 0 or less (from step S931 to step S922), and the above-described processing after the determination is executed again. Since m is the number of in-store distribution terminals, which is the total number of distribution terminals at the time of initialization, it is an integer of 1 or more unless the number of in-store distribution terminals is decremented, and the value is not 0 or less. The determination is made (the determination result in step S922 is “No”). As a result, similarly to the above, calculation of the terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m], terminal delivery information [i] [m], terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m], and terminal delivery condition [i] [m Is transmitted to the terminal [m], i is again set as the number of pieces of distribution information, and the value of m is decremented, and then it is determined whether or not it is 0 or less (the processing operations in steps S922 to S931) )repeat.

  By repeating this processing operation, terminal distribution information [i] [m], terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] and terminal distribution conditions [i] [m] are sequentially transmitted to each terminal [m], The value of m is determined to be equal to or less than 0 when the number of in-store distribution terminals is decremented (m becomes 0 and the determination result in step S922 is “Yes”). When m decrements are made for the number of distribution terminals in the store, distribution of attribute designation information [i] [m], distribution results of each terminal distribution information [i] [m], and distribution of each terminal distribution information [i] [m] Charges are received from all distribution terminals (terminal [0], terminal [1],..., Terminal [last m of the store]) (step S924), and terminal distribution information [i] [ m], terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m], and terminal delivery conditions [i] [m] have been transmitted (step S930). In the distribution amount designation information calculation subroutine, the processing up to this point is the distribution amount designation information calculation processing, and the distribution control device 90 then performs distribution result aggregation processing (the determination result in step S922 is “Yes”). After that, go to step S932).

  In the distribution record totaling process, the distribution control apparatus 90 distributes each terminal distribution information [i] [m] received from each terminal [m] in step S924 and the distribution of each terminal distribution information [i] [m]. Based on the fee, etc., the distribution average calculation for each attribute is performed. Specifically, since the distribution control device 90 knows in advance whether the terminal distribution information of each information number i is store distribution information or server distribution information, the distribution record of each received terminal distribution information [i] [m] Based on the distribution fee of each terminal distribution information [i] [m], the distribution result of store distribution information, the distribution fee for each store distribution information, and the distribution result of server distribution information are totaled. That is, from the distribution record and distribution fee of each terminal distribution information [i] [m] received from each terminal [m] in the above step S924, the distribution record (actually, each terminal [m] for each information number i). Display frequency, number of times of actual display, etc.) and distribution charges are totaled. Thereby, the distribution record for each server distribution information received in step S910 (distribution record obtained by summing up distribution records in all distribution terminals) is calculated, and the distribution record for each store distribution information input in step S913 is calculated. Calculate the distribution fee (distribution results obtained by adding up distribution results at all distribution terminals and distribution fees obtained by adding up distribution fees at all distribution terminals). In addition, since it is known in advance which attribute the terminal distribution information of each information number i corresponds to, the distribution result average for each attribute is calculated based on the distribution result of each received terminal distribution information [i] [m]. calculate.

  Furthermore, the distribution control device 90 receives the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] of each terminal distribution information [i] [m] obtained by the distribution amount designation information calculation process in the distribution record totaling process. The distribution information [i] [m] is summed for each corresponding attribute (genre or type), and the sum of each corresponding attribute is divided by the number of distribution information belonging to each corresponding attribute to average the distribution amount designation information for each attribute. In addition, the store delivery amount designation information is specified or calculated. Specifically, which attribute the terminal distribution information of each information number i corresponds to (the type information for each server distribution information received in step S910 and the type for each store distribution information input in step S913) And the corresponding attribute of each terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] is also identified, so that each terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] Based on those corresponding attributes, the average of the delivery amount designation information for each attribute is calculated. The store delivery amount designation information is specified or calculated as information to notify the delivery server 800 of the delivery amount designation information of each terminal delivery information at the store. For example, for each terminal delivery information of each information number i The average of the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] may be calculated and the average may be used as the store distribution amount designation information of each terminal distribution information. Alternatively, the distribution amount designation information [i] obtained during the calculation of the distribution amount designation information may be used as the store distribution amount designation information of each terminal distribution information.

  In the distribution control device 90, when such distribution result totaling processing is completed, the processing of the distribution amount designation information calculation subroutine returns and returns to the start. Distribution results of store distribution information obtained by processing of distribution result aggregation, distribution fee of store distribution information, distribution results of server distribution information, average of distribution results for each attribute, average of distribution amount designation information for each attribute, etc. This information is transmitted to the distribution server 800 during the main routine (step S918).

  Therefore, in the distribution server 800 that has received such information (in step 810 of FIG. 31), the distribution is performed according to the attribute for each card ID such as an IC card used in each store as an average distribution result for each attribute. For each genre (various type) of information such as desired entertainment, sports, politics, travel, etc., it is possible to grasp the average of distribution results for each store, and as an average of distribution amount designation information for each attribute, for example, For each genre of information such as entertainment, sports, politics, travel, etc. that is desired to be distributed according to the attribute for each card ID such as an IC card used in each store, grasp the average of the delivery amount designation information for each store be able to. In addition, since distribution results of store distribution information, distribution fees for each store distribution information, and distribution results of server distribution information can be obtained, the distribution server 800 can provide each of the content distribution source such as the advertisement requester, news, and the game hall. An information distribution fee such as an advertisement fee or a content distribution fee can be settled for the store through the external communication network 92 or the information distribution network 850.

  Furthermore, according to the processing for calculating the delivery amount designation information, the store side reduces the delivery amount of server delivery information from the delivery server 800 (for example, 100% server delivery information is reduced to 80%), and Since the service information and the advertising information of nearby shops or restaurants can be included in the information to be distributed, the distribution amount designation information different from the distribution amount designation information initially designated on the distribution server 800 side is included in the server distribution information. It will be applied to. For this reason, the distribution server 800 cannot calculate a correct estimated advertisement fee by the above-mentioned estimate calculation subroutine unless the distribution amount designation information of each distribution information at each store is acquired. Stores the delivery amount designation information for notifying the delivery server 800 of the delivery amount designation information of each terminal delivery information at each store, so that the delivery server 800 can calculate an accurate estimate. It has become. Note that the store delivery amount designation information is information for performing an accurate estimation calculation according to the actual information delivery situation in the distribution server 800 in this way, and therefore the average of the terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] described above In addition to the delivery amount designation information [i], other information (for example, delivery results, delivery fees, etc.) that accurately shows the delivery amount designation information at each store may be used as appropriate.

  In the distribution control device 90, the above-described distribution amount designation information calculation and distribution result totaling processing are executed, but the processing operation form of the distribution amount designation information calculation and distribution result totaling in the distribution control device of the information distribution system is as follows. The embodiment is not limited to the above-described form. For example, the calculation of the delivery amount designation information [i] (step S925) is performed between step S921 and step S922 when the delivery amount designation information [i] is used in common for each terminal [m]. It is good also as what is performed about. In addition, when there is no input for designating an attribute at the terminal [m] (when the terminal [m] is the issuing machine 20 or the replay accepting machine 12, the attribute is selected because the IC card 30 for the member is not inserted). When there is no input to be specified), the terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] is not calculated (steps S927 and S928) by attribute increase and non-attribute decrease, and the delivery amount designation information [i] is It may be used as delivery amount designation information [i] [m].

  The terminal distribution condition [i] [m] transmitted to each distribution terminal is the distribution condition for each server distribution information received in step S910 in the main routine and the distribution for each store distribution information submitted in step S913. It is a condition, and becomes data common to each distribution terminal, which is different for each i. In the above-described distribution amount designation information calculation, each terminal distribution information [i] [m], each terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m], and each terminal distribution condition [i] [m] are transmitted to all distribution terminals. Therefore, each distribution terminal side selectively determines whether or not to display each terminal distribution information [i] [m] based on each terminal distribution condition [i] [m]. (The process for making this determination is in the distribution condition display subroutine, details will be described later.) When the distribution destination is specified in the distribution conditions, the terminal distribution information [i] [ m] or the like may not be transmitted to a distribution terminal that is not a distribution destination. That is, there is distribution destination designation data in the distribution conditions for each server distribution information received in step S910 in the main routine and the distribution conditions for each store distribution information submitted in step S913. If the data is not designated as a delivery destination device to which the terminal [m] that is the transmission destination is to be delivered, the terminal delivery information [i] [m] corresponding to the delivery condition is sent to the terminal [m] May not be transmitted. Thereby, for example, when the terminal distribution information [i] [m] is an advertisement of a pachinko hall device for employees, the data disclosure machine 22, the data display machine 21, and the stand that display information for the player For the terminal [m] such as the machine 3, 4 to 6, etc., the terminal distribution information [i] [m], the terminal distribution amount designation, as the device that is not the target for distributing the terminal distribution information [i] [m] Information [i] [m] and terminal distribution conditions [i] [m] are not transmitted. In this case, the terminal distribution information [i] [m] and the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] are transmitted only to the management device 13 or the like to be distributed and displayed. ] [m] and terminal distribution conditions [i] [m] are transmitted.

4). Distribution terminal As described above, the terminal distribution information [i] [m], the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m], and the terminal distribution condition [i] [m] transmitted from the distribution control device 90 are the above pachinko machines. 2, inter-machines 3, 4 and 6, slot machine 5, island computer 7, counter 9, settlement machine 10, premium management machine (POS) 11, replay accepting machine 12, management device 13, issuing machine 20, data It is received by a distribution terminal such as the display 21, an out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 also having a function as a data disclosure machine, and the wireless communication system 23 (step SD <b> 1). In each distribution terminal, the constant display subroutine (step SD3) and the distribution condition display subroutine (step SD4) are executed as described above based on the received information, and terminal distribution is performed on the display means of each distribution terminal. Information [i] [m] is displayed. The contents of the specific processing operations of the constant display subroutine and the distribution condition display subroutine executed in each of these distribution terminals will be described below.

(1) Processing Operation of Constant Display Subroutine FIG. 37 is a flowchart of a constant display subroutine executed in each distribution terminal. As explained in <Game Hall Management System 1> above, the constant display subroutine is stored in the storage means of each distribution terminal, and if there is an activation request, the execution of the main routine of each distribution terminal is not hindered. At a predetermined time interval. As the predetermined time interval of the timer interrupt, for example, a startup interval of 50 ms is set (in addition, an arbitrary startup interval such as a startup interval of 100 ms may be set as appropriate, but here it is set to 50 ms) and once started. After the request is made, the processing operation for executing the processing from the start to the return of the constant display subroutine every 50 ms is repeated. In each distribution terminal, as described above, after transmitting / receiving the terminal distribution information [i] [m] or the like (steps SD1 and SD2 or steps SD1 and SD5), a request for starting such a constant display subroutine is made, and the following processing is performed. Operation starts. However, when a distribution condition display subroutine, which will be described later, is activated, it is assumed that a new always-display subroutine is not activated.

  In the constant display subroutine, game related information is displayed on the distribution terminal (step SD31). Here, the game-related information is, for example, information related to the game, such as the frequency as a valuable value, the number of replayed balls, and the deposit amount, in the inter-machines 3, 4 to 6. 5. In the data display device 21 or the data disclosure device 22, the performance display of the game machine (big hit count, probability variation count, slump graph, probability variation probability, probability of probability variation continuity, jackpot probability, etc.), counted by the individual counter 2C Information related to the game such as the number of acquired balls and point information (game points given for each ball rental, store visit points given according to the number of visits, etc.), and the management device 13 (value such as frequency) Card system management device that processes information, hall computer that aggregates operating information of gaming machines to adjust settings for changing the medal rate of gaming machines nails and slot machines, the number of prizes in stock In the management device for prize management for managing the number of issued goods, or the management device for member management such as the number of stored balls), the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls-the number of starting balls, the safe number-the number of outs or the counting value) (Out count-safe count), other information managed for each card ID such as the above-mentioned member IC card 30 and non-member IC card 31, and information related to games such as sales information of game halls, and distributed If the terminal is a pedestal machine, game-related information such as the frequency is displayed. Such display of game-related information is continuously executed (displayed as fixed information) in the display means of the distribution terminal when there is a display area in which the terminal distribution information can be displayed together with the game-related information. If there is no display area where the terminal distribution information can be displayed together with the game-related information (if the display area is such that the characters cannot be visually recognized if written together), the display of the game-related information and the terminal are performed by subsequent processing. Switching display of distribution information (if there is no display area in which terminal distribution information can be displayed together with game-related information, game-related information may not be displayed when terminal distribution information is displayed. On the contrary, when switching the display to the game related information during the display of the terminal distribution information, the display of the terminal distribution information is temporarily stopped and the game related information is displayed.

  In the continuous display subroutine, it is determined whether or not a third signal has been input (step SD32). The third signal here is a signal that informs the distribution terminal of the occurrence of a predetermined event by its input. For example, when the display means is a display unit having a touch panel, such as the inter-vehicle machine 3, a screen is displayed. Touch operation detection signal, gaming machine jackpot signal, ball rental signal for slats, gaming machine out signal, the above gaming machines (individual counters, slats, gaming machine seats, slats, etc.) And a human body detection signal from a human body detection sensor such as a lamp or a lamp, a detection signal for insertion of a cash in a pedestal machine, or a card insertion.

  When such a third signal is generated, the distribution terminal determines that the third signal has been input (the determination result in step SD32 is “Yes”), and then whether game-related information is being displayed. It is determined whether or not (step SD33). Here, it is determined whether or not the game-related information is being displayed. Although the game-related information is initially displayed at the beginning of the start of the constant display subroutine (step SD31), the constant display subroutine is repeated every 50 ms. This is because the terminal distribution information is displayed by the process described later, and the game related information is not displayed.

  However, if there is a display area where the terminal distribution information can be displayed together with the game related information, the display of the game related information continues as described above, so the game related information may not be displayed. Is limited to the case where there is no display area in which the terminal distribution information can be displayed together with the game related information. Therefore, if there is no such display area, the distribution terminal determines that the game-related information is not being displayed if the terminal distribution information is displayed (the determination result in step SD33 is “No”), and displays the display. Switching from the terminal distribution information to the game related information, the game related information is displayed (step SD34). In the display of the game related information performed by this, if the distribution terminal is a pedestrian machine, the game related information such as the frequency is also displayed as described above. Specifically, the game related information corresponding to the input third signal Display information.

  In the case of the display of such game-related information in the example of the third signal described above, when the detection signal of the touch operation on the touch panel screen is input as the third signal, for example, the frequency or the number of replay balls or the replay Displays the number of stored medals. When the big hit signal of the gaming machine is input as the third signal, for example, a message such as “Congratulations” is displayed, and then the number of winning balls is displayed. When a ball rental signal such as a pedestrian machine or an out signal from a gaming machine is input as the third signal, for example, a message such as “Good Luck” is displayed, and then the number of times or the number of reserved balls for replay or replay Displays the number of stored medals. When the human body detection signal from the human body detection sensor is input as the third signal, for example, a message such as “Welcome” is displayed. When a detection signal for cash insertion or card insertion in a pedestrian or the like is input as the third signal, for example, a message such as “I will win today” is displayed, and then the frequency is displayed. When the game related information is displayed according to the third signal, the process of the always-display subroutine returns to start (if the display area is wide, the game related information is displayed in the third signal). The terminal distribution information may be written together by a telop display to be described later at the same time when the signal is input.

  On the other hand, if there is a display area where the terminal distribution information can be displayed together with the game-related information, the game-related information is also displayed even if the terminal distribution information is displayed. After that, it is not determined whether or not the game related information is being displayed. If there is an input of the third signal, the game related information is displayed according to the third signal in the same manner as described above (the determination result in step SD32 is “ If “Yes”, the determination in step SD33 is not performed and the process proceeds to step SD34. For this reason, whether or not the game-related information is being displayed in step SD33 after determining the input of the third signal in step SD32 Whether or not it is determined is processing when there is no display area in which the terminal distribution information can be displayed together with the game-related information. The game related information displayed in response to the third signal is displayed together with the terminal distribution information. When the game related information is to be displayed entirely, the game related information is displayed. You may make it display on the whole surface preferentially. When game-related information is displayed according to the third signal, the process of the constant display subroutine returns and returns to the start as described above.

  When the third signal is generated, the game-related information is displayed as described above. However, when the third signal is not generated, it is determined whether or not the calculation result is a predetermined condition (step SD32). The result of determination in (No) is “No”, and the process proceeds to step SD35.) The case where the calculation result here is a predetermined condition refers to a case where the calculation result regarding the occurrence or change of a predetermined event grasped by the distribution terminal satisfies a predetermined condition, for example, distribution When both the probability change signal and jackpot signal of the gaming machine are input to the terminal, and the number of winning balls (out number-safe number or counting result of an individual counter such as the above-mentioned individual counter 2C) exceeds a predetermined value , When the points given out by renting balls or out become predetermined values set in stages (when the point addition calculation result satisfies a predetermined condition), an internal timer that does not rely on the third signal from the outside keeps timing Every predetermined time (when the elapsed time determination calculation result satisfies a predetermined condition; for example, every 3 minutes), when a predetermined time has elapsed since the player started the game (the elapsed time determination calculation result is predetermined) Meet the conditions It was the case), and the like.

  If there is an occurrence or change of an event that obtains a calculation result satisfying such a predetermined condition, the distribution terminal determines that the calculation result satisfies the predetermined condition (the determination result in step SD35 is “Yes”). Then, it is determined whether or not game-related information is being displayed (step SD33). The determination here is synonymous with the case where the third signal is generated, and is performed only when there is no display area in which the terminal distribution information can be displayed together with the game-related information. If it is displayed, it is determined that the game related information is not being displayed (the determination result in step SD33 is “No”), and the display is switched from the terminal distribution information to the game related information to display the game related information. Perform (step SD34). In the display of the game related information performed by this, if the distribution terminal is a pedestal machine, the game related information such as the frequency is also displayed in the same manner as described above. Specifically, however, the game related information corresponding to the predetermined condition satisfied by the calculation result is displayed. Display information.

  An example of the display of such game-related information is when the above-mentioned calculation result is a predetermined condition. This is the case where both the probability variation signal and the jackpot signal of the gaming machine are input to the distribution terminal, and the number of winning balls is greater than or equal to the predetermined value. In such a case, for example, a message such as “Congratulations on Probability” is displayed. In the case where the points given by renting a ball or out become each predetermined value determined stepwise in advance, the point amount is displayed every time the predetermined value is set stepwise. Winning or losing or winning or losing during a predetermined period is displayed every predetermined time (for example, every 3 minutes) measured by the internal timer. When a predetermined time elapses after the game start of the player, display of terminal distribution information by a telop display described later is started (display is stopped or interrupted as one of the display operations of game related information). When game-related information is displayed according to a predetermined condition that satisfies such a calculation result, the process of the always-display subroutine returns and returns to the start.

  On the other hand, when there is a display area in which the terminal distribution information can be displayed together with the game related information, it is not determined whether or not the game related information is being displayed as in the case where the third signal is generated. If the predetermined condition is satisfied, game-related information corresponding to the predetermined condition is displayed (when the determination result at step SD35 is "Yes", the determination at step SD33 is not performed and the process proceeds to step SD34). In this case, the game related information is also displayed together with the terminal distribution information. However, when the game related information should be displayed entirely, the game related information is preferentially displayed. May be. When game-related information is displayed according to the predetermined condition, the process of the always-display subroutine returns to the start as described above.

  When the calculation result is a predetermined condition, the game-related information is displayed as described above. However, when the calculation result is not the predetermined condition, the execution of the constant display subroutine is to turn on the distribution terminal. It is determined whether or not this is the first execution started for the first time (step SD36). In addition, when there is no display area in which terminal distribution information can be displayed together with game-related information, even when game-related information is being displayed by determining whether or not the above-described game-related information is being displayed, It is determined whether or not the execution of the display subroutine is the first time (if the determination result in step SD33 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SD36. Depending on the conditions).

  Here, when the constant display subroutine is executed for the first time, initialization is performed with the value of i as the number of pieces of distribution information (when the determination result in step SD36 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SD37). i is an integer representing an information number sequentially assigned to the terminal distribution information [i] [m] received from the distribution control device 90 by the distribution terminal, and the number of distribution information that is the total number of the terminal distribution information [i] [m]. Initialized to (maximum value of information number). In the second and subsequent continuous display subroutine execution, i is not initialized here, and the process proceeds directly to the subsequent process (the determination result in step SD36 is “No”, and the process proceeds directly to step SD38. .)

  Next, the distribution terminal compares the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] received from the distribution control device 90 with the random number% 100 (step SD38). The comparison determination is performed by randomly displaying the terminal distribution information [i] [m] on the distribution terminal, and comprehensively displaying the terminal distribution information [i] [m] on each terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] This is an example of a method for selecting display distribution information that enables distribution corresponding to m].

  The random number% 100 here is a remainder of random numbers generated for each terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] to be compared, and is a numerical value of 0-99. For example, a series random number such as 0 to 65535 (16 bit CPU = 2 ^ 16) is generated as a random number, and the remainder (random number% 100) obtained by dividing the random number by 100 is compared with the terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m]. . Therefore, the terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] is normalized so as to be compared with the random number% 100. For example, the display frequency is expressed as a ratio of the display period to the predetermined period. When the terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] is indicated by a numerical value (a numerical value of 1/30 or less), the terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] × 100 is compared with the random number% 100. . Note that the random numbers from 0 to 65535 as described above can be obtained by, for example, reading the last 4 digits (binary numbers) of the free-running counter at random timing (input random numbers to a configurable timer and free-running at that timing) (By the program that reads the counter) The first 4 digits read 4 upper digits, the 2nd read 4 digits 4 upper middle 4 digits, the 3rd read 4 digits 4 lower middle 4 digits, 4th read It is also possible to generate a 16-bit natural random number by adding the four digits to the last four digits and adding them.

  When the terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] is equal to or less than the random number% 100 by comparison with the random number% 100 of the terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m], the value of i is set to 1. For terminal distribution information [i] [m] of information number i that is decremented before decrementing, terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] is similarly compared with random number% 100 (the determination result in step SD38 is If “terminal delivery amount designation information ≦ random number% 100”, the process proceeds to step SD39, and then returns to step SD38.) Thereby, for the terminal distribution information [i] [m] of the information number i that is sequentially decremented, each terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] is compared with the random number% 100.

  When there is terminal distribution information [i] [m] in which the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] is larger than the random number% 100, the terminal distribution information [i] [m] is displayed on the distribution terminal. Then, the telop display subroutine is executed (when the determination result in step SD38 is “terminal delivery amount designation information> random number% 100”, the process proceeds to step SD310). The telop display subroutine is a process for displaying the telop while shifting the character string of the terminal distribution information [i] [m] every 0.1 second in the display means of the distribution terminal. Another routine related to the drive control of the display means Therefore, the contents will be specifically described later with reference to another flowchart.

  When the selected terminal distribution information [i] [m] is displayed by executing the telop display subroutine, the distribution terminal counts up the distribution results of the terminal distribution information [i] [m] (step SD311). Then, the delivery amount information [i] is counted up (step SD312).

  Here, regarding the distribution results, the terminal distribution information [i] [m] is counted once (accumulated) as the distribution results, but the distribution results are calculated from the number of display during a predetermined period in the distribution terminals. It is also possible to convert it into a frequency or the like (for example, the display time per display of the terminal distribution information [i] [m] × the display count / predetermined period, etc.). As for the distribution amount information [i], it is possible to adopt a form in which a certain distribution fee is accumulated every time it is displayed, but in the information distribution system, the terminal distribution information [i] [m] The amount corresponding to the situation at the distribution terminal when “” is displayed is counted up as distribution amount information [i].

For example, in the case of a distribution terminal such as the inter-vehicle machine 3 or the like, when the terminal distribution information of the advertisement is displayed, the distribution amount information [i] is counted up in the following manner.
・ Different advertising costs will be applied before and after the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the game of the player, and the amount corresponding to the advertising cost applied depending on whether the time of display is before or after elapse Count up to information [i].
・ Different advertising costs will be applied before and after human body detection by the human body detection sensor in the vicinity of the gaming machine, and the amount corresponding to the advertising cost applied depending on whether the display is before human body detection or after human body detection is delivered amount information Count up to [i].
・ Different advertising costs shall be applied before and after the card insertion or cash insertion of the above-mentioned IC card 30 for members, etc., depending on the advertising costs applied depending on whether the time of display is before or after card insertion or cash insertion The amount is counted up in the distribution amount information [i].
• Different advertising costs before and after the start of a game (for example, after touching the handle of the gaming machine, after hitting the slot lever, after hitting, or after detecting an out) The amount corresponding to the advertising cost applied depending on whether the display is before the game starts or after the game starts is counted up in the distribution amount information [i].

  After the delivery amount information [i] is counted up in this way, the value of i is decremented by 1 (step SD313), and it is determined whether or not the value of i is 0 or less (step SD314). The i decrement so far is performed until the terminal distribution information whose terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] is larger than the random number% 100 is selected as described above. Since the telop is displayed (steps SD39 and SD313 above), i is a value indicating an information number next to the information number of the displayed terminal distribution information. Therefore, if the value of i is not 0, the terminal distribution information [i] [m] of the information number i for which the comparison determination (step SD38) of the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] has not been performed yet. Therefore, the process of the constant display subroutine returns to the start while holding the value of i (the determination result in step SD314 is “No” and the process returns).

  As a result, in the always-display subroutine executed again after 50 ms, the terminal distribution information [i] [m] following the terminal distribution information that has been subjected to the comparison determination (step SD38) of the terminal distribution amount designation information at the previous execution is the same as described above. Are sequentially compared, and the selected terminal distribution information [i] [m] is displayed as a telop, etc., and after the value of i is decremented, it is again determined whether it is 0 or less (same as above after returning) After that, the process returns to step SD314.) In the constant display subroutine repeated every 50 ms, the terminal distribution information [i] [m] is sequentially displayed according to the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] by repeating such processing operations.

  When the value of i becomes 0, the value of i is again set as the number of distribution information as in the case of the initialization (step SD37), and the process returns (the determination result in step SD314 is “Yes”). When it becomes, the process proceeds to step SD315 and then returns.) As a result, the same processing operation is repeated in the continuous display subroutine repeated every 50 ms thereafter, and the number of distribution information is set every time i becomes 0, and the terminal distribution information [i] [m] is distributed to the terminal as described above. The information is sequentially displayed according to the quantity designation information [i] [m].

  In the constant display subroutine, the terminal distribution information [i] [m] corresponding to the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] is displayed as described above, and the terminal distribution information is written together with the game related information. When there is a display area that can be displayed, game-related information is displayed in accordance with the operation of the distribution terminal, and the terminal distribution information is sequentially displayed in the form written together therewith. On the other hand, when there is no display area where terminal distribution information can be displayed together with game-related information, game-related information is displayed as necessary according to the operation of the distribution terminal, while satisfying the need for display. The display of game related information and the display of terminal distribution information are switched. Note that the specific processing operation in the always-display subroutine is not limited to the above-described form, and the processing may be changed or added as necessary. For example, the terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] is larger than the random number% 100 during the execution of the comparison determination and i decrement (steps SD38 and SD39). If becomes 0, the comparison determination may be continued with the value of i as the number of pieces of distribution information at that time, or the process jumps to step SD315 to set the value of i as the number of pieces of distribution information.

  Further, in the above-described step SD33 when there is no display area in which the terminal distribution information can be displayed together with the game related information, for example, when the third signal is a touch operation on the touch panel or the like, the display of the game related information is performed. If it is in the middle, the telop display of the terminal distribution information executed in step SD310 is performed, and if the telop display of the terminal distribution information is in progress, the display is switched to the display of the game related information. However, when the third signal is a detection output that detects insertion of a card or seating of a player, it is desirable to display game-related information for a predetermined time. For this reason, the determination in step SD33 is not the determination as to whether or not the game-related information is being displayed, but the determination of the type of the third signal, and the display is switched according to the type of the third signal based on the determination result. You may make it perform. For example, when the type of the third signal based on the determination result is a touch operation on the touch panel, if the game related information is being displayed, the display is switched to the telop display of the terminal distribution information and the telop display of the terminal distribution information is being displayed. The display may be switched to display of game-related information. When the type of the third signal is due to card insertion, the display of the frequency or the number of replayable balls as the game-related information is performed for a predetermined time. Alternatively, when the type of the third signal is due to the seating of the player, it may be switched to the telop display of the terminal distribution information. Thus, the display contents are appropriately displayed according to the type of the third signal. A program such as the above-mentioned constant display subroutine may be configured so as to switch between them.

  Further, in step SD31, if there is no display area in which the terminal distribution information can be displayed together with the game related information, the touch panel on the surface of the display device such as an EL display or a liquid crystal display or a predetermined operation button is operated. The display of game-related information and the display of terminal distribution information may be switched alternately. When there is a display area in which terminal distribution information can be displayed together with game-related information, display of game-related information is performed in accordance with the operation of a touch panel or a predetermined operation button on the surface of a display device such as an EL display or a liquid crystal display. You may make it display by switching alternately the display by the joint description of terminal delivery information, and the display of at least one of game relevant information and terminal delivery information. Alternatively, the game-related information and the terminal distribution information may be alternately switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 5 seconds) regardless of such an operation. For example, when the display area is different for each distribution terminal, the display process by the operation described here, the display process for switching the display at a predetermined time interval, or the display process by the above-described constant display subroutine is performed for each distribution terminal. It is good also as what selects suitably and performs a different display process in each delivery terminal.

(2) Processing Operation of Distribution Condition Display Subroutine Next, the details of the processing operation of the distribution condition display subroutine will be described. FIG. 38 is a view showing a flowchart of a distribution condition display subroutine executed in each distribution terminal. As described in <Game Hall Management System 1> above, the distribution condition display subroutine is stored in the storage means of each distribution terminal, and if there is an activation request, the execution of the main routine of each distribution terminal is hindered. It is executed by timer interruption every predetermined time. As the predetermined time interval of the timer interrupt, for example, a startup interval of 50 ms is set (in addition, an arbitrary startup interval such as a startup interval of 100 ms may be set as appropriate, but here it is set to 50 ms) and once started. After the request, the processing operation for executing the processing from the start to the return of the distribution condition display subroutine every 50 ms is repeated.

  As described above, the distribution condition display subroutine includes, for example, card insertion such as the member IC card 30 (step S122 in FIG. 5, step S160 in FIG. 8, step S311 in FIG. 12, step S410 in FIG. 15). 18, step S510 in FIG. 18, steps S610 and S614 in FIG. 21, bill insertion or money acceptance (step S110 in FIG. 5, step S308 in FIG. 12), button operations such as a renting button (in FIG. 12) Steps S319, S322 and S327, Steps S418 and S427 in FIG. 15, Step S518 in FIG. 18, Steps S620 and S621 in FIG. 21, Step S651 in FIG. 24), Touch operation on the touch panel (in FIG. 12) Step S340), human body detection by the human body detection sensor (step in FIG. 12) 341), a ticket is issued for a receipt (step S424 in FIG. 15), a device is operated (step S709 in FIG. 26), etc. Card insertion etc. are made only at the first time each detected in the main routine). In the distribution terminal, when this activation request is made for the first time after the power is turned on, the distribution condition display subroutine is activated (step SD4). In the distribution condition display subroutine once activated by this, thereafter, from the start to the return. The processing operation for executing the processing every 50 ms is repeated. Therefore, if there is a second activation request after the first activation request after the power is turned on, the distribution condition display subroutine is already being executed every 50 ms.

  Therefore, for the distribution condition display subroutine, an activation request flag FLGRQ for determining whether or not to execute a substantial processing operation related to the display operation of the terminal distribution information is introduced, and the activation request flag FLGRQ is “1”. It is determined whether or not to proceed with the substantial process depending on whether it is “0” or “0” in the OFF state (step SD41 in FIG. 38). For this reason, when the distribution terminal first makes an activation request after power-on, the distribution condition display subroutine is activated and “1” is written in the activation request flag FLGRQ. The distribution condition display subroutine is not activated again, and the processing operation corresponding to the activation request is executed by writing “1” in the activation request flag FLGRQ.

  For this reason, the distribution terminal once the distribution condition display subroutine is activated determines whether or not the activation request flag FLGRQ is “1” every 50 ms (step SD41). Then, when there is an activation request and the activation request flag FLGRQ is written, the distribution terminal determines that the activation request flag FLGRQ is “1” (the determination result in step SD41 is “Yes”), and the subsequent The processing of the distribution condition display subroutine is started.

  In the distribution condition display subroutine, game-related information is displayed on the distribution terminal (step SD42). The game-related information displayed here is information related to the same game as the game-related information in the above-described constant display subroutine. If the distribution terminal is a pedestal machine, game-related information such as the frequency is displayed. Such display of game-related information is continuously executed in the display means of the distribution terminal when there is a display area in which the terminal distribution information can be displayed together with the game-related information. If there is no display area that can be displayed along with related information (if the display area is such that characters cannot be seen if written together), terminal distribution information is displayed after continuing for a predetermined time by subsequent processing. (If there is no display area in which the terminal distribution information can be displayed together with the game related information, the game related information may not be displayed when the terminal distribution information is displayed. When switching the display to the game related information while the information is being displayed, the display of the terminal distribution information is temporarily stopped and the game related information is displayed.

  In the processing of the subsequent distribution condition display subroutine, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after a request for starting the distribution condition display subroutine (for example, after insertion of a card in the case of a table machine) SD43), if it has not elapsed, it is determined whether or not there is an initial out detection or steering wheel ON (whether there is a signal input indicating either of them) (step SD44), and if there is none, display of game related information is displayed. Continue (if both determination results in steps SD43 and SD44 are “No”, the process returns to step SD42).

  Here, the elapse of the predetermined time is judged to be sufficient information for the player once the game-related information such as the frequency, the number of replay balls, and the point information is confirmed. This eliminates the necessity for display, so that the display of such game-related information is timed out for a predetermined time, and the display is switched to the terminal distribution information by subsequent processing. Accordingly, as the predetermined time, a time sufficient for the player to check the game-related information once (for example, 1 second) is set as appropriate.

  In addition, since the signal indicating the out detection or the handle ON is generated when the player finishes the confirmation of the game related information or when the game is started without confirmation, the display of the game related information is displayed by the signal input. Even if the display is switched to the distribution information display, there is no problem in the operation of the game hall, which gives the player a sense of incongruity. The reason for determining whether there is an out detection or whether the handle is ON is to enable the display to be switched from the game-related information to the terminal distribution information if the predetermined condition is satisfied even within the predetermined time. . Therefore, the predetermined conditions are satisfied not only when an out is detected or when the steering wheel is changed from OFF to ON (first out detection or initial handle ON), but also when, for example, the number of out reaches 30 balls. (Out is generally 100 balls per 60 seconds, etc., and can be regarded as constant per hour, so the condition of the number of outs can also be converted to time.)

  Here, when there is such an out detection or steering wheel ON, or when the start request flag FLGRQ is set to “1” as described above, there is a third signal input in the above-described constant display subroutine. This corresponds to the case (when the determination result at step SD32 in FIG. 37 is “Yes”). Therefore, in the always-display subroutine being executed at that time, it is determined whether or not game-related information is being displayed (step SD33 in FIG. 37), and the display is changed from the telop display of the terminal distribution information to the game according to each determination result. Switching to display of related information or switching from display of game related information to telop display of terminal distribution information. If there is neither out detection nor handle ON, the display of game related information continues until a predetermined time elapses in the distribution condition display subroutine being executed (steps SD42 to SD44). In the process, the delivery condition display subroutine does not proceed. Also, when a touch operation on the touch panel screen or a detection signal for human body detection is generated, a distribution condition display subroutine is requested to start (steps S340, S341 and SD4 in FIG. 12), and the out detection or the handle ON is detected within a predetermined time. If not, game-related information is displayed (steps SD42 to SD4 in FIG. 38), but the game-related information displayed at this time is a third signal that is a detection signal for touch operation or human body detection by a constant display subroutine. This is game-related information corresponding to the third signal when input (steps SD32 and SD34 in FIG. 37). In this case, when the telop display of the terminal distribution information [i] [m] is started first in the always display subroutine, the display processing by the distribution condition display subroutine is waited until the telop display is ended, From the time when the telop display is completed, the display of the terminal distribution information by the process described later of the distribution condition display subroutine is started.

  At the beginning of the substantial processing of the distribution condition display subroutine, the game-related information is displayed as described above, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed and whether or not a handle has been turned on (steps SD42 to SD44). Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed, or when there is an out detection or a handle ON, it is determined whether or not the distribution condition display subroutine is executed for the first time after the distribution terminal is turned on (step SD43). Alternatively, when the determination result at SD44 becomes “Yes”, the process proceeds to step SD45, and as a result, if there is an out detection or a handle ON immediately after the start of the execution of the distribution condition display subroutine, the display of the game related information is immediately performed. The display of the terminal distribution information by the process described later is started after being canceled.)

  Here, when the distribution condition display subroutine is executed for the first time, initialization is performed with the value of i as the number of pieces of distribution information (when the determination result in step SD45 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SD46). i is an integer representing an information number sequentially assigned to the terminal distribution information [i] [m] received from the distribution control device 90 by the distribution terminal, and the number of distribution information that is the total number of the terminal distribution information [i] [m]. Initialized to (maximum value of information number). In the second and subsequent distribution condition display subroutine executions, i is not initialized here, and the process proceeds directly to the subsequent process (the determination result in step SD45 is “No”, and the process proceeds to step SD47. move on.).

  Next, the distribution terminal determines whether or not the situation known by the distribution terminal at that time corresponds to the terminal distribution condition [i] [m] received from the distribution control device 90 (step SD47). The situation here refers to, for example, human body detection, card insertion, bill insertion or money acceptance, elapsed time since game start of player, occurrence of jackpot, operating rate of game machine in store, date and time, etc. This is a condition that can be determined from information obtained at the distribution terminal, and corresponds to the distribution condition specified in the terminal distribution condition [i] [m]. The determination of the situation corresponding to such a distribution condition will be described later with a specific example of the distribution condition. For example, the terminal distribution condition [i] that preferentially displays the terminal distribution information [i] [m] In the case where the time when a human body is detected in the vicinity is specified as [m], when the human body is detected in the vicinity by the human body detection sensor, the distribution terminal indicates the terminal distribution condition [i] [ m].

  If the terminal distribution condition [i] [m] is not met by the situation determination as to whether or not the terminal distribution condition [i] [m] is met, the value of i is decremented by 1, and the information number i next before the decrement is determined. The terminal distribution information [i] [m] is similarly determined whether the terminal distribution condition [i] [m] is met (if the determination result in step SD47 is “No”, Proceed to SD48, and then return to step SD47). As a result, terminal distribution information [i] [m] whose status at that time does not correspond to the terminal distribution condition [i] [m] is not displayed at that time, and terminal distribution of information number i that is sequentially decremented It is determined whether or not the information [i] [m] satisfies the terminal distribution conditions [i] [m].

  If there is terminal distribution information [i] [m] corresponding to the terminal distribution condition [i] [m], then the terminal distribution amount designation information of the terminal distribution information [i] [m] (When the determination result in step SD47 is “Yes”, the process proceeds to step SD49). This comparison determination is similar to the comparison determination performed in step SD38 in the constant display subroutine in that the comparison with the random number% 100 is performed. However, in the distribution condition display subroutine, the terminal distribution information to be compared with the random number% 100 [ The difference is that terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] multiplied by the coefficient designated by the terminal delivery condition [i] [m] is used as the terminal delivery amount designation information of i] [m]. .

  That is, the terminal distribution condition [i] [m] is the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] for preferential display of the terminal distribution information [i] [m] when the condition is satisfied. The terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] × terminal distribution condition [i] [m] is compared with the random number% 100 in the comparison determination in the distribution condition display subroutine. For example, when the terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] is indicated by the above frequency (a numerical value less than 1 such as 1/30), the terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] × terminal delivery The condition [i] [m] × 100 is compared with the random number% 100.

  By comparing and determining the terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] × terminal delivery condition [i] [m] with the random number% 100, the terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] × terminal delivery condition [ When i] [m] is less than or equal to the random number% 100, the value of i is decremented by 1, and the terminal distribution condition [i] ] [m] is determined (if the determination result in step SD49 is “terminal delivery amount designation information ≦ random number% 100”), the process proceeds to step SD48, and then returns to step SD47. ). Then, the situation determination is repeated again in the same manner as described above until the terminal distribution information [i] [m] corresponding to the terminal distribution condition [i] [m] exists (steps SD47 and SD48), and the terminal distribution condition [i] [m] When there is terminal distribution information [i] [m] corresponding to m], terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] × terminal distribution condition [i] [m] is again compared with random number% 100 (step When the determination result at SD47 is “Yes”, the process proceeds to step SD49 again. As a result, it is determined whether or not the terminal distribution information [i] [m] corresponding to the information number i that is sequentially decremented corresponds to each terminal distribution condition [i] [m]. The processing operation of comparing the distribution amount designation information [i] [m] × terminal distribution condition [i] [m] with the random number% 100 is repeated.

  And terminal distribution information whose situation corresponds to terminal distribution condition [i] [m] and whose terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] × terminal distribution condition [i] [m] is larger than random number% 100 If there is [i] [m], the terminal distribution information [i] [m] is selected to be displayed on the distribution terminal, and the telop display subroutine is executed (the determination result in step SD47 is “Yes”). When the determination result in step SD49 is “terminal delivery amount designation information> random number% 100”, the process proceeds to step SD410. The telop display subroutine executed here is a process of displaying the telop while shifting the character string of the terminal distribution information [i] [m] every 0.1 second in the display means of the distribution terminal. This is a subroutine common to the telop display subroutine to be executed (step SD310 in FIG. 37) and is another routine related to the drive control of the display means, and its contents will be specifically described later with reference to another flowchart. To do.

  When the selected terminal distribution information [i] [m] is displayed by executing the telop display subroutine, the distribution terminal counts up the distribution results of the terminal distribution information [i] [m] (step SD411) Then, the delivery amount information [i] is counted up (step SD412).

  The distribution results and distribution amount information [i] to be counted up here are the same as the distribution results and distribution amount information [i] to be counted up in the above-described constant display subroutine. That is, since the distribution result and the distribution amount information [i] are information that is counted up by displaying each terminal distribution information [i] [m], the constant display subroutine and the distribution condition for selecting and displaying the terminal distribution information together. This information is shared with the display subroutine. For this reason, in the distribution terminal, when the terminal distribution information [i] [m] is displayed in the distribution condition display subroutine, the distribution results and distribution amount information [i] used in the constant display subroutine are always counted up. This is performed in the same manner as the count-up in the display subroutine (steps SD311 and SD312 in FIG. 37).

  Therefore, for the distribution amount information [i], the amount corresponding to the situation at the distribution terminal when the terminal distribution information [i] [m] is displayed is counted up in the distribution condition display subroutine as well. For example, in the case of a distribution terminal such as the inter-vehicle machine 3 or the like, when the terminal distribution information of the advertisement is displayed, the human body in the vicinity of the gaming machine before and after the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the game of the player as described above. Before and after human body detection by the detection sensor, before and after card insertion or cash insertion, before and after the game start of the player (for example, after touching the handle of the gaming machine, until hitting the slot lever, or out is detected Applying different advertising expenses, etc. until it is detected), the amount corresponding to the advertising cost at the time of display is counted up in the distribution amount information [i].

  However, the distribution results and distribution amount information [i] counted up in the distribution condition display subroutine and the distribution results and distribution amount information [i] counted up in the constant display subroutine will be summed later as separate information. It is also possible to make it. In particular, the distribution amount information [i] in the distribution condition display subroutine is a distribution fee for distribution under a special condition that the terminal distribution information [i] [m] is selected by the determination in step SD47. Another setting can be made so that it can be set higher than the distribution fee in the constant display subroutine.

  After the delivery amount information [i] is counted up in this way, the value of i is decremented by 1 (step SD413), and it is determined whether or not the value of i is 0 or less (step SD414). As for the decrement of i performed so far, as described above, the situation corresponds to the terminal distribution condition [i] [m], and the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] × terminal distribution condition [i] [ m] is selected until the terminal distribution information whose random number is larger than 100 is selected and after the selected terminal distribution information is displayed in telop (steps SD48 and SD413 above), i is displayed. It is a value indicating the information number next to the information number of the terminal distribution information. Therefore, if the value of i is not 0, the above situation determination and comparison determination (steps SD47 and SD49) regarding the terminal distribution condition [i] [m] and the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] are still performed. Since the terminal distribution information [i] [m] of the information number i that has not been performed remains, the processing of the distribution condition display subroutine returns to start while retaining the value of i (in step SD414). The determination result is “No” and returns.)

  As a result, in the distribution condition display subroutine executed again after 50 ms, the same as described above from the terminal distribution information [i] [m] after the terminal distribution information that has been subjected to the above-mentioned situation determination and comparison determination (steps SD47 and SD49) at the previous execution. The terminal distribution condition [i] [m] and the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] are judged and compared, and the selected terminal distribution information [i] [m] is displayed as a telop. , I is decremented again to determine whether it is 0 or less (after returning, the process proceeds to step SD414 again through the same processing operation as described above). In the distribution condition display subroutine repeated every 50 ms, the terminal distribution information [i] [m] and the terminal distribution condition [i] [m] and the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [ m] is displayed sequentially according to both.

  When the value of i becomes 0, the value of i is set again as the number of distribution information and the activation request flag FLGRQ is set to “0” as in the case of the initialization (step SD46), and the process returns (step If the determination result at SD414 is "Yes", the process proceeds to steps SD415 and SD416, and then returns. As a result, in the distribution condition display subroutine repeated every 50 ms thereafter, the activation request flag FLGRQ is “0” unless there is a request for activation of the distribution condition display subroutine again, so that the process returns as it is (in step SD41). When the determination result is “No” and the process returns, substantial processing relating to the display operation of the terminal distribution information is not executed.

  However, when the activation request of the distribution condition display subroutine is made again and the activation request flag FLGRQ is set to “1” (the determination result in step SD41 becomes “Yes” again), the substantial operation related to the display operation of the terminal distribution information is substantially performed. The same processing is executed as above (steps SD42 to SD416). Therefore, the substantial processing of the distribution condition display subroutine includes card insertion, bill insertion or money acceptance, button operation such as a ball rental button, touch panel touch operation, human body detection by a human body detection sensor, receipt ticketing, device operation, etc. It is executed every time, and once execution is started, it is determined whether to display each terminal distribution information [i] [m], and terminal distribution condition [i] [m] and terminal The terminal distribution information is sequentially displayed according to both of the distribution amount designation information [i] and [m]. Then, after determining all the terminal distribution information [i] [m] of all the information numbers i, the substantial process is not executed until the activation request is made again as described above.

  In the distribution condition display subroutine, the terminal distribution information [i] [m] corresponding to the terminal distribution condition [i] [m] and the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] is displayed as described above. The terminal delivery condition [i] [m] is determined as to whether or not the condition is satisfied, and is also used as a coefficient by which the terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] is multiplied. The display according to the terminal distribution condition is performed. As a result, when there is a display area in which the terminal distribution information can be displayed together with the game related information, the game related information is displayed according to the operation of the distribution terminal, and the terminal distribution is particularly performed in the form written together therewith. Terminal distribution information corresponding to the conditions is sequentially displayed. On the other hand, when there is no display area where terminal distribution information can be displayed together with game-related information, game-related information is displayed as necessary according to the operation of the distribution terminal, while satisfying the need for display. The display of the game related information and the display of the terminal distribution information corresponding to the terminal distribution conditions are switched.

  Note that the specific processing operation in the distribution condition display subroutine is not limited to the above-described form, and processing may be changed or added as necessary. For example, during the execution of the situation determination, comparison determination, and i decrement (steps SD47 to SD49), the terminal distribution condition designation information [i] [m] × terminal If i becomes 0 without the terminal distribution information [i] [m] having a distribution condition [i] [m] larger than the random number% 100, the value of i at that time is set as the number of distribution information and an activation request. The flag FLGRQ may be returned as “0”, or the process may jump to step SD415 to return the value of i as the number of distribution information and the start request flag FLGRQ as “0”.

  In addition, when continuous display such as telop display of terminal distribution information is executed in a constant display subroutine activated by another timer interrupt, the distribution condition display subroutine waits for the processing of the constant display subroutine to end Even if the activation request flag FLGRQ becomes “1”, it may be immediately returned (if the determination result in step SD41 is “Yes”, it is determined whether the constant display is being executed or not). However, the distribution condition display subroutine may be immediately interrupted to give priority to the execution of the distribution condition display subroutine. As described above, if the always-display subroutine is immediately stopped, the game-related information necessary for the game can be displayed immediately in step SD42 in the distribution condition display subroutine.

  Further, in step SD42, if there is no display area in which the terminal distribution information can be displayed together with the game related information, the touch panel on the surface of the display device such as an EL display or a liquid crystal display or a predetermined operation button is operated. The display of game-related information and the display of terminal distribution information may be switched alternately. When there is a display area in which terminal distribution information can be displayed together with game-related information, display of game-related information is performed in accordance with the operation of a touch panel or a predetermined operation button on the surface of a display device such as an EL display or a liquid crystal display. You may make it display by switching alternately the display by the joint description of terminal delivery information, and the display of at least one of game relevant information and terminal delivery information. Alternatively, the game-related information and the terminal distribution information may be alternately switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 5 seconds) regardless of such an operation. For example, when the display area is different for each distribution terminal, display processing by such an operation, display processing for switching display at a predetermined time interval, or display processing by the above-described distribution condition display subroutine is performed for each distribution terminal. It is good also as what is selected suitably to perform a different display process in each delivery terminal.

  Also, when there is an attribute designation input at the distribution terminal, the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] to which the attribute increment is given is used, but the substantial processing operation of the distribution condition display subroutine is as follows. Alternatively, it may be executed after confirming reception of the delivery amount designation information [i] [m]. For example, when a card such as the member IC card 30 is inserted in the inter-vehicle machine 3, the distribution condition display subroutine is requested to start, but the attribute designation information [i] [m] is inserted. The terminal distribution amount designation information that is transmitted by acquiring the attribute information corresponding to the card ID from the management apparatus 13 and then receiving the attribute designation information [i] [m] and the attribute increase amount is given to the terminal distribution quantity designation information [ i] [m] is calculated and transmitted. Accordingly, in the distribution terminal, after the card insertion or the like, the terminal distribution amount designation information to which the attribute increment is given is received after returning at least twice in the main routine, but the distribution condition display subroutine is executed every 50 ms. Since it is executed once, the main routine executes processing about 1000 times, so the terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] given the attribute increment at the time of executing the delivery condition display subroutine If you can't receive, usually not. However, in order to ensure a reliable processing operation without any malfunction as a program, a distribution condition display subroutine is received until terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] given an attribute increase is received when a card is inserted or the like. It is better to wait for the substantial processing (for example, immediately after step SD41).

  The above is the processing operation of the constant display subroutine and the distribution condition display subroutine. The terminal distribution information [i] [m] is displayed and the distribution results and distribution amounts counted up in the above steps SD311 and SD411 and steps SD312 and SD412 are shown. The information [i] is aggregated at each distribution terminal and transmitted to the distribution control device 90 as the distribution record of each terminal distribution information [i] [m] and the distribution fee of each terminal distribution information [i] [m] (above Step SD2 or SD5). Thereby, the distribution control device 90 receives the distribution result of each terminal distribution information [i] [m] and the distribution fee of each terminal distribution information [i] [m] from each distribution terminal (step in FIG. 36). S924), as described above, distribution of store distribution information, distribution fee for each store distribution information, distribution of server distribution information, and calculation of average distribution results for each attribute (step S932 in the figure), Information such as distribution results is transmitted to distribution server 800 (step S918 in FIG. 35). Then, the distribution server 800 receives information such as distribution results from the distribution control device 90 of each store (step S810 in FIG. 31), and estimates calculation (step S814 in FIG. 32 estimate calculation subroutines).

  Note that switching between the display of game-related information and the display of terminal distribution information in the processing operations of the constant display subroutine and the distribution condition display subroutine is particularly effective when the display area of the display means is small, such as an intermediary machine. . That is, if the display of the game related information and the display of the terminal distribution information are switched as described above, the display of the necessary game related information is ensured even in a distribution terminal having a small display area such as a pedestal machine, Terminal distribution information can be displayed efficiently.

(3) Processing Operation of Telop Display Subroutine Next, the contents of the specific processing operation of the telop display subroutine for performing telop display while shifting the character string of the terminal distribution information every 0.1 second on the display means of the distribution terminal will be described. . FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the telop display subroutine. The telop display subroutine is a subroutine for controlling the display means in the distribution terminal and displaying the terminal distribution information selected in the above-mentioned constant display subroutine or distribution condition display subroutine, and the program is stored in the storage means of each distribution terminal. If there is an activation request, it is executed with a timer interrupt every predetermined time without disturbing the execution of the main routine of each distribution terminal. As a predetermined time interval for timer interruption, an arbitrary activation interval may be set as appropriate. However, when a telop is displayed while shifting the character string of the terminal distribution information every 0.1 second, an activation interval of 0.05 s (By setting the activation interval, the time interval for shifting the character string of the terminal distribution information to be displayed can be arbitrarily set. It is merely an example that the time is set to 0.1 second.) After that, the processing operation for executing the processing from the start to the return of the telop display subroutine every 0.05 s is repeated.

  Here, in the telop display in the distribution terminal of the information distribution system, it is possible to fast forward, stop and rewind the display, redisplay the information displayed in the past, etc., and these operations are performed in the telop display subroutine. Realized by processing. Each distribution terminal has an instruction button such as a fast-forward button, a stop button, a rewind button, and a re-display button for performing such display operation. Instruction inputs such as return and redisplay of information displayed in the past are made.

  Hereinafter, the processing operation of the telop display subroutine will be described including the processing operation corresponding to the ON / OFF operation of the instruction button. However, in the following description, a telop display screen composed of a rectangular display area of 64 dots in the horizontal direction and 256 dots in the vertical direction is adopted as an example of the screen for displaying the telop, and the terminal distribution information is displayed on the telop display screen. The discussion proceeds as if the text is displayed as a telop in the vertical direction.

  In the telop display subroutine, first, the value of cnt2 is incremented by 1, and then it is determined whether the fast-forward button is ON (held on) or OFF (steps ST1, ST2). Here, cnt2 performs a substantial processing operation for executing the telop display in the telop display subroutine normally every 0.1 seconds, and only when the fast-forward button is operated every 0.05 seconds. If the fast-forward button is OFF, it is determined whether or not it is an even number (if the determination result in step ST2 is “OFF”, the process proceeds to step ST3), and the subsequent processing is executed according to the determination. It is determined whether or not.

  That is, since the telop display subroutine is executed with a timer interrupt every 0.05 s as described above, cnt2 is incremented by 1 each time it is executed, and when cnt2 is an odd number (the determination result in step ST3 is Subsequent processing is continued when "No"), and is returned when the number is even (when the determination result at Step ST3 is "Yes"). If the fast-forward button is OFF, substantial processing is performed. The operation is performed every 0.1 seconds, and the operation of displaying a telop while shifting the character string every 0.1 seconds is realized. The initial value of cnt2 is set to 0 when the distribution terminal is turned on or when a telop display operation is started on the display means, and cnt2 becomes an odd number every 0.1 second from the first increment and the subsequent processing is continued. .

  Now, assuming that the fast-forward button is OFF and cnt2 is an odd number, the process proceeds to the subsequent processing through the above determination, and determines whether or not the distribution is the first time (the determination result in step ST2 is “OFF”, in step ST3 The determination result is “No”, and the process proceeds to step ST4.) Here, the first distribution is the first display of terminal distribution information. Therefore, the distribution terminal determines that the distribution is the first time when the telop display subroutine is started for the first time after power-on (the determination result in step ST4 is “Yes”), and the value of i is the final value yesterday. In addition, the value of y is set to 0 (step ST5), and the address of the character drawing [0] [0] is set to the address of the terminal distribution information [i] (step ST6. (The attached information represents an address in the storage means of the distribution terminal.)

  Here, i is an integer representing a display information number sequentially assigned to the terminal distribution information selected to be displayed by the always-on display subroutine or the distribution condition display subroutine (the above-described information assigned in order to each terminal distribution information). It is different from the information number i). The last value yesterday is the display information number of the terminal distribution information that the distribution terminal displayed at the end of the previous day, and i is initialized to the display information number. However, the last value of yesterday is an example of the display information number of the terminal distribution information that was being displayed last before the first time of distribution. If the last day of yesterday is not the last before the first time of distribution, the initial value of i is appropriately It may be the display information number of the terminal distribution information that was being displayed (Note that in order to hold such a final value of i yesterday, a backup RAM (such as a capacitor) is stored as one of the storage means of each distribution terminal. The memory information may be held for about a week using a RAM with a power source). y specifies the amount to shift the display data to be assigned from the vertical start position of the character string when assigning the display data of the character string of the terminal distribution information that is displayed in the vertical direction to the display area of the telop display screen. Shift counter. Character drawing is information representing a vertical character string to be displayed in telop as an image by dot display, and the dot display data at the uppermost left end of the image is character drawing [0] [0] (character drawing [0 ] [0] to a predetermined storage area is a virtual memory area defined in the program for temporarily assigning image data such as characters to be displayed in telop, and the telop display stored in terminal distribution information [i] The address of image data such as characters to be set is arbitrarily set.The dot display data of the horizontal dot position u and the vertical dot position v of the image by dot display is represented by character drawing [u] [v]. .) The terminal distribution information [i] is terminal distribution information with a display information number i, and is represented by dot display data of an image having the character string in the vertical direction. In the memory area of the terminal distribution information [i], dot display data of the terminal distribution information selected to be displayed is stored in the order of i by the number of display information numbers i to which the dot distribution data is assigned.

  Therefore, the address of the character drawing [0] [0] is set as the address of the terminal distribution information [i] (step ST6), which means that the address of the character drawing [0] [0] is the dot of the terminal distribution information [i]. This means that a block of all-dot display data of the terminal distribution information [i] is assigned to the address after the character drawing [0] [0] as the head address of the display data. Accordingly, when the vertical dot position of the terminal distribution information [i] is 0 to end (end = total number of vertical dots−1), character drawing [0] [0] to character drawing [63] [end] Is information representing all the dot display data of the terminal distribution information [i]. The dot display data is 0 or 1 when the telop display is a binary image such as light and dark, and the gradation value of RGB when the telop display is a color image.

  At the first delivery, i, y and character drawing [0] [0] are initialized as described above, and then the initialization is performed with the value of p set to 0 and the value of q set to 0 (step ST7). ). p and q are coordinates representing the horizontal dot position and the vertical dot position in the display area of the telop display screen, respectively. The leftmost horizontal dot position is p = 0, and the uppermost vertical dot position is q =. The coordinate (p, q) represents a display area by lighting each dot in the display area. Here, since the telop display screen has 64 dots in the horizontal direction and 256 dots in the vertical direction as described above, p corresponding to the display area is 0 to 63, and q is 0 to 255. When the distribution is not the first time, that is, when the telop display subroutine is executed for the second and subsequent times after the power is turned on, initialization of p and q is performed without initializing i and the like described above. (In the telop display subroutine to be executed thereafter, the determination result in step ST4 is “No” and the process proceeds to step ST7 as it is).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of q is 256 or more (step ST8), and it is determined that the value of q initialized to 0 is not 256 or more (the determination result in step ST8 is “No”). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of p is 64 or more (step ST9). It is determined that the value of p initialized to 0 is not 64 or more (the determination result in step ST9 is "No"). The lighting display area (p, q) is set as character drawing [p] [q + y] (step ST10). The lighting display area (p, q) is dot display data in the display area of coordinates (p, q), and character drawing [p] [q + y] representing the dot display data in the terminal distribution information [i]. ] Is set. Since p, q, and y are all 0 now, the leftmost uppermost character drawing [0] [0] during character drawing is set in the leftmost uppermost lighting display area (0, 0) in the display area. The

  Thereafter, the value of p is incremented by 1 (step ST11), and it is determined again whether the value of q is 256 or more (return from step ST11 to step ST8). Since the value of q has not been changed, it is determined that it is not 256 or more, and then it is determined whether the value of p is 64 or more in the same manner as described above (the determination result in step ST8 is “No” and step ST9). Go to.) Since p is set to 0 at the time of initialization, it is 63 or less unless it is incremented 64 times, and it is determined that the value is not 64 or more (the determination result in step ST9 is “No”). .) Therefore, the same processing is repeated until the value of p is incremented 64 times (steps ST8 to ST11), and characters are displayed in the lighting display area (p, q) at the horizontal dot position corresponding to p incremented by one. Drawing [p] [q + y] is set sequentially.

  If p is incremented 64 times, it is determined that the value is 64 or more (the determination result in step ST9 is “Yes”), the value of p is incremented by 1, and the value of p is changed. Similarly to the initialization, it is set to 0 again (step ST12). When p is incremented 64 times, character drawing [0] [0] to character drawing [63] [0] are set in the lighting display area (0,0) to lighting display area (63,0). Therefore, the dot display data is set in the display area for one line in the horizontal direction at the top end.

  After q is incremented, it is again determined whether or not the value of q is 256 or more (return from step ST12 to step ST8). Since q is set to 0 at the time of initialization, it is 255 or less unless it is incremented 256 times, and it is determined that the value is not 256 or more (the determination result in step ST8 is “No”). Then, similarly to the above, it is determined whether or not the value of p is 64 or more (step ST9). Since p is set to 0 when q is incremented as in the case of initialization, it is 63 or less unless it is incremented again 64 times, and it is determined that the value is not 64 or more (in step ST9). The determination result is “No”.) Therefore, the same processing as described above is repeated until the value of q is incremented 256 times (steps ST8 to ST12). For each row at the vertical dot position corresponding to q that is incremented by 1, the horizontal direction is the same as above. Character drawing [0] [q + y] to character drawing [63] [q + y] are sequentially set in the dot display lighting display area (0, q) to lighting display area (63, q).

  When q is incremented 256 times, character drawing corresponding to each of p and q is applied to each lighting display area (p, q) where p is 0 to 63 and q is 0 to 255 [p ] [q + y] is set. However, since y at present is 0, character drawing [p] [q + 0] is set for each lighting display area (p, q). Thereby, the distribution terminal controls the driving of the display means according to the dot display data of the lighting display area (p, q) in which the character drawing [p] [q + 0] is set, and each of the telop display screens All dots with coordinates (p, q) are displayed. In the telop display subroutine, the process of assigning the display data of the character string of the terminal distribution information to the display area of the telop display screen is performed by the processes from the initialization of p and q to the steps (steps ST7 to ST12).

  In the subsequent telop display subroutine process, it is determined that the value of q incremented 256 times is 256 or more (the determination result in step ST8 is “Yes”), and then an instruction button other than the fast-forward button is operated. It is determined whether or not it is present (pressed) (steps ST13, ST14, ST15). That is, the distribution terminal determines whether the stop button is ON (held on) or OFF based on the instruction input from each instruction button (step ST13), and the stop button is OFF. If there is, it is determined whether the rewind button is ON or OFF (step ST14), and if the rewind button is OFF, it is determined whether the redisplay button is ON or OFF (step ST15). ).

  Assuming that none of the instruction buttons is operated, the distribution terminal determines that the stop button, the rewind button, and the redisplay button are all OFF (the determination results in steps ST13, ST14, and ST15). Are both “OFF”), whether or not y is equal to or greater than the end of the terminal distribution information [i], that is, the display area shift counter y is the end dot position in the vertical direction of the terminal distribution information [i] It is determined whether or not this is the case (step ST16). Since y is set to 0 by the initialization described above, it is determined that it is not equal to or greater than end (the determination result in step ST16 is “No”), and the y value is incremented by 1 (step ST17). The process returns.

  Then, when the telop display subroutine is executed again after 0.1 seconds (in the execution after 0.05 seconds, cnt2 becomes an even number in step ST1, and returns in the determination in step ST3, and in the execution after 0.1 seconds. cnt2 becomes an odd number and the process proceeds to step ST7 through the determinations of steps ST2, ST3, ST4), and the process of assigning the display data of the character string of the terminal distribution information to the display area of the telop display screen in the same manner as above (steps ST7 to ST7) ST12) is executed. However, since y is incremented by 1 at this time, for each lighting display area (p, q), character drawing [p] [q + 1] shifted by one dot downward in the vertical direction is set. Is done. Thereby, the distribution terminal controls the drive of the display means according to the dot display data of the lighting display area (p, q) in which the character drawing [p] [q + 1] is set, and each of the telop display screens All the dots of coordinates (p, q) are displayed, and the value of y is incremented by 1 (step ST17) as described above, and the processing of the telop display subroutine returns.

  While none of the instruction buttons is operated, the character drawing [p] [q + y] is set for the lighting display areas (p, q) as described above, and the telop display screen is displayed. The processing operation in which the value of y is incremented by 1 is repeated every 0.1 second. Therefore, the lighting display areas (p, q) are drawn every 0.1 second by character drawing [p] [q + 0], character drawing [p] [q + 1], character drawing [p] [q + 2] ..., And is set to character drawing [p] [q + y] shifted by one dot downward in the vertical direction every 0.1 seconds as y is incremented.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram exemplifying a change in the lighting display area (p, q) to which the character drawing [p] [q + y] set in such a form is shifted. In FIG. 40, “Today's weather is sunny and cloudy” is an example of terminal distribution information [i] for weather forecast, “XX Prime Minister's Public Corporation Privatization Bill Submission” is an example of news terminal distribution information [i], “ “Delicious rice ball” is an example of the terminal distribution information [i] of the advertisement, and the respective ends are 563, 724, and 444. When the display area of the telop display screen is a rectangular display area of 64 dots in the horizontal direction and 256 dots in the vertical direction shown on the left side of the drawing, the lighting display area (p, q) is within the rectangular area as shown by the dotted line. Character drawing [p] [q + y], and dot display data is displayed as indicated by an arrow from the upper side of the character string of the terminal distribution information [i] as y increases as indicated by a broken line and an arrow. It will shift to the direction sequentially. As a result, the character string of the terminal distribution information [i] is displayed so as to move to the upper side of the telop display screen by one dot every 0.1 second, and the end line is the upper end position of the telop display screen. The display is completed when it reaches. When displaying the character string of the terminal distribution information [i] so as to gradually appear from the lower end position in the telop display screen, the telop display screen is displayed at the head of the dot display data of the terminal distribution information [i]. One non-display data (such as 0 dot display data) may be added.

  In the telop display subroutine, telop display in which the character string of the terminal distribution information [i] moves upward in the display area is performed in this way. When the incremented y reaches the end value, the end line of the terminal distribution information [i] reaches the upper end position of the telop display screen, and the telop display is completed. At this time, in the telop display subroutine, it is determined that y is equal to or greater than the end of the terminal distribution information [i] (the determination result in step ST16 is “Yes”), and the value of y is set to 0 as in the initialization ( In step ST18), the value of i is incremented by 1 (step ST19), and the address of the terminal distribution information [i] of the display information number i obtained by incrementing the address of the character drawing [0] [0] is returned (step ST20).

  Thereby, the same processing operation as described above is executed for the terminal distribution information [i] of the next display information number i, and the display on the display means is switched to the telop display of the next terminal distribution information [i]. When the telop display is completed, y is initialized again in the same manner and the same processing operation is repeated, and the terminal distribution information [i] of the display information number i sequentially incremented is displayed in telop in order. To go.

  On the other hand, when such a telop display is performed, if the fast forward button, stop button, rewind button, or redisplay button is operated, the distribution terminal receives an instruction input by the operation, and in the telop display subroutine By the processing, display fast-forward, stop, rewind, or re-display of information displayed in the past is realized as follows.

When the fast-forward button is operated When a player or the like operates the fast-forward button, the distribution terminal determines that the fast-forward button is turned on in response to a fast-forward instruction input by the operation (determination in step ST2). The result is “ON hold”), and the substantial processing operation for executing the telop display after step ST4 is executed regardless of whether the value of cnt2 is even or odd. Thus, while the fast-forward button is held ON, the above-described processing operation for performing telop display is repeated every time the telop display subroutine is executed with a timer interruption every 0.05 s. Therefore, the character string of the terminal distribution information [i] is displayed so as to move upward in the telop display screen by one dot every 0.05 seconds. A fast-forward telop display in which the character string moves upward twice as fast is realized.

When the stop button is operated When a player or the like operates the stop button, the distribution terminal determines that the stop button is turned on in response to the stop instruction input by the operation (determination in step ST13) The result is “ON hold”), and the processing of the telop display subroutine returns as it is. Thereby, while the stop button is held ON, the value of y is not incremented (step ST17), and the processing of the telop display subroutine is executed every 0.1 second, so that the lighting display area (p , Q) does not shift the character drawing [p] [q + y], and the same display continues on the display means, and the telop display is stopped.

When the rewind button is operated When a player or the like operates the rewind button, the distribution terminal determines that the rewind button is turned on in response to the rewind instruction input by the operation (step The determination result at ST14 is "ON hold"), and it is determined whether the value of y is 0 or less (step ST21). Since y is set to 0 at initialization and when telop display of each terminal distribution information [i] is completed (steps ST5 and ST18), telop display is performed by determining whether or not the value is 0 or less. It can be determined whether or not there is terminal distribution information [i].

  Therefore, when the value of y is not less than or equal to 0 (when the determination result in step ST21 is “No”), since there is terminal distribution information [i] being displayed in telop, the terminal distribution information [i] is incremented by being incremented. ] Is decremented by 1 (step ST22) and the process returns. As a result, in the telop display subroutine to be executed next, the character drawing [p] [q + y] set in the lighting display area (p, q) is shifted by one dot in the vertical direction, and the telop is being displayed. Thus, the character string of the terminal distribution information [i] that has been moved upward in FIG. While the rewind button is held ON, y is decremented in the same manner, and in the telop display subroutine executed every 0.1 second thereafter, the lighting display area (p, q) is similarly displayed. The character drawing [p] [q + y] to be set is shifted by one dot upward in the vertical direction, and the character string of the terminal distribution information [i] is moved downward by one dot. The moving direction of the displayed character string is reversed.

  However, when the value of y is 0 or less (when the determination result in step ST21 is “Yes”), there is no terminal distribution information [i] during telop display. This is when the telop display of the terminal distribution information [i] is completed or when the terminal distribution information [i] that was being displayed in the telop by the decrement of y described above has moved to the bottom end of the display area. is there. Accordingly, at this time, the value of i is decremented by 1 (step ST23), the value of y is decremented as the end of the terminal distribution information [i] of the display information number i (step ST24), and the character drawing [0] [0] It returns as the address of the terminal distribution information [i] of the display information number i that has been decremented (step ST25). As a result, the character drawing [0] [0] to the character drawing [63] [end] become dot display data of the terminal distribution information [i] of the previous display information number i, and y is set to the end of the lowermost position. After that, while the rewind button is held ON, this corresponds to the case where the aforementioned y value is not 0 or less, and the terminal distribution information [i of the previous display information number i [i] ] Will move down one dot at a time.

  When the rewind button is operated, the character string of the terminal distribution information [i] displayed in this way is moved downward by one dot at a time, and the character string of the terminal distribution information [i] moves Reversing the telop display is realized by reversing from normal.

When the re-display button is operated When a player or the like operates the re-display button, the distribution terminal receives an instruction to re-display information displayed in the past by the operation, and the re-display button is turned on. (The determination result in step ST15 is “ON hold”), the value of y is set to 0 in the same way as the initialization, the value of i is decremented by 1, and character drawing [0] [0] As the address of the terminal distribution information [i] of the display information number i obtained by decrementing the address (step ST26). As a result, the above processing operation for performing telop display on the terminal distribution information [i] of the previous display information number i is executed, and the terminal distribution information [i Switch to the telop display. Then, while the re-display button is held ON, the display on the display means is successively switched to the telop display of the previous terminal distribution information [i] one by one, and displayed in the past in the telop display. Redisplay of the information is realized.

  In the information distribution system, the server distribution information distributed from the distribution server 800 as described above and the store distribution information that the game hall store intends to provide independently are transmitted from the distribution control device 90 to each distribution terminal. The terminal distribution information selected by the distribution terminal by the process of the constant display subroutine or the distribution condition display subroutine is displayed in a telop on the display means by the process of the telop display subroutine. As a result, at the game hall stores, advertisements, news, weather forecasts, in-house service information of the game hall, advertisements of shops or restaurants in the vicinity of the game hall, registration information and price cuts of prizes at the game hall and stores outside the game hall Information provision services such as information and advertisements by general users are implemented.

5. Specific Example (1) Distribution Amount Specification Information, Distribution Conditions, and Distribution Fee Next, some specific examples in the above configuration or operation of the information distribution system will be described. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of an advertisement fee table that can be used in the information distribution system, and also shows a specific example of distribution amount designation information and distribution conditions.

  In FIG. 41, “distribution amount designation information” and “distribution condition” on the right end side indicate that the corresponding items in the advertising fee table on the left side are the distribution amount designation information and the distribution condition, respectively. The delivery amount designation information shown in the figure is designated by the desired delivery frequency of the advertisement, and a desired delivery frequency that designates 1/30 as the minimum frequency of advertisement display during a predetermined period is designated.

  The “desired distribution period” is a distribution condition for designating a period during which advertisement distribution is desired, and is designated as 90 days in the illustrated example. Whether or not this distribution condition is met is determined based on information such as a date / time counter in the distribution terminal (step SD47 in FIG. 38), but the distribution server 800 and the distribution control device 90 transmit the distribution information. It is good also as what determines when performing.

  “Time zone op” is a delivery condition that designates a time zone that is desired to be displayed preferentially. “Op” indicates that the delivery condition can be arbitrarily selected and designated. (The same applies to “op” added to other distribution conditions.) In “time zone op”, 10:00 to 12:00, 12:00 to 13:00, 13:00 to 15:00, 15:00 to 17:00, 17:00 to 19:00, 19:00 to 21:00, and 21:00 to 23:00 “Preferred delivery time zone priority display” indicating that display is performed preferentially in the time zone of the above can be designated as a delivery condition, and when the display is made in each designated time zone, the advertisement fee is an example shown in the figure Then, 0.8 times, 1.2 times, 1.0 times, 0.7 times, 1.2 times, 1.1 times, and 0.9 times are set. The determination (step SD47 in FIG. 38) at the distribution terminal as to whether or not this distribution condition is satisfied is performed based on information such as a time counter.

  “Day of the week op” is a delivery condition for designating the day of the week for delivery. “Delivery only on weekends and holidays” can be designated as the delivery condition. Then, it is 0.5 times. The distribution terminal determines whether or not this distribution condition is satisfied based on information such as a date / time counter.

  “Big end distribution op” is a distribution condition that specifies display preferentially at the end of the big hit. It can be specified as “priority display”, “acquisition 50,000 to 100,000 yen priority display”, “acquisition 3 to 50,000 yen priority display”, or “acquisition 1 to 30,000 yen priority display”. When done, the advertisement fee is 1.1 times in the illustrated example. The distribution terminal determines whether or not this distribution condition is met based on information from a signal from a gaming machine or the like.

  “Game condition distribution op” is a distribution condition that designates display preferentially according to the behavior or state of the player in particular. There are “priority display after game start (out)”, “priority display after predetermined time after start”, and the like.

  “Presentation after sitting” is a distribution condition that specifies that a player is preferentially displayed when seated on a seat of a gaming machine, and when the display corresponding to the designation is made, the advertisement fee is shown in the example in the figure. Then, it is 1.05 times. The distribution terminal determines whether or not this distribution condition is satisfied based on information based on a human body detection signal from the human body detection sensor in the vicinity of the gaming machine.

  “Priority display after insertion of card or cash” is a distribution condition that specifies that the card is preferentially displayed when a card such as the above-mentioned IC card 30 for members or cash such as banknotes is inserted. In the example shown in the figure, the advertisement fee is set to 1.05 times. The determination at the distribution terminal as to whether or not this distribution condition is satisfied is made based on the information by the above-described detection signal of card insertion or bill insertion.

  “Priority display after game start (out)” is a distribution condition that specifies that the display is given priority after the player starts the game or after the game is detected. When the display according to the specification is made, the advertising fee is displayed. In the illustrated example, it is 1.05 times. The determination at the distribution terminal as to whether or not this distribution condition is satisfied is made based on the information based on the above-described detection signal of out, detection signal of handle ON (OFF to ON), and the like.

  “Preferential display after a predetermined time after start” is a distribution condition that specifies that a predetermined time is displayed after the player has started the game, and an advertisement is displayed when the display according to the specification is made. In the example shown in the figure, the charge is 1.1 times. The determination at the distribution terminal as to whether or not this distribution condition is satisfied is made based on the information regarding the out detection signal, the detection signal of the handle ON (OFF to ON), the elapsed time after the detection signal is generated, and the like.

  “Operating op” is a distribution condition that designates display preferentially in accordance with the operating rate of in-store gaming machines. “Always” is displayed regardless of the operating rate, and is displayed when the operating rate is 80% or more. “80%” to be displayed, “50%” to be displayed when the operation rate is 50% or more, and “20% or more” to be displayed when the operation rate is 20% or more can be specified as distribution conditions. When the corresponding display is made, the advertisement fee is 1.0, 1.15, 1.1, and 1.05 times in the illustrated example. The distribution terminal determines whether or not this distribution condition is met by receiving operation rate information from a management device such as the management device 13 as necessary.

  “Region designation op” is a delivery condition that designates a delivery area, “Nationwide” that designates delivery to be displayed at stores nationwide, and “Distribution designated per prefecture / designate delivery to be displayed at stores in a designated prefecture” “Specify the distribution to be displayed at the store of the specified municipality“ Specified municipality / per municipality ”, Specify the distribution to be displayed at stores near the specified station“ Specified station / per station ”, at the specified store “Designated store / per store” that designates the delivery to be displayed can be designated as the delivery condition. When the display according to each designation is made, the advertising fee is 1.0 times in the example shown in FIG. 1 times, 0.05 times, 0.01 times, and 0.005 times. However, the ratios of “designated prefecture / per prefecture”, “designated municipality / per municipality”, “designated station / per station”, and “designated store / per shop” are 1 prefecture each. This is the magnification for the designation of one municipality, one station, and one store. The determination at the distribution terminal as to whether or not this distribution condition is satisfied is made based on information such as the location of the store where the distribution terminal is located.

  The “detailed advertisement op” is a distribution condition that specifies that a coupon ticket or the like related to the advertisement is issued by a touch operation on the touch panel while the advertisement is displayed. Issuance of coupon coupons and the like here will be described later, but this distribution condition is not used in the determination of whether or not to display distribution information (step SD47 in FIG. 38), and there was the touch operation or the like. Sometimes used as a condition for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined process for issuing a coupon. Specifically, when there is a touch operation on the touch panel, the displayed advertisement is rewound (rewinding by executing a process such as telop display rewind realized in the telop display subroutine), “Touch rewind printing fee / per touch”, which specifies that a predetermined ticket such as a coupon ticket is printed and issued, can be specified as one of the distribution conditions. In the example shown, an advertising fee of 5 yen is charged each time rewinding or issuing a ticket. The distribution terminal determines whether or not this distribution condition is met based on information from an operation detection signal from the touch panel.

  “Terminal designation op” is a distribution condition for designating a specific distribution terminal to be displayed, and is intended for general store customers such as players using the distribution terminal as a display device of a table machine or a prize management machine (POS). “To be used for general customers such as pedestrians or electric bulletin boards”, the distribution terminal is a management device such as a hall computer, a gift management machine (POS), a card management device, etc. “Hallcon etc. management device for store clerk” that specifies display for employees can be specified as a distribution condition, and when the display according to each specification is made, the advertisement fee is shown in the example shown in the figure Then, it is set to 1 time and 30 times. The distribution terminal determines whether or not this distribution condition is met based on the device type of the distribution terminal.

  In addition, in the information distribution system, information related to game machines (especially new pachinko machines, slot machines, inter-machines, etc.) that are especially targeted at employees such as store staff in game halls. ) Can also be handled as distribution information. Information related to a gaming machine can be provided to a store clerk or the like to increase the purchase probability of the gaming machine on business. For this reason, the advertising fee is high when the above-mentioned “for clerk management device clerk” is specified as the distribution condition.

  The terminal distribution condition [i] [m] (step SD49 in FIG. 38) used as a coefficient to be multiplied by the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] in the distribution condition display subroutine is as shown in the above-described advertising fee table. You may decide to use the multiplication rate of the advertisement charge to which each of these delivery conditions correspond. For example, for the terminal distribution condition [i] [m] in which the advertising fee magnification in the advertisement fee table is 1.15 times, the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] represented by the frequency is shown in FIG. When comparing with the random number% 100 in step SD49, the terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] × 1.15 × 100 may be compared with the random number% 100. However, combining the magnification in the advertisement fee table with the coefficient for multiplying the terminal delivery amount designation information in this way is only one convenience method. The scaling factor in the advertising fee table and the coefficient for the terminal delivery amount specification information may be different correction values, and the advertisement fee correction value and the terminal delivery amount specification information correction value are specified separately for each delivery condition. It is good also to keep.

(2) Example of inter-vehicle machine
(a) Appearance Configuration FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of the appearance configuration of a daikan machine that is one of the distribution terminals. This intermediary machine corresponds to the intermediary machine 4 (sand) in the above-mentioned game hall management system 1, a bill insertion slot at the top, a touch panel EL display as a display means at the center, and a ball lending discharge unit at the bottom. And an IC card insertion slot, which is an information distribution sand for displaying terminal distribution information by the processing operations of the above-described constant display subroutine, distribution condition display subroutine and telop display subroutine.

  In the case where a human body detection sensor is provided in a pedestal machine, it may be provided in the periphery of a display means such as a touch panel EL display indicated by a broken line in the drawing. Since the human body detection sensor is installed to switch the contents of the display information on the platform machine as described above according to the human body detection signal, it is also effective to make human body detection near the place where the display is performed. It is. In addition, the message “Please insert banknote” displayed on the touch panel EL display shown in the figure, white arrow, thousand yen, 2,000 yen, 5,000 yen and 10,000 yen amount display, and counting start Character display is an example of game-related information.

(b) Display example FIGS. 43 to 46 show the display of game-related information and the display of terminal distribution information by the processing operation of the constant display subroutine or distribution condition display subroutine in the inter-machine (information distribution sand) of FIG. It is the figure which showed the example of the form to do. Hereinafter, the display form shown in each figure will be described.

  The “general operation flow with normal distribution / genre selection” in FIG. 43 is a display form for general customers (non-members) who can select the genre of terminal distribution information on the screen. The screen display changes in each scene according to the behavior of the player. In the figure, the upper display screen shows an operation guidance screen on which game related information is displayed, and the lower display shows a news display screen in which terminal distribution information such as news is displayed together with game related information. Each operation during that time indicates the behavior of the player (the same applies to FIGS. 44 to 46 described later).

  The scene 01 shows a display screen N01 of news and the like displayed during standby, and the display of news and the like is displayed along with “Please insert banknotes or cards” of the game related information. “Menu” is an operation key for displaying a genre selection menu screen. In this scene 01, when the player inserts a banknote, the display is switched to the screen of the scene 02, and when the “menu” is pressed, the process proceeds to the scene 07.

  Scene 02 shows an operation guidance screen COM01 for general customers displayed at the time of deposit acceptance, and displays “Thank you for using” and “Payment amount 1000 yen” of game related information. If there is an additional deposit, the process proceeds to the scene 05 after this screen is displayed.

  The scene 03 shows the operation guidance screen COM02 displayed after the deposit process, and a predetermined symbol “Please press the ball lending button on the pachinko machine” of the game related information is displayed. In this scene 03, when the player presses the ball lending button on the pachinko machine, the process proceeds to scene 04. When additional banknotes are deposited, the process proceeds to scene 02.

  The scene 04 shows an operation guidance screen COM03 displayed at the time of paying out a ball, and “game of paying out a ball” in the game related information is displayed. In the scenes 02 to 04 from the deposit acceptance to the paying out of the ball, news and the like are not displayed in order to prevent an erroneous operation of the sand.

  The scene 05 shows an operation guidance screen COM4 and a news display screen N02 when the game has a frequency. On the operation guidance screen COM4, the game-related information such as “banknote can be deposited” is displayed, and when there is no sand operation for a certain period of time, the screen is switched to the news display screen N02. On the news display screen N02, the display of news and the like is displayed together with the game-related information “It is possible to deposit banknotes”. In this scene 05, when the player presses the ball lending button, the process shifts to the scene 04. When the banknote is additionally deposited, the process shifts to the scene 02. When the player presses the menu, the process shifts to the scene 07.

  A scene 06 shows a display screen N01 for news or the like when there is no frequency during the game. In this scene 06, when the player additionally deposits banknotes, the screen is switched to the operation guidance screen COM01 of scene 02. When the player quits the game or presses the return button, the process proceeds to scene 01, and when the menu is pressed, the process proceeds to scene 07.

  Scene 07 shows a display screen N03 for news, etc., when a genre is selected, and displays “character information genre selection” and operation keys for “general”, “entertainment / sports”, “weather”, and “return”. Has been. In this scene 07, when the player presses the “return” operation key, the screen returns to the original screen. On the other hand, when the operation key of each genre is pressed, the display returns to the original screen, but the display content such as news is changed to the selected genre. The selection genre of the operation key pressed here is the attribute designation input described above.

  The “information distribution sand normal version / genre selection general operation flow” in FIG. 44 is a display form for general customers who cannot select the genre of terminal distribution information on the screen, and corresponds to the behavior of the player. This shows the flow of the screen display changing in each scene. In this “information distribution sand normal version, no genre selection general operation flow”, the operation key “menu” for displaying the genre selection menu screen is not displayed, but other game-related information and terminal distribution information are as described above. Displayed in the same manner as scene 01 to scene 06 in “Information distribution sand Normal version / genre selection general operation flow”.

  The “information distribution sand normal version / genre selection member operation flow” in FIG. 45 is a display form for members that allows selection of the genre of terminal distribution information on the screen, and each corresponds to the behavior of the player, etc. This shows the flow of changing the screen display in each scene.

  The scene 01 shows a display screen N01 of news and the like displayed during standby, and the display of news and the like is displayed along with “Please insert banknotes or cards” of the game related information. “Menu” is an operation key for displaying a genre selection menu screen. In this scene 01, when the player inserts a card (member card such as the above-mentioned member IC card 30), the display is switched to the screen of the scene 02, and when “MENU” is pressed, the screen shifts to the scene 12.

  Scene 02 shows a member operation guidance screen K01 displayed when a password is input, and displays a "password" of game related information and an operation key for password input. The operation guidance screen K01 is switched (returned) to the display screen N01 for news of the scene 01 when there is no operation for a certain period of time. In this scene 02, when the player inputs a password, the process proceeds to the scene 04. However, if a password error occurs, the process proceeds to the scene 03.

  Scene 03 shows an operation guidance screen K02 displayed when a password error occurs, and the game-related information “Password is wrong. Please enter again” is displayed. This operation guidance screen K02 is displayed for several seconds, and the screen returns to the scene 02.

  Scene 04 shows an operation guidance screen K03 displayed when replay / ball rental is selected. The game-related information arrow, “Replay”, “Please insert banknotes when lending” and “ The “Card inquiry” operation key is displayed. In this scene 04, when the player presses the replay selection circle button, the process proceeds to the scene 07, and when the banknote is deposited for the ball lending, the process proceeds to the scene 05, and when the “card inquiry” is pressed for the membership card inquiry. Transition to scene 11.

  Scene 05 shows an operation guidance screen COM01 displayed at the time of deposit acceptance, and displays “Thank you for using” and “Payment amount 1000 yen” of game related information.

  The scene 06 shows an operation guidance screen K04 displayed after the deposit process, and the operation keys “Please press the pachinko ball lending button” and “Card inquiry” of the game related information are displayed. In this scene 06, if the player presses the ball lending button on the pachinko machine for renting a ball, the process proceeds to scene 08. When “Inquiry” is pressed, the scene 11 is entered.

  The scene 07 shows the operation guidance screen K05 displayed when the card contents are inquired, and the game-related information “card contents total 10,000 balls of accumulated balls 2000 balls of accumulated balls 12,000 accumulated points of accumulated balls 250P” is displayed. The operation guidance screen K05 is displayed for a few seconds after the replay button is pressed, and the process proceeds to the scene 08.

  The scene 08 is an operation guidance screen K06 and COM03 displayed at the time of paying out a stored ball or a loaned ball. On the operation guidance screen K06, the game-related information “Paying out of accumulated balls” is displayed, and on the operation guidance screen COM03, the game-related information “Paying out ball rental” is displayed.

  The scene 09 shows an operation guidance screen K03 and news display screen N02 displayed during the game of the player. On the operation guidance screen K03, an arrow of game-related information, “Replay” and “Please insert banknotes when lending a ball” and “Card inquiry” operation keys are displayed. The operation guidance screen K03 is switched to a news display screen N02 when no sand operation is performed for a certain period of time. On the news display screen N02, the display of news and the like is displayed together with the game-related information “Replay is the ● button, and the ball is inserted is the bill insertion”, and the “Menu” operation key is also displayed. . In this scene 09, when the player is playing a game and presses “card inquiry” for member card inquiry, the process proceeds to scene 11, and when there is no ball or frequency, a round button for replay selection is displayed. If you press, you will move to scene 07. If you add additional banknotes for renting the ball, you will move to scene 05. When pressed, the display switches to the scene 12 screen.

  Scene 10 shows an operation guidance screen K07 displayed at the end of the game of the player, and an arrow indicating “Please forget to remove the card” of the game related information is displayed. The operation guidance screen K07 is switched to a display screen for news of the scene 01 after being displayed for a certain period of time.

  Scene 11 shows the operation guidance screen K08 displayed at the time of the card inquiry, and the game-related information includes “Card contents: Total accumulated balls: 10000 balls; It is displayed. This operation guidance screen K08 returns to the original screen after pressing “RETURN” or after a certain period of time.

  The scene 12 shows a display screen N03 of news when a genre such as news is selected. The display of “text information genre selection” and operations of “comprehensive”, “entertainment / sports”, “weather” and “return” The key is displayed. In this scene 12, when the player presses the “return” operation key, the screen returns to the original screen. On the other hand, when the operation key of each genre is pressed, the display returns to the original screen, but the display content such as news is changed to the selected genre. The selection genre of the operation key pressed here is the attribute designation input described above.

  The “information distribution sand normal version / no genre selection member operation flow” in FIG. 46 is a display mode for members who cannot select the genre of terminal distribution information on the screen, and each of them corresponds to the behavior of the player. It shows the flow of the screen display changing in the scene. In this “Information distribution sand Normal version / No genre selection member operation flow”, the operation key “menu” for displaying the genre selection menu screen is not displayed, but other game-related information and terminal distribution information are as described above. Displayed in the same manner as scenes 01 to 11 of “Information distribution sand Normal version / genre selection member operation flow”.

(3) Delivery amount designation information The delivery amount designation information is information for designating the amount of delivery information to be displayed on the delivery terminal as described above, and the display frequency indicating the display amount during a predetermined period, the display amount itself, and the like. is there. The amount mentioned here includes the display frequency of the distribution information, the number of times of display, the quantity (number of information), etc., but the number of characters of the distribution information is handled as the amount specified by the distribution amount designation information. The amount of distribution in the information distribution system can be specified not only in the range of the advertisement quantity and the distribution frequency but also in the range of the number of characters.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a first designation example when the delivery amount is designated by the number of characters of the terminal delivery information in the delivery control apparatus. Listed in the type column on the left are terminal distribution information, respectively, news 1 to news 14, weather forecast and advertisement 1 to advertisement 3 are server distribution information and store advertisement received by the distribution control device from the distribution server. Reference numeral 1 denotes store distribution information submitted by the distribution control device. The number of characters of each terminal distribution information (number of characters in the number of characters column in the figure) is 40 for each news of news 1 to news 14, 70 for weather forecast, 40 for advertisement 1, 40 for advertisement 2, 22 for advertisement 3, and store advertisement 1 Is specified as 40. Of these terminal distribution information, the number of characters of news and weather forecasts provided from the content distribution source (the number of characters in the content character number column in the figure) is 630 in total, and the number of characters of the advertisement in the server distribution information and the advertisement of the store distribution information The total number of characters (number of characters in the advertisement character number column in the figure) is 142, and the ratio of the advertisement to the total number of characters of the terminal distribution information is 18.4%.

  With respect to the amount of delivery specified by the number of characters, at the game hall store, as indicated by the broken line and the arrow in the figure, the number of characters specified as 40 characters is set as the upper limit number of characters, and the number of characters less than that is set. Store distribution information can be arbitrarily increased or decreased within a range. That is, the store of the game hall can arbitrarily select what information is distributed within the range of 40 characters. For example, service information (29 characters) such as “Women ’s Day will be higher for women on Wednesdays” or advertisements for nearby restaurants such as “50 yen discount at the next ramen shop” (15 characters) can be distributed, and such store distribution information within 40 characters can be appropriately input from the input device of the distribution control device and distributed.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a second designation example when the delivery amount is designated by the number of characters of the terminal delivery information in the delivery control device. As in the first designation example, each of the items listed in the type column on the left side represents terminal distribution information, news 1 to news 14, weather forecast and advertisement 1 to advertisement 3 are server distribution information, and store advertisement 1 is Although it is store distribution information, store advertisement 2 which is also store distribution information is added. The number of characters of each terminal distribution information is the same as the first designation example for news 1 to news 14, weather forecast, advertisement 1 to advertisement 3 and store advertisement 1, but the number of characters of store advertisement 2 is designated as 20. ing. Among these terminal distribution information, the total number of characters of the content (news and weather forecast) is 630, and the total number of characters of the advertisement in the server distribution information and the advertisement of the store distribution information is 162. The proportion of advertisements in the number of characters is 20.5%.

  In the second specification example, there are two pieces of terminal distribution information in which the number of characters is specified for the store distribution information. That is, at the store in the game hall, store distribution information different from the store advertisement 1 can be arbitrarily input using the store advertisement 2 indicated by the broken line and the arrow in the figure as an option area. Store advertisement 1 and store advertisement 2 may be submitted by arbitrarily increasing / decreasing different store distribution information within the range of the maximum number of characters specified as 40 characters and 20 characters, respectively. it can. Thereby, for example, the store of the game hall can distribute its own service information with the store advertisement 1 and distribute the advertisement of the other store with the store advertisement 2. Within this range, it can be distributed by appropriately inputting from the input device of the distribution control device. By providing such an option area, the number of store distribution information increases and decreases (in addition to the increase or decrease in the number of characters of the single store distribution information below the maximum number of characters, the increase or decrease in the number of store distribution information Increase / decrease below the number of characters). Note that the display result may be analyzed based on the log, and the distribution fee may be charged.

6). Explanation of Main Configuration and Operation and Examples of Modifications and Applications (1) Introduction As described above, the information distribution system receives content such as news and weather forecasts and advertisement information from the distribution server from the outside. The distribution information is transmitted to the distribution control device at each store of the game hall. And in the delivery control device of each store, in addition to the server delivery information, the store delivery information that each store intends to provide uniquely is delivered to the delivery terminal as terminal delivery information. Recalculate information, distribute distribution of advertisements and news, distribution distribution for stores, distribution distribution of advertisements and news, etc. and distribution of desired distribution amount specification information suitable for distribution at stores It is sent to the distribution terminal as quantity designation information.

  Therefore, the information distribution system, for example, service information such as events that a game hall (a company with a display device) wants to distribute to customers, etc., content information such as news from a news distribution source, and an advertisement source (such as a manufacturer) It is a system that efficiently distributes and displays information distributed among the three parties with advertisements from general companies, gaming machine manufacturers, nearby stores, etc.), and information related to gaming halls (company that installs display devices) Although the display distribution can be forcibly increased or decreased regardless of the display distribution designation of other information, limits (the above-mentioned store distribution distribution, store distribution limit, etc.) are provided for the increase and decrease.

Furthermore, as a characteristic matter, the following are mentioned, for example.
-There is a predetermined distribution for news and advertising.
・ The balance is calculated according to the amount of information displayed in the game hall.
The advertising source can limit the area where the information is distributed (by the distribution conditions such as “area specification op”).
-When a player operates the device, information display by information distribution is stopped as necessary, and game-related information (remaining number of times, remaining replayed ball number, etc.) is displayed.
-For the display of distribution information, it is possible to charge the distribution fee only when a person such as a player is present in the vicinity.
-Depending on the distribution conditions, it is also possible to select an advertisement to be displayed according to the difference between the number of balls acquired and the investment amount.
-It is possible to limit the information distributed according to the preference of the player or the like by inputting the attribute designation, or to change the display distribution.
・ According to the distribution results and distribution fees, the displayed advertisement amount can be aggregated and billed for the advertisement fee, and the displayed news amount can be aggregated and the news distribution fee can be charged. .
-There is a limit to the amount that can be increased or decreased for information display distribution of store distribution information such as player preferences and hall information by setting attribute increase and specifying distribution distribution for stores.
-The telop display on the distribution terminal can be stopped, rewinded, etc.
It is also possible to display more detailed information when a displayed telop is specified (when a touch operation or the like is performed on the touch panel).
-When an advertisement telop is designated, it is also possible to issue an advertisement coupon or the like.
・ When advertising and game hall service information is distributed or display distribution is changed, it is also possible to make an estimate by analyzing the current situation.
・ A human body detection sensor is provided in the vicinity of a gaming machine (for example, a personal counter, etc.), and there may be a difference in advertising costs during a game, before a game (before an out detection, etc.) and at the end of a game (when counting, etc.) Is possible.

(2) Mixing of store distribution information The distribution server in the information distribution system includes server distribution information of contents such as advertisements, news, and weather forecasts, and the distribution amount of server distribution information (frequency of display amount during a predetermined period, display amount) Distribution amount designation information for designating itself) and the like can be transmitted. The distribution control device on the store side includes a distribution terminal (for example, a table machine provided corresponding to a game machine, a data display machine of a machine and a lamp board, a game machine, a game machine individual counter and a curtain board display machine). A plurality of at least one cooperating device capable of communicating with each other) and a distribution server, and can receive server distribution information and distribution amount designation information from the distribution server, and distribution amount designation information The distribution amount specified in the store is preferentially mixed with store distribution information unique to the store, so the distribution amount specification information of the server distribution information can be changed, and the distribution amount specification information of the store distribution information can be set Yes, both the server distribution information and the store distribution information are transmitted to the distribution terminal as terminal distribution information, and the distribution amount designation information in which each terminal distribution information is changed is transmitted. The distribution terminal can preferentially mix and provide the store distribution information by limiting the distribution amount specified in the distribution amount designation information from the distribution server based on the distribution amount designation information from the distribution control device. It should be noted that the transmission amount designation information or the like from the distribution server to the distribution control device or from the distribution control device to the distribution terminal may be transmitted every predetermined time such as the first morning or every hour. It may be transmitted together with new distribution information, or may be transmitted together with each distribution information.

  Therefore, the distribution control device is interposed between the distribution terminal and the distribution server, can receive the server distribution information and the distribution amount designation information, and restricts the distribution amount specified in the distribution amount designation information and preferentially stores. In order to mix the distribution information, the distribution amount specification information is changed, the changed distribution amount specification information and the terminal distribution information are distributed to the distribution terminal, and the distribution terminal restricts the distribution amount specified in the distribution amount specification information. Because it is possible to provide store distribution information preferentially, it is the owner of the distribution terminal by reviewing the requests for the distribution amount of players, employees, advertising sources, news distribution sources, etc. that touch the display on the distribution terminal It is possible to forcibly limit the amount of information based on the ownership of the store and increase / decrease the distribution amount of the company service information, etc., and to make advertisements, company service information, etc. the optimum information amount.

  In other words, according to the information distribution system, a request for an amount of information that does not necessarily satisfy the hope of the content distribution source such as the user, the advertising source, and the news distribution source in implementing the information providing service at the game hall. It is possible to forcibly limit the amount of information based on ownership as the owner of the display device, etc., and to add, abolish, increase or decrease in-house service information, while paying sufficient attention to An information providing service can be implemented by using advertisements, news, company service information, and the like as optimal amounts of information.

(3) Modified example of increasing / decreasing the delivery amount itself As a modified example of the information delivery system described above, it is equivalent to the above (2) by distributing the delivery information by increasing / decreasing the delivery amount itself without using the delivery amount designation information. It is also possible to realize the mixing of store distribution information. For example, the server distribution information is transmitted from the distribution server, and the distribution control device on the store side is interposed between the distribution terminal and the distribution server, receives the server distribution information from the distribution server, and limits the distribution amount of the server distribution information. In order to preferentially mix store distribution information unique to the store, the distribution amount of the server distribution information is reduced to the distribution terminal, and the distribution amount of the store distribution information that can be distributed is increased. The amount of distribution for the distribution terminal itself is controlled. As a result, the distribution amount itself of the server distribution information to the distribution terminal is reduced, and the distribution terminal provides distribution information according to the amount of distribution information distributed from the distribution control device, and according to the distribution amount controlled by the distribution control device. Server distribution information and store distribution information will be provided.

  Therefore, in the provision of information at the distribution terminal, the distribution of the store distribution information is realized in the same manner as in (2) above, and the distribution amount of players, employees, advertising sources, news distribution sources, etc. in contact with the display on the distribution terminal is realized. By reviewing the request, it becomes possible to restrict the amount of information compulsorily based on the ownership of the store that is the owner of the distribution terminal and increase or decrease the distribution amount of in-house service information, etc. An optimal amount of information can be obtained. This form of (3) is particularly a case where the distribution terminal does not respond to the distribution control device as to whether or not information distribution has been received (for example, the distribution information received from the distribution control device by the distribution terminal sequentially This is effective when the information is distributed (provided) on the distribution control device side).

  In the case of adopting the form (3), in the main routine (FIG. 31) of the distribution server 800, the distribution amount designation information for each server distribution information may not be transmitted in step S817 (server distribution of content etc.). The information other than the distribution amount designation information such as information and server distribution conditions may be transmitted), and the distribution control device 90 controls the distribution amount of each terminal distribution information. However, the delivery server also sends delivery volume designation information, and the delivery control device mixes the store delivery information with the delivery volume of the server delivery information less than the delivery volume specified by the delivery volume designation information. It is also possible to control each delivery amount itself.

  Here, the distribution amount of the distribution information distributed to the distribution terminal is specified by the distribution control device. Therefore, the delivery control device may designate the delivery amount by the terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m]. That is, the above distribution amount designation information calculation subroutine (FIG. 36) is executed in the distribution control device, and terminal distribution information [[]] is distributed to each distribution terminal according to the distribution amount indicated by the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] obtained thereby. Send i] [m]. Thereby, at each distribution terminal, the server distribution information and the store distribution information are displayed as described above.

  However, in this case, the processing that uses the terminal distribution amount designation information in the constant display subroutine or the distribution condition display subroutine cannot be executed on the distribution terminal side, so that the display is performed on the distribution control device side and displayed on the distribution terminal. Distribution information may be selected. In addition, the processing using the terminal distribution condition [i] [m] and the processing for counting up the distribution results and the distribution amount information [i] are not performed on the distribution terminal side. It may be performed on the distribution control device side. In this way, the distribution control device specifies the distribution amount of each terminal distribution information [i] [m], and distributes each terminal distribution information [i] [m] according to the specification, and is distributed from the distribution control device. Even when the distribution terminal simply displays each terminal distribution information [i] [m] coming in, the distribution information can be provided at the distribution terminal in the same manner as described above (according to various modes described below) Distribution information can be provided in the same way.)

  As for server distribution information, the distribution server may transmit distribution amount designation information to the distribution control device, and the distribution amount designation information may be used in the distribution amount designation information calculation subroutine as described above. May not transmit the delivery amount designation information. When the delivery amount designation information is not transmitted from the delivery server, the delivery control device appropriately sends the delivery amount designation information of the server delivery information (the delivery amount designation information corresponding to the received delivery amount designation information of the server delivery information or the terminal delivery information [ i] [m] corresponding to the delivery amount designation information) may be designated (the delivery amount designation information need not be supplied from the delivery server to the delivery control device). For example, the delivery amount designation information of the server delivery information corresponding to the received delivery amount designation information is determined in advance, or the delivery amount designation information of the server delivery information is designated by setting input from the input device of the delivery control device. May be.

  And in the form which does not transmit delivery amount designation | designated information with respect to a delivery terminal in this way, it is also possible to control arbitrarily the delivery amount of each terminal delivery information [i] [m] in a delivery control apparatus. Therefore, the distribution control device can increase the distribution amount of the store distribution information by reducing the distribution amount of the server distribution information. However, increasing the distribution amount of the store distribution information by reducing the distribution amount of the server distribution information can also be realized in the above-described form in which the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] is transmitted to each distribution terminal. (For example, if the store distribution limit is increased or more distribution can be specified as the distribution distribution for the store, the distribution amount of the server distribution information is decreased and the distribution amount of the store distribution information is increased. Can do that.)

  The distribution terminals in the above (2) and (3) are connected to the distribution server so as to be communicable (directly or indirectly through the distribution control device) and input (input by communication from a higher-level distribution control device, Including remote control, manual input, and dip switch input.) Based on the distribution amount designation information or terminal distribution information whose distribution amount is controlled, the distribution amount of server distribution information is limited and provided by preferentially mixing store distribution information. Is possible.

(4) Change of delivery amount designation information in delivery control device The delivery control device accepts delivery information and delivery conditions from the outside, and delivers according to the delivery conditions within the changed range of the changed delivery amount designation information. That is, in the distribution control device, the terminal distribution amount calculated by specifying the distribution distribution for the store, distribution distribution for advertisements and news, attribute increase, non-attribute decrease, distribution distribution designation information for the store distribution information, and the like. The designation information can be changed, and further, the terminal delivery amount designation information calculated by appropriately changing the designation of the distribution distribution for the stores can be changed. Then, according to the changed terminal delivery amount designation information and delivery conditions, delivery from the delivery control device and provision of terminal delivery information at the delivery terminal are performed.

(5) Information providing means at distribution terminal A distribution terminal such as an intermediary machine such as the information distribution sand described above distributes a predetermined amount at a predetermined time by the processing of the telop display subroutine in the display means as the information providing means. Displays a telop that provides information. In particular, in such a telop display, information that can be displayed in a predetermined unit time is limited unlike information that can be displayed as much as the memory is added as in a personal computer. If delivery is performed based on the quantity designation information, information such as store service information cannot be delivered. On the other hand, if the delivery amount designation information is changed as described above, store delivery information can be mixed with terminal delivery information and delivered, and store service information and the like can be provided. .

(6) Intermediary machine as a distribution terminal etc. An intermediary machine as a distribution terminal is provided for each gaming machine, and is based on valuable value specifying information read from a storage medium storing information that can specify the valuable value. Lending gaming media or instructing gaming machines to lend within the range of the specified value. By using such a pedestrian machine as a distribution terminal, it is possible to mix service information of the game hall and the like into the terminal distribution information as store distribution information in the game hall. In addition, each device in the game hall such as the inter-machine is connected so as to be communicable with a management device that stores a valuable value for each storage medium, like each device in the game hall management system 1. Each of these devices can be a distribution terminal as described above.

(7) Limiting the amount of change in the distribution amount designation information In the distribution control device, the distribution amount specified in the server distribution amount designation information is limited and mixed with the store distribution information. Limits can be set. This restriction can be provided by specifying distribution distribution for stores as described above: distribution of advertisements, news, etc. (step S911 in FIG. 35).

  If the service information of the store is excessively increased, it is not preferable because another advertiser complains that an advertisement corresponding to the advertisement fee is not made. In addition, if only advertisements and store service information are sent to players, etc., it will not be enjoyed and will eventually not be seen. On the other hand, if the amount of change of the delivery amount designation information is limited, the service information of the store will not increase excessively, and there is a complaint that other advertisers will not make advertisements commensurate with the advertising fee do not do. Also, since there is no such thing as advertising and store service information flowing, there is no chance that players will not be able to see it after all.

(8) Third Signal, etc. According to the above-described constant display subroutine or distribution condition display subroutine, the distribution terminal receives the third signal other than the terminal distribution amount designation information and the terminal distribution information, and receives the third signal (out, safe). Game-related information (frequency, replay, etc.) specified by terminal distribution information and storage information on storage media, based on ball rental button, touch panel touch, return button, counting signal, seating signal, deposit, card insertion, jackpot, etc. The number of balls, the number of winning balls, points, winning and losing (safe-out), etc.) can be switched and presented (determination in step SD32 in FIG. 37).

  Thereby, provision of terminal distribution information composed of news, advertisements and the like and provision of game-related information necessary for business can be switched as appropriate. That is, for example, in the display unit of the intermediary machine as a distribution terminal, while the terminal distribution information such as news and advertisements is always displayed, the player arrives at the game machine and inserts the membership card and cash into the intermediary machine Then, the frequency information obtained by frequencyizing cash as game-related information and the number information of balls for replaying the stored balls for using the acquired number of balls again to the gaming machine are displayed. When the game is started and an out signal is detected from an out meter that generates a signal for one firing ball, terminal distribution information such as news and advertisements is provided again, and the out signal is used as a distribution terminal. If the number of points reaches a predetermined number and the number of points increases, the provision of distribution information is interrupted as the points increase, and the number of points as game-related information is displayed again. It is done.

  Further, the display of the game related information in this case times out after a predetermined time, and the display is switched to the terminal distribution information display (determination in step SD43 in FIG. 38). The number of game-related information, the number of replayed balls, points, etc. need not be displayed after confirmation by the player, so it is possible to display interesting terminal distribution information news and advertisements after a predetermined time. This is because it is better. This switching is performed when a third signal is received and a predetermined condition is met (out is 30 balls (× 60 seconds / 100 balls can be converted into time), even within the predetermined time. Out detection or when the handle changes from OFF to ON) (determination in step SD44 in FIG. 38). If switching between terminal distribution information and game-related information is made when the third signal becomes a predetermined condition, the display can be switched without causing a sense of incongruity to a player or the like and in the operation of the game hall. Can do.

  In addition, the distribution terminal processes information based on the calculation result (parameters are the third signal, terminal distribution information, terminal distribution amount designation information, and time information. For example, the determination is similar to the determination of steps SD43 and SD44 in FIG. 38). The display of terminal distribution information and the display of game-related information (frequency, number of replay balls, number of winning balls, points, winning / losing (safe-out)) Good (determination in step SD35 in FIG. 37). Furthermore, since the display of the terminal distribution information and the display of the game related information are switched when the calculation result becomes a predetermined condition, the display can be switched without causing a sense of incongruity to the player and in business.

(9) Other forms of terminal distribution information The distribution terminal provides the same terminal distribution information one or more times regardless of the terminal distribution amount designation information, and for each type of terminal distribution information (news, external The terminal distribution information may be provided within the range of the upper limit frequency defined in the advertisement and company service information. Such terminal distribution information is provided when, for example, in the telop display subroutine (FIG. 39), the determination process (step ST16) for determining whether y is equal to or greater than the end of the terminal distribution information [i] is repeated a predetermined number of times. (After the determination result of “Yes” is predetermined a plurality of times), the display information number i can be incremented (step ST19). You may decide to provide it.

  Regardless of the terminal delivery amount designation information, the same terminal delivery information is provided once or multiple times, and is provided within the range of the upper limit frequency determined for each type of terminal delivery information. Appropriate distribution of distribution can be achieved, and if the company's service information is excessively large, dissatisfaction that advertisements commensurate with the advertisement fee will not be made by other advertisers, If you only flow external advertisements and store service information, you can solve the problem that you won't be able to see it after all.

(10) Attribute designation information In the information distribution system, the distribution amount can be changed according to the attribute information of the player or the like by the attribute increase and non-attribute decrease described above (steps S926, S927, and S928 in FIG. 36). Is possible. Furthermore, by appropriately setting the attribute increase amount and the non-attribute decrease amount, it is possible to limit the change of the distribution amount according to the attribute information of the player or the like. The attribute designation information [i] [m] represents the attribute information of the player or the like here, but for the attribute information of the player or the like, the genre of the information desired to be distributed as described above is used. The type (genre) information corresponding to the card ID can be managed as the information to be shown, and it can be used as attribute designation information (the card ID includes the above-mentioned member IC card 30 and non-member IC. The card 31 and the employee also include a card ID such as a clerk card 32 that manages the attribute information, but other IDs may be used as long as the identification information of the specific person, the player and the employee Other card IDs or IDs using media other than cards can also be used.)

  When managing the type (genre) information corresponding to the card ID, the above-mentioned address, name, age, gender, favorite stand, contact information, password for the player who has the IC card for membership 30 As attribute information indicating the type (genre) of distribution information desired in the information distribution by the information distribution system, the genre such as economic news, entertainment news, entertainment news, function explanation news, weather, etc. Each distribution request information is also managed, and such distribution request information (hereinafter referred to as “type information”) indicating the type of desired distribution information is also identified as one of the attribute information. Register in the management device based on the ID. The type information includes, for example, the distribution control device 90, the pachinko machine 2, the inter-vehicle machines 3, 4 and 6, the slot machine 5, the counter 9, the checkout machine 10, and the prize management machine (POS) 11 connected to the network 8. The replay accepting device 12, the management device 13, the issuing device 20, the data display device 21 and the data display device 21 can also be input at the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 or the like. If there is, it is possible to accept an input at the prize management machine (POS) 11 at the time of enrollment, or an accepting change input by the member is performed at an out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22 or inter-machines 3, 4 and 6 etc. May be. For non-member players, it is preferable that the input of delivery request information as the type information can be accepted by the intermediary machines 3, 4 and 6 installed for each gaming machine. The distribution request information in the case of a non-member player may be registered in the management device as type information of the non-member player based on the ID of the non-member IC card 31. The type information may be set by storing the setting of the distribution request information in the distribution terminal itself such as the interpolator using the touch panels 4 and 6. For non-member players, the distribution request information of the once registered type information may be cleared when it is determined that the non-member player is no longer in contact with the distribution information. For example, when a game is not performed for a predetermined time on a game machine where non-member game players have received distribution request information (that is, an outmeter that detects a discharge ball that has a remaining number of zero and is disposed below the game machine) Clearing the distribution request information that was the type information of the non-member player when the non-member IC card 31 is returned by the settlement machine, etc. May be.

  Here, when the type information is registered in the management device based on the IDs of the member IC card 30 and the non-member IC card 31, the member IC card 30 and the non-member IC card 31 are used for each distribution terminal. Therefore, the type information is specified for each distribution terminal. Further, in the case where the distribution request information is stored for each device such as the intermediary machines 3, 4 and 6, the type information set for each distribution terminal is used, so the type information is also designated for each distribution terminal. . Therefore, server distribution information (distribution information from a distribution server) is distributed for each distribution terminal in both cases where the type information is registered in the management apparatus based on the card ID and is set for each apparatus such as an inter-vehicle machine. And / or the type of distribution of store distribution information (other distribution information from the distribution control device provided in the store) can be selected (the attribute designation information [i] [m] is also distributed from each distribution terminal) Since it is transmitted to the control device, it is possible to select the type to be distributed in the same manner.)

  The attribute designation information based on the type information as described above is transmitted when there is an input for designating an attribute at each distribution terminal as in the case of the attribute designation information [i] [m]. It differs from the attribute designation information [i] [m] in that it indicates the type (genre) of the corresponding desired delivery information. Therefore, the attribute designation information based on the type information from each distribution terminal is referred to as “attribute designation information [m, ID]”, and a specific form using this attribute designation information [m, ID] will be described below.

  The attribute designation information [m, ID] is type information that is input by the input device at the distribution terminal having the terminal number m or specified by the card ID of the inserted IC card 30 or the like, and the terminal number m And the card ID (identification information ID corresponding to the member IC card 30, non-member IC card 31, store clerk card 32, etc. inserted at the distribution terminal) as parameters. The input attribute designation information [m, ID] is registered in a management device such as the management device 13 so as to be readable based on m and / or card ID (when the type information is set in the distribution terminal as described above) May not have a card ID as a parameter, and may not have a terminal number m as a parameter when specifying the distribution terminal is not essential as will be described later.), Attribute designation by card insertion, key operation, etc. Used when there is an input. As a form in which the attribute designation information [m, ID] is input at each distribution terminal of the game hall management system 1, the following can be cited.

・ Issuing machine 20
Although the issuing machine 20 does not handle attribute designation information (step SD2 in FIG. 5), a form of handling can also be adopted. For example, when the touch panel for inputting the attribute designation information [m, ID] is not provided in the intermediary machines 3, 4 and 6, the member IC card 30 inserted by the issuing machine 20 or a non-issued new card The member IC card 31 is associated with a card ID, which is identification information that can be identified, and type information as attribute designation information is input to the player (player) according to the display on the display unit 20e and stored. Good. However, in this case, the player receives the issuance of the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 in the issuing machine 20 and immediately leaves the issuing machine 20 and sits in front of the gaming machine. There is no time to specify and distribute distribution information according to the player's preference. Therefore, in order to distribute the distribution information corresponding to the attribute designation information [m, ID] in the gaming machine to be seated later, management of attribute designation information based on the ID may be adopted (in the issuing machine 20, the terminal number m is not necessarily a parameter. It is not necessary to use as the attribute designation information [ID] using only the ID of the card to be issued as a parameter. When the management of attribute designation information [ID] based on ID is employed in this way, for the IC card 30 for members, unless the attribute designation information [ID] registered at the first registration is changed by the distribution terminal such as the issuing machine 20 or the like. It is stored in the distribution control device 90. For the non-member IC card 31, only on the day of issuance, until the game ends (the remaining number of valuables is 0, and whether the out from the outmeter is interrupted for a predetermined time or is left by the human body detection sensor) The attribute designation information [ID] based on the ID is stored in the distribution control device 90 until the remaining number as the valuable value is settled in the settlement machine 10.

・ Replay acceptance machine 12
The replay accepting machine 12 does not handle attribute designation information (step SD2 in FIG. 8), but adopts a mode in which attribute designation information is handled in response to a case where a player who comes to the store starts from a replay. You can also For example, in the case where the touch panel is not installed in the intermediary machines 3, 4, and 6, the attribute designation is made in the replay accepting machine 12 corresponding to the case where the player who has visited the store starts from the replay as in the case of the issuing machine 20 described above. Information [ID] may be handled.

・ Between machines 3, 4 and 6
In the inter-machines 3, 4, and 6, the type of distribution information according to the player's own preference that the player sees is input on the touch panel or the like according to the display on the display unit 3 e, and the type information specified by the input is input. Attribute designation information [m, ID] is created as the stored result. The created attribute designation information [m, ID] is transmitted to the management apparatus 13 for registration, or directly transmitted to the distribution control apparatus 90 to be used for calculation of the distribution amount designation information. In this case, particularly for a member player, it is better to manage the attribute designation information [ID] in the distribution control device 90 based on the card ID which is the identification code of the player instead of m which is the identification code of the distribution terminal. This is preferable because it saves time and effort to change the attribute designation information every time the player changes the game machine serving as the distribution terminal. In addition, when there is no attribute designation information input unit such as a touch panel on the display unit of the intermediary machine such as the display unit 3e, the attribute designation information may be input by another distribution terminal.

・ Counter 9
In the counter 9, an attribute designation is made as a result of inputting the type of distribution information desired by the player according to his / her preference on the touch panel according to the display on the display unit 9g and storing the type information designated by the input. Create information [m, ID]. The created attribute designation information [m, ID] is transmitted to the management apparatus 13 for registration, or directly transmitted to the distribution control apparatus 90 to be used for calculation of the distribution amount designation information. In this case, particularly for a member player, it is better to manage the attribute designation information [ID] in the distribution control device 90 based on the card ID which is the identification code of the player instead of m which is the identification code of the distribution terminal. This is preferable because it saves the trouble of changing the attribute designation information every time the player moves and the current distribution terminal changes. In addition, when there is no input part of attribute designation information, such as a touch panel, on the display unit 9g, the attribute designation information may be input at another distribution terminal.

  Further, for the counter 9, as the distribution information corresponding to the counter, for example, a type such as premium information may be designated by attribute designation information, and the designation may be made exclusively for employees. In this case, the attribute designation information of the counter 9 can be received only when the employee's clerk card 32 is received, when the management device 13 receives information indicating that the counting is possible, or only the employee. When the special key operation is performed, the distribution control device 90 manages based on the terminal number m of the counter 9, or the distribution control device 90 uses the card ID of the employee clerk card 32 and the terminal of the counter 9 You may make it manage based on the number m. Alternatively, the counter 9 may not input attribute designation information, and the distribution control device 90 or another distribution terminal (for example, the management device 13) may accept input of attribute designation information in the counter 9. .

・ Premium management machine (POS) 11
In the prize management machine (POS) 11, a request for distribution information of a type according to his / her preference viewed by the player is input on the touch panel or the like according to the display on the display unit 11d, and the type information specified by the input is stored. As a result, attribute specification information [m, ID] is created. The created attribute designation information [m, ID] is transmitted to the management apparatus 13 for registration, or directly transmitted to the distribution control apparatus 90 to be used for calculation of the distribution amount designation information. In this case, particularly for a member player, it is better to manage the attribute designation information [ID] in the distribution control device 90 based on the card ID which is the identification code of the player instead of m which is the identification code of the distribution terminal. This is preferable because it saves the trouble of changing the attribute designation information every time the player moves and the current distribution terminal changes. When there is no attribute designation information input unit such as a touch panel on the display unit 11d, the attribute designation information may be input at another distribution terminal.

  As for the gift management machine (POS) 11, as the distribution information suitable for the prize management machine, for example, the type of the prize information or the like is designated by the attribute designation information, and the designation may be made exclusively for the employee. . In this case, with respect to the attribute designation information of the gift management machine (POS) 11, when the employee's clerk card 32 is accepted, information indicating that the business is in operation is received from the management device 13, or the employee When a special key operation that can only be performed by an employee is performed, the distribution control device 90 manages the key based on the terminal number m of the prize management machine (POS) 11 or the distribution control device 90 stores the employee's clerk card 32. You may make it manage based on card ID and the terminal number m of the prize management machine (POS) 11. Alternatively, the attribute management information (POS) 11 is not input with the attribute designation information, and the distribution control device 90 or another distribution terminal (for example, the management device 13) does not input the attribute designation information in the prize management device (POS) 11. An input may be accepted.

・ Checkout machine 10
In the checkout machine 10, the request for the type of distribution information according to his / her preference as seen by the player is input on the touch panel or the like according to the display on the display unit 10g, and the attribute designation is performed as a result of storing the type information designated by the input. Create information [m, ID]. The created attribute designation information [m, ID] is transmitted to the management apparatus 13 for registration, or directly transmitted to the distribution control apparatus 90 to be used for calculation of the distribution amount designation information. In this case, particularly for a member player, it is better to manage the attribute designation information [ID] in the distribution control device 90 based on the card ID which is the identification code of the player instead of m which is the identification code of the distribution terminal. This is preferable because it saves the trouble of changing the attribute designation information every time the player moves and the current distribution terminal changes. In addition, when there is no input unit for attribute designation information such as a touch panel on the display unit 10g, the attribute designation information may be input at another distribution terminal.

  Further, for the payment machine 10, for example, a type such as premium information may be designated by attribute designation information as distribution information suitable for the payment machine, and the designation may be made exclusively for employees. In this case, as for the attribute designation information of the checkout machine 10, when the employee's clerk card 32 is accepted, information indicating that the business is in operation is received from the management device 13, or only the employee is possible. When the special key operation is performed, the distribution control device 90 manages based on the terminal number m of the settlement machine 10, or the distribution control device 90 manages the card ID of the employee clerk card 32 and the terminal of the settlement machine 10. You may make it manage based on the number m. Alternatively, the attribute specifying information may not be input in the settlement machine 10 and the attribute control information in the settlement machine 10 may be received by the distribution control device 90 or another distribution terminal (for example, the management device 13). .

・ Data display 21
In the data display device 21, as a result of inputting the type of distribution information desired by the player according to his / her preference on the touch panel or the like according to the display on the display unit 21 a, and storing the type information designated by the input. Create attribute specification information [m, ID]. The created attribute designation information [m, ID] is transmitted to the management apparatus 13 for registration, or directly transmitted to the distribution control apparatus 90 to be used for calculation of the distribution amount designation information. In this case, particularly for a member player, it is better to manage the attribute designation information [ID] in the distribution control device 90 based on the card ID which is the identification code of the player instead of m which is the identification code of the distribution terminal. This is preferable because it saves the trouble of changing the attribute designation information every time the player moves and the current distribution terminal changes. In addition, when there is no attribute designation information input unit such as a touch panel on the display unit such as the display unit 21a, the attribute designation information may be input at another distribution terminal. The data display 21 does not input attribute designation information, and the distribution control device 90 or another distribution terminal (for example, the management device 13) accepts input of attribute designation information in the data display 21. Also good.

-Terminal device 22 for gift exchange outside the store
The out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 also has a function as a data publishing machine. As the function as the data publishing machine, the display unit displays a request for the type of distribution information according to his / her preference as viewed by the player. The attribute designation information [m, ID] is created as a result of storing the type information designated by the input using the touch panel. The created attribute designation information [m, ID] is transmitted to the management apparatus 13 for registration, or directly transmitted to the distribution control apparatus 90 to be used for calculation of the distribution amount designation information. In this case, particularly for a member player, it is better to manage the attribute designation information [ID] in the distribution control device 90 based on the card ID which is the identification code of the player instead of m which is the identification code of the distribution terminal. This is preferable because it saves the trouble of changing the attribute designation information every time the player moves and the current distribution terminal changes. In addition, when there is no attribute designation information input unit such as a touch panel on the display unit of the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22, the attribute designation information may be input at another distribution terminal. The function as the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 will be described later.

  Further, for the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22, as the distribution information suitable for the data disclosure machine, for example, a type such as premium information is designated by the attribute designation information, and the designation may be made exclusively for employees. Good. In this case, with respect to the attribute designation information of the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22, when the employee's clerk card 32 is accepted, information indicating that the business is in operation is received from the management device 13, or When a special key operation that can be performed only by an employee is performed, the distribution control device 90 manages the data based on the terminal number m of the data publishing machine 22, or the distribution control device 90 uses the card ID of the employee clerk card 32. Further, the management may be performed based on the terminal number m of the terminal device 22 for gift exchange outside the store. Alternatively, the data publishing machine 22 does not input the attribute designation information, and the distribution control device 90 or another distribution terminal (for example, the management device 13) inputs the attribute designation information in the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22. You may make it accept.

Management device 13
In the management device 13, for example, a distribution device of a type of distribution request for advertisement information related to a business viewed by an executive such as a store manager among employees (for example, advertising information related to a business such as a gaming machine or a gaming machine peripheral device) is managed. The attribute designation information [m, ID] is created as a result of storing the designated type information by designating it by an operation on the screen of 13 display devices (for example, designating by clicking with a mouse pointer). The created attribute designation information [m, ID] is registered by the management apparatus 13 or transmitted to the distribution control apparatus 90 and used for calculation of the distribution amount designation information. Such a management device 13 is a card system management device that processes valuable value information such as the frequency, and adjusts settings for changing the nail of the gaming machine and the medal rate of the slot machine with the operating information of the gaming machine. A communicatively connected hall computer that counts the number of items to be collected, a management device for managing premiums for managing the number of stocks and goods issued, and a management device for managing members such as the number of stored items, etc., via a network 8 It is good also as what is done.

  The management device 13 registers and manages attribute designation information [m, ID] and the like transmitted from each distribution terminal such as the issuing machine 20. In other words, the type information specified by each distribution terminal (economic news, entertainment news, entertainment news, news on function explanation of gaming machines, weather, etc.) is input to the management device 13 as described above. Distribution request information) is transmitted as the attribute designation information [m, ID], and the management apparatus 13 that has received the attribute designation information [m, ID] via the network 8 receives the parameter of the reception attribute designation information [m, ID]. As the attribute information corresponding to the card ID, the received attribute designation information [m, ID] is stored and managed in a database or the like of the storage device. The type information to be transmitted or input to the management device 13 as the attribute designation information [m, ID] includes the distribution control device 90, the pachinko machine 2, the inter-machines 3, 4, and 6 connected to the network 8 as described above, and the slot. Out-of-store gift exchange that also functions as a machine 5, a counter 9, a payment machine 10, a gift management machine (POS) 11, a replay accepting machine 12, a management device 13, an issuing machine 20, a data display machine 21, and a data publishing machine The terminal device 22 can be used for input, and if it is a member, it is possible to accept input at the prize management machine (POS) 11 or the like at the time of enrollment, or the member can accept midway change acceptance input by exchanging gifts outside the store. May be performed by the terminal device 22 or the intercom machines 3, 4 and 6, etc., and for non-member players, the inter-equipment provided for each game console is input of distribution request information as its type information Received on machines 3, 4 and 6 etc. Since may allow, type information entered in these devices, attribute designation information to each management device 13 [m, ID] it is managed by being registered as. For non-member players, however, the type information of the attribute designation information [m, ID] once registered is cleared when it is determined that the non-member player is no longer in contact with the distribution information. Also good. For example, when a game is not performed for a predetermined time on a game machine where non-member game players have received distribution request information (that is, an outmeter that detects a discharge ball that has a remaining number of zero and is disposed below the game machine) When the output from the non-member IC card 31 is returned by the checkout machine, the attribute designation information registered as the type information of the non-member player [ m, ID] may be deleted from the storage device.

  Then, the management apparatus 13 supplies the registered attribute designation information [m, ID] to the distribution control apparatus 90 as attribute designation information designated by the distribution terminal having the terminal number of the parameter m. However, the distribution terminal itself may supply the attribute designation information [m, ID] to the distribution control device 90 as described above. In addition, as described above, when the type information is set in the distribution terminal itself such as an intermediary machine, the distribution terminal may directly transmit the attribute designation information [m, ID] to the distribution control device 90. Furthermore, each distribution terminal may receive the attribute designation information [m, ID] corresponding to the card ID from the management apparatus 13 and transmit it to the distribution control apparatus 90 (however, in this case, each distribution terminal distributes The parameter m of the attribute designation information [m, ID] to be transmitted to the control device 90 is the terminal number of each distribution terminal in this case The supply form of the attribute designation information [m, ID] to the distribution control device 90 in this case is The attribute designation information [i] [m] is similar to the above-described form in which it is transmitted to the distribution control device 90, but the supply form of the other attribute designation information [m, ID] here is the attribute designation information. It can also be applied when [i] [m] is used.) For example, in each distribution terminal, when there is an information input for designating a corresponding attribute such as a card ID by operating an input device such as a touch panel, the input state is stored in the storage device, and in step SD5 above The attribute designation information [m, ID] may be transmitted. When information such as attribute designation information [m, ID] indicating the type information desired to be distributed is not obtained on the distribution terminal side, information indicating no attribute is transmitted from the distribution terminal to the distribution control device 90. Accordingly, the distribution amount may not be changed according to the attribute for the distribution terminal.

  The attribute designation information [m, ID] input at each distribution terminal and supplied to the distribution control device 90 as described above is used in the distribution control device 90 to calculate the distribution amount designation information of each terminal distribution information. . The calculation of the delivery amount designation information in this case can be performed in the same flow as the above-described delivery amount designation information calculation subroutine (FIG. 36). Different. That is, the distribution control device 90 receives the attribute designation information [m, ID] from each distribution terminal (step S924 in the figure), and calculates the distribution amount designation information [i] (step in the figure). Next, the distribution attribute of the terminal [m] is determined (step S926 in the figure). The determination of the distribution attribute at this time is attribute specification information [m, ID received from the terminal [m] in step S924. ] And the type information of terminal distribution information [i] [m] (as described above, the type information for each piece of distribution information input in step S813 in FIG. 31 or step S913 in FIG. 35).

  Specifically, the distribution attribute is determined based on whether or not the type information of the attribute designation information [m, ID] matches the type information of the terminal distribution information [i] [m]. The terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] giving the increased amount according to the attribute is calculated (the determination result in step S926 is “Yes” and the calculation in step S927 is performed), and the two do not match. In some cases, the terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] reduced by the amount corresponding to the attribute non-applicable is calculated (the determination result in step S926 is “No” and the calculation in step S928 is performed).

  Here, when the card ID is used in place of the terminal number m as a parameter for specifying the attribute designation information [m, ID] (when the attribute designation information [ID] is used), each member [m] Whether or not the IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 is inserted, if it is inserted, receives the ID of the card, and based on the received ID, the storage device of the distribution control device 90 The presence / absence of the distribution attribute may be determined from the above. Also, for example, for an employee whose desired distribution information type is pachinko business advertisement, when the attribute designation information [ID] based on the card ID of the employee includes pachinko business advertisement (multiple designation is possible) The terminal distribution information [i] [m] in which the distribution amount of the pachinko business advertisement is increased is distributed to the distribution terminal in which the employee has inserted the clerk card 32. Attribute designation information [ID] for such employees is not interesting only for pachinko business advertisements, so multiple designations may be possible. Also, because each employee has a different card ID, terminal delivery is preferentially delivered. It is also possible to specify the type of information [i] [m] for each employee.

  Note that the change of the delivery amount according to the attribute designation information is not necessarily performed in the same manner for both the server delivery information and the store delivery information, and may be performed for at least one of the server delivery information and the store delivery information.

(11) Distribution fee In the distribution result totaling (step S932 in FIG. 36), the distribution control apparatus totals and outputs the income or expenditure by the information distribution at the store or both of these amounts based on the distribution amount designation information. (For example, the counting result can be displayed, printed, output by voice, or output to the outside (distribution server or the like)). That is, in each distribution terminal, terminal distribution information to be displayed is selected based on terminal distribution amount designation information (or terminal distribution amount designation information and distribution conditions) by the processing of the above-described constant display subroutine and distribution condition subroutine (see FIG. Step SD38 in 37 and Step SD49 in FIG. 38), each terminal summarizing the distribution amount information [i] counted up by displaying the selected terminal distribution information for the distribution control device The distribution fee of the distribution information [i] [m] is transmitted (step SD312 in FIG. 37, step SD412 in FIG. 38 and step SD2 or SD5 described above). And about the delivery charge of each terminal delivery information [i] [m] by totaling the delivery amount information [i] here, for example, “minimum frequency 1/30” is displayed on the upper side of the above-mentioned advertisement fee table (FIG. 41). Is 100 yen / day per terminal, that is, 30000 yen per day in 300 halls, * × 1.1 means 330 yen / day per terminal when the above minimum frequency 1/30 is achieved As shown, the delivery amount designation information such as the minimum frequency of each terminal delivery information [i] [m] (for server delivery information, at the time of submission in step S813 in FIG. 35 based on the desired delivery amount designation information input at the time of submission in step S913 in 35), and a specific delivery fee depending on whether or not the designated delivery amount has been achieved. You will ask for the amount. Therefore, the distribution control device (step S924 in FIG. 36) that receives the distribution fee of each terminal distribution information [i] [m] from each distribution terminal evaluates the actual distribution amount based on the original distribution amount designation information. Distribution fee information based on the result is obtained, and the revenue amount or the expenditure amount based on the distribution amount designation information can be aggregated and output for each distribution information.

  The revenue from the information distribution includes the advertising fee revenue due to the implementation of the advertisement, but the advertising fee revenue may be returned to the store side. For example, for the advertisement in the store distribution information, since the store becomes an advertising agency and the advertisement is performed on each distribution terminal, the store may collect an intermediate margin for the store. That is, since the store distribution information submitted by the store side can include advertisements received from nearby shops or restaurants, the store side pays the operator of the information distribution system for the advertisement fee of such advertisements. The amount excluding the fee is the amount charged from the store for the store or restaurant, and the distribution control device counts the amount charged as a distribution fee for the store distribution information (distribution fee for the advertisement) and transmits it to the distribution server. (Step S932 in FIG. 36 and Step S918 in FIG. 35). Then, the distribution server (step S810 in FIG. 31) that has received the distribution fee of the store distribution information from the distribution control device gives the distribution fee, which is the amount charged from the store, to the store or restaurant. The fee plus the fee is charged as the advertising fee, and the distribution fee in the paid advertising fee is returned to the store. In this case, for the billing from the distribution server, an identification code of a store or a restaurant in the vicinity of the store is included in the distribution condition for each store distribution information, and the distribution server Or it is good also as what carries out the claim to a restaurant etc. by printing and sending out of an e-mail or a mail.

  Here, regarding advertisements for stores or restaurants in the vicinity of the store, more effective distribution can be performed by appropriately selecting distribution conditions (such as various options in the above advertisement fee table). Is calculated based on the selected various distribution conditions and distribution amount designation information, and the amount obtained by subtracting the operator's fee from the calculated amount as described above is the advertising fee income on the store side. Furthermore, advertisements such as shops or restaurants may be distributed to other stores based on the distribution conditions (the above “Regional Designation Op” etc.) in addition to the neighboring stores. In other words, the intermediate margin for the neighboring stores may be returned from the advertising fee at other stores.

  In the game hall store, the advertisement fee income can be obtained by the advertisement in the store distribution information. However, if own store distribution information such as service information is increased, advertisements in the store distribution information are reduced accordingly, so that the advertising fee income for the store is reduced. Such advertising fee revenue can be calculated from the distribution fee of the store distribution information based on the result of evaluating the actual distribution amount based on the original distribution amount designation information as described above. For example, the distribution fee information to be tabulated is expressed in a negative amount, for example, the distribution fee as a return money for the advertising fee to the store side, and the money paid from the store side to the operator etc. The distribution fee may be expressed as a positive amount. In this case, for advertisement store distribution information, the distribution fee excluding the operator's commission from the advertisement fee is an amount of -23 yen per distribution, and the service information store distribution information is distributed unless it is distributed. The fee is 0 yen, but when it is distributed, a fee will be charged as a price that the store did not distribute external advertisements to the operator, and the distribution fee will be +45 yen per distribution.

  On the other hand, the expenditure for information distribution includes a content price paid to a content distribution source such as news and weather forecast. Regarding the content price, the distribution server responds to the distribution record for each store based on the distribution record of the server distribution information received from the distribution control device of each store (step S810 in FIG. 31 and step S918 in FIG. 35). It is also possible to impose payment for the content. In this case, if the store distribution information is increased, the content distribution fee due to the information distribution at the store is reduced accordingly, so the content charge imposed on the store is reduced. In addition, if the equipment related to the information distribution system in the store is a rental or the like and the store does not have ownership, if the store increases the store distribution information, it will be used as a system usage fee on the store side Depending on the increase in information distribution fees or the type of contract between the store and the operator, etc., if the store increases the store distribution information, the store spending may increase. In the game hall stores, expenditures for information distribution are generated in this way. These expenditures can be totaled from the distribution charges and distribution results of store distribution information and the distribution results of server distribution information.

  In the distribution control device, as described above, revenues and expenditures due to distribution of content such as store service information, advertisements, and news, or the amount of both of these can be aggregated, and the distribution amount of each distribution information It is possible to exchange money according to the situation. In particular, the store distribution information specific to the information distribution system can be increased or decreased on the store side (distribution control device), but the balance control according to the increase or decrease of the store distribution information is also performed in the distribution control device as described above. It is possible to exchange money according to the distribution amount of store service information and the like.

  Further, in the above-described modification (2) in which the distribution amount itself is increased or decreased, the distribution control device distributes each terminal distribution information (the actual distribution amount actually distributed) is naturally known in the distribution control device. Since it is information, the distribution fee can be calculated from the distribution results for each of the store distribution information and the server distribution information. Therefore, in the distribution control device that controls the distribution amount itself, it is possible to perform balance calculation based on the distribution performance of each distribution information, and it is also possible to perform balance calculation according to the increase or decrease of store distribution information such as service information In the same manner as described above, money can be exchanged according to the distribution amount of store service information and the like.

  On the other hand, since the distribution server receives the distribution fee of the store distribution information, the distribution record of the store distribution information, and the distribution record of the server distribution information from the distribution control device of each store (in step S810 in FIG. 31 and in FIG. 35) Step S918) In addition to gathering all the information for calculating the balance at each store, distribution results of server distribution information at all stores can be totaled. As a result, the distribution server can calculate the balance of the store distribution information of each store in the same manner as described above, and can calculate the distribution fee of each server distribution information, so that news, weather forecasts and advertisements can be calculated. It is possible to perform balance calculation for each type of server distribution information.

  In other words, according to the information distribution system, when the information providing service is provided at the game hall, the advertisement distributor, the content distribution source such as news and the game hall, or these and service users such as the player are combined. The distribution amount of each piece of distribution information that can be changed by the four parties can be accurately grasped, so the distribution fee of each piece of distribution information is accurately calculated according to the amount of distribution such as the actual result of distribution, Money can be exchanged according to the amount of distribution. In the distribution control device, the distribution fee based on the distribution amount of each distribution information by the information distribution in the store can be calculated from the distribution result and distribution fee of each terminal distribution information received from each distribution terminal. For store distribution information distributed only at that store, the distribution control device can grasp the total distribution amount of the store distribution information, so the distribution fee generated can be determined on the distribution control device side (without depending on the distribution server). ) Can be calculated. In the distribution server, the distribution results of each store distribution information and each server distribution information are totaled based on the distribution results and distribution charges of each store distribution information received from the distribution control device of each store and the distribution results of each server distribution information. Since the distribution amount of all distribution information can be grasped, the distribution fee based on the distribution amount of each server distribution information can be calculated, and the distribution amount of store distribution information distributed at two or more stores The distribution fee based on the distribution amount of the store distribution information distributed only at one store can also be calculated by the distribution server. The calculated distribution fee may be output in a predetermined form in the distribution server or the distribution control device. For example, the calculated distribution fee is output to a monitor output, a print output, an external device on the network or a device in the store. An output or the like may be performed.

  The calculation of the distribution fee based on the distribution amount of distribution information by the information distribution system is as described above. As a specific example of the calculation process in the calculation, an example of processing performed by the distribution server will be added. When the distribution fee is calculated by the distribution server, based on the store distribution record [k] [i] or the store distribution amount designation information [k] [i] in the above-described estimation calculation subroutine (FIG. 32). By calculating and accumulating the distribution fee of each server distribution information [i] at each store [k], the distribution fee can be calculated in parallel with the estimation calculation. The following first example and second example are examples in which a specific process of the calculation is realized by adding processing to several steps in FIG. 32 (note that the following first example and second example are described below). 32, the estimation calculation subroutine of FIG. 32 is an estimation calculation and distribution fee calculation subroutine, step S814 in FIG. 31 is “estimation calculation and distribution fee calculation”, and “estimation calculation start” in FIG. 32 is “estimation calculation”. And distribution fee calculation start ”.

First example Step S832:
"Distribution information fee [0]-Distribution information fee [number of distribution information] ← 0" is added Step S834:
“Store distribution information fee [0] [k] to store distribution information fee [number of distribution information] [k] ← 0” is added] Step S837:
“Store delivery information fee [i] [k] ← Store delivery information fee [i] [k] + Store delivery performance [k] [i] × 1 terminal basic charge × number of terminals [k]” or “Store delivery information” Charge [i] [k] ← Store distribution information charge [i] [k] + Store distribution amount designation information [k] [i] × 1 terminal basic charge × number of terminals [k] ”is added Step S841:
“Each delivery information fee [i] ← Each delivery information fee [i] + Each store delivery information fee [i] [k] × AV / contract minimum value × delivery results for each attribute to which the delivery information for which the delivery fee is calculated belongs Add distribution result correction ratio (for example, 0.95) with respect to the average Step S842:
“Each delivery information fee [i] ← Each delivery information fee [i] + Each store delivery information fee [i] [k] x Delivery performance correction rate for the delivery performance average for each attribute to which the delivery information for which delivery fees are calculated belongs (Eg 0.95) added

  In this first example, the distribution information fee [i] (i = 0 to the number of distribution information) is the distribution fee of the server distribution information [i], and the store distribution information fee [i] [ By sequentially accumulating k], the final delivery fee amount is obtained. The store distribution information fee [i] [k] (i = 0 to the number of distribution information, k = 0 to the number of distribution stores) is a distribution fee of the server distribution information [i] at the store [k], and the process proceeds to step S837. Calculated by any of the above formulas to be added. In steps S841 and S842, “each delivery information fee [i]” and “each store delivery information fee [i] [k]” are added for each i of i = 0 to the number of delivery information. Represents executing an expression. The distribution performance correction rate for the distribution performance average for each attribute to which the distribution information subject to distribution fee calculation belongs is the correction rate for the distribution performance average of the attribute to which the server distribution information [i] belongs with the distribution fee as the distribution information fee [i]. For example, the server distribution information [i] is appropriately set in consideration of the distribution record of the server distribution information [i] with respect to the distribution record of other distribution information having the same attribute.

  According to the distribution fee calculation in the first example, the distribution fee of each server distribution information [i] is calculated for each store [k] based on the distribution record at each store [k] or the distribution amount represented by the distribution amount designation information. ] And the distribution fee for each store [k] is sequentially accumulated. As a result, the distribution fee for each server distribution information [i] based on the distribution amount at each store [k] is calculated, and finally the distribution fee for each server distribution information [i] by information distribution at all stores is calculated. Is done.

Second example Step S832:
“Total Distribution Result [0] to Total Distribution Result [Number of Distribution Information] ← 0” is added Step S837:
“Total delivery results [i] ← total delivery results [i] + store delivery results [k] [i]” is added Step S844:
Added “Distribution Fee [i] ← Total Distribution Performance [i] x 1 Distribution Fee”

  This second example is an example in the case where the distribution fee is calculated by expressing the distribution amount distribution result by the number of distributions. The total distribution record [i] (i = 0 to the number of distribution information) is the distribution record of each server distribution information [i] represented by the number of distributions, and the store distribution record [k] at each store [k]. By sequentially accumulating [i], the total number of distributions at all stores is finally obtained. The distribution fee [i] is a distribution fee of the server distribution information [i] calculated by multiplying the total number of distributions at all stores by one distribution fee (distribution fee per distribution). As a result, the number of distributions is counted as the distribution amount of each server distribution information [i] at each store [k], and finally the distribution fee for each server distribution information [i] based on the number of distributions at all stores is calculated. Is done.

  In the first example and the second example described above, since the above-described estimation calculation subroutine of FIG. 32 is used as it is and processing is added, the distribution charge calculation target is only server distribution information. Then, as described above, when store distribution information is newly received, an identification number is assigned and managed in the database, so that the identification number corresponds to information number i in a new estimate calculation subroutine for one store distribution information. If the identification number to be assigned is given, the store distribution information can be handled in the process of the estimate calculation subroutine. Therefore, in the distribution server, it is possible to similarly calculate the distribution fee of the store distribution information by the distribution fee calculation of the first example and the second example.

  In addition, as the distribution amount used as a reference in the calculation of the distribution fee, the distribution record and the distribution amount designation information can be used as described above. The distribution result is represented by the actual amount such as the number of displays actually performed by the distribution terminal and the amount of information actually displayed, and the distribution amount designation information is a distribution control device as an amount for scheduling or instructing the actual amount. Is given to the distribution terminal. Accordingly, examples of the distribution amount used for calculating the distribution fee in the information distribution system include the number of times of distribution by the distribution control device or the number of data provided by the distribution terminal, the amount of data, and the like. The number of times, the number of characters, the amount of distribution information, the specified information, the distribution record, etc.) are used as distribution fee calculation parameters that enable calculation of the distribution fee.

(12) Telop display The display means of a distribution terminal that performs telop display (such as a distribution terminal with a telop display device disposed in front) can display a plurality of character images of a predetermined number of characters in a predetermined area. Each distribution terminal functions as a telop display device that moves a character image in a predetermined direction as time elapses. By the processing of the telop display subroutine described above, based on a required operation, fast-forward, stop movement, and reverse to the movement direction. It is possible to rewind in the direction and redisplay the character image displayed in the past. The required operation here is an operation for instructing a telop display mode, telop display information, and the like. The fast-forward button, stop button, rewind button, and re-display button of the distribution terminal described above This is the operation of the instruction buttons. Specifically, it is possible to provide side buttons such as a fast forward button, a stop button, a rewind button, and a redisplay button on the distribution terminal and perform a required operation by an operation of pressing these side buttons. Alternatively, when the display means has a touch panel, such as the above-described interpolator, for example, a touch operation near the edge of the touch panel (near the edge of the screen) is input for fast-forwarding or rewinding instructions. It is good also as operation which inputs instruction | indications, such as stopping the touch operation near the center of a touch panel. Based on such required operations, such as telop that changes every moment by fast-forwarding the display, stopping the movement, rewinding in the direction opposite to the movement direction, or re-displaying the character image displayed in the past. Of the terminal distribution information, information that the player or the like is interested in can be stopped, returned to the previous display information, or information that is not of interest can be fast-forwarded.

  That is, according to a distribution terminal (distribution terminal as a telop display device) in an information distribution system, when an information providing service at a game arcade is performed with telop display that changes from moment to moment, a customer who becomes a user, etc. Can stop the information that is interested in display, return the display to the previous display information that interests you, or fast forward the information that you are not interested in.

  In the telop display at the distribution terminal, an advertisement-related ticket for the advertisement being displayed may be issued by inputting a predetermined instruction at the advertisement display timing. As the predetermined instruction input here, for example, an arbitrary touch operation on the touch panel, an arbitrary touch operation in the advertisement display area, a touch operation in an area such as a predetermined “details” or “discount ticket”, etc. The distribution terminal uses the content (advertisement) displayed when the instruction is input as the selection condition for the advertisement-related ticket, and the advertisement-related ticket corresponding to the advertisement being displayed when the instruction is input A predetermined process for enabling issuance is performed.

  The advertisement-related voucher includes a wide variety of vouchers that show matters related to the advertisement being displayed at the time of inputting instructions. For example, discount vouchers, coupon vouchers, advertisement source addresses, Paper with a telephone number or map, paper with restaurant menu details, paper with detailed advertisement information, or flyer distributed through newspaper inserts, etc. . The advertisement-related ticket is issued, for example, by printing or display on a gift management machine (POS) 11, a data display device 21, an out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 having a function as a data disclosure device, or the like. However, by connecting the distribution terminal to a predetermined external coupon issuing device and performing printing or display on the external coupon issuing device, or placing a ticket issuing machine on the distribution terminal that displays a telop, It can also be performed by printing or displaying on the ticket issuing machine. The predetermined process is a process that makes it possible to issue such an advertisement-related ticket. For example, information for specifying an advertisement in a storage medium such as a card such as the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 (Or register the information by sending / receiving information to / from the management device) and insert the storage medium into a receipt-issuable device such as the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 to issue an advertisement-related ticket from the device. To do. Issuance of advertisement-related tickets in response to instructions input at such advertisement display timings increases the opportunity for advertisers to actually attract customers and increase profits from advertisements when players are interested in advertising be able to.

(13) Estimate calculation of advertising fee, etc. In the process of the estimate calculation subroutine described above, the distribution amount designation information or the average value (AV) of the distribution results at each store is compared with the contract minimum value, and the estimated advertisement according to the comparison result The fee is calculated (steps S840, S841, and S842 in FIG. 32). Thereby, the estimated advertisement fee is calculated according to the actual distribution status of each distribution information based on the actual distribution amount designation information and distribution results at each store. Therefore, with regard to the distribution information of advertisements that are newly submitted and subsequently distributed, and the information of advertisements that have not yet been submitted (hereinafter referred to as “undistributed advertisement information”), The estimated advertising fee is calculated as a pre-estimation prior to the execution of the advertisement by analogizing the distribution amount specifying information and the distribution result when actually distributing from the distribution amount specifying information and the distribution result.

  In contrast to such an advertisement fee estimate calculation, the information distribution system can calculate the estimated advertisement fee on the assumption that undistributed advertisement information has been distributed. For example, when the distribution server 800 executes the process of the estimate calculation subroutine based on the received store distribution amount designation information from the distribution control device 90 of each store (steps S810 and S814 in FIG. 31 and FIG. 32), It is also assumed that the undelivered advertisement information to be estimated that has not been distributed is distributed, and the estimated advertisement fee may be calculated by subtracting other received store distribution amount designation information accordingly. Alternatively, the distribution amount designation information for estimating the undelivered advertisement information may be included in the received store distribution amount designation information used in the processing of the estimate calculation subroutine, and the estimated advertisement fee may be calculated based on the distribution amount designation information. . In this case, for the undistributed advertisement information, an estimated advertisement fee when the estimated distribution amount designation information is used as the distribution amount designation information at each store is calculated. In addition, as the delivery amount designation information for estimation, for example, it may be possible to cause the advertisement requester of undelivered advertisement information to specify a desired delivery amount for estimation and use the delivery amount designation information. The information may be appropriately changed on the distribution server 800 side according to the difference between the received distribution amount designation information and the original desired distribution amount designation information.

  Furthermore, for undistributed advertisement information, the distribution amount designation information [i] or terminal distribution is executed by the distribution amount designation information calculation subroutine in the distribution control device 90 of each store in the same manner as other distribution information that is actually distributed. The amount designation information [i] [m] is calculated (steps S925 to S926, S927, and S928 in FIG. 36), and the distribution amount designation information is used as the estimate delivery amount designation information by the estimate calculation subroutine. An estimated advertisement fee may be calculated. In this case, the distribution control device 90 of each store does not need to transmit undelivered advertisement information to the distribution terminal such as the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] (step S930 in the figure). The transmission may be performed to simulate the distribution of undistributed advertisement information. That is, in the distribution terminal, the undistributed advertisement information is also selected in the selection of the display distribution information in the constant display subroutine and the distribution condition display subroutine (step SD38 in FIG. 37 and steps SD47 and SD49 in FIG. 38). When undelivered advertisement information is selected as display distribution information, the telop display subroutine for displaying it is not executed (step SD310 in FIG. 37, step SD410 in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39), and undelivered advertisement information is displayed. Is not displayed, and the delivery results are counted up (step SD311 in FIG. 37, step SD411 in FIG. 38). If it does in this way, the distribution performance when it will be distributed also about undistributed advertisement information is obtained, and it is undistributed to the distribution performance average for every attribute (steps S841 and S842 in FIG. 32) used for calculation of an estimated advertisement fee. Calculation of the estimated advertisement fee based on the distribution result using the distribution result that simulates the distribution of the undistributed advertisement information (calculation of the estimated advertisement fee by the process in the lower part of step S837 in FIG. 32) ) Is also possible. When simulating the distribution of undelivered advertisement information, the distribution amount information [i] is counted up when the undistributed advertisement information is selected as the display distribution information in the constant display subroutine or distribution condition display subroutine ( Step SD312 in FIG. 37, step SD412 in FIG. 38), and the distribution amount information [i] can be aggregated to calculate the estimate of the advertisement fee.

  Further, as described above, the form of calculating the estimated advertising fee according to the comparison result between the average value of the delivery amount designation information and the contract minimum value (steps S840, S841 and S842 in FIG. 32) This is an example of a form in which the estimated advertising fee is calculated according to the actual distribution status at present. If the attribute corresponding to the contract minimum value of the distribution information to be estimated is specified, the estimated advertising fee can be calculated (advertisement Since the estimate calculation of the fee can be performed by either the distribution server 800 or the distribution control device 90 as described above, any distribution information of the distribution information as the server distribution information and the distribution information as the store distribution information is estimated. If you specify the contract minimum and the corresponding attribute, you can calculate the estimated advertising fee.) The reason why the estimated advertising fee is reduced when the contract price is below the contract minimum in step S841 in FIG. 32 is that the amount of information that can be displayed is determined when the display on the distribution terminal is the telop display as described above. It depends on On the other hand, in the information distribution system, the distribution fee is increased or decreased depending on the distribution conditions (particularly, the distribution conditions for specifying the distribution area such as the above “region specification op”) as shown in the example of the advertisement fee table (FIG. 41). Further, the distribution fee can be increased or decreased according to the amount of information of the distribution information itself such as the number of characters. Therefore, in the calculation of the estimate of the advertising fee, not only the contract minimum value and the corresponding attribute, but also the form in which the estimated advertising fee is increased or decreased according to the distribution conditions specified for the distribution information to be estimated, or the distribution of the estimation target A mode in which the estimated advertisement fee is increased or decreased according to the number of characters of information may be adopted.

  In the information distribution system, the estimate of the advertisement fee can be calculated as described above, but the estimate of the distribution fee can be calculated similarly for the distribution information of contents such as news and weather forecast. That is, a distribution server in the information distribution system receives distribution amount designation information from each distribution control device, and distribution information (contents such as news and advertisements. It is possible to target not only distribution information but also store distribution information of arbitrary stores. Further, the distribution server receives the distribution results of each distribution information from each distribution control device (may be a result of distribution to each distribution terminal or may be a result of receiving a result provided by each terminal), and the received distribution Based on the actual result, it is possible to calculate the estimated delivery fee of the delivery information that is scheduled to be newly delivered.

  Further, the calculation of the estimated delivery fee can be performed in the delivery control device as described above. In other words, the distribution control device may be distribution amount designation information (set by each distribution terminal, may be set for each distribution terminal of the distribution control device, or the distribution amount designation information is common to the distribution terminals. Distribution information (news and other contents and advertisements) scheduled to be distributed based on the distribution control device). Not only store distribution information of the store but also server distribution information and stores of other stores It is also possible to target distribution information.) The distribution fee estimate amount can be calculated. In addition, the distribution control device may update the distribution information that is scheduled to be newly distributed based on the distribution result of each distribution information (the result of distribution to each distribution terminal may be the result of receiving the result provided by each terminal). The estimated delivery fee can be calculated.

  Here, for store distribution information such as advertisements distributed only at a certain store, when the distribution control device of the store calculates an estimate by the processing of the above-described estimate calculation subroutine (FIG. 32), for example, the store number k is set. The terminal number is m, the server distribution information number i is the terminal distribution information number i, and it is determined whether the server distribution information [i] is distribution information distributed at the store [k] (step S836). It is determined whether or not the terminal distribution information of the number i is distribution information to be transmitted to the terminal [m], and the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] or the terminal distribution information [i] is accumulated by SUM accumulation (step S837). “1 terminal basic charge × number of terminals [k]” in the estimate that is accumulated in the distribution results of [m] and added in the accumulation of estimated advertising charges (steps S841 and S842) is “1 terminal The basic fee can be used. Moreover, in the modification which increases / decreases the delivery amount itself of (3) above, it is possible to similarly calculate the estimated delivery fee based on the delivery performance of each piece of delivery information. Since the distribution server assigns an identification number and manages it in the database when store distribution information is newly received as described above, the distribution server newly adds one identification number for one store distribution information in the estimate calculation subroutine. If an identification number corresponding to the information number i is given, store distribution information can be handled in the processing of the estimation calculation subroutine in the distribution server described above (stores that are actually distributed at each store in the distribution server). It is also possible to perform an estimate calculation reflecting the delivery amount designation information and delivery results of the delivery information, or to calculate the estimated delivery fee for the store delivery information.

  Further, the basic fee for one terminal in the above estimation calculation subroutine is a uniform basic distribution fee per terminal, and the distribution fee for distribution information and the like within a predetermined number of characters is uniform. For example, the distribution fee may be calculated for each character of the distribution information. For example, in the estimation calculation subroutine shown in FIG. 32, an accumulated value “SUM2” for accumulating the number of characters of each piece of distribution information and an average value “AV2” of the number of characters of each piece of distribution information are introduced. The basic delivery fee per terminal set is “one character per character basic fee”, “SUM2 ← SUM2 + number of characters of store delivery information [k] [i]” in step S837, and “AV2 ← SUM2 //” in step S839. cnt ”,“ estimated advertising fee ← estimated advertising fee + 1 basic character per terminal × number of terminals [k] × AV / contract minimum value × distribution average for each attribute × AV2 ”in step S841, and“ estimated ”in step S842 Advertising fee ← Estimated advertising fee + 1 terminal 1 character basic fee x number of terminals [k] x average distribution result for each attribute x AV2 ". Thereby, it is possible to calculate an estimate of the distribution fee based on the basic distribution fee set for each character of the distribution information.

  Here, when the distribution result is represented by the number of distribution information distributions and the distribution fee is calculated based on the number of distributions or distributions, the AV calculated in step S839 is the average number of distributions per distribution information in each store [k]. Since it is a record, AV is the number of times proportional to the number of terminals [k] of each store [k]. For this reason, the contract minimum value to be compared with AV in step S840 becomes a different value in game halls with different numbers of distribution terminals (number of games). Therefore, when the delivery record is represented by the number of delivery times of delivery information, the contract minimum value is represented by the number of delivery times per delivery terminal, and the processes in several steps in FIG. 32 are changed as follows. Also good.

Step S839:
Change to “AV ← SUM / (cnt × number of terminals [k])” Step S841:
“Estimated advertising fee ← Estimated advertising fee + 1 terminal basic fee x number of terminals [k] x AV / contract minimum value x distribution performance correction rate for average distribution performance for each attribute to which the distribution information to be estimated belongs (for example, 0.95)" Step S842:
"Estimated advertising fee ← Estimated advertising fee + 1 terminal basic fee x number of terminals [k] x distribution performance correction rate for average distribution performance for each attribute to which the distribution information to be estimated belongs (for example, 0.95)"

  In this way, when the distribution record is expressed by the number of distribution information provisions, the estimation calculation can be performed even if the number of distribution terminals in each game hall is different. The distribution performance correction rate for the distribution result average for each attribute to which the estimation target distribution information belongs is a correction rate for the distribution result average of the attribute to which the estimation target distribution information belongs. For example, another distribution having the same attribute as the estimation target distribution information Set as appropriate in consideration of the distribution of information. If the distribution results are converted into frequency, etc., and the distribution results of each distribution information are information that does not depend on the difference in the number of distribution terminals, the distribution of each store can be performed without changing such processing. It is possible to cope with the case where the number of terminals is different.

  Further, in the estimate calculation subroutine, in evaluating the estimated advertisement fee based on the store delivery amount designation information or the store delivery performance for the amount of delivery information to be estimated, whether or not it falls below the contract minimum value as in step S840. The estimated distribution fee is reduced. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the distribution fee such as the advertisement fee may be set by increasing the amount exceeding the contract reference value and proportionally decreasing the amount below the contract reference value. For example, in the estimate calculation subroutine of FIG. 32, steps S840 and S842 after step S839 are deleted, and the estimated advertisement fee is calculated by executing step S841, and the calculation formula in step S841 is “estimated advertisement fee ← estimate”. It may be “advertising fee + 1 terminal basic fee × number of terminals [k] × AV / contract standard value × distribution result average for each attribute”. In this case, for example, the contract reference value may be specified in advance by an advertisement requester candidate or the like, or may be set in advance by an operator or administrator of the information distribution system. However, since the fee setting for information distribution is an appropriate rule and there can be any fee system, the specific estimation of increase / decrease of the estimated amount and the calculation formula for the estimation calculation, etc., depend on the fee setting or the fee structure, etc. May be selected as appropriate.

  In the information distribution system, it is possible to calculate the distribution fee estimate of the distribution information that is scheduled to be newly distributed based on the distribution amount designation information and the distribution result as described above. (Amount specification information or average value of distribution results) can also be presented together, so that when an appropriate increase / decrease in the advertisement can be accepted, the advertisement fee is also included when the advertisement requester requests the advertisement or during the advertisement. Advertisement frequency etc. can be presented as an estimate or status report. Further, in the distribution control device installed in the store, for example, the distribution amount designation information from the distribution server is changed separately from the central distribution server, and the compulsory information amount based on the ownership of the owner of the display device is changed. To the extent that the restriction has been made, advertisements of stores or restaurants in the vicinity of the store can be provided to customers of the store, and the advertisement fee and frequency of advertisements for such advertisements are estimated and reported as a status report. Can be presented.

  In other words, according to the information distribution system, when the information providing service at the amusement hall is performed, it is accepted that the advertisement in the information providing service is appropriately increased or decreased, and the advertisement requester requests the advertisement or the advertisement is performed. In the middle, it is possible to present a status report such as an estimate of the advertisement fee and the frequency of advertisement. In addition, if the store side compulsorily mixes the store distribution information of the service information into the distribution information, the frequency of the advertisement implementation may decrease and it may be unsatisfactory for the advertising client. Since a status report such as frequency can be presented, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the advertisement client is unhappy.

  In calculating the estimate of the distribution fee, the desired distribution conditions (number of distributions per predetermined period, distribution period and number of distributions, distribution area, distribution store specification, distribution time zone, jackpot, after card insertion, etc.) (Limited to game conditions, etc.) can be entered, and the estimated delivery fee can be calculated according to the entered desired delivery conditions. In this regard, for example, in the delivery amount designation information calculation subroutine (FIG. 33), the set desired delivery amount designation information is set as server delivery amount designation information [k] [i] (step S855) as “server delivery amount”. Designated information [k] [i] = desired delivery amount designation information (1/30 of frequency, etc.) × desired delivery condition (correction value 1.3, etc.) × average of delivery amount designation information for each attribute ” It can also be realized by calculating the server delivery amount designation information corresponding to (the store delivery amount designation information corresponding to the delivery conditions can be calculated and used for estimation calculation in the same manner). However, when this calculation is performed, the subsequent update process (step S856) of the distribution condition [k] [i] is not necessary.

  In addition, the information distribution system has attribute information registration means (such as storage means of the management device) relating to the content genre such as news and advertisements of players, etc., and only distribution information selected based on the registered attribute information Or it is possible to distribute more of the distribution information. The terminal distribution information of the genre corresponding to the attribute can be distributed more by the increase of the terminal distribution amount designation information by the attribute increase (step S927 in FIG. 36), but only the terminal distribution information of the genre is received. In the case of distribution, the terminal distribution information to be transmitted is selected based on the attribute designation information [i] [m] received by the distribution control device, or the attribute increase is increased to reduce the non-attribute decrease to 0. It is also possible (steps S926, S927, S928, etc. in FIG. 36). In this case, terminal delivery amount designation information is calculated in accordance with the designated attribute, and display delivery information is selected based on the terminal delivery amount designation information in accordance with the attribute (step SD38 in FIG. 37 and step SD47 in FIG. 38). SD49) is performed, and the delivery results are counted up (step SD311 in FIG. 37, step SD411 in FIG. 38). Therefore, when there is an attribute designation input, the delivery amount designation information and delivery results corresponding to the attribute are used in the estimate calculation subroutine, so the estimated delivery fee is calculated according to the designated attribute. Can do.

  Further, in the information distribution system, since the average distribution result for each attribute and the store distribution amount designation information are referred to in the calculation of the estimated advertisement fee (steps S837, S841 and S842 in FIG. 32), the distribution result based on the attribute information Or even if there is a change in the delivery amount designation information (the delivery amount designation information is changed by the attribute designation information [i] [m], and the delivery results change accordingly), the estimated amount corresponding to the change is calculated. Is possible.

  The estimated amount can be increased or decreased according to the number of characters of the distribution information to be estimated as described above, or can be increased or decreased according to the distribution conditions (particularly, the above “region designation op”). It is also possible to store each past information in a distribution server or distribution control device and calculate an estimate according to the past situation (for example, 12/15 to 12/31 minutes one year ago, etc.) You can also perform an estimate calculation.)

(14) Advertising Cost The distribution terminal counts up the amount of money according to the situation at the distribution terminal at the time of displaying the distribution amount information when the terminal distribution information is displayed as the amount of distribution information ( Step SD312 in FIG. 37 and Step SD411 in FIG. 38). As described above, this is realized by changing the advertising expenses to be applied according to the situation at the time of display. However, the advertising expenses to be applied according to the situation are as follows. Adopted.
・ Advertisement fees are calculated by applying different advertising costs before and after the prescribed time has elapsed since the game started.
・ Equipped with human body detection sensors in the vicinity of gaming machines (personal counter, board, lamp, pedestrian machine, seating sensor for chairs), and collects advertising charges by applying different advertising costs before and after human body detection.
・ Advertising fees are calculated by applying different advertising costs before and after card insertion or cash insertion.
・ The advertising fee is calculated by applying different advertising costs before and after the start of the game (until the handle of the gaming machine, hitting the slot lever, and detecting out).

Here, each advertising expense may be specifically set as follows.
・ Before and after human body detection: Since there is no person around until human body detection, the advertising cost is reduced (the advertising cost before this human body detection is referred to as advertising cost A).
・ From detection of human body to card insertion or cash insertion: Since the player is busy with grabbing cash etc., the advertising cost is reduced (advertising cost from this human body detection to card insertion or cash insertion is And).
-From card insertion and cash insertion to game start: Since the player concentrates on the game, the advertising cost is reduced (the advertising cost from card insertion to game start is referred to as advertising cost C).
-From the start of the game to a predetermined time: Since the player concentrates on the game, the advertising cost is reduced (the advertising cost from the start of the game to the predetermined time is referred to as the advertising cost D).
-After a predetermined time has elapsed: Since the player does not concentrate on the game after the predetermined time has elapsed, the advertising cost is increased (the advertising cost after the elapse of the predetermined time is referred to as the advertising cost E).
・ From big hit after a predetermined time to the end of probability change: From the big hit to the end of probability change, the player concentrates on the game, so the advertising cost is reduced (the advertising cost from the big hit after the predetermined time has elapsed to the end of the positive change is F) .)
Then, for example, the advertising cost A to the advertising cost F are set to “E>A> B, C, D, F”, etc., and an appropriate advertising fee is imposed according to the situation at the distribution terminal when the terminal distribution information is displayed. Like that. Also, for terminal distribution information displayed at the moment of card insertion or cash insertion, a particularly high advertising cost may be set.

Various detection means for detecting the situation in the distribution terminal when the terminal distribution information is displayed have already been described in order to apply the advertising expenses according to such a situation. Here, each detection means detects again. Examples of situations to be enumerated are as follows.
-The above human body detection sensor detects the situation where a player or other person has come near the gaming machine (the presence or absence of a human body near the distribution terminal).
-The situation that an operation to receive the rental of game media such as card insertion or cash insertion was performed by the detection means such as card insertion or cash insertion of the interbank machine.
-The situation where the player started the game is detected by the detection means of the gaming machine that generates an out signal or detects the change of the handle or slot lever from the OFF state to the ON state.
-The situation that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the game is detected by a time counting means such as a counter that counts from the occurrence of an out signal.
・ A detection means such as a game machine that generates a big hit signal or a probability change signal detects the situation from the big hit to the end of the probability change.
In addition, a detection signal of a touch operation on the touch panel screen, a ball rental signal such as an intermediary machine, information on the number of winning balls and various points, and the like can also be used as a signal of detection means for detecting the situation in the distribution terminal. Further, the distribution control device side can detect a predetermined situation based on the game information. Moreover, as a detection means, it is also possible for only a distribution terminal to detect a situation with a detection program by a detection sensor such as a human body detection sensor of the distribution terminal, and from the distribution terminal by a detection sensor such as a human body detection sensor of the distribution terminal. It is also possible for the distribution control device to receive the detection signal and to detect the situation with a detection program on the distribution control device side, and to detect the detection signal from the distribution terminal by a detection sensor such as a human body detection sensor of the distribution terminal. It is also possible for an external information device to receive and the external information device to detect the situation using a detection program.

  In the information distribution system, distribution of the game state and the like on the gaming machine is based on the human body detection by the human body detection sensor, the detection of card insertion or cash insertion, the generation of the out signal, the ON / OFF of the handle or the slot lever, etc. It is possible to detect the situation at the terminal, thereby accurately grasping the state of the person who contacts the advertisement, and to calculate the advertisement fee corresponding to the advertisement effect according to the state. Similarly, for distribution information other than advertisements, it is also possible to detect the situation at the distribution terminal and accurately grasp the state of the person who contacts the distribution information, and calculate the distribution fee according to the state.

(15) Others The communication server and the distribution control device in the information distribution system and between the distribution control device and the distribution terminal are communicably connected by a network such as the network 8 or the information distribution network 850. A telecommunication line such as a network for carrying out the connection may be wired or wireless, or may be a mixture of a wired part and a wireless part in which a part is wireless but the other part is wired. The distribution server and the distribution control device and the distribution control device and the distribution terminal in the information distribution system can be connected via a telecommunication line or the like so as to be communicable in a wired or wireless manner.

  In the above information distribution system, one or a plurality of distribution servers may be used, a plurality of computers may be linked to each other, or a plurality of servers that perform distributed processing may be used. The distribution control apparatus may be one or a plurality of linked computers, or may be composed of a plurality of servers that perform distributed processing. In addition, the distribution information may be not only character image information but also other image information, and may also be audio information. When the distribution information is voice information, a voice information providing service is implemented at each distribution terminal.

(Financial management device 50)
Next, the financial management apparatus 50 which comprises a financial management system is demonstrated.

  The financial management device 50 is configured by a computer or the like in which a program that defines processing for explaining operations described later is installed, and includes a predetermined input device, information processing device, storage device, display device, communication interface, and the like. As shown in FIG. 1B, the financial management apparatus 50 can communicate with the management apparatus 13 via a communication interface.

  Here, the input device includes input means such as a pointing device such as a keyboard and a mouse, and accepts character input, selection input, and the like by an administrator or the like and supplies them to the information processing device.

  The information processing apparatus is composed of arithmetic means such as a CPU for executing various internal arithmetic processes, a non-volatile memory such as a ROM storing system information and the like, and a semiconductor memory such as a RAM storing updatable information. Storage means, and various internal operations and control means for controlling information exchange with the outside, and executes various information processing according to input from the input device, contents of installed programs, etc. And plays a central role in carrying out financial processing in the operations described below.

  The storage device includes storage means such as a hard disk in which information such as installed program files and various data files (for example, database files that manage various types of data in a database structure) are stored. Keep information on as needed.

  The display device is composed of display means such as a liquid crystal display, a CRT display, and a printer, and displays predetermined information under the control of the information processing device.

  The communication interface includes a communication line, a port for connecting to other devices, a modem, and the like, and is responsible for information communication with the management device 13 or the distribution control device 90.

  Note that the management device 13 or the distribution control device 90 described above may be configured to have the function of the financial management device 50.

  Next, the configuration of the financial management apparatus 50 will be specifically described.

  FIG. 49 is a functional block diagram showing the main configuration of the financial management apparatus 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the operation of the financial management apparatus 50.

  As illustrated in FIG. 49, the financial management apparatus 50 includes a control unit 1000, an input / output information processing unit 1001, and a financial information management unit 1002.

  The control unit 1000 is a functional block realized by the information processing device, the storage device, and the communication interface described above. The calculation unit of the information processing device mainly uses programs, data, and the like stored in the ROM, RAM, and the storage device. This relates to a part for executing various arithmetic processes. The control unit 1000 controls input / output of information between the units of the input / output information processing unit 1001 and the financial information management unit 1002 and information input / output from the management device 13. If the information distribution network 1120 is connectable, the center server 1130 via the information distribution network 1120, the distribution control device 90 of each game hall, and the out-of-store terminal devices provided at each store outside the game hall (for home delivery) The input / output of information to and from 1100 (including the terminal device outside the store) is also controlled (see FIGS. 1A and 1B).

  The input / output information processing unit 1001 is a functional block realized by the above-described information processing device, input device, and communication interface, and performs input / output processing such as information managed by the management device 13. The input / output information processing unit 1001 performs input / output processing of various information input by the input device. Examples of the input information include information managed by the management device 13, for example, information for calculating income and expenses based on game data. Such information will be described in detail later. Information processed and calculated by the financial management apparatus 50 is output to the management apparatus 13 via the input / output information processing unit 1001. Further, the input / output information processing unit 1001 is processed and calculated by the financial management apparatus 50, for example, a total sum of predetermined subjects of the general ledger, a profit and loss statement attached to a settlement report to be submitted to the tax office, a balance Information such as a table is output to the display device described above. The input / output information processing unit 1001 may be connected to the network 8 and input information from the network 8.

  The financial information management unit 1002 is a functional block realized by the above-described storage device, and is managed by the management device 13 input to the input / output information processing unit 1001, for example, revenue and expenses based on game data Information for calculation and various information processed and calculated by the financial management apparatus 50 are stored. Also, it stores various information input by the input device. Also, the financial information management unit 1002 includes information on the types of selected prizes (such as prize IDs) and the number managed by the management apparatus 13 and input to the input / output information processing unit 1001, for example. Based on the total prize exchange information, information for calculating income and expenses for each trader and various information processed and calculated by the financial management device 50 are stored.

  Here, the case where the control unit 1000 executes various types of arithmetic processing using a program for executing financial processing stored in the ROM, RAM, and storage device will be mainly described. However, the ROM, the RAM, and the storage device may be configured such that a program for executing financial processing is not stored. In this case, the ROM, the RAM, and the storage device output information such as calculation elements necessary for executing the financial processing to a device having a financial processing function provided in a format capable of financial processing. A program for executing a data totaling process is stored. Then, information such as the calculated calculation elements is output to an apparatus having a financial processing function provided elsewhere via the input / output information processing unit 1001. The conversion into a format that can be financially processed may be performed by the financial management device 50, or may be converted into a format that can be recognized by further providing a conversion device and outputting via the conversion device. Here, outputting in a format that can be processed financially means rewriting to a language that can be recognized by the financial processing device so that information such as calculation elements is output, and information such as calculation elements can be processed financially in the financial processing device. This means that the data is output separately. As a method for classifying information such as the calculation element, for example, there is a method in which each information is provided with flag information and classification is possible based on the flag information. However, the method is not limited to this.

(Description of operation)
Next, the operation of the financial management apparatus 50 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the control unit 1000 determines whether there is input information other than in-input information or out-input information based on information from the input / output information processing unit 1001 (step S1010).

  Here, the in-input information is input information for calculating income from the management device 13 or the like. Specifically, the deposit information, refund information, a shot ball from the gaming machine (called “out”), Information on inserted medals (called IN), information on acquired gaming media discharged from gaming machines (pachinko balls are called safe, medals used in slot machines are called OUT), number of counting balls (number of winning balls and accumulated balls) Information), information on the number of medals (the number of winning medals and the number of stored medals), information on the number of game media obtained by exchanging prizes at a wagon trader or service counter trader, information on the number of balls lent, information on the number of rented medals. The out-input information includes the management device 13, the prize management machine (POS) 11, the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 provided in the game hall, and the out-of-store terminal device provided in each store outside the game hall. This is input information for calculating expenses from 1100 and the like, and specifically, prize management such as each prize purchase amount, each prize payout number, each prize name, prize ID, withdrawn savings and temporary payment consumption tax. Information from the machine (POS) 11, the name of the gift outside the hall, the gift ID outside the hall, the trader ID of the wagon trader or service counter trader, the number of special prizes paid out to the wagon trader or service counter trader, the price of the prize outside the hall Information from the terminal device 22 for out-of-store prize exchange and the out-of-store terminal apparatus 1100, such as the withdrawal valuable value and the temporary payment consumption tax, the delivery gift name, the delivery gift ID, the delivery gift price, the withdrawal valuable value, the delivery fee and the temporary payment It refers to information, such as information from the courier for a terminal device, such as a consumption tax.

  If it is determined in step S1010 that there is input information other than in-input information or out-input information (Yes in step S1010), the control unit 1000 determines that the closing date information for performing the financial processing is input / output information. When the information is input in advance to the processing unit 1001 or the like, information on the settlement date for performing the financial processing is input based on the information from the financial information management unit 1002 (step S1011). If the closing date information is not input, the control unit 1000 “inputs the closing date” to the above-described display device such as a monitor via the input / output information processing unit 1001. Output information to display such as. The settlement is not limited to one period (one year), and for example, financial processing can be executed corresponding to a quarter period (three months), a half period (six months), or the like. Therefore, the settlement date to be input is not limited to the day corresponding to the first period, but can be set so that the financial processing is executed even if the date corresponding to the quarter period, the half period, or the like is input. .

  Subsequently, based on the information from the input / output information processing unit 1001, the control unit 1000 inputs today, that is, the date on which information other than in-input information or out-input information is input (step S1012).

  Subsequently, information related to various subjects of the general ledger is input from the above-described input device via the input / output information processing unit 1001, and the control unit 1000 identifies header information (identification of information type) for identifying the information. Information) and is stored in the financial information management unit 1002 as history information and aggregated information for a predetermined period for each subject of the general ledger stored in advance (step S1013).

  The items of this general ledger include, for example, opening premium inventory (BS asset decrease), equipment depreciation (PL revenue decrease), purchases (PL revenue decrease), commuting expenses (PL revenue) Decrease), salary and compensation (PL revenue decrease), welfare expenses (PL revenue decrease), travel expenses (PL revenue decrease), communication expenses (PL revenue decrease), packing fee (PL revenue decrease) , Advertising expenses (PL revenue decrease), Compensation expenses (PL revenue decrease), Conference expenses (PL revenue decrease), Utilities expenses (PL revenue decrease), Consumable office supplies expenses (PL revenue decrease), Tax and public dues (PL revenue decline), book expenses (PL revenue decline), payment fees (PL revenue decline), membership fees (PL revenue decline), rent (PL revenue decline), repair costs (PL Revenue decrease), Printing costs (PL revenue decrease), Equipment costs (PL revenue decrease) Land rent (PL revenue decrease), consumables expenses (PL revenue decrease), miscellaneous expenses (PL revenue decrease), interest expense discount (PL revenue decrease), amortization of establishment expenses (PL revenue decrease), miscellaneous loss (PL revenue decrease), fixed asset loss (PL revenue decrease), withholding income tax (PL revenue decrease), corporate tax / resident tax (PL revenue decrease), sales (PL revenue increase), end-of-life gifts Inventory (increased BS assets), interest income (increased PL earnings), miscellaneous income (increased PL earnings), gain on sales of fixed assets (increased PL earnings), generation of custody products (increased BS debt), banks Cash on hand (BS asset increase), deposits from bank accounts (BS asset increase), end-of-life product inventory (BS asset increase), payments for other people's advance payment (BS asset increase) , Accrued receivables (BS asset increase), prepaid expenses Payment (increase in BS assets), payment of accounts payable (increase in BS liabilities), introduction of game machines, tools, machinery and equipment (increase in BS assets, but decrease in PL revenue for equipment under 100,000 yen), telephone subscription Rights registration costs such as rights and loans (BS asset increase), establishment costs (asset increase), bills payable (liability decrease), accounts payable settlement (liability decrease), debt settlement (liabilities) ), Return of deposit products (decrease in savings and medals by replay and prize exchange) (decrease in liabilities), refund of deposits (decrease in liabilities), decrease in capital (decrease in BS assets), provisional Consumption tax paid (to calculate the actual payment amount after offsetting the provisional consumption tax later) (increase in assets), cash outflows (decrease in assets), withdrawals from bank accounts (decrease in assets) , Decrease in inventory at the beginning of the period (decrease in BS assets) ), Collection of accounts receivable (decrease in assets), transfer of prepaid expenses (decrease in assets), occurrence of accruals (such as taxes and purchases) (increase in debt), disposal of gaming machines, tools, machinery and equipment ( BS asset decrease), extinction or sale of rights such as telephone subscription rights and lending rights (BS asset decrease), amortization of establishment expenses (PL revenue decrease), bills payable (liabilities increase), accounts payable (liabilities) ), Borrowings (increased debt), deposits generated (applicable when deposits and medals are stored as ordinary liabilities) (increased liabilities), deposits generated (increased liabilities), capital Increase in gold (increase in net assets of BS), provisional consumption tax (to calculate actual payment amount after offsetting temporary consumption tax) (increase in debt), etc. Calculated according to the wording in parentheses (PL: income statement, BS: balance) Table, balance sheet, income statement, statement of retained earnings, retained earnings statement, and outputs the included schedule). These subject names can be changed as appropriate, and new subjects can be added.

  Subsequently, the control unit 1000 determines whether in-input information or out-input information has been input based on information from the input / output information processing unit 1001 (step S1014). Further, when it is determined in step S1010 described above that there is no input information other than in-input information or out-input information (No in step S1010), the process in step S1014 is executed.

  When it is determined in step S1014 that no in-input information or out-input information is input (No in step S1014), the process in step S1022 is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1012 that in-input information or out-input information has been input (Yes in step S1014), the control unit 1000 receives the in-input information or the out-input information via the communication interface. Based on the header information, it is classified and sorted for each subject of the general ledger stored in advance, and is stored in the financial information management unit 1002 as history information and total information for a predetermined period (steps S1015 and S1016). .

  Subsequently, the control unit 1000 calculates the sales amount based on the information stored in the financial information management unit 1002 and stores it in the financial information management unit 1002 (step S1017). The sales amount is calculated based on the calculation element based on the sales amount and / or game data corresponding to the money used by the player for the game. Specifically, for example, the amount deposited by the player, the amount deposited by the player minus the amount refunded by the settlement machine, or the amount deposited by the player, returned by the settlement machine. The amount obtained by subtracting the sum of the sum of the amount and the number of stored game media multiplied by the unit price per game media, and the number of game media inserted into the gaming machine An amount obtained by multiplying the unit price per game, an amount obtained by multiplying the number of game media lent to the player by the unit price per game medium, and the like can be selected as appropriate. In addition, these sales are aggregated and stored so that financial processing is possible in the direction of increasing profits.

  Subsequently, the control unit 1000 calculates a provisional consumption tax based on the information stored in the financial information management unit 1002 (step S1018). Here, provisional consumption tax is the amount deposited as internal tax.

  Subsequently, based on the information input in step S1015 and step S1016, the control unit 1000 determines a predetermined period such as sales, purchase amount, provisional consumption tax, provisional consumption tax, in input information, out input information, and the like. Are totaled (step S1019). The predetermined period includes, for example, a period from the previous settlement date to the current settlement date (1 period), monthly, quarter period, and 1/2 period. Temporary consumption tax is the amount paid as internal tax.

  Here, the purchase amount is based on the purchase amount corresponding to the purchase amount of the prize paid to the player in exchange for the acquired game medium obtained by the player and / or a calculation element for calculating the purchase amount. Calculated. Specifically, for example, an amount obtained by multiplying the number of prizes paid out by the purchase unit price of prizes, an amount obtained by multiplying the number of purchases of prizes by the purchase unit price of prizes, and the number of gaming media discharged to the gaming machine A value obtained by multiplying the value obtained by subtracting the number of inserted game media by the unit price per game medium, and a value obtained by multiplying the number of game media counted by a counter by the unit price per game medium, etc. Is the purchase amount. In addition, these purchase amounts are tabulated and stored so that financial processing is possible in the direction of decreasing revenue. In addition, the above-mentioned calculation element based on the sales and / or game data corresponding to the amount used by the player for the game to calculate the sales and the player to calculate the purchase amount are obtained. Information relating to at least one of the purchase amount corresponding to the purchase amount of the prize paid to the player in exchange for the acquired game medium and / or the calculation element for calculating the purchase amount, such as the management device 13 From the device via the input / output information processing unit 1001. Of course, both may be input from an external device such as the management device 13.

  Subsequently, the control unit 1000 causes the financial information management unit 1002 to store the total amount for each predetermined period counted in step S1019 (step S1020).

  Subsequently, the control unit 1000 classifies and sorts the sales amount, purchase amount, provisional consumption tax, and provisional consumption tax for each item of the general ledger stored in advance based on the respective header information. Information capable of outputting the general ledger is stored in the financial information management unit 1002 as history information and total information for a predetermined period (step S1021). Here, the information that can be output from the general ledger means, for example, history information described for each item of the general ledger and total information such as a total amount for each subject. In addition, for example, financial management processing corresponding to each processing of a gift exchange process in the game hall, a gift exchange process or a prize delivery process in a store outside the game hall can be executed, respectively It is also possible to execute the process in step S1021 described above corresponding to this process. Here, the prize exchange process at a store outside the game hall is, for example, at a store outside the game hall, for example, by reducing the number of game media corresponding to the prize selected from the number of storages that is the number of game media acquired by the player. Is the process of handing over. In addition, the prize delivery process at a store outside the game hall means, for example, that the number of game media corresponding to a prize selected from the number of game media obtained by a player is reduced in the game hall, This is a process of delivering a prize selected by a player at a store. In regions where prize exchange processing at stores outside the game hall is prohibited, prize exchange processing at stores outside the game hall, game halls, etc. so that entry / exit processing and gift delivery processing at stores outside the game hall are executed. A system consisting of an out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22, an out-of-store terminal device 1100, and a center server 1130 can be set by appropriately selecting the gift delivery process at an outside store. As an example, the center server 1130 appropriately selects and stores a prize exchange process at a store outside the game hall and a prize delivery process at a store outside the game hall for each game hall. Either a power-off at the time of power-on or a power-off at the time of closing, a prize exchange process at a store outside the game hall, or a prize delivery process at a store outside the game hall is set in response to an instruction from the center server 1130 periodically. One general ledger may be provided with one or a plurality of pieces of outputable information, and each piece of outputable information is preferably rewritable.

  Subsequently, based on the information from the input / output information processing unit 1001, the control unit 1000 determines whether or not a settlement instruction for outputting a general ledger, a profit and loss statement, a balance sheet, or the like has been input (step S1022). ). This settlement instruction is information input by selecting a settlement instruction button displayed on the screen by a store clerk or the like using an input device such as a keyboard or a mouse.

  If it is determined in step S1022 that an account settlement instruction has been input (Yes in step S1022), the control unit 1000 subsequently receives information on the account settlement period for performing financial processing in the input / output information processing unit 1001 and the like. If it has been input in advance, information on the settlement period in which financial processing is performed is input based on information from the financial information management unit 1002 (step S1023). On the other hand, when the closing period information is not input, the control unit 1000 displays, for example, “Please input the closing period” on a display device such as a monitor via the input / output information processing unit 1001. Outputs information to make it work. Here, the settlement period is a period during which settlement processing is performed. For example, even if the settlement date is one period in step S1011, the actual start of financial management is one regular period such as July 4th. If it is not April 1, which is the start date of, the period from July 4, 2005 to March 31, 2006 is entered as the settlement period.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1022 that the payment information has not been input (No in step S1022), the control unit 1000 subsequently uses the keyboard based on the information from the input / output information processing unit 1001. Then, it is determined whether or not a request for performing a periodic financial status diagnosis has been made by an input device such as a mouse (step S1024).

  If it is determined in step S1024 that a request for performing periodic financial status diagnosis has not been made (No in step S1024), the control unit 1000 subsequently uses the information from the input / output information processing unit 1001. Based on this, it is determined whether or not a request for outputting the general ledger has been made by an input device such as a keyboard or a mouse (step S1025).

  If it is determined in step S1025 that the request to output the general ledger is not made (No in step S1025), the process returns and the process from step S1010 is executed again.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1025 that a request to output the general ledger has been made (Yes in step S1025), for example, a total is displayed on a display device such as a monitor via the input / output information processing unit 1001. The account ledger information is output and displayed on the screen (step S1026). Here, FIG. 50A shows an example of sales in the general ledger, FIG. 50B shows an example of purchases in the general ledger, and FIG. 50C shows an example of repair costs in the general ledger. Through the processing in step S1026, the general ledger for each subject for each predetermined period as shown in FIGS. 50A to 50C can be displayed on a display device such as a monitor.

  At this time, for example, the control unit 1000 obtains the amount obtained by subtracting predetermined expenses such as facility rental costs (location fees), utility costs, pachinko customer introduction costs, etc. based on the total prize exchange information. The number of special prizes paid according to the amount of income and the number of remaining special prizes to be paid may be aggregated for each trader and output to a display device such as a monitor.

  Subsequently, in response to a request from an input device such as a keyboard and a mouse, history information and count results for each subject of each general ledger are output to a display device such as a monitor via the input / output information processing unit 1001, for example. (Step S1027).

  Subsequently, based on the information from the input / output information processing unit 1001, it is determined whether or not a correction request for description such as a general ledger is input by an input device such as a keyboard or a mouse (step S1028).

  If it is determined in step S1028 that a correction request for each amount in the general ledger is not input (No in step S1028), the process returns and the processing from step S1010 is executed again. In this case, the general ledger information output via the input / output information processing unit 1001 is confirmed, and the general ledger information is stored in a printer or a hard disk as a display device in addition to the monitor. Can be output to the device.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1028 that a correction request for description such as an individual amount in the general ledger has been input (Yes in step S1028), the control unit 1000 determines in step S1021 financial information. Information capable of outputting the general ledger stored in the management unit 1002 is rewritten based on the correction request information, and the rewritten information is stored in the financial information management unit 1002 (step S1029).

  If it is determined in step S1024 that a request for performing periodic financial status diagnosis has been made (Yes in step S1024), or after the processing in step S1023, the settlement period input in step S1023 and the predetermined period in step S1019 Based on the information stored in the financial information management unit 1002 that has been summed up and sorted in step S1021 (classified into each item of the general ledger), the accumulated amount in the direction of increasing income in the income statement The integrated amount of the balance of the expense account, which is the integrated amount of the income account, and the integrated amount in the direction in which the income of the income statement decreases is calculated (step S1030). Furthermore, it is a credit on the balance sheet, which is the accumulated amount in the direction of decreasing assets, the accumulated amount of the liability account balance and the balance of the capital account, and the debit of the balance sheet, which is the accumulated amount in the direction of increasing assets. An accumulated amount of a certain asset account balance is calculated (step S1030). Information such as an integrated amount calculated so as to be able to output these income statement and balance sheet is stored in the financial information management unit 1002.

  Subsequently, in order to supplement the process of selecting the settlement process in the determination of step S1022 and executing the periodic financial status determination, the control unit 1000 again uses the keyboard, It is determined whether or not a request for performing a periodic financial status diagnosis is made by an input device such as a mouse (step S1031).

  If it is determined in step S1031 that there is no request for performing periodic financial status diagnosis (No in step S1031), the profit and loss statement and balance sheet stored in the financial information management unit 1002 are output. Based on the available information, the profit and loss statement and balance sheet are output to a display device such as a monitor and a printer and a storage device such as a hard disk via the input / output information processing unit 1001 (step S1032).

  Here, for example, like the general ledger described above, the profit and loss statement and the balance sheet are temporarily output to a display device such as a monitor via the input / output information processing unit 1001 and displayed on the screen, It may be possible to correct the contents of the income statement and balance sheet. At this time, the corrected profit and loss statement and balance sheet information are rewritten with the information that can output the profit and loss statement and balance sheet stored in the financial information management unit 1002, and the rewritten information becomes the financial information management unit. 1002 is stored. Note that the in-input information and the out-input information that have been input and sorted in steps S1015 and S1016 are also counted, for example, that the wiring for transmitting the sales information from the inter-vehicle machine is disconnected or the number of shot balls is counted. It can be corrected because there is an outmeter failure or a safe ball leak, and more than a predetermined number of premiums may be discharged due to a failure of the giveaway machine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1031 that a request for performing periodic financial status diagnosis has been made (Yes in step S1031), periodic financial status diagnosis is executed (step S1033).

  Here, the periodic financial status diagnosis will be described. In this periodic financial situation diagnosis, from the relationship expressed using the three parameters of accumulated profit and loss, assets minus accumulated liabilities and capital, and required margin, the accumulated profit and loss, assets and liabilities The required margin is calculated based on the amount obtained by subtracting the accumulated amount of capital. In addition, the accumulated amount of profit and loss takes into account the carry-over from the previous period, and the periodic financial situation diagnosis is executed. Necessary margin is the money to be paid when the transaction result ends with a loss when the transaction is settled.

  Subsequently, the required margin information calculated in step S1033 is output to a display device such as a monitor or other connection means via the input / output information processing unit 1001 (step S1034). After the process of step S1034, the process returns, and the process from step S1010 is executed again.

  According to the financial management apparatus 50 described above, financial processing is executed based on information from the management apparatus 13, the prize management machine (POS) 11, the out-of-store gift exchange terminal apparatus 22, the out-of-store terminal apparatus 1100, and the like. Automatically print out information such as the grand total of the specified items in the general ledger, the income statement attached to the settlement report submitted to the tax office, the balance sheet, and all documents submitted to the tax office. It can be obtained in this way. As a result, financial processing in an arbitrary period can be easily performed. Furthermore, based on the required margin calculated from the relationship expressed using the three parameters of the accumulated profit and loss, the asset minus the accumulated liability and capital, and the required margin, the periodic financial Situation diagnosis can be performed. As a result, the management status of the game hall can be grasped at all times. The in-input information (information related to sales in the pachinko hall) and the out-input information (information related to gift payouts in the pachinko hall) that are input and sorted in steps S1015 and S1016 are entered and purchased every day in the pachinko hall. Since the price of prizes is so large, it is automatically entered from the game hall using a communication line, so that the labor of manual entry can be greatly reduced. In particular, the number of purchases and the amount of purchases manually input to the free gift management machine (POS) 11 will fluctuate dramatically, and the price of the free gift will fluctuate. This eliminates the need for manual entry, greatly improving work efficiency and eliminating the need to pay a tax accountant.

(Outside store gift exchange terminal device 22)
Next, the outside gift exchange terminal device 22 will be described with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 51 is a plan view showing the surface of the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22. First, with reference to FIG. 51, the main configuration of the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 will be described.

  The out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 is based on a function as a data publishing machine that displays jackpot information on game machines and the like, information on the number of game media paid out, and the number of saved game media obtained at least. And a function as a prize exchange device for performing processing relating to prize exchange. Here, as described above, an example in which the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 has a function as a data publishing machine is shown, but the function as a data publishing machine may not be provided. As will be described later, the terminal device 22 for exchanging out-of-store prizes displays, for example, information related to the selected prize by the player selecting a prize from among the prizes that can be picked up at a store outside the game hall. Publications 1260, 1261, and 1262 are issued. In addition, in the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22, the player can set conditions relating to the prize processing. Further, as shown in FIG. 1B, the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22 is communicably connected to each device provided in the game hall via the network 8.

  As shown in FIG. 51, a display device 1200 for displaying information, a receipt insertion slot 1201 for inserting a receipt issued by the counter 9, and various cards are inserted in front of the store gift exchange terminal device 22. A card insertion slot 1202 to be inserted, a banknote insertion slot 1203 to insert and discharge a banknote, an issue outlet 1204 to issue issues 1260, 1261 and 1262 on which information relating to prize exchange is displayed, and an authentication of a player And an authentication information input device 1205 for inputting information to be used.

  The display device 1200 is a display unit that displays predetermined information when processing related to prize exchange is performed under the control of a control device to be described later, and also displays distribution information by the information distribution system described above. The display device 1200 includes display means having a touch panel constituted by a touch panel EL (Electro Luminescence) display or the like. In this display device 1200, a touch operation of a player or the like is received using various operation keys arranged on the touch panel corresponding to display contents. In addition to detecting and inputting the key operation input by this touch operation, any touch operation other than the operation key (touch operation that does not specify the display of the operation target and simply touches an arbitrary area on the display screen) is also accepted. The operation input by the arbitrary touch operation is also detected and input. Therefore, the display device 1200 also has a function as an input device.

  Further, the display device 1200 may display, for example, telop of the distribution information by the information distribution system, for example, as described above, in addition to the display of information according to the touch operation of the player or the like accompanying the process related to the prize exchange. it can. The contents to be displayed in the telop include, for example, information related to a prize when a newly exchangeable prize is registered, information related to a price reduction of an exchangeable prize, information related to a player's favorite prize, etc. For example, the information described in the information distribution system. For example, even if the information related to the prize of the player's favorite is registered by the player in the outside gift exchange terminal device 22, the outside gift exchange terminal device 22 based on the exchange history of the player's gift. Or the management device 13 or the like may be registered and registered in the database of the center server 1130 corresponding to the member ID read from the member IC card 30 inserted into the card insertion slot 1202.

  The receipt insertion port 1201 is a portion for inserting a receipt on which barcode information indicating the number of acquired game media issued by the counter 9 is displayed. An information reader is provided.

  The card insertion slot 1202 is a portion into which an IC card, a magnetic card, or the like is inserted, and an information reading device that reads at least information stored in each card is provided therein. Specifically, a reader / writer or the like is used as the information reading device. Examples of the card inserted from the card insertion slot 1202 include a member IC IC card 30, a non-member IC card 31, an electronic money card, a cash card, a credit card, etc., and information corresponding to usable cards A reader is provided. Further, by using a reader / writer as the information reading device, for example, the information after the premium exchange process can be written in the IC card 30 for member IC, the IC card 31 for non-member IC, the electronic money card, and the like.

  Further, for example, when the inserted card is the IC card 30 for the member IC, the photograph of the player's face input by the authentication information input device 1205 by the authentication information adding means provided in the card insertion slot 1202 The authentication information for authenticating the player such as is displayed on the authentication information display unit 30c of the IC card 30 for member IC in a rewritable manner and is discharged. As the authentication information adding means, a print display device using a rewritable display method, for example, a print display device that erases and rewrites the display by applying heat to a predetermined paint such as leuco or cloudiness is used.

  The banknote insertion slot 1203 is an insertion slot for inserting banknotes, and is provided with a compact banknote identification device that can handle each banknote. Note that banknotes that can be accepted from the banknote insertion slot 1203 may be limited.

  The issue outlet 1204, which will be described later, is an outlet for discharging the issues 1260, 1261, and 1262 on which information relating to prize exchange is displayed as shown in FIGS. A display device such as a printer for displaying predetermined information is provided. Further, authentication information for authenticating the player such as a photograph of the player's face inputted by the authentication information input device 1205 is displayed on the issue by this display device, and the issues 1260, 1261 and 1262 are discharged. You can also. Here, the publications 1260, 1261, and 1262 are not particularly limited, and are configured of, for example, paper.

  The authentication information input device 1205 is for inputting information for authenticating the player, and is composed of, for example, a small camera for inputting a photograph of the player's face. The player's face photograph input by the authentication information input device 1205 is displayed on the above-mentioned member IC card 30 and the issue 1260, 1261, and is used to authenticate the player.

  In addition, the input / output of signals between the component devices connected to the network 8 is controlled by the control device provided in the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 in each of the component devices described above. The control device also controls the input / output of signals to / from the management device 13 and the distribution control device 90 via the network 8. This control device is mainly composed of an arithmetic unit (CPU), a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), and other storage means such as a semiconductor memory that keeps information as necessary. Various arithmetic processes are executed using programs and data stored in the storage means such as the ROM and RAM.

  Here, in addition to the processing operation for processing information from the center server 1130 via the management device 13 and the distribution control device 90 and the processing operation related to the prize exchange, the program stored in the storage means such as ROM or RAM includes: A program in which processing operations for carrying out information distribution by the above-described information distribution system are included is included, and the control device executes each process according to the program.

  The store gift exchange terminal device 22 includes a communication interface including a port for connecting to the network 8 and a modem. The store gift exchange terminal device 22 also includes various information from an installed program file, various data files (for example, a database file that manages various types of data in a database structure), the center server 1130, and the like. Is stored, and the information is continuously held as necessary.

  Next, a specific configuration and operation of the store gift exchange terminal device 22 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 64.

  FIG. 52 is a functional block diagram showing the main configuration of the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the operation of the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22. 54 to 64 are diagrams for explaining an example of display contents displayed on the display device 1200 of the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 includes a control unit 1210, an input / output information processing unit 1211, a card processing unit 1212, a receipt processing unit 1213, an issue processing unit 1214, and a free gift. An exchange information management unit 1215 and a banknote processing unit 1216 are provided.

  The control unit 1210 is a functional block realized by the above-described control device, storage device, and communication interface. The control unit of the control device mainly uses various programs, data, and the like stored in the ROM, RAM, and storage device. This relates to the part that executes the arithmetic processing. In this control unit 1210, the input / output information processing unit 1211, the card processing unit 1212, the receipt processing unit 1213, the issue processing unit 1214, the gift exchange information management unit 1215, and the bill processing unit 1216. It controls the information input / output and the information input / output from the management device 13, the distribution control device 90, and each device provided in the game hall.

  The input / output information processing unit 1211 is a functional block realized by the above-described control device and communication interface, and performs input / output processing of information from the management device 13, the distribution control device 90, and each device provided in the game hall. . Examples of input information include information related to game data managed by the management device 13, information related to prize exchange from the center server 1130, information related to game data from each device provided in the game hall, and the like. It is done. Examples of the information related to the game data managed by the management device 13 include information such as the number of storages that is the number of game media acquired by the player.

  Information such as the number of savings may be managed by the center server 1130. Examples of information relating to prize exchange from the center server 1130 include information on prizes that can be exchanged for prizes registered by stores outside the game hall, information on prizes that can be exchanged for new prizes, prize exchanges, etc. Information on possible price reduction of prizes, information on whether or not processing relating to prize exchange is possible at a store outside the game hall, and the like. Further, examples of the information related to the game data from each device provided in the game hall include information on the number of game media counted by a counter. Moreover, since it also has a function as a data disclosure machine, the information related to the game data managed by the management device 13 includes information such as the number of big hits of each gaming machine and the number of game media paid out. Information related to game data from each device provided in the game hall may be input from the management device 13. The various types of information described above are merely examples, and are not limited to these, and will be described in detail in the following description.

  Further, the information processed by the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 is output to the management device 13 and / or the distribution control device 90 via the input / output information processing unit 1211, and is further output to the center server 1130.

  The card processing unit 1212 is a functional block implemented by the information reading device, the authentication information input device 1205, the print display device, and the display device 1200 described above. The card processing unit 1212 reads information from a card inserted from the card insertion slot 1202 and plays a game. Display of customer authentication information on the card, processing of information stored on the card based on information input from the display device 1200, and the like are executed.

  The receipt processing unit 1213 is a functional block realized by the information reading device described above, and executes reading of information from a receipt inserted from the receipt insertion port 1201. A barcode is written on the receipt and is read by a barcode reader.

  The issue processing unit 1214 is a functional block realized by the information reading device, the authentication information input device 1205, the print display device, and the display device 1200 described above, and issues 1260, 1261, A process for issuing 1262 is executed.

  The prize exchange information management unit 1215 is a functional block realized by the storage device described above, and includes the management device 13, the distribution control device 90, and each device provided in the game hall that are input to the input / output information processing unit 1211. And information related to the prize exchange processed by the terminal device 22 for exchanging prizes outside the store are stored.

  The banknote processing unit 1216 is a functional block realized by the above-described banknote identification device, and executes a process of identifying a banknote inserted from the banknote insertion slot 1203.

(Description of operation)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 to 64, the operation of the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 will be described.

  FIG. 53 shows a flowchart of the main routine executed by the control unit 1210 in the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22. The program is stored in the storage means of the control unit 1210, and processing from start to return is performed. The high-speed processing operation that the control unit 1210 executes in a time such as 0.01 ms is repeated. In this main routine, first, terminal distribution information [i] [m], terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] and terminal distribution are transmitted from the distribution control device 90 via the network 8 in the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22. The condition [i] [m] is received (step SD1).

  Here, the terminal distribution information [i] [m] is the news, weather forecast, advertisement, game hall service information, game hall and stores outside the game hall that are distributed to the information distribution destination terminal in the information distribution system described above. Distribution information such as registration information, price reduction information, and information input via the external communication network 1150 (in the information distribution system, character information displayed as a telop is handled as an example of distribution information) The number or number of information is represented by [i], and the distribution destination terminal is represented by [m], which is a terminal number assigned in advance. That is, the store gift exchange terminal device 22 is the i-th terminal distribution information [1] [m] to terminal distribution information [i] [m] from the distribution control device 90 as the m-th terminal on the network 8. Terminal distribution amount designation information [1] [m] to terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] and terminal distribution conditions [1] [m] to The terminal distribution condition [i] [m] is received. Terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] is the amount of terminal distribution information [i] [m] displayed on the terminal (frequency of display indicating display amount during a predetermined period, display amount itself, etc.) The terminal distribution condition [i] [m] is information indicating a condition for displaying the corresponding terminal distribution information [i] [m] on the terminal.

  After receiving these pieces of information, the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 distributes each terminal distribution information [i] [m] and each terminal distribution information [i] [m] via the network 8. The fee is transmitted to the distribution control device 90 (step SD2). The distribution result here is information indicating the result of displaying each terminal distribution information [i] [m] on the display device 1200 in the terminal device 22 for outside gift exchange which is the m-th terminal. It is counted in the processing relating to the display of the distribution information, and the distribution fee is also counted according to the counted distribution performance (totaled in the above-described constant display subroutine and distribution condition display subroutine).

  The terminal distribution information [i] [m], the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m], the terminal distribution condition [i] [m], the terminal distribution information [ Since the specific contents of the distribution record of i] [m] and the distribution charge of each terminal distribution information [i] [m] have been described in the above description of the entire information distribution system, they are omitted here. In the entire gaming hall management system 1A and gaming hall management system 1B, as will be described below, other devices connected to the network 8 also transmit and receive terminal distribution information [i] [m], etc. The same applies to the information. However, each device connected to the network 8 is assigned a terminal number in advance as a delivery destination terminal, and the value of [m] is different. Also, “(* No input of attribute designation is given for the terminal device for outside prize exchange)” in step SD2 is attributed to the distribution desired in the information distribution system described later (a player who desires information distribution of a specific genre) This indicates that the information that designates the attribute) is handled, and that the information is not handled by the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 (a form of handling may be adopted, which will be described later) To do.) The information specifying the attribute here is used as the attribute specifying information [i] [m] in the following description. The specific contents of the attribute specifying information [i] [m] are already in the entire information distribution system. explained.

  As described above, in the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 that has transmitted / received the terminal distribution information [i] [m] or the like, a constant display subroutine is started (step SD3). The constant display subroutine is a process for displaying the received terminal distribution information [i] [m] on the display device 1200 based on the received terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m], and the program is a control unit. If there is an activation request, the control unit 1210 executes the timer routine every predetermined time without interrupting the execution of the main routine. The specific contents of the constant display subroutine have been described in the description of the entire information distribution system.

  Subsequently, in the next process in the main routine, the control unit 1210 determines whether or not a card or a receipt is inserted based on information from the card processing unit 1212 and the receipt processing unit 1213 (step S1220).

  If it is determined in step S1220 that a card or a receipt is not inserted (No in step S1220), the process returns and the process from the start is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1220 that a card or receipt is inserted (Yes in step S1220), the distribution condition display subroutine is started in the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 (step SD4). . The distribution condition display subroutine refers to the display apparatus 1200 based on the terminal distribution conditions [i] [m] and the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] that generally received the received terminal distribution information [i] [m]. This is a process to be displayed. The program is stored in the storage unit of the control unit 1210, and if there is an activation request, the control unit 1210 executes the timer interrupt every predetermined time without interrupting the execution of the main routine. Since the processing of the distribution condition display subroutine has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted. The same applies to the processing of the distribution condition display subroutine that is to be started up by other devices in the entire gaming hall management system 1A and gaming hall management system 1B.

  Subsequently, the card processing unit 1212 reads, for example, ID information for identifying a player stored in the card inserted from the card insertion slot 1202, and outputs the ID information to the control unit 1210 (step S1221).

  If the control unit 1210 determines in step S1220 that a card or a receipt has been inserted (Yes in step S1220), the player shown in FIG. Possible information is displayed on the screen (step S1223). As shown in FIG. 54, the player has items of “table data disclosure”, “price exchange, product purchase”, “member payment method designation”, “member's current desired item, always favorite item registration” By touching any of the items, processing of the item can be selected. In this embodiment, various advertisement information transmitted in the information distribution system described above is displayed as a telop on a part of the lower side of the screen. Here, as an example, ○ △ □ ramen store price cut information and product photo images are displayed.

  Subsequently, the control unit 1210, based on the operation input signal from the touch panel of the display device 1200, “disclosure data disclosure”, “free gift exchange, product purchase”, “member settlement method designation”, “member current status” The item selected from the items “desired item, always favorite item registration” is determined (step S1223).

  If the control unit 1210 determines from the screen shown in FIG. 54 that “exchange gift / purchase product” is selected based on an operation input signal from the touch panel of the display device 1200, the gift exchange shown in FIG. Display a screen that can display possible prizes. In addition to information on prizes that can be exchanged for prizes, the display screen includes items such as "exchange gifts at nearby stores", "home delivery prize exchanges", "exchange prize exchanges", and "game hall prize exchanges". Is displayed.

  Here, “exchanging prizes at nearby stores” means subtracting the number of game media corresponding to the prizes exchanged in the game hall from the number of game media earned by the player, and collecting prizes at stores outside the game hall Provide prizes that can be exchanged inside the game hall, subtract from the number of game media earned by the player at the store outside the game hall, and exchange prizes that pick up the selected prize, and exchange prizes inside the game hall For example, you can select a store outside the game hall, subtract it from the number of game media earned by the player at the store outside the game hall, and exchange prizes for picking up the selected prize. This is called processing related to providing a free gift in exchange for the number of media. Furthermore, the processing related to providing a prize that provides a prize in exchange for the number of acquired game media includes, in addition to subtracting from the number of game media earned by a player in either a game hall or a store outside the game hall, As will be described in detail in the description of the out-of-store terminal device 1100, the shortage of the amount for the prize or the amount exceeding 10,000 yen when the prize exceeds 10,000 yen, such as cash, points, credit cards, etc. Include processing to settle at other value. “Home delivery premium exchange” means processing for prize exchange by subtracting the number of game media corresponding to the prize to be exchanged from the number of game media earned by the player, and prizes included in stores outside the game hall This is a free gift exchange for picking up a free gift at a home or the like from a home delivery store that delivers the goods. “Receipt exchange” refers to exchange of prizes in the game hall. For example, if the prize in the game hall is not out of stock or can be exchanged in the game hall, it is always placed in the game hall. If the prize is not available, it is a prize exchange that waits for the game hall to collect the prize and collects the prize. “Exchanging prizes in the game hall” means exchanging with prizes in the game hall. Note that, in the case of “exchange prizes” and “exchanging prizes at game halls”, the number of game media corresponding to the prizes to be exchanged is subtracted from the number of game media earned by the player as in the case of “home delivery prize exchanges”. Processing related to prize exchange is performed. Further, the prize exchange process using the stored number of game media acquired by the player may be performed only by the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22 in the game hall. In this case, in the out-of-store terminal device 1100, processing relating to prize exchange is performed using valuable values such as cash, points, credit cards, etc. other than the number of savings.

  Next, FIG. 56 shows an example of a display form when it is determined from the screen shown in FIG. 55 that, for example, “food, drink” is selected. For example, when it is determined that “food, drink” is selected, the control unit 1210 displays information such as “seafood”, “meat”, “vegetable, fruit”, etc., related to “food, drink” on the display device 1200. To do. Subsequently, for example, when it is determined that “Seafood” is selected from these items, the control unit 1210 displays information such as “processed product”, “fresh”, “dried fish, smoked”, and the like related to “Seafood”. It is displayed on the display device 1200. Subsequently, for example, when it is determined that “fresh” is selected from these items, the control unit 1210 displays information such as “sea urchin”, “shrimp, crab”, “seaweed”, and the like related to “fresh”. To display. Subsequently, for example, when it is determined that “shrimp, crab” is selected from these items, the control unit 1210 displays information such as “shrimp”, “crab” related to “shrimp, crab” on the display device 1200. To do. Subsequently, when it is determined that, for example, “crab” is selected from these items, the control unit 1210 displays information such as “Abra crab”, “hair crab”, “snow crab”, “king crab”, and the like related to “crab” Display on the device 1200. Subsequently, when it is determined that, for example, “king crab” is selected from these items, the control unit 1210 displays, for example, advertisement information on each store related to “king crab” as shown in FIG. To display.

  Also, in each advertising information column, the price of “king crab”, the number of pachinko balls and medals required for exchange are described. Moreover, you may write the evaluation of the store etc. with respect to each prize. As a result, the player can immediately grasp the number of game media necessary for exchanging the prize together with the price of the prize. Here, the number of game media necessary for exchanging the prize is displayed together with the price of the prize, but for example, the number of points necessary for exchanging the prize or other valuable value necessary for exchanging the prize may be displayed. As shown in FIG. 57, for example, in the upper left of the display screen, the value of the player, for example, the frequency, the number of points, the number of points, the total value of these values, etc. is displayed. The valuable value corresponding to the exchanged prize is subtracted from these valuable values.

  Note that the valuable value that can be used when performing processing related to the exchange of prizes is not limited to the above-described valuable value, and is, for example, an electronic money card or a credit card inserted from the card insertion slot 1202. You may make a payment. Moreover, you may settle using the banknote etc. which were inserted from the banknote insertion port 1203. FIG. That is, even if three or more kinds of valuable values including the number of game media saved by the player can be specified from the inserted card, and the payment processing related to the prize exchange is performed using the three or more kinds of valuable values. Good. In the case of settlement using banknotes, the change may be stored as a valuable value, or a change discharge port may be provided to discharge the change. Further, for example, in the case of a member player, the payment processing method can be selected as appropriate, and this payment processing method will be described in the operation of “designation of member payment method”.

  Further, when it is determined based on the information from the center server 1130 that a prize cannot be exchanged at a store outside the game hall, a stop process for stopping the process related to the exchange of prizes with the store outside the game hall is performed. Applied. Here, the state in which a gift cannot be exchanged at a store outside the game hall means, for example, that the power supply of the out-of-store terminal device 1100 at the store outside the game hall is turned off or a switch indicating that preparation is in progress is being made. Examples include a case where the transaction is not in a transaction state, or a case where a transaction relating to a prize exchange with a store outside the game hall is stopped from the center server 1130 based on the management status of the game hall. In addition, the stop process for stopping the process related to the prize exchange is, for example, that the prize related to the store where the stop process is performed is not displayed on the display device 1200, or cannot be selected even if it is displayed, or at a store outside the game hall. When you select a gift to be offered, the message "Can you accept today's gift because it is currently closed?" Is displayed, and if you select NO as the subsequent selection, processing such as canceling the selected gift will be performed. It can be illustrated.

  As described above, the player can select a prize to be exchanged from the touch panel of the display device 1200, while the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22 is based on an operation input signal from the touch panel of the display device 1200. Processing related to prize exchange can be executed.

  As described above, based on the operation input signal from the touch panel of the display device 1200, the control unit 1210 determines whether or not a prize exchange other than "exchange gifts at a nearby store" has been selected (step S1225). .

  If it is determined in step S1225 that “exchange gift at a nearby store” has been selected (No in step S1225), the control unit 1210 then gives a free gift of 10,000 yen or less for each premium. It is determined whether or not it is exchange (step S1226).

  If it is determined in step S1226 that the gift exchange is not within 10,000 yen (No in step S1226), the control unit 1210 subsequently determines whether the amount corresponding to the number of savings is greater than 10,000 yen. Is determined (step S1227). Here, 10,000 yen is the limit value, depending on the area where the game hall is built, it is illegal to exchange prizes of 10,000 yen or more using the number of savings (regulation of business practices and suitability of business) The standard on the maximum price of prizes stipulated in Article 19-3 of the Law for the Enforcement of the Law Concerning Legislation, etc. (Extract) shall be no more than 10,000 yen. This is because there is an area called).

  If it is determined in step S1227 that the amount corresponding to the number of savings is greater than 10,000 yen (Yes in step S1227), the financial management apparatus 50 and the center server 1130 are informed via the input / output information processing unit 1211. The name of the selected prize, the ID of the prize for specifying the prize, the price of the prize, information on the valuable value withdrawn along with the prize exchange, and the like are output (step S1228). The value to be withdrawn is appropriately selected from one or more valuable values, with the upper limit of the number of savings withdrawn for one prize being 10,000 yen. Debited with value. Therefore, if the sum of all the valuable values to be withdrawn is less than the price of the prize, the prize exchange can be canceled, and if canceled, the process is returned. In this case, the price of the premium includes consumption tax as a tax, and when information on valuable value deducted in connection with the prize exchange is output, the provisional consumption tax that is information on that tax is output. Is also output.

  Subsequently, the control unit 1210 causes the issue processing unit 1214 to issue the issue 1261 shown in FIG. 63 (step S1229). The issue 1261 shown in FIG. 63 is issued when a prize exceeding 10,000 yen is selected in the prize exchange in the store outside the game hall as described above, and information on the selected prize is shown. It is a gift voucher for specifying the valuable value of 10,000 yen. This gift voucher includes information related to the selected prize, information that can specify the valuable value of 10,000 yen, that is, bar code information that can specify that 10,000 yen has been deducted from the stored number Is displayed (in the case of prize exchange in which the number of game media corresponding to prizes exchanged in the game hall is subtracted from the number of game media earned by the player and prizes are collected at stores outside the game hall). As another example of bar code information, information that can specify the number of acquired game media may be displayed (select a prize to be exchanged in a game hall and acquired by a player at a store outside the game hall) When subtracting from the number of saved game media and exchanging selected prizes). Other examples of bar code information include information that can identify one or more valuable values held by the player, and one or more valuable values that are registered to be available for the present prize exchange. Possible information may be displayed (a store outside the game hall with a prize to be exchanged in the game hall is selected and subtracted from the number of game media saved by the player in the store outside the game hall and selected. (In the case of a prize exchange for picking up prizes).

  Also, the authentication information which is the face photograph of the player inputted by the authentication information input device 1205 is displayed on the issue 1261, and for example, the issue 1261 is collated with the person who brought it to the store outside the game hall. You may be able to do it. Further, in the issue 1261, store information is displayed in which the prize selected by the outside shop exchange terminal device 22 can be exchanged. As the store information, for example, a store name, a store address or telephone number, a map showing the store location, and the like are displayed. The issue 1261 also displays information such as the name and address of the game hall where the prize exchange processing has been performed by the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22. Further, the issue 1261 displays information on the number of balls that can be exchanged by the player, such as the number of balls and medals, and information on the amount of money that can be used when the total is converted into an amount. In addition, store information is not restricted to these, A display content can be set suitably.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1227 that the amount corresponding to the number of savings is 10,000 yen or less (No in step S1227), the financial management device 50 and the center are connected via the input / output information processing unit 1211. The server 1130 outputs the name of the selected prize, the ID of the prize for specifying the prize, the price of the prize, the information on the valuable value withdrawn along with this prize exchange (step S1230). The value withdrawn refers to a value that is appropriately selected from one or a plurality of values such as the number of acquired game media. If the sum of all the valuable values to be withdrawn is less than the price of the prize, this prize exchange can be canceled, and if it is canceled, the process returns. In this case, the price of the premium includes consumption tax as a tax, and when information on valuable value deducted in connection with the prize exchange is output, the provisional consumption tax that is information on that tax is output. Is also output.

  Subsequently, the control unit 1210 causes the issue processing unit 1214 to issue the issue 1260 shown in FIG. 62 (step S1231). The issue 1260 shown in FIG. 62 is issued when a prize of 10,000 yen or less is selected in the exchange of a prize outside the game hall as described above. In the prize exchange process at 22, the value corresponding to the prize is subtracted, and it simply functions as a prize voucher for exchanging with the prize. The premium voucher displays bar code information that can specify premium ID (premium code) information for specifying the premium. The issue 1260 displays the name and quantity of the prize to be exchanged, the prize ID, the unit price of the prize, the number of game media necessary for the prize exchange, and the like. Also, the authentication information which is the face photograph of the player input by the authentication information input device 1205 is displayed on the issue 1260, and for example, the issue 1260 is collated with the person who brought the issue 1260 to a store outside the game hall. You may be able to do it. Further, in the issue 1260, store information that can exchange the prize selected by the outside shop exchange terminal device 22 is displayed. As the store information, for example, a store name, a store address or telephone number, a map showing the store location, and the like are displayed. The issue 1260 also displays information such as the name and address of the game hall where the prize exchange processing has been performed by the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22. In addition, store information is not restricted to these, A display content can be set suitably.

  In this way, the maximum price of prizes stipulated in the Law of the National Public Safety Commission of Article 19 of the Law stipulated in Article 29-3 of the Law Enforcement Regulations (Extract) on the Regulation of Customs Business and the Suitability of Business, etc. Corresponding to not exceeding the standard 10,000 yen, as described above, if the yen-converted price for exchanging the prize per piece does not exceed 10,000 yen, it is possible to specify the prize delivered at a store outside the hall For example, if an issue 1260 printed with a barcode is issued and the price exceeds 10,000 yen, the barcode is printed as information that can specify the value available at a store outside the hall. An issue 1261 different from the issue 1260 is issued.

  If it is determined in step S1226 that the gift exchange per piece is within 10,000 yen (Yes in step S1226), the processing from step S1230 described above is executed, and step S1231 is executed. Issued issue 1260 issued at. Subsequently, the processing from step S1232 is executed.

  Next, when it is determined in step S1225 that a prize exchange other than “exchange gifts at a nearby store” has been selected (Yes in step S1225), the control unit 1210 then “ It is determined whether or not “exchange prize” has been selected (step S1232).

  When it is determined in the determination in step S1232 that “exchange prize at game hall” is selected (Yes in step S1232), for example, the control unit 1210 places the selected prize in the issue processing unit 1214. By issuing an issue (not shown) that displays a map or the like in the game hall that is being played (step S1233), the map allows the player to go directly to the desired prize location. Note that the processing in step S1232 and step S1233 may be configured to be processed by the gift management machine (POS) 11.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the determination in step S1232 that “exchanging prizes at the game hall” is not selected (No in step S1232), the control unit 1210 subsequently selects “exchange gifts for home delivery”. It is determined whether or not (step S1234).

  If it is determined in step S1234 that “home delivery gift exchange” has been selected (Yes in step S1234), the financial management device 50 and the center server 1130 have selected it via the input / output information processing unit 1211. Value to be withdrawn, appropriately selected from one or more valuable values, such as a prize name, a prize ID for identifying a prize, a prize price, and the number of game media earned as a result of the prize exchange Value information and the like are output (step S1235). In this case, the price of the premium includes consumption tax as a tax, and when information on valuable value deducted in connection with the prize exchange is output, the provisional consumption tax that is information on that tax is output. Is also output.

  Subsequently, the control unit 1210 causes the issue processing unit 1214 to issue the issue 1262 shown in FIG. 64 (step S1236). The issue 1262 shown in FIG. 64 is issued when home gift exchange is selected in the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22, and corresponds to a free gift in the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22. The valuable value to be subtracted is merely a memorandum indicating to the player what the prize related to the home gift exchange was. The issue 1262 displays the name and quantity of the prize to be exchanged, the address and telephone number of the prize shipping store, the unit price of the prize, the number of game media necessary for the prize exchange, the photograph information of the prize, and the like. Further, in the issue 1262, store information is displayed in which the prize selected by the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22 can be exchanged. Also, the issue 1262 displays information such as the name and address of the game hall where the prize exchange process has been performed in the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22. In addition, store information is not restricted to these, A display content can be set suitably.

  It should be noted that after the processing in step S1236 or in the determination in step S1234, it is determined that “home delivery gift exchange” has not been selected (No in step S1234), the process returns to the start.

  Next, when it is determined in step S1223 that “table data disclosure” has been selected (“table data disclosure” in step S1223), a known process as a data disclosure machine installed in the game hall is executed. (Step S1240). That is, information about gaming machines such as the number of big hits, the number of times of starting, and the number of game media discharged are displayed on the display device 1200. Note that display items to be displayed can be switched appropriately by the player on the display device 1200 touch panel. After the process of step S1240, the process returns and returns to the start.

  Next, when it is determined in the determination in step S1223 that “specify payment method for member” is selected (“specification of payment method for member” in step S1223), for example, a payment method as shown in FIG. The selection screen is displayed, and the following settlement method setting process is executed (step S1245).

  First, the control unit 1210 selects “consumption method designation by consumption in order of priority”, “designation of settlement method according to the designated consumption ratio”, “consumption by consumption in descending order of point usage frequency”, “point usage frequency only” It is determined that one of the buttons “consume and settle in ascending order” is selected, and the display is switched according to the selected item.

  FIG. 59 is an example of a display screen when “consumption method specification by consumption in order of priority”, which is a settlement based on a predetermined function formula, is selected. In this settlement, as described above, three or more kinds of valuable values including the number of game media earned by the player can be specified from the inserted card, and the three or more kinds of valuable values are used. A case will be described in which a payment process relating to a prize exchange is possible and a banknote inserted from the banknote insertion slot 1203 can be processed as a valuable value.

  When exchanging prizes in a game hall, first, the valuable value associated with exchanging prizes is subtracted from the number of game media stored by the player. In addition, when there is a number of savings related to pachinko balls and medals as game media, it is subtracted first from the game media counted in the near future. Here, for example, when the value of the selected prize is insufficient even if all the stored numbers are used, the order of the valuable value to be subtracted next is set. For example, in FIG. 59, “1” is set in “Point A”, and “2” is set in “Electronic Money 1”. Therefore, in this case, the “point A” is subtracted after the stored number is subtracted. Further, if it is not enough to subtract “point A”, it is subtracted from “electronic money 1”.

  In addition, when a prize to be received at a store outside the game hall is changed and the difference is settled and a shortage occurs, the order of the valuable value to be subtracted next is set. For example, this is the case where a free gift of 5000 yen is selected at the terminal device 22 for exchanging out-of-store prizes in the game hall, and it is desired to exchange a free gift for 8000 yen in place at the store outside the play hall. . For example, in FIG. 59, “1” is set in “Point A”, and “2” is set in “Electronic Money 1”. Therefore, in this case, the “point A” is subtracted after the stored number is subtracted. Further, if it is not enough to subtract “point A”, it is subtracted from “electronic money 1”.

  Further, when a prize to be received at a store outside the game hall is changed and the difference is settled and a refund is generated, the ranking of the valuable value to be refunded is set. For example, this may be the case when a prize of 8000 yen is selected at the terminal device 22 for exchanging out-of-store prizes in the game hall, and a prize of 5000 yen is exchanged for a free gift at a shop outside the game hall. . For example, in FIG. 59, “1” is set in “Point A”, and “2” is set in “Electronic Money 1”. In this setting, for example, when there is a limit value for the added value of “A point”, the remaining amount is added to “electronic money 1” of the next rank. When “1” is set for “A point” and “not selected” is set for other valuable values, all refunds are added to “A point”. In addition, even if it does not have the structure which changes a refund part into valuable value, it can also be comprised so that changing a refund part into valuable value may be prohibited.

  FIG. 60 shows an example of a display screen when “designation method according to designated consumption ratio” is selected. In this settlement, as described above, three or more kinds of valuable values including the number of game media earned by the player can be specified from the inserted card, and the three or more kinds of valuable values are used. A case will be described in which a payment process relating to a prize exchange is possible and a banknote inserted from the banknote insertion slot 1203 can be processed as a valuable value.

  When exchanging prizes in a game hall, first, the valuable value associated with exchanging prizes is subtracted from the number of game media stored by the player. In addition, when there is a number of savings related to pachinko balls and medals as game media, it is subtracted first from the game media counted in the near future. Here, for example, when the value of the selected prize is insufficient even if all the stored numbers are used, the ratio of the valuable value to be subtracted next is set. For example, in FIG. 60, “50” for “Point”, “5” for “Additional cash”, “29” for “Electronic money 1”, “5” for “Frequency for ball rental”, and “Electronic money 2”. “1” is set in “15” and “credit”. Then, the ratios set for all the valuable values are set to be “100” when totaled. In this case, the shortage is subtracted based on the ratio set for each valuable value.

  In addition, when a premium to be received at a store outside the game hall is changed and the difference is settled and a shortage occurs, the ratio of the valuable value to be subtracted next is set. For example, in FIG. 60, “50” for “point”, “10” for “additional cash”, “5” for “ball rental frequency”, “4” for “electronic money 1”, and “electronic money 2”. “5”, “Credit” are set to “1”, “Number of accumulated balls” is set to “20”, and “Number of stored medals” is set to “5”. Then, the ratios set for all the valuable values are set to be “100” when totaled. Here, the number of stored balls is the number related to pachinko balls out of the number of stored game media acquired by the player. The number of medals is the number related to medals out of the number of game media saved by the player.

  Further, when a premium to be received at a store outside the game hall is changed and the difference is settled and a refund is generated, the ratio of the valuable value to be refunded is set. For example, in FIG. 60, “100” is set to “point”, and “0” is set to other valuable values. In this case, all refund amounts are changed to points. In addition, even if it does not have the structure which changes a refund part into valuable value, it can also be comprised so that changing a refund part into valuable value may be prohibited.

  Next, a description will be given of a case where “consumed and settled in order of frequency of use of only points” is selected.

  When exchanging prizes in a game hall, first, the valuable value associated with exchanging prizes is subtracted from the number of game media stored by the player. In addition, when there is a number of savings related to pachinko balls and medals as game media, it is subtracted first from the game media counted in the near future. Here, for example, when the value of the selected prize is insufficient even if all the stored numbers are used, the shortage is subtracted from the points in order of the frequency of use.

  Further, when a premium to be received at a store outside the game hall is changed and the difference is settled, and a shortage occurs, the shortage is subtracted from the points in order of the frequency of use.

  In addition, when a premium to be received at a store outside the game hall is changed and the difference is settled and a refund occurs, the refund amount is converted into the corresponding points in the order of the most frequently used points. Add the point to the point. In addition, even if it does not have the structure which changes a refund part into valuable value, it can also be comprised so that changing a refund part into valuable value may be prohibited.

  Next, a case will be described in which “settlement by using only points in ascending order of use frequency” is selected.

  When exchanging prizes in a game hall, first, the valuable value associated with exchanging prizes is subtracted from the number of game media stored by the player. In addition, when there is a number of savings related to pachinko balls and medals as game media, it is subtracted first from the game media counted in the near future. Here, for example, if the value of the selected prize is insufficient even if all the stored numbers are used, the shortage is subtracted from the points in the order of the points with the lowest usage frequency.

  In addition, when a premium to be received at a store outside the game hall is changed and the difference is settled and a shortage occurs, the shortage is subtracted from the points in the order of the least frequently used points.

  In addition, when a gift to be received at a store outside the game hall is changed and the difference is settled and a refund occurs, the refund amount is converted into the corresponding points in the order of the least frequently used, Add the point to the point. In addition, even if it does not have the structure which changes a refund part into valuable value, it can also be comprised so that changing a refund part into valuable value may be prohibited.

  Here, although details will be described in the description of the center server 1130 described later, a predetermined fee may be collected when the above-described valuable value is changed to another valuable value. The conditions set in the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 are output to the center server 1130 via the input / output information processing unit, and the center server 1130 sets each setting based on, for example, the ID of the member player. Information is stored and managed.

  Next, when it is determined in the determination in step S1223 that “the member's current desired item, always favorite item registration” has been selected (“the member's current desired item, always favorite item registration”). 61, for example, displays a screen on which prizes that can be exchanged as shown in FIG. 61 can be displayed, and executes the following registration process of prize information desired by a member player (step S1246).

  The screen changes after the screen that can display the prizes that can be exchanged as shown in FIG. 61 are the same as those in the above-described “Premium exchange”. For example, “Food, drink” is displayed from the screen shown in FIG. If it is determined that the selection has been made, the control unit 1210 displays information such as “seafood”, “meat”, “vegetables, fruit” and the like related to “food, drink” on the display device 1200. Subsequently, for example, when it is determined that “Seafood” is selected from these items, the control unit 1210 displays information such as “processed product”, “fresh”, “dried fish, smoked”, and the like related to “Seafood”. It is displayed on the display device 1200. Subsequently, for example, when it is determined that “fresh” is selected from these items, the control unit 1210 displays information such as “sea urchin”, “shrimp, crab”, “seaweed”, and the like related to “fresh”. To display. Subsequently, for example, when it is determined that “shrimp, crab” is selected from these items, the control unit 1210 displays information such as “shrimp”, “crab” related to “shrimp, crab” on the display device 1200. To do. Subsequently, when it is determined that, for example, “crab” is selected from these items, the control unit 1210 displays information such as “Abra crab”, “hair crab”, “snow crab”, “king crab”, and the like related to “crab” Display on the device 1200. Subsequently, when it is determined that, for example, “king crab” has been selected from these items, the control unit 1210 determines that this is a member's current desired item or a favorite item at all times, and this information is input / output, for example. The data is output to the center server 1130 via the information processing unit, and the center server 1130 stores and manages it based on, for example, the ID of the member player.

  In this way, when the player performs processing related to the exchange of prizes by performing “registration of the member's current wish, always favorite thing”, for example, in the prize that can be exchanged for the prize, When there is a prize corresponding to the desired item, the information can be preferentially displayed on the display device 1200. In addition, in the case of having information relating to a prize corresponding to what the player wants, for example, to the display device of the gaming machine or the display device of the intermediary machine through which the corresponding member plays through the information distribution system described above. The information can be preferentially displayed.

  As described above, in the terminal device 22 for exchanging gifts outside the store, “data disclosure”, “exchanging gifts, purchasing products”, “specifying the member settlement method”, “what the member wants now, what he always likes Processing of items such as “registration” can be executed. In addition, various advertisement information transmitted in the information distribution system described above can be displayed as a telop on a part of the screen.

  Further, in the prize exchange, for example, exchange processing such as “exchanging prizes at a nearby store”, “exchanging prizes for delivery to home”, “exchanging prizes for purchase”, and “exchanging prizes at a game hall” can be performed. In addition, when exchanging prizes, in addition to the number of game media saved by the player, the number of game media can be settled using other valuable values such as cash, points, credit cards, and the like. In addition, it is possible to set a settlement method when using each valuable value.

  In addition, the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 can issue publications 1260, 1261, and 1262 on which information related to the gift exchange is displayed. This issue can be issued with different information displayed on the issue depending on whether a prize exceeding 10,000 yen is selected or a prize of 10,000 yen or less, for example. That is, different prize exchange processes can be performed when a prize exceeding 10,000 yen is selected and when a prize of 10,000 yen or less is selected. In addition, since the issue information 1260 and 1261 can display authentication information which is a face photograph of the player input by the authentication information input device 1205, for example, the issue 1260 and 1261 are displayed at stores outside the game hall. You can collate with the person who brought you. As a result, it is possible to prevent a third party from exchanging premiums using the issue 1260, 1261.

(Out-of-store terminal device 1100)
Next, the out-of-store terminal device 1100 will be described with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 65 is a plan view showing the surface of the out-of-store terminal device 1100. First, the main configuration of the out-of-store terminal device 1100 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The out-of-store terminal device 1100 is installed in a store outside the game hall and performs processing related to prize exchange. Further, although the details will be described later, the out-of-store terminal device 1100 can perform processing such as prize registration and input of advertisement request information. As shown in FIG. 1A, the out-of-store terminal device 1100 is connected to a center server 1130 and a transmission server 1140 via an information distribution network 1120 so as to be communicable.

  As shown in FIG. 65, on the front side of the out-of-store terminal device 1100, there are a display device 1300 for displaying information and issues 1260 and 1261 issued by the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22 (see FIGS. 62 and 63). ) Is inserted, a card insertion slot 1302 for inserting various cards, a banknote insertion slot 1303 for inserting banknotes, an input unit 1304 for inputting characters, symbols and numerical values, and authenticating a player An authentication information input device 1305 for inputting information to be changed, a change button unit 1306 for changing and determining various information, and a business confirmation switch 1307 are provided.

  The display device 1300 displays various kinds of information, and is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display. The display device 1300 can also display, for example, telop display of distribution information by the information distribution system as described above.

  The issue reception 1301 is provided with a barcode reader that reads barcode information displayed on the issue 1260, 1261 (see FIGS. 62 and 63) issued by the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22.

  The card insertion slot 1302 is a portion into which an IC card, a magnetic card, or the like is inserted, and an information reading device that reads at least information stored in each card is provided therein. Specifically, a reader / writer or the like is used as the information reading device. Examples of the card inserted from the card insertion slot 1302 include a member IC card 30, a nonmember IC card 31, an electronic money card, a cash card, and a credit card, and information corresponding to usable cards A reader is provided. Further, by using a reader / writer as the information reading device, for example, the information after the premium exchange process can be written in the IC card 30 for member IC, the IC card 31 for non-member IC, the electronic money card, and the like.

  The banknote insertion slot 1303 is an insertion slot for inserting banknotes, and a compact banknote identification device that can handle each banknote is provided inside. Note that banknotes that can be accepted from the banknote insertion slot 1303 may be limited.

  The input unit 1304 is composed of input keys capable of inputting characters, symbols, numerical values, and the like, and performs input for prize registration and other settings.

  The authentication information input device 1305 inputs authentication information for authenticating a player such as a photograph of the player's face, and is composed of a small camera or the like. The player's face photo input by the authentication information input device 1305 can be displayed on the display device 1300 or output to the center server 1130 via the communication interface. Also, authentication information (face photo) corresponding to a player who exchanges prizes, input by the authentication information input device 1205 of the terminal device 22 for exchanging gifts outside the store, is input from the center server 1130 via the communication interface and displayed. It can also be displayed on the device 1300.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the change button unit 1306 includes selection buttons 1306a to 1306e such as “Store information registration change”, “Premium information registration change”, “Market information”, “Advertise request”, “Determination”, and the like. Composed. The selection button items are not limited to these, and selection buttons for items other than these items may be provided.

  Here, the store information registration change button 1306a is a selection button that is pressed when registering or changing store information such as a store address or a telephone number. In the case of newly registering information, when this selection button is pressed, for example, a format screen for inputting the information is displayed on the display device 1300, and predetermined information can be input based on the format. Become. Further, when information is already registered, when this selection button is pressed, for example, the registered information is displayed on the display device 1300, and the description of a predetermined portion can be changed based on the information. It becomes possible. The prize information registration change button 1306b is a selection button that is pressed when, for example, registering a new prize that can be exchanged for a prize or when changing information on an already registered prize. When newly registering information, when this selection button is pressed, for example, a format screen for inputting the information is displayed on the display device 1300, and predetermined information can be input based on the format. It becomes. Further, when information is already registered, when this selection button is pressed, for example, the registered information is displayed on the display device 1300, and the description of a predetermined portion can be changed based on the information. It becomes possible. The market price information button 1306c is, for example, a selection button that is pressed when viewing average price information, price range information, exchange performance information for each price range, etc. of a premium. The advertisement request button 1306d is a selection button that is pressed when requesting an advertisement for a premium such as a new product. When this selection button is pressed, for example, a format screen for inputting the information is displayed, and it becomes possible to input predetermined information such as a prize for making an advertisement request based on the format. The decision button 1306e is a button for confirming the input information of each item described above.

  The business confirmation switch 1307 is a switch for setting whether or not a prize exchange process is being performed in a store outside the game hall provided with the out-of-store terminal device 1100, and includes, for example, a dip switch. In the business confirmation switch 1307, the switch is moved to “closed” when the store is closed, and to “open” when the store is opened. Information on the business confirmation switch 1307 is output to the center server 1130 via the communication interface. Based on this information, the center server 1130 determines whether or not this store is capable of processing related to prize exchange. Then, the center server 1130 changes the output of information relating to the prize exchange to the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22 according to the determination result, for example.

  In each of the above-described component devices, signal input / output between the component devices is controlled by a control device provided in the out-of-store terminal device 1100. The control device also controls input / output of signals to / from the center server 1130 and the transmission server 1140 via the information distribution network 1120. This control device is mainly composed of an arithmetic unit (CPU), a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), and other storage means such as a semiconductor memory that keeps information as necessary. Various arithmetic processes are executed using programs and data stored in the storage means such as the ROM and RAM.

  Here, in the program stored in the storage means such as ROM or RAM, in addition to the processing operation for processing information from the center server 1130 and the processing operation for prize exchange, information distribution by the above-described information distribution system is performed. A program in which processing operations are defined is included, and the control device executes each process according to the program.

  Further, the out-of-store terminal device 1100 includes a communication interface configured by a port, a modem, and the like for connecting to the information distribution network 1120. The out-of-store terminal device 1100 stores installed program files, various data files (for example, database files managing various types of data in a database structure), various information from the center server 1130, and the like. A storage device such as a hard disk is provided, and the information is kept as needed.

  Although not shown, the out-of-store terminal device 1100 is communicably connected to the distribution control device in the same manner as the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 described above, and is one of the information distribution destinations in the information distribution system described above. You may make it function as a terminal.

  Next, a specific configuration and operation of the out-of-store terminal device 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 66 is a functional block diagram showing the main configuration of the out-of-store terminal device 1100. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the operation of the out-of-store terminal device 1100.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the out-of-store terminal device 1100 includes a control unit 1310, an input / output information processing unit 1311, a card processing unit 1312, an issue processing unit 1313, a gift exchange information management unit 1314, and a banknote processing. A unit 1315 and an information registration change processing unit 1316.

  The control unit 1310 is a functional block realized by the above-described control device, storage device, and communication interface. The control unit of the control device mainly uses various programs and data stored in the ROM, RAM, and storage device. This relates to the part that executes the arithmetic processing. In this control unit 1310, each of an input / output information processing unit 1311, a card processing unit 1312, an issue processing unit 1313, a gift exchange information management unit 1314, a banknote processing unit 1315, and an information registration change processing unit 1316. Information input / output between machine parts and information input / output from the center server 1130 and the transmission server 1140 are controlled.

  The input / output information processing unit 1311 is a functional block realized by the above-described control device and communication interface, and performs input / output processing of information from the center server 1130 and the transmission server 1140. Examples of the input information include various information managed by the center server 1130 and the transmission server 1140, information related to prize exchange, and the like. Information relating to the game data of each game hall managed by the center server 1130 is also included as input information. The information related to the game data includes, for example, information such as the number of storages that is the number of game media acquired by the player.

  Examples of information relating to prize exchange from the center server 1130 include, for example, prize information processed by an out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22 in a game hall, valuable value information based on a player ID, and out-of-store prize exchange. The authentication information (face photo) corresponding to the player who exchanges prizes, information on the management status of the game hall from the center server 1130, etc., which are input by the authentication information input device 1205 of the terminal device 22 for use. The various types of information described above are merely examples, and the information is not limited to these. Information that is managed by the center server 1130 to be output can be input as necessary.

  Information processed by the out-of-store terminal device 1100 is output to the center server 1130 and the transmission server 1140 via the input / output information processing unit 1311.

  The card processing unit 1312 is a functional block realized by the information reading device, the authentication information input device 1305, the input unit 1304, and the display device 1300 described above. ID information of the player from the card inserted from the card insertion slot 1302 And the like, input of information related to the prize processing from the input unit 1304, display of various information on the display device 1300, and the like.

  The issue processing unit 1313 is a functional block realized by the information reading device, the authentication information input device 1305, the input unit 1304, and the display device 1300, and reads the barcode information displayed on the issue 1260, 1261. Input of information relating to the prize processing from the input unit 1304, display of various information on the display device 1300, and the like are executed.

  The gift exchange information management unit 1314 is a functional block realized by the storage device described above. Information from the center server 1130 and the transmission server 1140 input to the input / output information processing unit 1311 and the terminal device 1100 outside the store. Information related to the processed prize exchange is stored.

  The banknote processing unit 1315 is a functional block realized by the above-described banknote identification device, and executes a process of identifying a banknote inserted from the banknote insertion slot 1303.

  The information registration change processing unit 1316 (1316a to 1316e) is a functional block realized by the storage device, the input unit 1304, the authentication information input device 1305, the change button unit 1306, and the communication interface. For example, as described above Execute prize registration, prize information change, advertisement request, etc.

(Description of operation)
Next, the operation of the out-of-store terminal device 1100 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 67 shows a flowchart of a main routine in the out-of-store terminal device 1100 executed by the control unit 1310. The program is stored in the storage unit of the control unit 1310, and the processing from the start to the return is performed by the control unit 1310. Is a high-speed processing operation that is executed in a time of 0.01 ms or the like. In this main routine, first, terminal distribution information [i] [m], terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m], and terminal distribution condition [i] [ m] is received (step SD1).

  Here, the terminal distribution information [i] [m] means news, weather forecasts, advertisements, game hall service information, game halls and outside game halls distributed to the information distribution destination terminals in the information distribution system described above. Distribution information such as premium registration information and price reduction information at stores, information input via the external communication network 1150 (in the information distribution system, character information displayed as a telop is handled as an example of distribution information), and The number or number of distribution information is represented by [i], and the distribution destination terminal is represented by [m], which is a terminal number assigned in advance. That is, the out-of-store terminal device 1100 receives i pieces of distribution information from the terminal distribution information [1] [m] to the terminal distribution information [i] [m] from the distribution control device, and corresponds to each piece of the distribution information. Terminal delivery amount designation information [1] [m] to terminal delivery amount designation information [i] [m] and terminal delivery condition [1] [m] to terminal delivery condition [i] [m] are received. Terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] is the amount of terminal distribution information [i] [m] displayed on the terminal (frequency of display indicating display amount during a predetermined period, display amount itself, etc.) The terminal distribution condition [i] [m] is information indicating a condition for displaying the corresponding terminal distribution information [i] [m] on the terminal.

  After receiving these pieces of information, the out-of-store terminal device 1100 transmits the distribution record of each terminal distribution information [i] [m] and the distribution fee of each terminal distribution information [i] [m] to the distribution control device. (Step SD2). Here, the distribution result is information indicating a result of displaying each terminal distribution information [i] [m] on the display device 1300 in the out-of-store terminal device 1100 that is the m-th terminal. It is counted in the processing related to display, and the distribution fee is also counted according to the counted distribution result (totaled in the above-mentioned constant display subroutine and distribution condition display subroutine).

  The terminal distribution information [i] [m], the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m], the terminal distribution condition [i] [m], the terminal distribution information [ Since the specific contents of the distribution record of i] [m] and the distribution charge of each terminal distribution information [i] [m] have been described in the above description of the entire information distribution system, they are omitted here. In the entire gaming hall management system 1A and gaming hall management system 1B, as will be described below, other devices connected to the network 8 also transmit and receive terminal distribution information [i] [m], etc. The same applies to the information. In addition, “(* There is no input of attribute designation for an out-of-store terminal device)” in step SD2 is an attribute of distribution desired in an information distribution system described later (attribute of a player who desires information distribution of a specific genre, etc.) ) May be handled, and this indicates that the information is not handled by the out-of-store terminal device 1100 (a form of handling may be adopted, which will be described later). The information specifying the attribute here is used as the attribute specifying information [i] [m] in the following description. The specific contents of the attribute specifying information [i] [m] are already in the entire information distribution system. explained.

  As described above, in the out-of-store terminal device 1100 that transmits / receives the terminal distribution information [i] [m] or the like, a constant display subroutine is started (step SD3). The constant display subroutine is processing for causing the display device 1300 to display the received terminal distribution information [i] [m] based on the received terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m], and the program is a control unit. If there is an activation request, the control unit 1310 executes the timer interrupt every predetermined time without interrupting the execution of the main routine. The specific contents of the constant display subroutine have been described in the description of the entire information distribution system.

  Subsequently, in the next processing in the main routine, the control unit 1310 determines whether or not a card or issue 1260, 1261 has been inserted based on information from the card processing unit 1312 and the issue processing unit 1313 ( Step S1320).

  If it is determined in step S1320 that the card or issue 1260, 1261 is not inserted (No in step S1320), the process returns to and the process from the start is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1320 that the card or issue 1260, 1261 is inserted (Yes in step S1320), the distribution condition display subroutine is started in the out-of-store terminal device 1100 (step SD4). ). The distribution condition display subroutine refers to the display device 1300 based on the terminal distribution conditions [i] [m] and the terminal distribution amount designation information [i] [m] that generally received the received terminal distribution information [i] [m]. The program is stored in the storage means of the control unit 1310, and if there is an activation request, the control unit 1310 executes the timer interrupt every predetermined time without interrupting the execution of the main routine. Since the processing of the distribution condition display subroutine has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted. The same applies to the processing of the distribution condition display subroutine that is to be started up by other devices in the entire gaming hall management system 1A and gaming hall management system 1B.

  Subsequently, the card processing unit 1312 reads, for example, ID information for specifying a player stored in the card inserted from the card insertion slot 1302 and outputs the ID information to the control unit 1310. In addition, the issue processing unit 1313 reads information relating to gift exchange from, for example, barcode information displayed on the issue 1260 and 1261 inserted from the issue reception 1301, and outputs the information to the control unit 1310 (step S1321). . The information relating to the prize exchange from the bar code information includes, for example, information on the prize to be exchanged and information for identifying a face photo that is the authentication information of the player displayed on the publications 1260 and 1261. Yes.

  Subsequently, the control unit 1310 outputs information relating to prize exchange from the ID information and barcode information for specifying the player to the center server 1130 via the input / output information processing unit 1311 (step S1322). Also, information specified from the ID information and information relating to prize exchange is input from the center server 1130 via the input / output information processing unit 1311 (step S1322). As this input information, for example, the player's face photo information relating to the prize exchange input by the authentication information input device 1205 of the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22, the selected prize information, and the like can be cited. Further, when the member IC card 30 is used, information related to “designation of the member settlement method” set by the above-mentioned store gift exchange terminal device 22 is given as input information. It is done. As described above, the player's face photo information related to the prize exchange input from the center server 1130 is displayed on the display device 1300. This makes it possible to collate a person who has performed processing related to prize exchange with the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22 in the game hall and a person who has brought the issue 1260, 1261 to the shop outside the game hall.

  Here, in the exchange of prizes at a store outside the game hall, when the prize to be received at the store outside the game hall is changed and the difference is settled, and there is a shortage or refund, cash, points, electronic This prize is also provided when processing related to prize exchange, such as making up for shortfalls with valuable value such as money or credit, or converting the amount equivalent to the return amount into points, electronic money, etc. and adding it. Information related to the exchange is output to the center server 1130 via the input / output information processing unit 1311.

  Subsequently, the control unit 1310 determines whether or not the store information registration change button 1306a is pressed based on the information from the information registration change processing unit 1316 (step S1323).

  If it is determined in step S1323 that the store information registration change button 1306a has been pressed (Yes in step S1323), the display device 1300 displays a format screen for inputting information related to the store information registration change as described above. To display. If it is determined that the enter button 1306e is pressed after predetermined information is input based on the format, the newly registered information or updated information is sent to the center via the input / output information processing unit 1311. The data is output to the server 1130 (step S1324). Here, as information related to the store information registration change, for example, store name, store address, store phone number, store manager name, store manager, store e-mail address, company name, head office address, head office phone number, representative director Items such as name, headquarters manager, capital, number of employees, sales, headquarters e-mail address, etc. are included, but the present invention is not limited to these, and the items can be changed as appropriate.

  If it is determined in step S1323 that the store information registration change button 1306a has not been pressed (No in step S1323), or after the processing in step S1324, the control unit 1310 adds information to the information registration change processing unit 1316. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the premium information registration change button 1306b has been pressed and the enter button 1306e has been pressed (step S1325).

  If it is determined in step S1325 that the giveaway information registration change button 1306b has been pressed (Yes in step S1325), the authentication information input device 1305 inputs the giveaway information to be registered or changed, that is, the giveaway photo ( Step S1326). Then, the control unit 1310 displays the input information on the display device 1300, and based on the information from the information registration change processing unit 1316, a decision button 1306e that is information for agreeing to use the photographed photograph is displayed. It is determined whether or not the button has been pressed (step S1327).

  If it is determined in step S1327 that the enter button 1306e is not pressed (No in step S1327), the process in step S1326 is executed again.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1327 that the enter button 1306e has been pressed (Yes in step S1327), the input / output information processing unit 1311 receives newly registered information or updated information together with the photo information. To the center server 1130 (step S1328). Here, examples of information related to the change in the prize information registration include items such as product name, price, photo, product description, and barcode information input acceptance, but are not limited to these items. It can be changed. The center server 1130 is specified based on the output photographic information and the IDs of the publications 1260 and 1261 that are already input in the game hall out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 and managed by the center server 1130. It may be configured to compare the photograph information of the player, determine whether or not both match, and output the determination result to the out-of-store terminal device 1100.

  When it is determined in step S1325 that the premium information registration change button 1306b has not been pressed (No in step S1325), or after the processing in step S1328, the control unit 1310 adds information to the information registration change processing unit 1316. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the market price information button 1306c has been pressed (step S1329).

  If it is determined in step S1329 that the market price information button 1306c has been pressed (Yes in step S1329), the control unit 1310 displays the barcode request information or premium ID information input request information for the market price information to be obtained. Is displayed on the display device 1300. If it is determined that the determination button 1306e, which means completion of input of the barcode information (read by the issue reception 1301) of the premium or the premium ID information manually input by the input unit 1304, is pressed, the control unit 1310 outputs the barcode information or premium ID information of the premium input by the information registration change processing unit 1316 together with the output request information of the market price information to the center server 1130 via the input / output information processing unit 1311 (step S1330). . Then, market price information such as average price information, price range information, exchange performance information for each price range related to the barcode information or premium ID information output to the center server 1130 is input from the center server 1130 to the input / output information processing unit 1311. Is input via. Then, the control unit 1310 displays the input market price information on the display device 1300, for example, and stores and manages the premium exchange information management unit 1314 (step S1330).

  When it is determined in step S1329 that the market price information button 1306c is not pressed (No in step S1329), or after the processing in step S1330, the control unit 1310 is based on information from the information registration change processing unit 1316. Then, it is determined whether or not the advertisement request button 1306d has been pressed (step S1331).

  If it is determined in step S1331 that the advertisement request button 1306d has been pressed (Yes in step S1329), the control unit 1310 displays the barcode information or premium ID information of the premium to be advertised, the advertisement frequency, the distribution conditions, and the like. Input request information such as setting conditions is displayed on the display device 1300. The input request information includes, for example, an item for selecting whether or not to send a mail advertisement to the member player when the gift meets the favorite condition of the member player. . When this mail advertisement is selected, the mail advertisement is made to the member player when the prize information that matches the member player's favorite prize condition is obtained. If the control unit 1310 determines that the determination button 1306e indicating completion of input of the input request information is pressed, the control unit 1310 outputs the input request information to the center server 1130 via the input / output information processing unit 1311. (Step S1332). The center server 1130 stores and manages these input request information.

  If it is determined in step S1331 that the advertisement request button 1306d has not been pressed (No in step S1331), or after the process in step S1332, the process returns to the start.

  As described above, the out-of-store terminal device 1100 can perform the free gift exchange process based on the issues 1260 and 1261 issued by the out-of-store free gift exchange terminal device 22 in the game hall. In addition, in the out-of-store terminal device 1100, for example, when a prize to be received at a store outside the game hall is changed and the difference is settled, cash, points, electronic money, It is possible to perform processing relating to prize exchange such as compensation of shortage with a valuable value such as credit or conversion of an amount corresponding to a refund amount to points, electronic money and the like.

  Further, in the out-of-store terminal device 1100, it is possible to input face photo information of a person who has performed processing related to the prize exchange at the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22 in the game hall from the center server 1130. It is possible to collate with the person who brought the publications 1260 and 1261. As a result, it is possible to prevent a third party from exchanging premiums using the issue 1260, 1261. Further, the out-of-store terminal device 1100 can perform store information registration change, premium information registration change, market price information input, advertisement request, and the like.

(Center server 1130)
Next, the center server 1130 constituting the premium exchange system will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 1A, the center server 1130 includes an out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 installed in each game hall, an out-of-store terminal device 1100 installed in a store outside each game hall, and a personal user used by general users. A general user terminal device 1160 such as a computer is connected to be communicable via an information distribution network 1120 or an external communication network 1150. The center server 1130 manages, for example, information such as game data in each game hall and various information related to prize exchange processing. Further, the center server 1130 is managed by, for example, a third trader different from the manager who manages each game hall or a store outside each game hall.

  In addition, as will be described later, the intermediary that is the third trader can use the center server 1130 to perform payment for the prize exchange between the game hall and the store outside the game hall on behalf of the center server 1130. . In other words, because there is an intermediary between the game hall and the store outside the game hall, from the game hall to the intermediary, from the intermediary to the store outside the game hall, or from the store outside the game hall to the intermediary, Payment processing is performed from the intermediary to the game hall. In addition, the center server 1130 can manage to be able to output premium information and store information registered from stores outside the respective game halls, and can set and manage various fees related to prize exchange.

  Further, it is possible to manage information from the financial management device 50 of each gaming hall described above, and it is possible to output information such as the management status of each gaming hall. In addition, it may be configured to have a function as a financial processing device and execute financial processing instead of the financial management device 50 provided in each game hall.

  The center server 1130 is configured by a computer or the like in which a program that defines processing for explaining operations to be described later is installed, and includes a predetermined input device, information processing device, storage device, display device, communication interface, and the like.

  Here, the input device includes input means such as a pointing device such as a keyboard and a mouse, and accepts character input, selection input, and the like by an administrator or the like and supplies them to the information processing device.

  The information processing apparatus is composed of arithmetic means such as a CPU for executing various internal arithmetic processes, a non-volatile memory such as a ROM storing system information and the like, and a semiconductor memory such as a RAM storing updatable information. Storage means, and various internal operations and control means for controlling information exchange with the outside, and executes various information processing according to input from the input device, contents of installed programs, etc. It serves as a core for executing management processing related to prize exchange processing and financial processing in the operations described later.

  The storage device includes storage means such as a hard disk in which information such as installed program files and various data files (for example, database files that manage various types of data in a database structure) are stored. Keep information on as needed.

  The display device is composed of display means such as a liquid crystal display, a CRT display, and a printer, and displays predetermined information under the control of the information processing device.

  The communication interface includes a port, a modem, and the like for connecting to the information distribution network 1120, the external communication network 1150, and other devices, and includes an out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22, an out-of-store terminal device 1100, and a general user terminal device 1160. In charge of information communication with

  Next, the configuration of the center server 1130 will be specifically described.

  FIG. 68 is a functional block diagram showing the main configuration of the center server 1130. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the operation of the center server 1130.

  As shown in FIG. 68, the center server 1130 includes a control unit 1400, an input / output information processing unit 1401, and an information management unit 1402.

  The control unit 1400 is a functional block realized by the information processing device, the storage device, and the communication interface described above. The calculation unit of the information processing device mainly uses programs, data, and the like stored in the ROM, RAM, and the storage device. This relates to a part for executing various arithmetic processes. In this control unit 1400, input / output of information between the respective units of the input / output information processing unit 1401 and the information management unit 1402, an out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22, an out-of-store terminal device 1100, and a general user terminal device 1160 Controls the input and output of information.

  The input / output information processing unit 1401 is a functional block realized by the information processing device, the input device, and the communication interface described above. The input / output information processing unit 1401 receives from the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22, the out-of-store terminal device 1100, and the general user terminal device 1160. Performs information input / output processing. Also, an input / output process of various information input by the input device is performed. Input information and output information from each device will be described in detail later.

  The information management unit 1402 is a functional block realized by the storage device described above, and stores various information input to the input / output information processing unit 1401 and various information input by the input device.

(Description of operation)
Next, the operation of the center server 1130 will be described with reference to FIG.

  Various information output from each terminal device such as the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22, the out-of-store terminal device 1100, and the general user terminal device 1160 is input via the input / output information processing unit 1401, and from each terminal device The information corresponding to the request is output to each terminal device via the input / output information processing unit 1401 (step S1410).

  Communication items from each terminal device to the center server 1130 include communication at the time of valuable value registration (including prizes in the valuable value), communication at the time of advertisement request, and exchange / buy and sell communication.

  In the communication at the time of valuable value registration, valuable value management entity ID (electronic money management entity, stores that provide prizes outside the game hall (the prizes and points are valuable value), credit card operators, debit card operators, and delivery gift shops (The prize is a valuable value) etc.), the price, the grant points, the management entity ID that makes the valuable value available, and image data such as a photograph of the prize as necessary. Here, the operating entity refers to a company or an individual store that handles itself, for example, the credit card operating entity refers to a credit card company that issues a credit card (the same applies below).

  In the advertisement request communication, a valuable value management entity ID, a price, a grant point, an advertisement management entity ID to be advertised in order to use the valuable value, and image data such as a product photo are transmitted as necessary.

  In exchange / trading communication, valuable value (including goods and prizes in the valuable value) supply source management entity ID, member ID of the member who performs the exchange or purchase, valuable value management entity ID after exchange, price, exchange valuable value, grant Send points and more.

(1) An example of information output to the center server 1130 from the game hall management device 13 or the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22.
From the management device 13 or the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 to the center server 1130, for example, a game hall ID, transaction value ID (ID type set and registered in the center server 1130), IN information (shown in FIG. 50) In addition, in-input information referred to in steps S1014 and S1015), OUT information (out-input information referred to in steps S1014 and S1016 shown in FIG. 50), and a photograph of the face of the player who exchanged prizes at a store outside the game hall Issued 1260, 1261 ID, giveaway giveaway ID to be delivered, member ID, home delivery giveaway ID, information on whether the delivery fee is paid on delivery or value deduction, information on the presence / absence of shipping fee for delivery to home, delivery agent selection information Are output as exchange settlement information. In addition to the member ID, it is the setting information indicating whether to use only the priority order, the specified consumption ratio, and the points, which are the settlement methods set in the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22, in order of increasing or decreasing usage frequency. Information relating to what is currently desired or what is always desired, such as consumption designation information and member player registration information, is output.

  Here, as the above-described IN information (in-input information referred to in step S1014 and step S1015 shown in FIG. 50), the number of shots from the gaming machine, the number of outs that are the number of inserted medals, and the game discharged from the gaming machine The number of safes that are the number of media, the number of balls lent, the amount of money to be deposited, etc.

  Further, as OUT information (out input information shown in step S1014 and step S1016 shown in FIG. 50), the number of counting balls, the number of medal medals, the number of savings (the number of stored medals and the number of stored balls), the number of payouts for each prize, each prize Unit purchase price, accounting sales, required margin, accounting purchase amount, type and amount of exchanged products at stores outside the amusement hall, its quantity, amount, withdrawals, issuance points, gift exchange fee (center server) And the value exchange fee (set and registered by the center server 1130), the withdrawal valuable value used for prize exchange, and the like.

  Here, the above-mentioned sales are calculated based on the calculation element based on the sales and / or game data corresponding to the amount of money used by the game player, for example, by the financial management device 50 or the like. Specifically, as the sales amount, for example, the payment amount paid by the player, the payment amount paid by the player minus the return amount refunded by the payment machine, the payment amount paid by the player, The amount calculated by subtracting the total amount of the refund amount refunded by the number of stored game media multiplied by the unit price per game media, and the number of game media input to the gaming machine Examples include an amount obtained by multiplying the unit price per medium, and an amount obtained by multiplying the number of game media lent to the player by the unit price per game medium.

  Further, the above-mentioned purchase amount is, for example, the purchase amount corresponding to the purchase amount of the prize paid to the player in exchange for the acquired game medium obtained by the player by the financial management device 50 and / or the purchase amount. It is calculated based on the calculation element for calculating the height. Specifically, as the purchase amount, for example, the amount obtained by multiplying the number of prizes paid out by the purchase unit price of the prize, the amount obtained by multiplying the number of purchases of the prize by the purchase unit price of the prize, and the game medium discharged to the gaming machine The value obtained by subtracting the number of game media input to the gaming machine from the number and the unit price per game medium, and the number of game media counted by the counter to the unit price per game medium For example, the amount multiplied by.

  In addition, as the withdrawal valuable value used for prize exchange, cash, points used for prize exchange at each game hall, each store outside the game hall, and home delivery store, electronic money (the ID of the electronic money card is sent to the issuer) The specified amount is deducted from the issuer), savings, debit (debit card ID is sent to the debit card handling source, and if the debit card is used, the specified amount is deducted from the player's account), credit (If the credit card ID is transmitted to the credit company and the credit card is approved, the designated amount is borrowed from the credit card company).

(2) An example of information output from the center server 1130 to the game hall management device 13 or the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 or the like From the center server 1130 to the management device 13 or the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22, for example, Information reception acknowledgment information, credit availability information, electronic money withdrawal processing availability information, electronic money balance information, withdrawal amount information, electronic money information after withdrawal, and the like are output.

(3) Example of information output from outside terminal device 1100 of store outside game hall to center server 1130 From outside terminal device 1100 to center server 1130, for example, store ID outside game hall, issue 1260, 1261 Information such as the ID of the customer, the delivered gift ID, the member ID, and the face photograph of the visitor. Also, giveaway completion report information (stored in the center server 1130 after output), giveaway non-delivery report information, giveaway exchange products and sales information on electronic mall sales items (images, price, number of points granted, manufacturer name, manufacturer's name, etc.) A URL (UniForm Resource Locator) in which a product description is written is output. Here, when outputting the giveaway non-delivery report information, information indicating that delivery processing using the issue 1260, 1261 cannot be performed in the out-of-store terminal device 1100 from the center server 1130 to the out-of-store terminal device 1100 is output. Is done. The out-of-store terminal device 1100 displays this information on the display device 1300 to convey the information to the player. It should be noted that in the game hall, an employee manually inputs from the terminal device of the management device 13 (for example, the personal computer 17) at least one of accumulated ID number and withdrawal history and IDs of issues 1260 and 1261. 1260 and 1261 are reissued.

(4) Example of information output from center server 1130 to out-of-store terminal device 1100 in a store outside the game hall For example, member ID, output from out-of-store terminal device 1100 from center server 1130 to out-of-store terminal device 1100 Whether the photograph information matches the photograph information of the player already specified based on the IDs of the publications 1260 and 1261 that have been input at the game hall out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22 and managed by the center server 1130 Information on whether or not, if a prize is delivered based on a certain issue 1260, 1261, the face photo information of the customer at the time of delivery of the same prize as the delivered report, NG information of each ID, issue 1260, 1261 The photograph information of the player inputted at the terminal device 22 for exchanging gifts outside the store based on the ID of the player is output.

(5) Example of information output from the center server 1130 to the out-of-store terminal device 1100 of the store (delivery store) outside the game hall. ID, home delivery prize amount (yen), home delivery fee payment or valuable value deduction payment information, home delivery prize shipping information, delivery agent selection information, etc. are output.

(6) Example of information output from the out-of-store terminal device 1100 of the store outside the game hall (home delivery store) to the center server 1130 From the out-of-store terminal device 1100 of the home delivery store to the center server 1130, for example, reception acknowledgment information Is output.

(7) Example of information output from center server 1130 to general user terminal device 1160 For example, merchandise information, game data information, and the like of an online shopping mall are output from the center server 1130 to the general user terminal device 1160. Here, as the output game data information, for example, prizes exchanged for prizes, the number of big hits for each gaming machine played for a predetermined period for each player, a value obtained by subtracting the number of game media input from the number of game media acquired, etc. Can be mentioned.

(8) Example of information output from the general user terminal device 1160 to the center server 1130 Select from the general user terminal device 1160 to the center server 1130, for example, in order to exchange with the valuable value possessed by the individual in the valuable value exchange transaction. Exchange information (cash exchange transactions at stores outside the game hall and cash on delivery transactions for parcel delivery can be specified), information on the type and quantity of valuable value related to the exchange, and selected valuable value (including products) ), Selected game hall to display personal ID information and game data (multiple holes can be selected, all holes can be selected) ID, game machine model to display game data (multiple gaming machines, all models can be selected) ) ID, period information for displaying game data, and the like are output.

(9) Example of information output from center server 1130 to general user terminal device 1160 Notification information that the selected valuable value has been exchanged in the value exchange transaction from center server 1130 to general user terminal device 1160 In the game data display, the designated game hall, the machine type of the game machine, the game data of the period, and the like are output. In the game data display, the game data total value for each game hole and the game data total value of all the selected game holes are output so as to be displayed. Here, the game data refers to the number of big hits, the number of start times per minute of the selected game machine or the number of winnings in the navel per start, the number of small wins obtained in the slot machine, the number of big wins and balls Number, winning and losing (expenditure amount and value conversion value of the number of game media acquired based on A and B settings by one A yen player and one B yen player).

  Note that the output information described above is an example, and is not limited thereto, and the information output can be changed as appropriate.

  Next, based on the input information described above, the control unit 1400, for example, an out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22, an out-of-store terminal device 1100, a general user terminal device 1160, a game hall, an electronic money operating entity, and a credit card operation The processing requested by the entity, cash card operating entity, debit card operating entity, etc. is "Registration and fee processing associated with registration", "Value processing (exchange) and fee processing associated with premium conversion" and "Advertising and It is determined which is “fee processing associated with advertisement” (step S1411). Below, “Registration and fee processing associated with registration” is requested, “Value processing (exchange) and fee processing associated with premium conversion” is requested, and “Admission and fee processing associated with advertisement” Each case will be described.

(When "Registration and fee processing associated with registration" is requested)
If it is determined in step S1411 that “registration and fee processing associated with registration” is requested (“A” in step S1411), the following fee processing associated with registration and registration is executed (step S1412).

(1) Setting of Valuable Value Fee Tables 1 to 4 show an example of an input screen in which a valuable value fee is set.

  As shown in Tables 1 to 4, the value service fee is set based on an individual contract signed by an intermediary that is the operating entity of the center server 1130 with the operating entity of each valuable value. Each fee is input by the input means 1130. As the input valuable value fee, for example, a point for each gaming hall, a point for each store outside the gaming hall, a courier point and other valuable values are exchanged for a different valuable value, a withdrawal fee, Enter for each card operator.

  In the case of exchange between valuable values, a fee can be set according to at least one of the type of valuable value before conversion, the type of valuable value after conversion, and the type of valuable value before and after conversion. Also, in the case of exchange between valuable values, you can set the fee rate (fee rate) borne by the exchange source, the fee rate borne by the exchange destination, and the fee rate borne by the player, including “0”, It is also possible to specify the value to pay the fee (see Table 2 and Table 3). The fee can be set such as 0.1% of the total amount of transactions (premium exchange, valuable value exchange) when converted into yen. Payees and payment sources are intermediaries, players, gaming halls, stores outside gaming halls, courier stores, card operators, and transaction types (delivery gifts, prizes at stores outside gaming halls, gaming halls) At least one commission rate can be set for the prize. There are two types of commissions received for each value: conversion source and conversion destination. The fee charged to the player, the fee charged to the game hall, and each valuable value. You can set a fee that is charged to the management entity. For example, if there are 10 types of players, game halls, and valuable value management entities, two types of fees can be set for each, so that a total of 20 types (10 × 2 types) of fees can be set. In addition, in the value exchange shown in Tables 2 and 3, the fee when converting a certain point to another point is, here, an intermediary that is the owner of the center server 1130 that executes the conversion process. It is set to be credited to the merchant.

  Table 1 shows an example of an input screen in which a valuable fee is set when the prize is “Kani”. In this case, 0%, 1%, 2% of the price will be paid to the business of the center server 1130, which is an intermediary company, the game hall, the player, and the supply shop for the prize exchange fee. 1% payment is set. In addition, 50%, 50%, 0%, and 0% of the commission are obtained as the payee for each of the business of the center server 1130, which is an intermediary trader, the game hall, the player, and the supply store for the crab. ing. In addition, a fee rate when using a debit card or a credit card, a share rate for paying a fee, a payment rate for a fee payee, and the like are set in the settlement relating to the gift exchange.

(2) Registration of prize The control unit 1400 receives information relating to a prize from a store (including a delivery shop) outside the game hall (a photograph of the prize, a price, a grant point, a description of the prize, a transaction form of the prize ( Delivery gifts, gifts delivered at stores outside the game hall, gifts delivered inside the game hall, etc.) based on ID information from the terminal device 22 for exchange gifts outside the store, the terminal device 1100 outside the store, and the general user terminal device 1160 The information is registered in the information management unit 1402 which is a database of the center server 1130 so as to be searchable.At that time, an ID is given to a prize (product) which is a gift exchange target and a sale target, and from the prize ID or partner game hall ID The information relating to the above-mentioned prize is registered so as to be searchable.

  In addition, the center server 1130 accumulates the registration fee set for each store outside the game hall (including home delivery stores) for each store for the month and year, and the cumulative value of the monthly and yearly registration fees for the past several years. Remember. Moreover, the history for every registration is memorize | stored and memorize | stored so that these information can be output according to the instruction | indication from a registration store. Further, when there is a request to output these information from a store outside the game hall (including a home delivery store), the outside registration device 1100 is referred to by referring to the set registration fee from the ID of each store operating entity. Output to.

(When "value conversion (exchange) and fee processing associated with prize conversion" is requested)
Next, if it is determined in step S1411 that “value conversion (exchange) and fee processing associated with premium conversion” is requested (“B” in step S1411), the following conversion of the value ( Exchange) and fee processing accompanying premium conversion are executed (step S1413).

  Here, conversion (exchange) between valuable values, exchange processing related to a fee associated with premium conversion, and trading processing for buying and selling premiums as commodities in the center server 1130 will be described.

  The person who performs the exchange process and the transaction process includes a game hall, a store outside the game hall (including a home delivery store), a member player, an electronic money operating entity, a credit card operating entity, and a debit card operating entity.

  At the time of the exchange process and the sale process, the center server 1130 outputs a conversion rate of a valuable value that can be used for the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 of each game hall. The outside gift exchange terminal device 22 stores the conversion rate of the valuable value, and based on the conversion rate, all the valuable value owned by the player is converted into a circle unit, and the outside gift exchange terminal device 22 is stored. Displayed on the display device 1200. Also, for each exchangeable prize that can be exchanged and traded at the same time, the number of exchangeable savings (number of medals, number of balls) required for exchange, and required for exchange The purchase price, the number of points required for exchange, etc. are displayed together.

  In the exchange process and the sale process, as described above, in the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22, even if the number of game media acquired by the player is withdrawn at the time of prize exchange, a payment balance (shortage) occurs. If the order of the value to be withdrawn is set, the balance of payment may be calculated in that order and displayed with the corresponding value. For example, if the value to be withdrawn first is a point and the value to be withdrawn is electronic money, the electronic money is displayed with the balance of payment (shortage) after the settlement process at the point as electronic money. The converted value is shown. Further, as described above, when the designated consumption ratio of each valuable value is set in the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22, the settlement processing may be performed according to the consumption ratio. The selection of these processes can be made appropriately by the player at the terminal device 22 for exchanging gifts outside the store and the store outside the game hall at the terminal device 1100 outside the store. In addition, examples of valuable value that can be used include cash, electronic money, credits, debits, points outside other game halls (including home delivery stores) and points in other game halls, the number of balls, and the number of medals. Can be mentioned. In addition, as described above, a plurality of valuable values can be used in a mixed manner, such as when the order of valuable values to be withdrawn is set or when a designated consumption ratio of valuable values is set. .

  In the center server 1130, in the process of step S 1410, information related to the results of gift exchange in the above-mentioned store outside gift exchange terminal device 22 or the outside terminal device 1100 is input. Here, based on the conversion rate of the available valuable value output from the center server 1130, the exchange processing and the buying and selling process performed by the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 of each game hall are executed, and the center server 1130 Although an example of inputting information relating to the prize exchange results has been shown, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the center server 1130 executes exchange processing such as conversion of valuable value in the above-mentioned store gift exchange terminal device 22 and transaction processing, and information after the processing is used as the store gift exchange terminal device 22 in the game hall, You may make it output to the shop terminal device 1100 of a store outside a game hall.

  Further, the center server 1130 stores the history of prizes (products) that are repeatedly exchanged or purchased by the player for each ID of the player, and tabulates the genre of each prize (product).

  Next, in the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22, “specify payment method for member” is selected, and further, “consumption method designation by consumption in order of priority”, “designation of payment method according to designated consumption ratio” or The operation of the center server 1130 during the payment process when other payment processes are set will be described.

(1) When “consumption method designation by consumption in order of priority” is set When the terminal device accessing the center server 1130 is the terminal device 22 for exchanging store gifts installed in the game hall, First, the server 1130 executes a withdrawal process for exchanging premiums from the number of game media acquired based on the member ID read and transmitted. At this time, the withdrawal process is executed from the selected one of the number of stored balls of 4 yen per ball and the number of stored 20 medals per card, and even if the selected number of game media becomes “0”, the prize price is increased. When it has not reached, that is, when there is a payment balance, the payment balance is deducted from the other game medium.

  Furthermore, when the other game medium becomes “0” and the premium price has not been reached, the “priority order” set in the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22 and stored in the center server 1130 based on the member ID. The setting conditions of “Consume and set payment method in order” are read from the information management unit 1402, and the subsequent payment processing is executed based on the setting. In the subsequent processing, if the set first-priority valuable value is not “0”, the payment balance is deducted from the valuable value. Further, when the value of the first priority is “0” and the premium price has not been reached, the balance of payment is deducted from the value of the second priority. The same processing is executed thereafter until the balance of payment becomes “0”. In the case of settlement with cash, a banknote is inserted into the banknote insertion slot 1203 of the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22. Further, when making a payment with a credit card, an electronic money card, a debit card, etc., the ID is read from each card inserted in the card insertion port 1202, 1302 of the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 or the out-of-store terminal device 1100. Inquiries are made to each card operating entity via the center server 1130 as to whether payment is possible. If payment is possible, payment is made with each card.

(2) When “Payment method designation according to designated consumption ratio” is set “Payment method designation according to designated consumption ratio” is a case where a settlement based on a predetermined function formula is executed and the center server When the terminal device that has accessed 1130 is the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 installed in the game hall, the center server 1130 is the number of game media acquired based on the member ID read and transmitted first. A withdrawal process related to the prize exchange is executed from the stored number. At this time, the withdrawal process is executed from the selected one of the number of stored balls of 4 yen per ball and the number of stored 20 medals per card, and even if the selected number of game media becomes “0”, the prize price is increased. When it has not reached, that is, when there is a payment balance, the payment balance is deducted from the other game medium.

  Furthermore, when the other game medium becomes “0” and the premium price has not been reached, the “specified consumption” set by the out-of-store premium exchange terminal device 22 and stored in the center server 1130 based on the member ID is stored. The setting condition of “specify payment method according to the ratio” is read from the information management unit 1402 and subsequent payment processing is executed based on the setting. For example, the share of points, additional cash, electronic money 1, ball rental frequency, electronic money 2, and credits are set to 50%, 5%, 29%, 0%, 15%, and 1%, respectively. In this case, the balance of payment is deducted from each valuable value at that rate.

  Next, conversion between valuable values will be described.

  When conversion between valuable values is performed in the center server 1130, the storage medium (IC card for membership in each game hall) read by the terminal device 22 for out-of-store gift exchange or the terminal device 1100 outside the store and output to the center server 1130 30 (for savings), each credit card, each debit card, each cash card, each point card, each electronic money card, etc.) all the valuable value possessed by the players handled by this system Are read from the database or the server of the external value management entity and specified. For example, the points of the game hall are read from the game hall management device 13 or the center server 1130. The center server 1130 can also read another ID stored in the information management unit 1402 of the center server 1130 managed by the ID based on the ID of the storage medium used by the player. Depending on each ID, all of the valuable value of the conversion source can be read from the information management unit 1402 of the center server 1130 and can be specified by inquiring other valuable value management entities as necessary.

  Based on the information set by the “designation of payment method according to the designated consumption ratio” simultaneously input by the center server 1130, the valuable value that is the specified conversion source is the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 or the out-of-store terminal device. The value is converted into the valuable value of the designated conversion destination from each terminal device 1100. Then, if necessary, information related to increase / decrease in the value of the conversion source and the value of the conversion destination is output to a value management entity other than the value managed by the center server 1130, and each value management entity manages it. Update the database of the management device to be used.

  Here, the instruction information related to the conversion received by the center server 1130 from each terminal device is input together with the ID information of one or more valuable values that are the conversion source, and this instruction information includes the valuable information of the conversion source. Conversion information for specifying which ratio of the value is consumed and at which ratio the valuable value of the conversion destination is increased is included. In addition to the valuable value ID, the instruction information may include flag information indicating the type of valuable value of the conversion source, flag information indicating the valuable value of the conversion destination, and the like.

  The conversion information described above is, for example, valuable value information of conversion sources such as A, B, C, D, E, F, and the consumption ratios of the valuable values of these conversion sources: 50%, 10%, 10% Consumption ratio information such as 10%, 10%, 10%, etc., and total valuable value information (for example, 12,000 yen) of the conversion source. Furthermore, this conversion information includes valuable value information of conversion destinations such as G, H, and I, and increase rate information such as 30%, 30%, and 40%, which are respective increase rates of the valuable values of these conversion destinations. ing. As another example, instead of the consumption rate information such as 50%, 10%, 10%, 10%, 10%, 10%, etc., the amount information of each consumption may be used. In this case, the value of the conversion source Total value information is unnecessary, and the total valuable value of the conversion source is calculated from the sum of the respective amount information.

(3) When other settlement processing is set As other settlement processing in the center server 1130, for example, processing that consumes valuable value in order of near expiration date, processing that consumes based on the usage frequency of valuable value, etc. Can be mentioned.

  In the case of processing that consumes valuable values in the order close to the expiration date, for example, points are consumed in the order in which the expiration dates of points issued by stores outside the game halls, card operating entities, game halls, etc. are approaching. In this case, the center server 1130 first executes a withdrawal process related to prize exchange from the number of saved game media. At this time, the withdrawal process is executed from the selected one of the number of stored balls of 4 yen per ball and the number of stored 20 medals per card, and even if the selected number of game media becomes “0”, the prize price is increased. When it has not reached, that is, when there is a payment balance, the payment balance is deducted from the other game medium. Furthermore, when the other game medium becomes “0”, when the premium price has not reached, as described above, the points are consumed in the order in which the expiration date of the points approaches, and the remaining balance is deducted.

  Further, as a process of consuming based on the usage frequency of the valuable value, there are a process of consuming the valuable value in descending order of usage frequency, and a process of consuming the valuable value in ascending order of usage frequency.

  In the case of processing that consumes valuable values in descending order of usage frequency, the center server 1130 first executes a withdrawal process related to prize exchange from the number of saved game media. At this time, the withdrawal process is executed from the selected one of the number of stored balls of 4 yen per ball and the number of stored 20 medals per card, and even if the selected number of game media becomes “0”, the prize price is increased. When it has not reached, that is, when there is a payment balance, the payment balance is deducted from the other game medium. Further, when the other game medium becomes “0”, when the prize price has not reached, as described above, the valuable value is consumed in descending order of frequency of use, and the remaining balance is deducted. .

  In the case where the predetermined settlement processing (1) to (3) is set, first, the stored number that is the number of acquired game media is set to “0”, and then the settlement processing at another valuable value is performed. Although it is possible, it is not limited to this processing. For example, regardless of whether or not there is a stored number, for example, when an instruction button for performing processing that does not consume the stored number is provided in the out-of-store terminal device 1100 in the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 and is pressed. First, the predetermined settlement process set from the beginning may be executed without executing the process of setting the number of saved game media to “0”.

(4) Cancellation processing When the terminal device that has accessed the center server 1130 is the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 installed in the game hall or the out-of-store terminal device 1100 installed in the store outside the game hall, Even after the prize selected for exchange or purchase has been settled, the center server 1130 exchanges or purchases this prize when information relating to the pressing of a cancel button (not shown) is input. The process which cancels the process which concerns on can be performed.

  For example, when the ID of the member IC card 30 and / or the IDs of the publications 1260 and 1261 shown in FIG. 62 or 63 are read by an information reader such as a barcode reader in the out-of-store terminal device 1100, the ID is specified. Transaction information is displayed on the display device 1300. In this state, when a cancel button (not shown) is pressed, the out-of-store terminal device 1100 centers information indicating that the cancel processing is performed together with the ID of the member IC card 30 and / or the IDs of the publications 1260 and 1261. Output to the server 1130. The center server 1130 executes a cancellation process based on the information.

  Here, Tables 5 to 10 show a list in which part of information managed by the center server 1130 is displayed in time series.

  As shown in Tables 5 to 10, after executing the cancellation process, the valuable value and the fee used for exchange or purchase are returned to the state before the transaction. Further, when the cancellation process is completed, the center server 1130 performs a cancellation operation on the information to that effect, and outputs the information to a terminal device such as the out-of-store terminal device 1100, for example. When the terminal device inputs this information, the transaction is canceled and displayed on the display device. When executing the cancellation process, a fee associated with the cancellation process may be set by the initial setting in the center server 1130, and the fee related to the cancellation process may be collected without returning the fee to the state before the transaction.

  In addition, once the cancellation process is executed, when it is detected that the “Premium exchange, product purchase” displayed on the display device 1200 of the out-of-store premium exchange terminal device 22 is pressed, the premium exchange is performed again. Alternatively, processing related to product purchase is executed. In addition, in the out-of-store terminal device 1100, the issues 1260 and 1261 are inserted into the issue reception 1301, and the issue processing unit 1313 reads the ID and the like, so that processing related to gift exchange or product purchase is executed again. Is done.

(5) Difference settlement processing The difference settlement processing is, for example, when a player exchanges with other prizes at a store outside the game hall instead of the prize selected by the terminal device 22 for out-of-store prize exchange at the game hall. The center server 1130 settles the difference generated in

  In this case, instead of executing the cancellation process described in (4) and then executing the process related to the replacement again, the difference settlement process can be directly executed by the initial setting in the center server 1130. .

  In the difference settlement process, first, the out-of-store terminal device 1100 reads the premium ID of another premium, subsequently reads the ID of the issue 1260, 1261 and / or the member IC card 30, and stores the information as a center server. 1130. Based on the information, the center server 1130 reads information related to the prizes of the previous transaction and the current transaction from the information management unit 1402 and outputs the information to the out-of-store terminal device 1100. And it can change by pushing the decision button 1306e in the terminal device 1100 outside a shop, for example.

  At this time, if the value of the other prize is higher than the value of the prize that was initially selected, a shortage difference occurs. This difference can be settled with cash inserted from the bill insertion slot 1303, for example. Further, when the settlement is made with a credit card, electronic money card, debit card or the like inserted into the card insertion slot 1302, the out-of-store terminal device 1100 outputs the ID read from the card to the center server 1130, and the center server 1130 outputs inquiry information as to whether or not payment can be made to the card operating entity based on the ID. When the center server 1130 inputs information indicating that payment is possible from the card operating entity, the center server 1130 executes payment processing using each card.

  If a predetermined payment method is set in “Specify payment method according to specified consumption ratio” described above, the same process as described in “Specify payment method according to specified consumption ratio”. It is also possible to execute the settlement process based on the set condition.

  On the other hand, if the value of the other prize is lower than the value of the prize initially selected, a surplus difference is generated. In this case, for example, the center server 1130 outputs information for displaying a valuable value capable of converting the difference amount to the out-of-store terminal device 1100, and the out-of-store terminal device 1100 sends the information to the display device 1300. indicate. The out-of-store terminal device 1100 outputs, for example, valuable value information selected by the player using the input key of the input unit 1304 to the center server 1130, and the center server 1130 uses the information management unit 1402 based on the conversion information. Information is changed based on the ID. If a predetermined payment method is set in “Specify payment method according to specified consumption ratio” described above, the same process as described in “Specify payment method according to specified consumption ratio”. It is also possible to change the difference to a predetermined value based on the set condition.

  In addition, by the initial setting in the center server 1130, it is possible to set the number of balls or medals for use as a valuable value that can be used for the difference settlement processing. In addition, since the information management unit 1402 of the center server 1130 stores conversion rates for converting all valuable values into yen or foreign currency, it is also possible to convert valuable values into those currencies. It is also possible to convert to a unified currency. Further, the center server 1130 can output the converted information to, for example, the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 or the out-of-store terminal device 1100. For example, when the conversion rate of points given at a store outside the game hall to a yen is 0.1 yen per point, for example, when 101 points are provided, it is displayed as 10.1 yen Information is output from the center server 1130.

(6) Map Display Processing on Issued Items 1260 and 1261 When the center server 1130 determines that the prize selected by the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22 is 10,000 yen or less, the center server 1130 sends information to the information management unit 1402 Based on the stored information, as shown in FIG. 62, information for issuing an issue 1260, which is a voucher for exchanging premiums at a store outside the game hall, is used as an out-of-store premium exchange terminal device 22. Output to. When a home delivery prize is selected, the center server 1130 outputs information for issuing an issue 1262 as a prize exchange certificate to the outside gift exchange terminal device 22 as shown in FIG. . The out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 issues an issue 1260 based on the information. The issue 1260 displays a map of a store where the selected prize can be exchanged. Further, since prize exchange using the issue 1260 is possible at a plurality of stores, the issue name 1260 lists their store names and addresses, and the map can identify the location of each store. You may point with a mark. It should be noted that the above-described processing includes issuing processing including map display processing of the above-mentioned issue 1260 when the player exchanges for a prize of 10,000 yen or less regardless of whether the player is a member or a non-member. Can be executed.

  If the center server 1130 determines that the prize selected by the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22 exceeds 10,000 yen, the center server 1130 uses the information stored in the information management unit 1402 as shown in FIG. As shown, information for issuing an issue 1261 which is a voucher on which information related to a prize selected by the outside gift exchange terminal device 22 is displayed is output to the outside gift exchange terminal device 22. The out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 issues an issue 1261 based on the information. Note that the shortage generated during the exchange of prizes can be settled with a valuable value such as cash, points, electronic money, credits or the like in the out-of-store terminal device 1100. Also in this case, as in the case of the issue 1260, the issue 1261 displays a map of a store where the selected prize can be exchanged. In addition, when a prize exchange using the issue 1261 is possible at a plurality of stores, the issue name 1261 lists the store names and addresses, and the map identifies the location of each store. You may point at a possible mark.

  Further, the center server 1130 performs the prize exchange as described above based on the barcode information displayed on the issue 1260 and 1261 and the ID of the member IC card 30 input from the outside gift exchange terminal device 22. Information relating to a map of a possible store may be output to the terminal device 22 for outside gift exchange or the terminal device 1100 outside the store. Then, a map may be displayed on the display device of the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 or the out-of-store terminal device 1100.

  As described above, in the prize exchange process in the terminal device 22 for exchanging prizes outside the store in the game hall, the upper limit of the number of game media (save number) that a player can exchange for prizes is 10,000 yen (2,500 balls for savings). , And 500 stored medals).

  As shown in FIG. 62 and FIG. 63, the issue 1260, 1261 includes the map information of stores where prizes can be exchanged and the face of a player who has performed a prize exchange process at the terminal device 22 for outside prize exchange. A photo is displayed.

  The face photo information, which is authentication information for authenticating the player, is stored in the information management unit 1402 of the center server 1130. Further, in addition to the facial photo information input at the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22, the facial photo information input at the out-of-store terminal device 1100 is also stored, and each information can be output based on the ID information and the like. is doing. As authentication information for authenticating the player, for example, fingerprint information, eye (eye) shape information, or the like may be used in addition to the face photo information. The information management unit 1402 of the center server 1130 stores at least one type of these authentication information. For example, in the out-of-store terminal device 1100 in a store outside the game hall, when the person who brought the issue 1260 or 1261 and the person who exchanged the prize in the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22 can be confirmed. May provide an authentication button so that information related to the authentication confirmation can be output to the center server 1130, and the store clerk outside the game hall may approve the taking out of the prize.

  It should be noted that in the out-of-store terminal device 1100, the player may be photographed each time in cancellation processing, difference settlement processing, and the like. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized processing that is performed twice after the issue 1260 and 1261 are copied.

(7) Conversion fee setting for each valuable value For example, the conversion fee for each valuable value input and set by the input device of the center server 1130 is stored in the information management unit 1402 based on the valuable value ID. Depending on the value of the valuable value of one or a plurality of conversion sources and the value of the valuable value of one or a plurality of conversion destinations, the center server 1130 performs the conversion at the time of conversion. The fee is calculated, the history information is stored, and each information is further aggregated. The history information and the total information are managed so that they can be output based on instruction information given for each valuable value, for each management entity of each valuable value, and for each player. Examples of the output include an output to the display device of the center server 1130, an output to a printer, and the like, an output to the outside such as the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 and the out-of-store terminal device 1100.

  In accordance with the instruction information, the control unit 1400 of the center server 1130 executes conversion processing from the conversion source valuable value to the conversion destination valuable value, and sets a fee set based on a contract with each valuable value management entity. Read from the information management unit 1402 based on the valuable value ID. There are two types of receipt fees to be read, each of which is a conversion source and a conversion destination for each valuable value, a fee charged to a player, a fee charged to a game hall, and a value of each value. There is a fee imposed on the management entity. For example, if there are 10 types of players, game halls, and each valuable value management entity, 20 types (2 types × 10 types) can be set, but the present invention is not limited to this example.

  When converting, the fee collected from the player may be withdrawn from one of the valuable values of the player. If there are multiple valuable values possessed by the player, the player withdraws the fee. However, it may be possible to select a valuable value. In the center server 1130, when the collection destination is other than the player, the above-mentioned fee is totaled every predetermined period such as every month, and billed (for example, the amount charged from the account of the contract partner is accounted for by the server operating entity) Information related to instructions for transferring money, output of information related to instructions for transferring payments from the account of the server operating entity to the contractor's account, printing of invoices, address, address, postal code, etc. Output of information to be made possible, output of information such as a transaction history table of a billing amount).

  By doing this, it is possible to set a fee according to the contract status with the issuer of valuable value. For example, when the contractor is a store outside the game hall, for example, when paying expenses such as sponsorship money Can be set up with a high degree of flexibility so that a large amount of commission can be set as a dividend. If the first valuable value that is the conversion source has an expiration date such as a point, for example, the value may be subtracted as the expiration date approaches and finally set to “0”. The points may be converted into other valuable values (for example, the number of saved items).

  Further, as described above, for example, when a change is made between valuable values, money exchange associated with increase / decrease in the valuable value or a fee occurs according to the valuable value related to the conversion. For example, when a certain valuable value is reduced, income is obtained according to the reduced amount, and when a certain valuable value is increased, expenditure corresponding to the increased amount is made. In the center server 1130, these revenues and expenditures are aggregated for each valuable value, and billing (for example, information related to an instruction for transferring the billed amount from the contracted account to the account of the server operating entity or the server operating entity) Output information related to instructions for transferring payments from your account to the contractor's account, print out invoices, output information that allows you to print the delivery address, address and postal code, etc. Etc.) can be executed. The aggregation can be executed at predetermined intervals such as every month.

(8) Processing stop processing related to prize exchange The center server 1130 provides information on bank stoppage information, information on delays in deposits / withdrawals, information on ties, etc. When the center server 1130 determines that communication with the out-of-store terminal device 1100 in the store outside the game hall is not established when the input is made from the terminal device (for example, when the power of the out-of-store terminal device 1100 is OFF) The server 1130 performs at least one of information providing processing, advertisement processing, gift exchange processing, and gift (product) purchase settlement processing for the gift or merchandise of the store on the outside gift exchange terminal device 22 or the outside terminal device 1100. Outputs information about stopping. Further, the center server 1130 displays information for displaying, for example, “Currently incommunicable store, possibly closed” in the gift display column of this store, and the terminal device 22 for exchanging gifts outside the store. To the terminal device 1100 outside the store.

  In addition, the center server 1130 stores information related to transaction suspension authenticated by a store outside the game hall, a game hall, an electronic money operating entity, a credit card operating entity, a cash card operating entity, a debit card operating entity, etc. , The information for stopping the transaction relating to the predetermined prize exchange is output to each terminal device based on the information. For example, when a transaction is stopped in a store outside a game hall (including a delivery store), information on the game hall or the Internet terminal of the player is not displayed as a gift or a product to be purchased. Even if the payment is made, the settlement cannot be executed, and a message such as “Transaction suspended” is displayed instead.

  In addition, when the center server 1130 inputs information relating to the suspension of the game hall transaction, the center server 1130 sends the information to the out-of-store terminal device 1100 of the store outside the game hall that has a contract for the prize exchange with the game hall. Output information. As a result, the out-of-store terminal device 1100 cannot, for example, deduct points or the number of points stored in the gaming hall, and a message such as “Transaction suspended” is displayed, or valuable information on the gaming hall is displayed. Is converted into a valuable value based on the margin of the game hall.

  Further, when the center server 1130 inputs transaction stop information related to the operating entity of electronic money, credit card, cash card, debit card, the center server 1130 sends the information to the out-of-store terminal device 1100 of a store outside the game hall, for example. Is output. As a result, the out-of-store terminal device 1100 cannot execute purchase settlement or giveaway exchange settlement based on the valuable value such as points or electronic money on the card, and a message such as “Transaction suspended” is displayed. Disappears.

  Further, the center server 1130 inputs the required margin calculated from the management status data from the financial management device 50 of each game hall, or the center server 1130 needs to calculate the game data from the management device 13 and calculate it. The following processes are listed as necessary processes (step S1419, step S1421, and step S1423) that are executed by the center server 1130 based on the margin and are associated with the determinations of steps S1418, S1420, and S1422, which will be described later.

  The necessary processing includes, for example, output of warning information indicating a possibility that the required margin is insufficient, output of required margin replenishment request information, and suspension of transactions in the corresponding game hall. That is, the center server 1130 cannot receive a prize at a store outside the game hall using the valuable value (savings, points, etc.) in the corresponding game hall, and can make a purchase settlement or exchange settlement of the prize from the delivery shop. Information for doing so is output to the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 and the out-of-store terminal device 1100. As a result, it is no longer possible to exchange prizes using the valuable value (stored number, points) issued by the game hall in the outside gift exchange terminal device 22, and the outside gift exchange terminal device 22 is powered on. Even in the ON state, “stopped” or the like is displayed on the display device 1200, and no reception is possible. Further, the out-of-store terminal device 1100 makes it impossible to exchange prizes using the valuable value (stored number, points) issued by the game hall.

(9) Free gift exchange processing related to out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 and out-of-store terminal device 1100 In the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22, it is possible to exchange free gifts using the number of game media stored by the player. In the out-of-store terminal device 1100, it is possible to make it impossible to exchange prizes using the stored number.

  When the power source of the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 and the out-of-store terminal device 1100 (including the terminal device installed in the delivery store) is turned on, the in-store gift exchange terminal device 22 and the out-of-store terminal device 1100 Initial setting information is output to the center server 1130. Further, based on the information, the center server 1130 stores the initial setting information stored in the information management unit 1402 for each prefecture where the game hall is located in the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 and the out-of-store terminal device 1100. Output. The initial setting information includes game hall information that can be traded in each terminal device, store information (including a home delivery store) outside the game hall, valuable value information that can be handled, and product information that can be handled.

  When the input terminal device is the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22, the center server 1130 sets the handling permission information of the number of group game halls including the own game hall as the number of withdrawals that can be withdrawn. Is output to the out-store gift exchange terminal device 22. Further, the center server 1130 permits or does not permit the withdrawal of the number of savings that are different (because the guidance and judgment of the police are different for each prefecture) in the prefecture where the gaming hall where the store outside the gaming hall can be traded is located. The permission information is output to the out-of-store terminal device 1100 as initial setting information. Then, the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 and the out-of-store terminal device 1100, in accordance with the input initial setting information, the available game hall, the valuable value of the store outside the game hall (the prize (product), each store issue point, A prize exchange process based on electronic money, credits, debits, and stored number) is executed.

  Further, as shown in Tables 5 to 10, a cancellation process for canceling a prize as a valuable value exchanged with the number stored in the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 in the out-of-store terminal device 1100 can be executed. . By this cancellation processing, the valuable value and fee withdrawn in the game hall are restored to the previous state. In addition, other prizes can be settled by combining the valuable values owned by the player, but the difference caused by exchanging with other prizes without executing the cancellation process can be settled with other valuable values. You can also settle. At this time, in accordance with the initial setting information, the out-of-store terminal device 1100 may be prohibited from withdrawing the number of saved game halls. In addition, in the above-described cancellation processing, the case where processing is performed to return the fee to the previous state has been described. For example, a value obtained by imposing a cancellation processing fee at a store outside the game hall and reducing the cancellation processing fee. May be the previous state. Note that the cancellation processing fee can be set as appropriate based on the management plan of the game hall or a store outside the game hall, or the fee amount can be changed.

(10) Processing in Stores Outside Game Hall The processing related to prize exchange in the out-of-store terminal device 1100 at stores outside the game hall (excluding home delivery stores) and home delivery stores can be different processing.

  The out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22 is based on the search screen, specifies a prize genre, a value that can be withdrawn, a home delivery prize, a prize that can be exchanged at a store outside the game hall, and the current status of the store outside the game hall. You can search by specifying conditions such as business status (whether it is open or not) and exchange prizes.

  When the center server 1130 inputs information related to selection of a prize that can be exchanged by the number of stored items in the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22, the selection of the prize can be exchanged in the game hall. As shown in Tables 5 to 10, depending on whether it is a prize, a prize exchangeable at a store outside the game hall (except for a delivery shop), or a prize exchangeable at a delivery shop, , Different expense processing can be performed. For example, in the case of a prize that can be exchanged in a game hall, the center server 1130 does not execute processing for ordering the prize to the outside (the supply store is the shop in Table 5). Further, in the case of a prize that can be exchanged at a store outside the game hall (excluding a delivery store), the center server 1130 exchanges an outside store gift in response to an inquiry from a store outside the game hall (excluding a delivery store). Based on the exchange result in the terminal device 22 for use, the information which allows the over-the-counter terminal device 1100 to display the delivery allowance information of the exchange prize is output. Further, in the case of a prize that can be exchanged at a delivery store, the center server 1130 outputs information such as the exchange result in the outside gift exchange terminal device 22 and the address, name, and telephone number of the delivery destination to the delivery store.

(When "Advertisement and fee processing associated with advertisement" is requested)
If it is determined in step S1411 that "advertisement and fee processing associated with advertisement" is requested ("C" in step S1411), the following fee processing associated with advertisement and advertisement is executed (step S1414).

  If the center server 1130 is set to automatically advertise in accordance with the setting of whether or not to automatically advertise at the time of new prize registration set for each store outside the game hall (including home delivery stores), the center server 1130 Information related to the advertisement of the registered prize is output to the exchange terminal device 22 and other advertisement display devices (for example, a telop display device installed at a gas station, a store outside the game hall, or the like). The out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22 and other advertisement display machines display advertisements for registered prizes on the display device based on information from the center server 1130. The automatic advertisement at the time of new prize registration means that when a new prize is registered, the center server 1130 automatically outputs advertisement information based on the prize to the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22 and other advertisement display devices. To be done.

  Further, the center server 1130 is configured to perform automatic advertisement according to the setting of whether or not to perform automatic advertisement at the time of registering the price reduction information of the prize set for each store outside the game hall (including home delivery stores). Outputs information related to the advertisement relating to the price reduction information of the prize to the terminal device 22 for exchanging the prize and other advertisement display machines (for example, a telop display machine installed at a gas station, a store outside the game hall, etc.) To do. Then, the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 and other advertisement display machines display an advertisement related to the price reduction information of the gift on the display device based on the information from the center server 1130. The automatic advertisement at the time of registration of the price reduction information of the prize means that when the price reduction information of the prize is registered, the center server 1130 automatically sends the prize to the out-of-store prize exchange terminal device 22 or other advertisement display device. This means that advertisement information based on price reduction information is output. If the center server 1130 receives an advertisement instruction from an out-of-store terminal device 1100 at a store outside the game hall (including a delivery store), the center server 1130 can select an out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 or other information based on that information. The registered prize is advertised on the advertisement display.

  In addition, the center server 1130 accumulates the advertising fee set for each store outside the game hall (including delivery delivery stores) for each store for each month and year, and calculates the monthly and annual advertising fees for the past several years. The accumulated value and the history for each advertisement are stored in the information management unit 1402. In addition, according to instruction information from a store that requested an advertisement such as a store outside a game hall (including a delivery store), the information managed by the information management unit 1402 can be output to the out-of-store terminal device 1100. The center server 1130 stores historical information such as prize exchanges and purchases managed for each ID of the player, as described in the processing of step S1413. The center server 1130 repeats (that is, when a prize exchange or purchase is counted several times or more) based on the history information or the like, and a prize corresponding to the prize genre that the player exchanges or purchases, When new registration or price reduction information related to a prize corresponding to a favorite prize by registration is registered, advertisement information related to this prize is output to the corresponding player.

  After executing any one of the processes in steps S1412 to S1414, when the center server 1130 inputs a registration request, the center server 1130 stores the registration fee as history information in the information management unit 1402 and inputs the registration fee history output request. In this case, the registration fee history information is output to the terminal device that has requested the output. Further, when the registration request is input, the center server 1130 accumulates the registration fee for one month and one year, and when the output request for the total value of the registration fee is input, the center server 1130 registers with the terminal device that requested the output. Output the accumulated value of the commission.

  The center server 1130 outputs a history list such as input fee, amount of exchanged prizes (premiums (including home delivery prizes) in stores outside the game hall), delivery charges, transaction (exchange and withdrawal) valuable value, etc. Each transaction is stored in the information management unit 1402 in chronological order, for each player, for each game hall, for each store outside the game hall, for each intermediary that operates the center server 1130, for each home delivery store, for each valuable value, Accumulate the total balance of each prize.

  The center server 1130 receives a bill for each predetermined period (such as monthly) and a request for income (for example, at the end of the month) for each gaming hall, for each store outside the gaming hall, for each intermediary that operates the center server 1130, and for each home delivery store. Outputs information on invoices and income documents along with a history list based on timed requests and requests from output buttons (outputs information to be printed on paper for e-mailing and mailing to each entity) ) The center server 1130 calculates the cumulative value by specifying each of the cumulative value information described above by inputting a predetermined period, for example, a period of one month, one year, or what month to what month. .

  Further, the center server 1130 is provided by each operating entity such as an out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22, an out-of-store terminal device 1100 (including a terminal device at a delivery store), a general user terminal device, electronic money, a credit card, and a debit card. Receive access from terminal device, authenticate with ID password, etc., give free gift exchange history, valuable value exchange history, purchase history according to instructions from each terminal device, fees for exchange and purchase and valuable value traded The total value (including prizes) is output to each designated terminal device. Each terminal device can display such information. Further, the display device of the center server 1130 can display the total information and history information for each operating entity of each terminal device and each terminal device in a list.

  Also, the management device 13 that can communicate with the out-store gift exchange terminal device 22 in the game hall and the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 via the network 8 accesses the center server 1130 to obtain related information. By inputting, for each store outside the game hall where the transaction was made, for each delivery store, and for each prize management machine (POS) 11 installed in the game hall, the prize management machine (POS) 11 in one gaming hall Are different and / or identifiable marks and phrases, in other words, “inside” meaning exchange within the game hall as shown in Tables 5 to 10, and exchange at stores outside the game hall. The center server 1130 can output a list of total information and history information by distinguishing between “outside” and “home” meaning exchange at a delivery store. Further, before the fee value, for example, in the case of a fee related to the exchange in the game hall, “inside” or the like is described to distinguish the center server 1130 from the list of total information and history information. Can be output.

  In addition, in the out-of-store terminal device 1100 at the delivery store, for each game hall where transactions have been made and for each store outside the game hall, separately and / or identifiable marks and words, etc., as described above The center server 1130 can output a list of total information and history information. In addition, as described above, the center server 1130 distinguishes between a predetermined mark and wording (“−”, FFFF, @, Z, etc.) before the numerical value of the fee, and the center server 1130 displays the total information and history information. A list can be output.

  In addition, the center server 1130 has a game hall ID, a member IC card ID, a prize ID, a supply store (a store outside the game hall (including a delivery store)) ID, a receipt ID, a price, a withdrawal valuable value (spot, Based on saving medal, cash, credit, electronic money, debit, each store point, a mixture of these), exchange prizes, exchange date and time, exchange installation location, ID of the terminal device that executed the exchange process, withdrawal value, member ID, Information management unit 1402 based on each ID so that the exchange points set for each reward point, each supply store ID, each prize, and each valuable value can be searched and listed as an exchange history. I remember it. In addition, these pieces of information are accumulated and stored in the information management unit 1402 as, for example, monthly and yearly cumulative values of valuable values for each ID and for each valuable value. Then, in response to an instruction from the authenticated member, game hall, and supply store, the center server 1130 causes the member ID, game hall ID, supply store ID, history information of the value management entity ID, and cumulative value information of the above information. Can be output to the request source. Moreover, in the terminal device which requested | required such information, these information can be displayed on a display apparatus etc., for example. In addition, in the accumulated value information, an output label as an invoice and income book for each management entity of each valuable value is printed, and at the beginning of the month, an address label is printed together with the above-mentioned invoice for each operating entity and output information as an income book. Information for doing this is also included.

  Next, after the processing of step S1415, the control unit 1400 stores the necessary margin calculated based on the game data in the financial management device 50 provided in each game hall, for example, stored in the information management unit 1402. Information is read out (step S1416).

  In addition, when the required margin information is not stored in the information management unit 1402, the control unit 1400 inputs game data and the like from the management device 13 of each game hall and stores the game data in the information management unit 1402, Based on the information, the required margin is calculated by the same processing as described in the financial processing of the financial management apparatus 50 described above (see the processing in steps S1030 and S1033 in FIG. 50) (step S1417). The required margin is calculated based on the relationship between the accumulated profit and loss, the asset minus the accumulated liability and capital, and the required margin. It is calculated based on the amount obtained by subtracting the accumulated amount. In addition, the accumulated amount of profits and losses takes into account the carry-over from the previous period, and the periodic financial situation diagnosis is executed. Necessary margin is the money to be paid when the transaction result ends with a loss when the transaction is settled. When information such as game data is stored in the information management unit 1402, the information may be read from the information management unit 1402.

  Subsequently, the control unit 1400 determines whether or not the margin of the game hole is equal to or larger than the required margin calculated in step S1416 or calculated in step S1417 (step S1418).

  When it is determined in step S1418 that the margin of the gaming hole is less than the required margin input in step S1416 or calculated in step S1417 (No in step S1418), the control unit 1400 Then, warning information for warning that the margin of the gaming hole is less than the calculated required margin is output to the gaming hole via the input / output information processing unit 1401 (step S1419). Here, the output of the warning information also has a function as a necessary process.

  When it is determined in step S1418 that the margin of the gaming hole is greater than the required margin input in step S1416 or calculated in step S1417 (Yes in step S1418), and the process of step S1419 Thereafter, the control unit 1400 determines that the margin money of the game hall is input in step S1416 or a value obtained by multiplying the premium exchange transaction amount in the store outside the game hall for a predetermined period calculated in step S1417 by a predetermined constant. It is determined whether it is larger (step S1420). Here, 1.0 or the like is used as the predetermined constant.

  In the determination in step S1420, the margin of the game hall is less than or equal to the value obtained by multiplying the prize exchange transaction volume at the store outside the game hall for a predetermined period calculated in step S1416 by a predetermined constant. If it is determined that there is (No in step S1420), the control unit 1400, in the game hall via the input / output information processing unit 1401, in the store outside the game hall for a predetermined period when the margin for the game hall is calculated. Warning information that warns that the value is equal to or less than a value obtained by multiplying the gift exchange transaction volume by a predetermined constant is output (step S1421). In addition, as a necessary process, the control unit 1400 outputs the required margin replenishment request information to the game hall via the input / output information processing unit 1401 (step S1421).

  In the determination in step S1420, the margin for the game hall is greater than the value input in step S1416 or the value obtained by multiplying the prize exchange transaction volume at the store outside the game hall for a predetermined period calculated in step S1417 by a predetermined constant. (Yes in step S1420), and after the processing in step S1421, the control unit 1400 determines that the margin for the gaming hole has been input in step S1416 or is out of the gaming hole for a predetermined period calculated in step S1417 It is determined whether or not it is larger than a value obtained by multiplying the premium exchange transaction volume at the store by a predetermined second constant (step S1422). Here, 0.8 or the like is used as the predetermined second constant.

  In the determination in step S1422, the margin of the game hall is input in step S1416 or the premium exchange transaction volume in the store outside the game hall for a predetermined period calculated in step S1417 is multiplied by a predetermined second constant. When it is determined that the value is equal to or less than the value (No in step S1422), the control unit 1400 passes the input / output information processing unit 1401 to the gaming hole outside the gaming hole for a predetermined period when the margin for the gaming hole is calculated. Warning information is output to warn that the value is equal to or less than the value obtained by multiplying the premium exchange transaction volume at the store by a predetermined second constant (step S1423). Further, as a necessary process, the control unit 1400 outputs information for stopping the transaction in the game hall to the game hall via the input / output information processing unit 1401 (step S1423). That is, the center server 1130 cannot receive a prize at a store outside the game hall using the valuable value (savings, points, etc.) in the corresponding game hall, and can make a purchase settlement or exchange settlement of the prize from the delivery shop. Information for doing so is output to the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22 and the out-of-store terminal device 1100. As a result, it is no longer possible to exchange prizes using the valuable value (stored number, points) issued by the game hall in the outside gift exchange terminal device 22, and the outside gift exchange terminal device 22 is powered on. Even in the ON state, “stopped” or the like is displayed on the display device 1200, and no reception is possible. Further, the out-of-store terminal device 1100 makes it impossible to exchange prizes using the valuable value (stored number, points) issued by the game hall.

  In the determination in step S1422, the margin of the game hall is input in step S1416 or the premium exchange transaction volume in the store outside the game hall for a predetermined period calculated in step S1417 is multiplied by a predetermined second constant. When it is determined that the value is greater than the value (Yes in step S1422) and after the process in step S1423, the process returns to the start.

  As described above, the center server 1130 can store and manage information from terminal devices such as the out-of-store gift exchange terminal device 22, the out-of-store terminal device 1100, and the general user terminal device 1160. In addition, the information, the outside gift exchange terminal device 22, the outside terminal device 1100, the general user terminal device 1160, the game hall, the electronic money operating entity, the credit card operating entity, the cash card operating entity, the debit card operating entity Based on the request from the above, etc., "registration and fee processing accompanying registration", "fee value conversion (exchange) and premium conversion accompanying premium conversion" and "fee processing related to advertisement and advertisement" are executed. be able to.

  The center server 1130 is managed by a third company different from the manager who manages each game hall or a store outside each game hall, and the center server 1130 manages the game hall and the store outside the game hall. It is possible to perform payment on behalf of the exchange of prizes between them. In addition, the center server 1130 can manage to be able to output premium information and store information registered from stores outside the respective game halls, and can set and manage various fees related to prize exchange. Further, the center server 1130 can manage the information from the financial management device 50 of each gaming hall described above, and can output information such as the management status of each gaming hall.

(Premium exchange device 1500)
Next, the prize exchange device 1500 provided in the wagon 1550, the service counter, etc. will be described with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 70 is a perspective view of a wagon 1550 equipped with a prize exchange device 1500. FIG. 71 is a perspective view of a service counter 1560 equipped with a prize exchange device 1500. 72 is a perspective view of the prize exchange device 1500, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing a selection screen of the prize exchange device 1500. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a configuration of the gift exchange device 1500. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the flow of operations in the gift exchange device 1500.

  As shown in FIG. 70 and FIG. 71, the prize exchange device 1500 accommodates prizes and is installed at any time in a wagon 1550 that can move in the game hall or an empty space in the game hall and accommodates prizes. Equipped to 1560. The wagon 1550 and the service counter 1560 contain food and drinks such as juices, lunch boxes, and breads, and can be exchanged and purchased by selecting a favorite prize on the selection screen of the prize exchange device 1500. It has become.

  In addition, the wagon 1550 and the service counter 1560 equipped with the prize exchange device 1500 may be operated by companies other than the game hall that provides prizes such as food and drink. When a plurality of merchants conduct business in the game hall, a wagon 1550 and a service counter 1560 are provided for each merchant.

  As shown in FIG. 72, on the front side of the prize exchange device 1500, there are an IC card information reading unit 1510 that functions as a prize exchange permission information reading means and a prize exchange information writing means, and a selection screen 1520 that functions as a prize selection means. And are provided.

  The IC card information reading unit 1510 reads various information from the member IC card 30 and the non-member IC card 31 that are brought close to the IC card information reading unit 1510, and transfers them to the member IC card 30 and the non-member IC card 31. Write various information. Examples of the information read from the member IC card 30 and the non-member IC card 31 include a card ID and free gift exchange permission information. On the other hand, as information to be written into the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31, for example, the gift exchange information, the gift exchange result registration flag is “0” (0 indicates that the gift exchange result is unregistered), and the like. Can be mentioned. When the merchant card is brought closer, various information is read from the merchant card and various information is written to the merchant card. As information to be read from the merchant card, for example, as a merchant ID and all prize exchange information, the game medium in which the prize is exchanged with the number of acquired game media (the number of winning balls / medals or the number of stored balls / medals) stored in the card stored last time The total number of game media for managing the number (for example, the number of medals of 20 yen per piece, the number of medals of 10 yen, the number of balls of 4 yen, the number of balls of 2 yen) converted into a predetermined fixed value is added. Value information Z (for example, total amount in yen, 20 yen x 20 yen medal number + 10 yen x 10 yen medal number + 4 yen x 4 yen coin number + 2 yen + 2 yen coin number), actual current ball and current medal memorized last time Value information Y exchanged in (1) (units similar to Z), value information X of merchandise sales with cash stored last time, and the like. On the other hand, as information to be written on the merchant card, for example, as the above-mentioned all prize exchange information, the value information summed up from the total number of game media exchanged after giving the previous value information Z is added to the previous value information Z. And the updated value information Z and the like. Further, for the value information Y and the value information X, the same information as the value information Z can be cited. Further, the IC card information reading unit 1510 is configured by a reader / writer, for example.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the selection screen 1520 shows various prizes to be exchanged with the number of acquired game media (the number of winning balls / medals or the number of stored balls / medals) stored on the card, or various products purchased with cash. This is a screen for selecting the type of game medium to be exchanged with an actual current ball (actual pachinko ball) or a current medal (actual medal). The selection screen 1520 displays various information such as a prize name (product name), the number of game media required for exchanging prizes, and the total number of game media related to the selected prize. This selection screen 1520 is a display means having a touch panel constituted by a touch panel EL (Electro Luminescence) display or the like. In this selection screen 1520, a touch operation of a player or the like is accepted with various operation keys arranged on the touch panel corresponding to the display content, and a key operation input by the touch operation is supplied to the control unit of the prize exchange device 1500. Also accepts any touch operation other than the operation keys (touch operation that does not specify the display of the operation target and simply touches an arbitrary area on the display screen), and the operation input by the arbitrary touch operation is also input to the control unit. Supply.

  Next, the operation of the gift exchange device 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. 74 and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the gift exchange device 1500 mainly includes a control unit 1600, a card processing unit 1610, and a selection screen detection unit 1620.

  The control unit 1600 is mainly composed of an arithmetic unit (CPU), a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), and other storage means such as a semiconductor memory that keeps information as necessary. In the CPU, Various arithmetic processes are executed using programs and data stored in the storage means such as the ROM and RAM. The control unit 1600 controls the input / output of signals between the respective units of the card processing unit 1610 and the selection screen detection unit 1620.

  An operation input signal corresponding to a touch operation of a player or the like is supplied to the control unit 1600 from the touch panel of the selection screen 1520. The operation input signal supplied from the touch panel includes a signal indicating the key operation input by the touch operation of the operation key described above and a signal indicating the operation input by the arbitrary touch operation, and the player or the like performs an arbitrary touch operation. The operation input signal at this time is a signal notifying the control unit 1600 that the display screen is simply touched without specifying the operation target (just that there is a touch operation).

  The program stored in the storage means such as the ROM or RAM of the control unit 1600 includes a program that defines the processing operation of the prize exchange device 1500 that performs processing relating to prize exchange, and the control unit 1600 is in accordance with the program. Is configured to execute processing related to gift exchange. The process related to the prize exchange is to store information and control the display operation of the selection screen 1520 as necessary, and the prize exchange apparatus 1500 has storage means (ROM, RAM, etc. And a control means (drive control of the selection screen 1520 by the control unit 1600) and the like.

  The card processing unit 1610 reads various information from the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 that is brought close to the IC card information reading unit 1510, outputs the read information to the control unit 1600, Various information is written to the IC card 30 and the non-member IC card 31. Further, the card processing unit 1610 reads various information from the merchant card brought close to the IC card information reading unit 1510, outputs the read information to the control unit 1600, and writes various information to the merchant card. The card processing unit 1610 is composed of, for example, a reader / writer.

  The selection screen detection unit 1620 supplies an operation input signal corresponding to the touch operation on the selection screen 1520 to the control unit 1600.

  And each apparatus part of the selection screen 1520, the card | curd process part 1610, and the selection screen detection part 1620 controlled by the control part 1600 operate | moves as follows (FIG. 75).

  The operation of the gift exchange device 1500 will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 75 showing the flow of operations in the gift exchange device 1500 shows a flowchart of the main routine in the gift exchange device 1500 executed by the control unit 1600, and the program is stored in the storage means of the control unit 1600. The high-speed processing operation in which the control unit 1600 executes the processing from the start to the return in a time such as 0.01 ms is repeated.

  In this main routine, first, a menu screen is displayed on the selection screen 1520 (step S1650).

  Based on the information from selection screen detection unit 1620, control unit 1600 determines whether information related to “initial setting”, “end-of-day process”, or “exchange work” has been input (step S1651).

  Here, the information related to the “initial setting” includes, for example, information relating to initial settings such as premium registration information, value setting of each premium, that is, setting of the number of exchangeable game media, and the number of acquired game media. Information such as game media value information to be converted into a predetermined value and managed, information of game media (number of winning balls and number of stored balls) to be withdrawn preferentially when exchanging prizes, etc. The initial setting process is executed by inputting. In this initial setting process, initial setting of the prize exchange device 1500 is performed by registering and setting the input information. Information regarding this initial setting is input on the selection screen 1520, for example. Further, the information may be read into the prize exchange device 1500 by reading the information from the card for the trader that stores information related to “initial setting” in advance by the IC card information reading unit 1510.

  In addition, in the initial setting in the prize exchange device 1500, for example, the information on the value of the game medium corresponding to the value of the game medium for each of the machine, the game machine, the game island, or the game machine group. May be set. For example, the value of a pachinko ball discharged from one type of gaming machine is converted to 4 yen per ball, the value of a pachinko ball discharged from another type of gaming machine is converted to 2 yen per ball, and from a further type of gaming machine Information relating to the value of the game medium such as converting the value of the pachinko balls to be discharged into 1 yen per ball may be set. Here, each gaming machine group means each group when gaming machines are grouped by type when a plurality of gaming machines are installed on one gaming island.

  The information related to “end-of-day process” is information input at the end of the work, and the end-of-day process is executed by inputting this information. The end-of-day process refers to, for example, a process of writing all premium exchange information stored in the control unit 1600 in a “exchange service” to be described later on a merchant card. That is, the control unit 1600 is all prize exchange information, for example, various types of selected prizes (such as prize IDs) and the number of information, information related to a player who has selected a prize (such as a card ID), The current value information updated by adding the value information of the total number of game media exchanged after giving the trader ID and the previous value information Z for the business related to the prize exchange to the previous value information Z. Write Z etc. on the merchant card. For the value information Y and value information X, the same information as the value information Z is written in the merchant card. In addition, when outputting information such as all free gift exchange information from the free gift exchange device 1500, for example, in addition to writing in the merchant card in the IC card information reading unit 1510 as described above, for example, the free gift exchange device 1500, Information such as all prize exchange information may be output by temporarily connecting the management apparatus 13 with a communication line.

  Each wagon 1550, each service counter 1560, and the like can be rented out by, for example, each trader. Therefore, in each premium exchange device 1500 mounted on each wagon 1550 or each service counter, each trader that is the operating entity. Every prize exchange information can be aggregated every time. In addition, even when a plurality of contractors use one wagon 1550 or one service counter 1560, the prize exchange information can be managed together with the trader ID when exchanging prizes. Based on the above, for example, it is possible to tabulate for each trader who is an operating entity. In addition, the prize exchange device 1500 can separately count sales information for selling merchandise in cash and information for exchanging prizes on game media. Note that the processing related to these tabulations may be executed by the management apparatus 13.

  The information related to “exchange business” is information relating to a prize selected on the selection screen 1520, such as information on the selected prize or product, valuable value for exchanging or purchasing a prize (pachinko ball, medal, Cash) information, etc., relating to the prize exchange entered by the touch operation on the selection screen 1520, and the exchange work process is executed by inputting such information. This exchange work process will be described in detail later.

  If it is determined in step S1651 that information related to “initial setting” has been input (“initial setting” in step S1651), the initial setting process described above is executed (step S1652). Then, the process returns and returns to the start.

  If it is determined in step S1651 that information related to “end-of-work process” has been input (“end-of-work process” in step S1651), the above-described end-of-work process is executed (step S1653). Then, the process returns and returns to the start.

  If it is determined in step S1651 that information related to “exchange business” has been input (“exchange business” in step S1651), the control unit 1600 displays a settlement screen related to the selected premium on the selection screen 1520. It is displayed (step S1654). As shown in FIG. 73, the payment screen is a screen that displays, for example, the selected prize name (product name), the number of prizes, the number of game media necessary for prize exchange, and the like. The payment screen also displays the total number of prizes and the total number of game media necessary for prize exchange.

  Subsequently, based on the information from selection screen detection unit 1620, control unit 1600 determines whether or not a “stop”, “subtotal”, or “immediate correction” screen has been touched (step S1655). If it is determined that a touch operation has not been performed (“no touch operation” in step S1655), the process in step S1654 is repeated.

  Here, the case where the “stop” screen is touch-operated is, for example, a case where all the inputs so far are cleared and it is desired to return to the initial state. The case where the “subtotal” screen is touch-operated is, for example, a case where a process for exchanging selected prizes is executed and a settlement process is performed. The case where the “immediate correction” screen is touch-operated is, for example, a case where the last input information is to be cleared.

  If it is determined in step S1655 that the “Cancel” screen has been touched (“Cancel” in Step S1655), the control unit 1600 clears all the information relating to the prize exchange input so far ( Step S1656). Then, the process returns and returns to the start.

  If it is determined in step S1655 that the “immediate correction” screen has been touched (“immediate correction” in step S1655), the control unit 1600 clears the last input information (step S1657). . Then, the processing from step S1654 is executed.

  If it is determined in step S1655 that the “subtotal” screen has been touched (“subtotal” in step S1655), the control unit 1600 displays “card if you have a card” on the selection screen 1520. Is displayed close to the IC card information reading unit 1510 ”(step S1658). Further, the control unit 1600 displays “Please select a payment method from“ pachinko ball ”,“ medal ”,“ cash ”, and“ card ”and perform a touch operation” on the selection screen 1520 (step S1658). . Further, the payment method may be “card frequency” and may be accepted as a selection by touch operation of “card frequency”.

  Here, when the screen of the “pachinko ball” is touched, the prize is exchanged using the actual pachinko ball actually acquired by the player. When the “medal” screen is touched, prizes are exchanged using actual medals actually acquired by the player. When the “cash” screen is touched, the selected product is sold via cash. When the “card” screen is touched, a process related to prize exchange is executed based on information stored in the IC card such as the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31. In the case where “card frequency” is provided, the product may be sold by subtracting the frequency information managed in the storage of the management device 13 based on the card ID.

  Subsequently, based on the information from the card processing unit 1610, the control unit 1600 determines whether an IC card such as the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 is brought close to the IC card information reading unit 1510, that is, an IC card The card information reading unit 1510 determines whether information has been read from an IC card such as the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 (step S1659). Note that the case where information is read from the IC card such as the member IC card 30 and the non-member IC card 31 in the IC card information reading unit 1510 is, for example, a touch operation on the screen of “card” in the process of step S1658. For example, it may be determined that it has been done.

  If it is determined in step S1659 that the IC card information reading unit 1510 has read information from an IC card such as the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 (Yes in step S1659), the control unit 1600 Specifies the free gift exchange permission information for permitting free gift exchange from the read information (step S1660). Here, as the prize exchange permission information, for example, acquired game medium number information relating to the number of acquired game media, flag information for simply allowing prize exchange, and the like are stored. Further, the prize exchange permission information may include both the number of acquired game media information and flag information.

  Here, if flag information or the like for simply permitting the prize exchange is stored, the prize exchange is permitted. Therefore, the IC card information reading unit 1510 displays the prize exchange information related to the selected prize. , And write to IC cards such as the member IC card 30 and the non-member IC card 31. Then, when the IC card is inserted into the inter-vehicle machine 3, 4, 6 or the like, the gift exchange information is output to the management device 13, and the management device 13 manages it based on information such as the card ID. Update the free gift exchange information. Here, a case will be described in which acquired game medium number information relating to the acquired number of game media is stored in IC cards such as the member IC card 30 and the non-member IC card 31 as the prize exchange permission information.

  The control unit 1600 specifies the number of winning balls and the number of stored balls from the read information on the number of acquired game media. If the number of winning balls and the number of stored balls are not converted to the predetermined unit, as described above, the game media for conversion to a predetermined constant value, which is input in the initial setting, is managed. Based on the value information, it is converted into a predetermined unit. Then, the process of step S1663 is executed.

  If it is determined in step S1659 that the IC card information reading unit 1510 has not read information from the IC card such as the member IC card 30 or the non-member IC card 31 (No in step S1659), the process continues. The control unit 1600 determines whether or not the “cash” screen has been touched based on the information from the selection screen detection unit 1620 (step S1661).

  If it is determined in step S1661 that the “cash” screen has been touched (Yes in step S1661), the process of step S1663 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1661 that the “cash” screen is not touch-operated (No in step S1661), then control unit 1600 is based on information from selection screen detection unit 1620. Then, it is determined whether or not the “pachinko ball” or “medal” screen has been touched (step S1662).

  If it is determined in step S1662 that the “pachinko ball” or “medal” screen has been touched (Yes in step S1662), the process of step S1663 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1662 that the “pachinko ball” and “medal” screens are not touch-operated (No in step S1662), the processing from step S1654 is executed.

  In the process of step S1663, when the “pachinko ball” or “medal” screen is touched in the above-described process, the control unit 1600 displays the selected prize on the payment screen displayed in step S1654. The number of exchangeable game media, that is, the number of game media necessary for exchange with the selected prize is displayed (step S1663). In the above-described process, when the “cash” screen is touch-operated, the control unit 1600 displays an amount that can be exchanged for the selected prize on the settlement screen displayed in step S1654, that is, the selected amount. The amount of money necessary for exchanging with a free gift is displayed (step S1663). In the above-described processing, when the “card” screen is touched, the control unit 1600 displays the number of winning balls or the number of stored balls that can be exchanged for the selected prize on the settlement screen displayed in step S1654. That is, the number of winning balls or the number of stored balls necessary for exchanging with the selected prize is displayed (step S1663). In this case, in the above-described initial setting, when the number of winning media that are withdrawn preferentially at the time of prize exchange is set as the number of winning balls, the number of winning balls that can be exchanged with the selected prize is displayed, When the game medium to be withdrawn preferentially at the time of prize exchange is set as the number of accumulated balls, the number of accumulated balls that can be exchanged for the selected prize is displayed. The settlement screen also displays the total number of game media or the total amount required for prize exchange.

  Subsequently, the control unit 1600 subtracts the number of selected prizes or products that have been processed for the prize exchange described above from the stock information of the prizes or products, and updates the stock information (step S1664). Further, the control unit 1600 provides information related to the above-mentioned prize exchange, that is, the selected prize (product) ID and the number thereof, information relating to the number of game media used for prize exchange or sale, cash information, prize exchange or Stores information such as date and time information on merchandise sales and gift exchange information such as trader ID (step S1664). Further, the control unit 1600 displays a message “Please bring the card closer to the IC card information reading unit 1510 if you have a card” on the selection screen 1520. Then, the control unit 1600 writes the prize exchange information described above into the IC cards such as the member IC card 30 and the non-member IC card 31 that are brought close to each other via the IC card information reading unit 1510 (step S1664).

  Subsequently, in the case of processing using an IC card, the control unit 1600 displays on the selection screen 1520 the number of pachinko balls and medals withdrawn in the processing relating to the prize exchange, the number of remaining winning balls and the number of stored balls, and the like. (Step S1665).

  Subsequently, based on information from selection screen detection unit 1620, control unit 1600 determines whether or not the “end” screen has been touched (step S1666).

  If it is determined in step S1666 that the “end” screen has been touched (Yes in step S1666), the process returns to start.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1666 that the “end” screen has not been touched (No in step S1666), the processing from step S1654 is executed. After step S1665, step S1654 is executed, and step S1666 is set as one of the selection information in step S1655. When the “end” screen is touched, the process returns to start. Also good.

  The configuration of the prize exchange device 1500 and the operation in the prize exchange device 1500 are examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the prize exchange device 1500 may be provided with a prize discharge means capable of discharging a special prize based on all prize exchange information. The prize discharging means is not particularly limited as long as it has a configuration of a known prize dispenser. Specifically, it has the same configuration as the prize dispenser 18 provided in the prize management machine (POS) 11 described above, and a predetermined type and number of special prizes are given as prizes based on instructions from the control unit 1600. Any device that pays out to the outside of the exchange device 1500 may be used. Examples of special prizes include large prizes (equivalent to 2500 yen) and small prizes (equivalent to 1000 yen). These special prizes can be cashed at the prize exchange.

  For example, at the time of the above “end-of-day process”, the control unit 1600 obtains the amount of revenue of the trader obtained by subtracting the above-mentioned various expenses from the sales obtained by the trader operating the wagon or service counter from information such as all prize exchange information It is also possible to issue a special prize corresponding to the above, and issue a receipt printed with the sales, various prizes, and the amount and quantity of the special prize paid out. Thus, if the merchant performs the end-of-day process, a special prize corresponding to the merchant's income can be obtained immediately. For example, complicated procedures and processes with the game hall can be avoided. In addition, in the management apparatus 13, sales (card prize exchange amount, present item / medal prize exchange amount, cash sale amount, card frequency) for each store company outside the hall, delivery company, wagon service company, and service counter company Sales amount), the aforementioned premiums, and special premiums corresponding to revenues are summed up every hour, every day, every predetermined period, and displayed in a list and printed, and output to an external computer connected to the Internet can do.

  As described above, according to the prize exchange device 1500 described above, for example, the prize exchange information written by the prize exchange device 1500 is issued via the IC card such as the IC card 30 for members and the IC card 31 for non-members. , Replay accepting machine 12, interstage machines 3, 4, 6, counting machine 9, premium management machine (POS) 11, checkout machine 10, etc. Information such as prize exchange information output to the first terminal device is output from the first terminal device to the management device 13, and various information can be managed by the management device 13. Therefore, since the information from the prize exchange device 1500 can be output without being output to the management device 13 by wireless communication or the like, the information can be accurately transmitted without being affected by the surrounding environment due to static electricity or the like. Further, for example, when the prize exchange device 1500 is mounted on the wagon 1550, since communication wiring or the like is not connected, it is possible to freely move in the game hall, leading to improvement of sales of the trader. .

  In addition, as the acquired game media can be managed separately by winning balls and saving balls, for example, when playing a game by replay, lending of game media to collect replay fees and replay fees It is possible to arbitrarily set both of rental of game media that are not collected. In addition, since the prize exchange device 1500 can arbitrarily set the game media (the number of winning balls and the number of accumulated balls) to be withdrawn preferentially when giving away prizes, it is easy for the game hall to take management measures.

  In addition, for example, in the initial setting in the prize exchange device 1500, information on the value of the game medium corresponding to the value of the game medium for each of the inter-machines, for each game machine, for each game island, or for each game machine group. Can be set. As a result, for example, even if conversion of the value of a game medium that differs depending on the type of gaming machine is performed, prizes can be exchanged with a unified value, and prize exchange and merchandise can be performed without causing unfairness by the player. Processing related to sales can be performed.

  Each wagon 1550, each service counter 1560, and the like can be rented out by, for example, each trader. Therefore, in each premium exchange device 1500 mounted on each wagon 1550 or each service counter, each trader that is the operating entity. Every prize exchange information can be aggregated every time. In addition, even when a plurality of contractors use one wagon 1550 or one service counter 1560, the prize exchange information can be managed together with the trader ID when exchanging prizes. Based on the above, for example, it is possible to tabulate for each trader who is an operating entity. In addition, the prize exchange device 1500 can separately count sales information for selling merchandise in cash and information for exchanging prizes on game media.

  Furthermore, in the prize exchange device 1500, all prize exchange information can be written, for example, on a merchant card. Also, for example, all prize exchange information written by the prize exchange device 1500 can be transmitted, that is, output to a third terminal device such as the prize management machine (POS) 11 or the inter-vehicle machines 3, 4, 6. . Information such as prize exchange information output to the third terminal device is output from the third terminal device to the management device 13, and various information can be managed by the management device 13. Therefore, since the information from the prize exchange device 1500 can be output without being output to the management device 13 by wireless communication or the like, the information can be accurately transmitted without being affected by the surrounding environment due to static electricity or the like.

It is the figure which showed the structure of the whole game hall management system provided with the prize exchange system and financial processing system which concern on one Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which showed the structure of the game hall management system provided with the prize exchange system and financial processing system in each game hall. It is a perspective view of a member IC card, a non-member IC card and a store clerk IC card used in the game hall management system. It is a top view which shows the external appearance of the issuing machine in a game hall management system. It is a figure which shows the structure part of an issuing machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of operation | movement in an issuing machine. It is a top view which shows the external appearance of the replay acceptance machine in a game hall management system. It is a figure which shows the structure part of a replay acceptance machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of operation | movement in a replay acceptance machine. It is a top view of the machine between machines in a game hall management system. It is an internal block diagram of a pedestal machine. It is a figure which shows the structure part of a pedestrian machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of operation | movement in an inter-vehicle machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of operation | movement in an inter-vehicle machine. It is a perspective view which shows the external appearance of the counter in a game hall management system. It is a figure which shows the structure part of a counter. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of operation | movement in a counter. It is a top view which shows the external appearance of the prize management machine (POS) in a game hall management system. It is a figure which shows the structure part of a prize management machine (POS). It is a flowchart which shows the flow of operation | movement in a prize management machine (POS). It is a top view which shows the external appearance of the adjustment machine in a game hall management system. It is a figure which shows the structure part of a payment machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of operation | movement in a settlement machine. It is a front view which shows the external appearance of the data display machine in a game hall management system. It is a figure which shows the structure part of a data display. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of operation | movement in a data display. It is a figure which shows the structure part of the management apparatus in a game hall management system. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of operation | movement in a management apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the information management list in a game hall management system. It is a figure which shows an example of the information management list in a game hall management system. It is the figure which showed the structure of the information delivery system by one Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which represented the main structure of the delivery server in the information delivery system with the functional block diagram. It is a flowchart of the main routine performed with a delivery server. It is a flowchart of an estimation calculation subroutine executed by the distribution server. It is a flowchart of the delivery amount designation information calculation subroutine executed by the delivery server. It is the figure which represented the main structure of the delivery control apparatus in the information delivery system with the functional block diagram. It is a flowchart of the main routine performed with a delivery control apparatus. It is a flowchart of a delivery amount designation information calculation subroutine executed by the delivery control device. It is a flowchart of the always-display subroutine performed with the delivery terminal in the information delivery system. It is a flowchart of a distribution condition display subroutine executed in the distribution terminal. It is a flowchart of a telop display subroutine executed in the distribution terminal. It is the figure which illustrated the mode of change of the lighting display area (p, q) to which character drawing [p] [q + y] set in a telop display subroutine shifts. It is the figure which showed an example of the advertisement fee table which can be used in an information delivery system. It is the figure which showed the example of an external appearance structure of the intermediary machine which is one of the delivery terminals. It is the figure which showed the example of the form which displays the game related information and the display of terminal delivery information by the processing operation of a constant display subroutine or a delivery condition display subroutine. It is the figure which showed the example of the form which displays the game related information and the display of terminal delivery information by the processing operation of a constant display subroutine or a delivery condition display subroutine. It is the figure which showed the example of the form which displays the game related information and the display of terminal delivery information by the processing operation of a constant display subroutine or a delivery condition display subroutine. It is the figure which showed the example of the form which displays the game related information and the display of terminal delivery information by the processing operation of a constant display subroutine or a delivery condition display subroutine. It is the figure which showed the 1st designation | designated example in the case of designating a delivery amount with the number of characters of terminal delivery information in a delivery control apparatus. It is the figure which showed the 2nd designation example in the case of designating a delivery amount with the number of characters of terminal delivery information in a delivery control apparatus. It is a functional block diagram which shows the main structures of a financial management apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows operation | movement of a financial management apparatus. The figure which shows an example which displayed the sales in the general ledger. The figure which shows an example which displayed the purchase amount in the general ledger. The figure which shows an example which displayed the repair expense in the general ledger. It is a top view which shows the surface of the terminal device for shop gift exchange. It is a functional block diagram which shows the main structures of the terminal device for store gift exchanges. It is a flowchart which shows operation | movement of the terminal device for store gift exchange. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the display content displayed on the display apparatus of the terminal device for store gift exchange. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the display content displayed on the display apparatus of the terminal device for store gift exchange. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the display content displayed on the display apparatus of the terminal device for store gift exchange. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the display content displayed on the display apparatus of the terminal device for store gift exchange. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the display content displayed on the display apparatus of the terminal device for store gift exchange. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the display content displayed on the display apparatus of the terminal device for store gift exchange. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the display content displayed on the display apparatus of the terminal device for store gift exchange. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the display content displayed on the display apparatus of the terminal device for store gift exchange. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the display content displayed on the display apparatus of the terminal device for store gift exchange. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the display content displayed on the display apparatus of the terminal device for store gift exchange. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the display content displayed on the display apparatus of the terminal device for store gift exchange. It is a top view which shows the surface of a terminal device outside a shop. It is a functional block diagram which shows the main structures of a terminal device outside a shop. It is a flowchart which shows operation | movement of a terminal device outside a shop. It is a functional block diagram which shows the main structures of a center server. It is a flowchart which shows operation | movement of a center server. It is a perspective view of a wagon equipped with a prize exchange device. It is a perspective view of the service counter equipped with the prize exchange device. It is a perspective view of a prize exchange device. It is a top view which shows the selection screen of a prize exchange apparatus. It is the figure which showed the structure of the prize exchange apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of operation | movement in a prize exchange device.

Explanation of symbols

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Game hall management system, 2 ... Pachinko machine, 2C ... Individual counter, 3, 4, 6 ... Inter-machine, 5 ... Slot machine, 7 ... Island computer, 8 ... Network, 9 ... Counter, 10 ... Settlement machine, 11 ... Premium management machine (POS), 12 ... Replay acceptance machine, 13 ... Management device, 14 ... Protocol converter, 15 ... Modem, 16 ... Management center, 17 ... Personal computer, 18 ... Premium dispenser, 20 DESCRIPTION OF REFERENCE SIGNS LIST: Issuing machine, 21: Data display, 22: Terminal device for exchanging out-of-store prizes, 23: Wireless communication system, 50: Financial management device, 90 ... Delivery control device, 91 ... External communication server, 92 ... External communication network, 800, 1140 ... distribution server, 850, 1120 ... information distribution network, 1100 ... terminal device outside store, 1150 ... external communication network, 1160 general user terminal device, 1500 ... landscape Exchange apparatus, 1510 ... IC card information reading section, 1520 ... selection screen, 1550 ... wagon, 1560 ... service counter.

Claims (12)

A prize exchange for exchanging prizes that enables the exchange of information relating to prize exchange via a storage medium, a management apparatus connected to the machine, and a storage medium for renting out game media A prize exchange system that performs processing related to prize exchange,
The inter-machine is
Provided with a prize selection means for selecting a prize to be exchanged,
The management device is
A game medium subtraction means for subtracting the number of game media corresponding to the selected prize from the number of acquired game media;
An operating entity specifying means for specifying an operating entity that provides the selected prize;
For each identified operating entity, the operating entity totaling means for counting free gift exchange information related to prize exchange ,
The prize exchange device is
A prize exchange permission information reading means for reading the prize exchange permission information from the storage medium in which the prize exchange permission information enabling the prize exchange is stored;
A prize exchange information writing means for writing the prize exchange information relating to the prize selected by the prize selection means of the inter-vehicle machine based on the read prize exchange permission information into the storage medium; A prize exchange system, characterized in that the apparatus can separately count sales information on merchandise sales in cash and game medium exchange information on prize exchange with game media . The prize exchange device is
A second prize selecting means for selecting a prize to be exchanged;
The prize exchange information writing means writes the prize exchange information relating to the prize selected by the second prize selection means on the storage medium based on the read prize exchange permission information. Item 1. The prize exchange system according to item 1 . The premium exchange system further includes a first terminal device,
The first terminal device is
An output processing unit that reads the prize exchange information from the storage medium and performs processing for outputting at least information related to the number of game media corresponding to the prize to be exchanged to the management device. Item 3. A prize exchange system according to item 1 or 2 . The prize exchange system according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the prize exchange permission information is information on the number of acquired game media related to the number of acquired game media . The prize exchange system according to any one of claims 1 to 4 , wherein the prize exchange apparatus is capable of separately counting the all prize exchange information for each operating entity that provides each prize . In the prize exchange device, it is possible to set the value of the game medium corresponding to any one of the machine, the gaming machine, the gaming island, and the gaming machine group, and the prize is based on the set value. The prize exchange system according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein processing relating to exchange is performed . A prize exchange for exchanging prizes that enables the exchange of information relating to prize exchange via a storage medium, a management apparatus connected to the machine, and a storage medium for renting out game media A prize exchange method in a prize exchange system that performs processing related to prize exchange,
In the inter-machine,
A prize information output step in which a prize information output means outputs information relating to a prize selected by the prize selecting means of the inter-vehicle machine capable of selecting a prize to be exchanged to the management device;
In the management device,
A game medium subtracting step for subtracting the number of game media corresponding to the prize from the number of game media acquired by the game medium subtraction means based on the information relating to the selected prize exchanged,
An operating entity specifying step in which the operating entity specifying means specifies an operating entity that provides the prize selected by the premium selecting means and exchanging the prize;
For each identified operating entity, the operating entity totaling means includes an aggregation step for each operating entity for totalizing the prize exchange information related to the prize exchange,
In the prize exchange device,
A prize exchange permission information reading step in which a prize exchange permission information reading means reads the prize exchange permission information from the storage medium in which the prize exchange permission information enabling the prize exchange is stored;
Based on the read prize exchange permission information, the prize information writing means writes the prize exchange information related to the prize selected by the prize selection means capable of selecting the prize to be exchanged in the inter-vehicle machine to the storage medium. A prize exchange information writing step, wherein the prize exchange device is capable of separately counting sales information for selling products in cash and game medium exchange information for exchanging prizes on game media. method of exchange. In the prize exchange device,
The prize information writing means stores the prize exchange information relating to the prize selected by the second prize selection means capable of selecting a prize to be exchanged in the prize exchange device based on the read prize exchange permission information. 8. The prize exchange method according to claim 7, further comprising a second prize exchange information writing step for writing to the storage medium. In the premium exchange method, the premium exchange system further includes a first terminal device,
In the first terminal device,
An output processing step of reading the prize exchange information from the storage medium and outputting at least information related to the number of game media corresponding to the prize to be exchanged to the management device is provided. Item 9. The prize exchange method according to Item 7 or 8. The prize exchange method according to any one of claims 7 to 9, wherein the prize exchange permission information is information on the number of acquired game media related to the number of acquired game media. The prize exchange method according to any one of claims 7 to 10, wherein the prize exchange device is capable of separately counting the all prize exchange information for each operating entity that provides each prize. In the prize exchange device, it is possible to set the value of the game medium corresponding to any one of the machine, the gaming machine, the gaming island, and the gaming machine group, and the prize is based on the set value. The prize exchange method according to any one of claims 7 to 11, wherein processing relating to exchange is performed.

Images